S0ME PARASITES OF AUSTRALIAN VERTEBRATES

By Pateicra M. Mawson “

[Read 8 April 1954]

SUMMARY

Four nematodes from inarsupials are described as new species, Labiostrangylus kimngt

from Muacropus major, Spirostrongylus Rarioma from Thylogale eugemi, Phascolostrongylus

stirtoni and Macropostrongylus lastorhini from Lasiorhinus lattfrons; other species recorded

are Phuryngostrongsiius alfha Johnston and Mawson (Macropus major), Diplotriagna alpha

Johnston and Mawson (Calamanthus fuliginosus), Strepiocara recia (Linst.) (Podiceps novae-

hollandiae) and Physaloptera bancrofi Trewin Smith and Ophidascaris flaria (Duj.) (Aspidites

melanocephalus).. Pharyngostrongylus, parma Johnston and Mawson and P. gallurdi Johnston

and Mawson are both referred to genus Spirastrangylus Yorke and Maplestone, and a key to

species of this gerus is given.

LIST OF PARASITES

List of parasites examined, arranged under their hosts:

Aspidites melanocephdlus (Krefft), Ophidascaris filaria (Duj.), Physaloptera

bancrofti Jrwin-Smith (Queensland).

Calamanthus fuliginosus Vig, and Horst, Diplotriaena alpha J. and M. (South

Australia).

Podiceps ruficollis Vroeg, Streptocara recta (Linst.) (Sotith Australia),

Macropus mujor Shaw, Labiostrongylus kungt n.sp., Pharyngostrongylus alpha

J- and M., (New South Wales),

Lusioritinus latifrons (Owen), Phascolostrongylus stirtoni nu, sp., Macropo-

strongylus lasiorhint n.sp., (South Australia).

sh ill Per. and Less, Spirosirongylus kartoya n. sp. (Kangaroo

sland).

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The nematodes reported on in this paper were sent fot examination by

yarious people. Professor Stirton, a visitor to South Australia from Berkeley

University, California, U.S.A., collected and dissected the wombats from which

two new species of Strongyle worms were taken; Dr, Flecker of the Queensland

Naturalists’ Club sent the stomach of Aspidites melanocephalus, The material

from Macropus major was sent for identification by the Director of the New

South Wales Department of Agriculture Veterinary Research Station at Glen-

field, New South Wales; the worms from the wren Calamanthus fuliginosus

were collected by S, J, Edmonds of this Department. I am indebted to these

collectors for opportunities they have provided for the examination of interesting

tnaterial,

PHARYNGOSTRONGYLUS ALPHA Johnston and Mawson

Fig, 1-2

Several specimens of this species were prescnit in material from the kangaroo

(Macropus major) from New South Wales. Pharyngostrongylus alpha is appar-

ently very common in the red and grey kangaroo. The present material comprises

rather larger worms than have hitherto been recorded, and the length of the

spicule and of the female tail is greater.

The males are up to 10:2 mm., the females to 11:2 mm. in length; the

spicules are 1*7 mm. long, 1/5*7 of the body length; the female tail is 0-48 mm.

long, and the vulva 0-15 mm. in front of this. Eggs in the vagina are 0:14 mm,

by 0-08 mm, Earlier descriptions state that the labial papillae are without setae;

however, in some specimens a pair of very small setae are present on the sub-

median. papillae.

“Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide,

The genus Sprrostroncyius Yorke and Maplestone 1926

The genus Spirostrangylus was erected by Yorke and Maplestone 1926

{p. 68) for a species of worm found in a wallaby. The exact location of the

worm in the animal was not indicated by them; the worms however were dis-

tinctive among Trichoneminae from marsupials in being “spirally rolled.” Since

then two other species with a similar habit, and closely resembling Spirostrongylus

in other features, have been described from the oesophagus of wallabies; these

were both referred, probably ertoneotsly, to the genus Pharyagostrongylus, as

P, para Johnston and Mawson 1939, and P, gallardt Johnston and Mawson

1942. A species with similar habitat and habit, is described below,

The earlier species were kept distinct from the genus Sypirastrongylics

mainly because of the absence of a leaf crown. En face examination of the

species described below shows that there are numerous very small chitinows

projections from the anterior end of the buccal cavity, and these may well be

present in the other species; they are so small that they would not he seen in

other than en face view. Apart from the small size or possible absence of the

leaf crown, the four species are very similar, It is now suggested that the

following species belong to the genus S, spirestrengylus Yorke atul Maplestone,

S. parma Johnston and Mawson, S. gallavdi Johnston and Mawson, and

S, kartuna n. sp, A key to the species has heen prepared.

1. Vestibule Jonger than 40, ium, ety ee aS gtane 2

Vestibule shorter than 35y, 100 we ae eee ee 3

2. Vestibute 70, long; female tail 50), lon, wee ee Raertana Tsp.

Vestibule 45, long; female tail 230,.Jong .. —. ... $. gallardi J. & M.

3. Vestibule 14, long; with very thick walls 2.0 0 400 a. Ss parma J. & M.

Vestifile 25-27, long, walls not thick. 9 wa. eee, spirosirangylus V. & M,

Spirostrongylus kartana n. sp.

Fig. 3-6

Numerous small coiled worms were taken from the oesophagus of

Thylogals eugenii from Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island, The males. were up

to 8 mm. and the females to 9 mm. in Jength, and both sexes were tightly coiled

into a spiral, both in life and death.

The cuticle is distinctly annulated. The setiform cervical papillae lie about

80 behind the anterior end. The anterior end bears a ctitictlar roll on which

are four rounded submedian papillae and two small lateral papillae. ‘The buccal

cavity is short, and leads to a vestibule (which may be homvlogous with buccal

capsule) with strongly annulated walls, which are thickest near the mouth, and

narrow gradually towards the base. The cavity of this vestibule is of even

diameter, and is 94 wide by 60u long. The oesophagus is 0°65-0°75 mm, long,

with the anterior two-thirds widening gradually, ending in @ sudden constriction

followed by a large bulb. The nerve ring lies at the level of the constriction,

and the excretory pore is at this level or just behind it, The female tail is 50

long, very short and pointed. Immediately in front of it is the vulva, 110, in

front of the posterior end of the body. The eggs are 140 x 70.

The spicules are 0°85-0-95 mm, kong, alate, with simple tips. A heart-

shaped gubetnaculum is present. The bursa is not deeply lobed and bears no

internal papillae. Only the dorsal ray reaches the edge of the bursa. The ventral

rays lie together; the ventro-lateral ray is divergent form ithe medio- and

postero-lateral, and the externodorsal which rises from the same root as the

laterals is divergent from them. The dorsal ray is cleft nearly to its base, and

each of the widely divergent branches reaches the bursal edye, giving off a shart

lateral branch at about two-thirds of its length. .

The species is very like S, gallard? Johnston and Mawson, differing chiefly in

the length of the vestibule and of the female tatl-

Labiostrongylus kungi n. sp,

Fig. 7-9

A new species of the genus Labiostrongylus was taken from Macropus major

in New South Wales. The species is very close to L. longispicularis Wood, which

apparently is common in kangaroos from all parts of Australia, but differs in

the form of the dorsal ray of the bursa and in the spicule length. The name

L. kungi has been given in recognition of the work done on the genus by Kung,

Fig. 1-9

Fig, 1-2, Pharyngostrongylus alpha—i, head; 2, female tail. Fig. 3-6, Spirosirongylus

kartana—3, head; 4, oesophageal region; 5, female tail; 6, bursa. Fig. 7-9, Labio-

strongylus kungi—7, head; 8, en face view of head; 9, part of bursa.

Fig. 5 and 7 to same scale.

The males are up to 48 mm, in length, the females to 60 mm. The cuticle

is firmly annulated; a pair of small threadlike cervical “papillae” lie 0-7 - 0-8 mm.

from the anterior end, There are six lips, the two lateral shorter than the sub-

median; the lateral labial papillae are rounded and lie near the apex of the lips;

the submedian papillae are selifurm and lie at about mid-lengti on the lips, The

buccal capsule is deep, O15 mm. long by O11 mm. internal diameter,

0-15 mm. external diameter. The oesophagus is long, about quarter of the

body length in the male; it is almost cylindrical, and the base is sur-

routided by a fold of “glandular” tissue. The nerve ring was not clearly

discerned but is thought to lie at one-third of the oesophageal length from the

head, The excretory pore was not seen, The feniale tai! is 1-6 mm. long; the

vulva is 3-2 mm, from the tip of the tail, Ripe eggs were not seen. The bursa

of the male is very like that of L. australis Kung, differing only very slightly in

the form of the dorsal ray ( fig. 9). The genital cone is distinct, and bears two

bifid accessory processes. The spicules are 52-60 mm. long, one-sixth to one-

ninth of the body length.

Macropostrongylus lasiorhini n. sp.

Fig, 10-15

An apparently new species of the genus Macropostrongylus was taken from

Lasiarhixus latifrons from near Blanchetown, South Australia. Both males and

females were present, the males up to 1-5 mm. in length, the females to 2°0 mm.

The cuticle is distinctly annulated, The lips are not distinct but there is a definite

labial roll of tissue bearing the cephalic papillae, at the anterior end, Shortly

behind this the body is constricted at the level of the hinder part of the buccal

capsule, and from there widens rapidly to the hase of the oesophagus, then more

gradually to the middle region of the body, followed by a gradual narrowing to

the tail. In the fetnale the body narrows abruptly shortly in front of the anus,

and ends in a short pointed tail,

There are six eushion-like cephalic papillae, each with a yery short anteriorly

directed seta. The buccal capsule narrows posteriorly, the anterior diameter being

32 including the walls, the posterior 254; the depth of the base from the mouth

is 50 to 55u. The walls are thicker posteriorly, There are four strong tooth-like

clements arising from the inner walls of the buccal capsule, two arising from

the anterior end, two from abour the mil-length. In en face view they are seen

to be in submedian positions, the two subdorsal directed slightly towards one

another, he two subventral similarly arranged. These are considered ta he the

elements of the internal leaf crawn which is characteristic af the genus but which

in this species are fewer in number and more heavily chitinized than usual,

The ocsophagns is 1-1+1 mm. long in the male, 1+1-1-2 mm. in the female;

the anterior third is cylindrical, surrounded near its base by the nerve ring;

posterior ta this the oesophagus widens greatly, to nearly five times its diameter

al the nerve ring. The excretory pore lies just behind the nerve ring.

In the female the conical tail is short and pointed, 0-1 mm. long. The vulva

is 0'12 mm. in front of the ants, The eggs are about 150 hy 60p,

The alate spicules are 1-0 mm, long. A pair of curved gubernacular plates,

0-2 nun. long, are present The bursa has distinct dorsal and lateral lobes, and

the two ventral lobes are nol separated. The ventral rays are cleft near their

tips and reach nearly to the edge of the bursa, The dorso- and medio-lateral

tays lie toyether for their entire length, the anterolateral is separate [rom them

and not quite so long; the externodorsal arises from the dorsal and is short.

The dorsal bifureates at about mid-length each branch hifurcating at half its

length forming two terminal branches, of which the outer may be equal to or

slightly longer than the inner and neither of which reach the outer edyre.

The species is very close tu M. baylist Wood. The main differences fie in

the proportions of the buccal capsule which is relatively deeper in the species

from the wombat, and in the shape of the head and of the cephalic papillae. The

female is longer, The spicule is longer in the species from the wombat; Wood

describes four large and “a number” of smaller elements of the leaf crown,

Ju the present species only the tour larger elements are present, anil of these

only two arise from the mid-length of the walls of the tmccal capsule.

Phascolostrongylus stirtoni n. sp.

Fig. 16-18

Only two female worms, an apparently new species belonging to the genus

Phascolostrongylus, were collected from Lasiorhinus latifrons, and of these

one only is entire. This reaches a length of 16 mm. They closely resemble

P, tyrleyt Canavan but differ in certain features. The trivial name of the new

species is given in recognition of the collector, Professor Stirton.

Fig. 10-19

Fig. 10-15, Macropostrongylus lasiorhini—10, head; 11, en face view of head; 12,

oesophageal region; 13, female tail; 14, lateral view of bursa; 15, dorsal and externo-

dorsal rays. Fig. 16-18—Phascolostrongyvlus sttriont—l6, head; 17, oesophageal region;

18, female tail; Fig. 19, Streptocara recta—male tail,

Fig. 10 and 12 to same scale, Fig. 12, 13, 14, 15 and 17 to same scale.

The cuticle is distinctly annulated throughout the body. There is a pair of

clongale lateral “‘cetvical” papillae lying a short distance posterior to the oeso-

phous. The cephalic papillae are six in number, the four submedian segmented,

t each composed of two. segments instead of three as described by Canavan.

Canayan’s figure is of two-partite papillae; possibly he considered the pulp, or

nerve tissue, which passes forwards into the papiita, as a third segment. ‘The

part projecting beyond the lips is 10 in length (24 p in P. turleyt),

The buccal capsule is cylindrical rather than barrel-shaped. The eight leaf

crown elements arise from the top of the buccal capsule. The oesophagus is

0-6 mm. long, slightly constricted where it is stittoutided by the nerve ring, at

0°32 mum. from the mouth, and behind this widening slightly. The exerctory pore

is at the level of the posterior end of the ocsophagus, not at mid-oesophagus as

described for P. tirle yt,

The body narrows abruptly a short distance in front of the vulva, and the

tail is short and conical, The anus 1s :0°15 mm,, and the vulva 0-3 mm, from the

tip of the tail, The posterior lips of both the anus and the vulva ate erllarged.

An egg in the vagina is 84a x 39 p.

PiysaLorrera BANCROFTI Irwin-Smith

Several worms, both males and females, lrom Alspidiles nielanocephalus from

Cairns, Queensland, proved to be Physaloptera bancrofti, This species, originally

described in 1922 from a lizard, (rymnedactylus platurus Shaw, from Narrabeen,

Sydney, bas not been recorded since then. The specimens from the snake are

almost identical in size and proportions of parts of the hody, arrangement of

teeth on lips, and arrangement of bursal papillae, with the descriptions and figures

given by Miss Irwin-Smith,

STREPTOCARA RECTA (Linst.)

Fig, 19

Several specimens of Stveflocara recta were taken from Podiceps ruficallis,

from Meadows, South Australia, Both males and females are preset, the males

to 42 nim. long, the females to 5°5 tm,

The measurements generally agree with those described by Yatnaguti 1935.

The main difference is in the position of the vulva which In the present specimens

lies tearer to the middle of the hody, dividing it in ratio 5:4, The vestibule

in the male is 23 long, 13 in diameter dorsoventrally and 6p laterally The

cervical papillae in most specimens are quincuspid; in the males the central cusp

is shorter than the others, in most female specimens all cusps ate of equal length

except in two cases; in one specimen the second and fourth cusps of both cervical

papillae are elongate and bifid, and in another the central cusp of one cervical

papillae only is similarly developed.

in the male the proximal ends of both spicules are greatly enlarged and the

distal end of both are “barbed,” that of the longer spicule being somewhat com-

plex and twisted givisiy perhaps the corkscrew appearance commiented on by

Mueller, The post-anal papillae are not arranged in two separate groups as

figured by Mueller. A figure of the male tail is given. The anterior end has been

sgured ial and Mawson in an eatlicr publication (Johnston and Mawson

O41, 258).

OPHIDASCARIS FILARIA (Dujardin)

This common parasite of snakes is now recorded from Aspidites melano-

cephalus from Cairns, Queensland.

DTPLOTRIAENA ALPHA Johnston and Mawson

_ A male and a female worm were taken from a field wren Culamanthus fuli-

ginosns, by Mr. 5, J, Edmonds near Keith, South Australia.

The male is 53 mm. long, 0-45 mm. maximum breadth, the female 75 mm.

long, 0-6 mm, maximum breadth. The head bears four large papillae in sub-

median positions and a pair of very small lateral papillae (?amphids). The

tridents are 0-1 mm. long in the male, 0-11 mm. in the female. The anterior part

of the oesophagus is 0-35 mm, long in the male, 0°5 mm. in the female, and the

total length of the oesophagus is 2°4 and 3-1 mm. in the female respectively.

The nerve ring surrounds the anterior oesophagus at about its mid-length or a

little behind this. The vulva lics shortly behind the end of the anterior oesophagus,

0-6 mm. from the head. The eggs are 26-31 » by 45 p.

The male tail is so clear that the spicules and papillae are hardly discernible.

The longer spicule is 0-9 mm.

D, alpha was described from two female specimens. The only significant

difference from these shown by the female from the wren is in the much shorter

length of the posterior part of the oesophagus.

LITERATURE

Canavan, W. P. 1931 Nematode parasites of vertebrates in the Philadelphia Zoological

Gardens and vicinity; ii. Parasitol, 23, 196-228

Irwin-SmitH, V. 1922 Notes on the nematode genus Physaloptera, pt. iv. The Physaloptera

of Australian lizards (cont.), Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S,W,, 47, (4), 415-427

Jonnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1938 Strongyle nematodes from Central Austra-

lian kangaroos and wallabies. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, (2), 263-286

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P, M. 1939 Strongyle nematodes from marsupials in

New South Wales. Proc. Linn Soc. N.S.W., 64, 513-536

Jounsron, T, H,, and Mawson, P, M, 1940 Some flarial parasites of Australian ‘birds.

Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust. 64, (2), 355-361

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P.M. 1942 The Gallard collection of parasitic nema-

todes in the Australian Museum. Rec. Aust. Museum, 21, (2), 110-115

Kung, C, C. 1948 Some new nematodes from the Australian wallahy (Macropus rufogrisea

fruticus) with a note on the synonymy of genera Zoniolaimus, Labiostrongylus and

Buccostrongylus. Jour. Helm., 22, (2); 93-108

Woon, W. A. 1929 Some parasitic nematodes from Western Atstralia. Rep. Dir. Inst.

Animal Path., Cambridge, (1929) 1930, 205-214

Yamacutt, S., 1935 Studies on the helminth fauna of Japan, pt. xii, Ayian nematodes. I,

Jap. J. Zool., 6 (2), 403-431

Yorke, W., and Marrestone, P, A, 1926 The nematode parasites of vertebrates, London

THE STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION IN THE VICINITY OF

MT. BABBAGE STATION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY G. D. WOODARD

Summary

Boulder-bearing grits in the vicinity of Muloowurtina Station, previously regarded as glacial

deposits of Cretaceous (Winton) age, are lacustrine deposits in which many of the boulders are

erratics derived from the Sturt Tillite. The presence of an upper Gondwana flora in these sediments

and their conformable relationships with the overlying Aptian marine shales places them within the

lower Cretaceous System. Correlation of these sediments has been made with the Blythesdale

Sandstones (late Neocomian - early Aptian). The generally coarse clastic nature of the sediments,

pronounced current bedding, and ripple marking of the lower grits give evidence in support of

torrential stream accumulation into a lacustrine environment.

The Mt. Babbage and adjacent sections, previously described as early Tertiary (Eyrian) have been,

on floral and lithological evidence, grouped as lower Cretaceous (Neocomian). These dominantly

arenaceous sediments are overlain by fossiliferous marine clays of lower Cretaceous (Aptian) age,

capped by a resistant siliceous Duricrust. Over the whole area a later deposit of piedmont gravels

has been developed obscuring much of the outcrop of earlier sediments. Tentative regional

correlation of the Mesozoic deposits of Mt. Babbage has been made with strata of a similar nature at

Billy Springs, Copley and west of the Flinders Range.

THE STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION IN THE VICINITY OF

MT. BABBAGE STATION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By G. D. Wooparn

[Read 8 April 1954|

SUMMARY

Boulder-bearing grits in’ the vicinily of Muloowurtina Station, previously regarded

as glacial deposits of Cretuceous (Winton) age, are lacustrine deposits in which many

of the boulders are erratics derived from the Sturt Tillite. The presence of an upper

Gondwana fora in these sediments and their conformable relationships with the over-

lying Aptian marine shales places them within the lower Cretaceous System, Correla-

tion of these sediments has been made with the Blythesdale Sundstones (late Neocomiait

-carly Aptian). The generally coarse clastic nature of the sediments, pronounced

current bedding, and ripple marking of the lower grits give evidence in support of

forretitial stream accumulation into a lacustrine environment,

The Mt. Babbage and adjacerit sections, previously described as early Tertiary

ane have been, on floral and lithological evidence, grouped as lower Cretaceous

Neocomian). These dominantly arenaceous sediments are overlain by fossiliferous

marine clays of lower Cretaceous (Aptian) age, capped by a resistant siliceous Duri-

crust. Over the whole area a later deposit of piedmont gravels has been developed

obscuring much of the outcrop of earlier sediments. Tentative regional correlation of

the Mesozoic deposits of Mt, Babbage has been made with strata of a similar nature

at Billy Springs, Copley and west of the Flinders Range.

I. INTRODUCTION

Previous field investigations within this area have largely been confined to

the metamorphic Precambrian Complex. W. G. Woolnough (1924) prepared

a preliminary note on the occurrence of glacial erratics in the Muloowurtina area,

but did not refer to the Mesozoic aspect of the associated Aora or the marine

nature of the overlying Lower Cretaceous sediments. A further paper prepared

in association with Sir T. W. E. David (1926) discussed in further detail the

occurrence of glacial erratics and the stratigraphic succession of this area.

Sprigg (1951) referred to the Mount Babbage section but was unable to

visit the localities. Bowes (1952) similarly referred to the sediments of this

locality as belonging to the Eyrian series,

The Mesozoic age of the Mt. Babbage sediments was first recognized by

O. A. Jones, wha determined the presence of Ofozomites and other associated

flora in specimens collected by S. B, Dickinson during the detailed napping of

the area.

Figetp Work

Field studies of the Muloowurtina arca were made by the writer during

September 1953. ‘The work included field recormaissance, measuring aryl describ-

ing stratigraphic sections and the collection of representative fossils and samples

of the section units.

U. GEOLOGY AND PHYSIOGRAPITY

‘The area under consideration is located withm the vicinity of Muloowurtina

Homestead, situated in latitude 29° 58’ south, longitude 139° 44’ east, 150 miles

east of Copley, South Australia. The most marked physiographic feature of the

area is the Flinders Ranges which consist of metamorphosed Precambrian sedi-

metits which have been faulted and subsequently dissected to form a high moun-

tain range between 2,000 and 3,000 feet in height. Jn the vicinity of Muloo-

wurtina the range has a marked linear esearpmenr trending roughly north-east

and south-west,

Bordering the eastern slope of the range, a series of foothills of steeply

dipping lower Cretaceous (Aptian) sediments consisting of fossiliferous blue-

grey, yellow, and white gypsiferous clays and silty sands with a grey Duricrust

capping, rises to a height of approximately 350 feet above the level of the eastern

plains, High residuals of these Cretaceotis beds form extensive tableland forma-

tions over much of the area north of the homestead, the beds, which are here

fossiliferous, dipping gently to the east at approximately 3°. Adjacent to and

overlying unconformably the Precambrian racks is a series of cross-bedded and

laminated intercalated grits, sands and carbonaceous clays which dip at 2°,

N.70° E., below the marine Cretaceous beds. Within these grits are occasional

faceted boulders which have been regarded previously (David and Woolnongh,

1926) as glacial in origin, These boulder heds, together with the underlying clastic

and carbonaceous sediments, have been examined principally fram a series of

shallow clif exposures:

1, Approximately two miles north-west of Mutoowurtina homestead,

2, In the cliffs of Hamilton Creek from Terrapinna waterhole to south of

the woolshed, + mile west of the homestead,

3, From the fossil wood locality described in detail by Woolnough and

David, 24 miles south of Muloowurtina,

The boulders whose origitt has previously been regarded as glacial consist

of a heterogeneous assortment of medium and coarse-grained quartz felspar

porphyries, quartzite, quartz, slate, schists, ete., up to five feet in length, which

are scattered, alone with smaller tounded pebbles, in abundance over these areas.

Some of the boulders exhibit well-defined planes of faceting, others are well

rounded of irregular in shape. No glacial striae have been observed on the stirface

of the boulders though effects of fluviatile wear are generally well marked. The

boulders in all three regions which were examined, either overlie, or are set in

a coarse gritty heterogeneous sandstone of which the grains are sub-angular and

dominantly quartzite in composition. In the most southerly examined locality,

24 miles from Mulocwurtina, the dark brownish-yellow sandstone in which the

boulders occur dips gently io the eust at an angle of 11°, strike 330°, Gentle

folding giving dips of approximately 3° has occurred in the vicinity of the wool-

shed. North of Terrapinna waterhoie, micaceous sandstones, quartzites and ferru-

ginous grits have been examined where they form high tablelands in the vicinity

of Mount Babbage, These sediments, formerly regarded as Lower Tertiary

(Eyrian) in age (Woolnongh and David, 1926; Sprigg, 1951; Bowes, 1952),

contam plant fossils and some Jamellibranches. They are exposed at

Mt. Babbage and in an extensive easterly dipping tabJeland nearby, as a thin

capping (25-30 feet} unconformably resting on granitized Precambrian sediments

(Bowes, 1952: Sprieg, 1981), West of Mt. Babbage a thick series of coarse

cross-bedded grits. and gravels passing upwards inte micaceous sands and massive

fossiliferous quartzite is exposed in a deep valley unconformably above the

Precambrian granite complex. Of these sediments the upper 30 feet of micaceaus

sands and quartzite is equivalent to the plateau formation of Mt. Babhage. The

strata which have a marked easterly dip of 5° have a maximum measured thick-

ness of 100 feet. Severe faulting in 4 north-easterly direction has resulted in

a. displacement vertically of the Mt, Babbage strata between 150 and 200 feet,

At these highest points ouly 25 to 30 feet of overmass sediments are represented.

It seems most probable therefore that initial sedimentation tank Place in a

Jacustrine erivironment bounded ta the east hy a fault-line scarp of probable

Palaeozvic age. A late Mesozoic transgression succeeding the accumulation of

the Jower 75-80 feet of clastic sediments resulted in deposition of the coarse

inicaccons sandstones which are represented in the Mt. Babhage section. From

the upper grey quartzite have heen obtained impressions of fassil wood

and leaves, together With some silicified lamellibranch remains. The coarse angular

character of the lower deposits, eross-bedding, and their obvious derivation from

the Precambrian source rocks close by, stiggests rapid accumulation of these clastic

sediments ina lacustrine intermontane environment, Following the identification af

a plant closely related to Nuthorstiana described previonsly from Europe as a dune

inhabitant, it ig possible that the upper 25 to 30 fect of fossiliferous micaceous

satidstone and quartzite may represent fossil dune deposits murginal to areas of

lacustrine accumulation, which have since been consolidated by processes of

secondary silicification. Successive stages i the erosion of these beds may be

traced, on the western cdown-faulted block, from terrace levels, of which four,

at approximately 15-20 feet intervals, were identified, Ferruginization and the

lithologic similarities of the arenaceons mentbers make specife correlations within

this lower dissected area difficult, Correlation of the upper qtiartzite is possihje

on the basis of the abundant Fossil plant impressions. Correlation of these beds

and the ferruginized micaccous sands, gtits, and boulder beds cast of Mt. Babbage

seems justified from lithologic and palaeontologic evidence, These boulder beating

beds underlie the gypsiferous blue-grey shales of lower Cretaceous age, so that,

assuming equivalence of the Mt, Babbage sections and these heds, the upper

quartzite with plant fossils and lamellibranchs and the underlying micaceous sands

and ferruginized grits containing a similar fiora are Lower Cretaceous in age and

helong to the Blythesdale sandstone.

Late Cainozoic sedimentation is represented by coarse. alluvial boulder beds,

redistributed duricrist quartzite boulders and aeolian sand deposits which overlie

the Mesozoic sediments cast of the Flinders Ranges,

1. STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION

1. PrRecaMBRIAN

Sheared illite (Sturlian); granite, quarte-felspar pegmatite, quartzite,

gcisses, schists, ¢tc,, form a basement complex in which there is pronounced

lineation N.70° E, The rocks form a granite complex ef which Sprigg (1951)

discussing the Mt. Babbage Granite Complex states: “To the west the coarsely

telspathic types appear to dontinate whereas near the south-eastern margin the

granite is strongly “gneissic”, and at the actual border is highly sheared and

ailicifed, On its southern aspect the granite border parallels the adjacent meta~-

sedimentary structutes fairly faithfully, but elsewhere sedimentary structures

run obliquely into the gramite. Faulting along the margins is therefore a pro-

bability.” Bowes (1952) has discussed in detail the petrology of these Precambrian

rocks.

2, Lower Cretaceous (Lare NrocowrAn-earty Artran),

BLYTHESDALE SANDSTONE.

The mediunt to coarse-grained inicaccons sandstones, ferruginized grits and

{uartzites of the Mt. Babbage area are placed on palaeobotanical evirlence as belong-

ing to the Lower Cretaceous, Equivalent sediments, finer grained and less ferrugin-

uus, expased along the banks of the Llamilton Creek and 25 miles south vf Muloo-

wurtina consist of coarse cross-bedded sandstones, grits and gravels together with

intercalated plant-bearing carbonaceous shales. In the upper partion of these beds

boulders, formerly regatded as glacial erratics, occur both im situ and_seattered

over the surface, The close similarity between the flora of Hamilton Creck and

Mt, Babbage stuggests these strata to he equivalent, and lower Cretaceous in age.

The dominantly arenaceous sediments are typically lacustrine in nature, their

eross-bedded heterogeneous aspect denoting rapid and turbulent conditions of

sedimentation in an environment close to the source rocks, Lateral variations of

these sediments are consequently most marked, making specific correlation of

individual members very difficult. At Mt, Balbage and in the adjacent eastern

tableland the sediments in descending wrder consist of +

Lithology Thickness

Massive grey duricrust quartzite capping which weathers into Jarge

angular blocks, containing fussil plant impressioms and some silicified

lamellibranchs (7 Unio sp.) aid passing into a coarse silicified quartz con-

glomerate at the base. The quartzite is eruss-bedded in places and has ,

undergone pronounced. secondary silicification _ - - - 10-15

Laminated medium-grained micaceous silty sands with ferruginous bands

yellowish-brown in culour; the grains sub-angular to angular are dominantly

quartzite in composition; some blue-etey quartz pebbles are included. In

places they are mottled purplish-grey to reddish-brown, in culuur - - 419

These sediments, displaced vertically some 150 feet, overlie uncon-

formably the Mt. Babbage Granite complex. The lower members of this

section are exposed to the north-west of Mt. Babbage on the downfaulted

side, where they are revealed in descending order;

Dark-brown ferruginous angular white quartz pebble conglomerate - 12

Coarse heterogermous sub-angular grit, slightly ferruginons with micaceous

buff-coloured sandy lenses — - os id - - . - 2

Interealated grey quartzites and light-brown micaceaus sands. - - §’

Massive grey quartzite, strongly jointed in a north-south direction,

grading to the south and west tito a coarse porcellauised ferruginous

grit with white quartz pebble lenses and intercalated quartz grits - - 15

Interbedded ferruginous dark reddish-brown coarse angular grits, micaceous

sandstones and coarse rounded white quartz pebble beds lensing into massive

quartzite with intercalated micaceous sand members in the top 5 feet - 18°

A composite section reveals therefore more than 100 feet of these

Mesozoic sediments. To the east of the Mt, Babbage tablelands, distant

approximately half a mile, further ferruginous grits, and micaceaus sands

heating fossil plant remains are exposed unconformably above the Pre-

cambrian rocks. In the ereck-hed adjacent to Gun Powder Bore are

consolidated reddish to buff-coloured sandstones which dip east below

the Cretaceous clays. These sediments form part of the section of a series

ef high cliffs exposed approximately 500 yards to the west. The section

revealed from these cliffs consists in descending order of :

(1) Cross-bedded ferruginised gritty sands with a well consolidated dark

heterogeneous grit in which are large boulders of porphyry, quartzite,

schist, gneiss, etc, The beds have yielded fossil wood and the upper sand

below the boulder bed cotitais organic impressions similar to those of the

Mt. Babbage quartzite. - - - - - - wy

(2) Laminated fine white relatively unconsolidated quartz sands which are

mottled purplish and red with white tmicaceous sandy shale larninae and

pebbly zreenish-grey micaceous sands. The thickness of this bed varies

predominantly blue-grey and white quartz pebbles. - - - - 2

(3) Course sands and gravel Jenses with dark ferruginous bands overlying a

basal. ferruginoys reddish-hrown quartz gravel, this lowermost member

marking the unconformity with the Precainbran - - - - 3

Correlation of these sediments has been made with those exposed in

the banks of Hamilton Creek, where similar micaceous sands, carbona-

cents shales and boulder beds are tevealed. A typical section from the

pis cliffs north of Terrapinna Waterhole reveals in descending

order:

(1} Reddish-brown piedmont boulder conglomerates with intercalated gravels

overlying unconformity - - - - - - - wy

(2) Coarse boulder conglomerate marked by a basal bed cotitaining large

(5-f feet) rounded quartzite, granite, gneissic Eranite, schisi, etv., with

finer pebbly matrix, the whole being set in a mottled greenish-grey to brown

consolidated silty sand. This passes above into a mottled finer hetero-

geriéous houlder bed with intercalated finer gravelly Jenses and at the top

pebhly greenish-grey tiieateous sands, The thickness of this hed varies

considerably laterally - - #

{3) Light-brown cross-bedded gypsiferous mottled and banded greyish-brown

silty clays with overlying cross-bedded coarse angular quartz gravels, the

pebbles averaging approximately 4 inch in diameter and set i & finer i

sandy matrix - ~ - - - - ” = < 4

(4) Medium-grained light-brown to grey quartz grit with lensing angular

gravel members, the pebbles consisting of quartz and felspar; cross-bedded,

carbonaceous in places - - - - - - - 2

(3) Coarse Ferruginous yellow-brown cross-bedded angular grits with inter-

calated finer grey satidy lenses The thickness of this member is variable,

the tup being marked by a dark yellow-brown limonitic band - - WwW

Overlying the Precambrian, west of Muloowurtina woolshed, is the basal

member of this succession which consists of a medium-grained relatively uncon-

solidated yellowish-brown micaceous clastic sandstone with intercalated ferrugin-

ised brown fimoritic bands and coarse angular grit lenses, the thickness of this

member being approximately 10 feet. Overlying this are intercalated micaceous

sands, grits, gtavels and carbonaceous shales similar to those described above.

The sediments vary, Jaterally, however, the gravelly and carbonaceous units

lensing and dividing. The beds are locally folded into shallow anticlines and syn-

clines, the limbs of which dip between 4° and 5°, Lithologically similar quartz

grits and gravelly sands exposed along the eastern scarp of the range enable

correlation with the boulder-bearing sands described previously by David and

Woolnough as a “gritty tillite’. These sediments which were regatded as Winton

Beds are equivalent to the Hamilton Creek boulder beds ftom which upper

Gondwana plants have been obtained, They consist of yellowish-hbrown con-

solidated gritty sandstones overlying unconlermably the Precambrian meta-

morphic complex, Contained in these gritty sands are abundant silicifed fossil

tree trunks and scattered over the suriace are numerous boulders of quartzite,

porphyry, gneiss, etc, Only three sizeable boulders were found in sity within

this bed, ane a dark blnish-grey quartzite possibly faceted, one rounded grey

quartzite and @ roughly triangular quartz felspar rock, The sediments enclosing

these boulders. consist of clastic quartz, the grains sub-rounded and heterogeneous

but of medium coarseness, Intercalated in the lower region of this quartzite are

finer sands and soft grey clay lenses ayeraging 2-5 inches in thickness, The upper

limit of the bed consists of a consolidated and ferruginized coarse quartz grit

with abundant sub-angular blue-grey quartz pebbles. The base of the hed is

marked by a coarse quartz conglomerate, ferruginised and consolidated. This

bed has an easterly dip of 11°; strike 330°. The grits lic below the easterly

dipping blue-grey, Lower Cretaceous (Roma) clays from which fossiliferous

marine Jimestone nodules have been obtained. No supporting evidence can be

found for the previously propesed glacial origin of these boulders in- Cretaceous

times. The lack of glacial striae, the effects of fluviatile transport, and the

proximity of similar tock types in the Flinders Ranges suggests the most probable

origin of the boulders ‘to be scree accumulations, redistributed hy fuviatile

agencies, and deposited marginal to a widespread Jacustrine area, Some of the

quartzite boulders are identical with erratics now im situ in the Sturtian Tillite

nearby. Derivation of faceted boulders from this Formation seems the most

obvious explanation for their occurrence.

The thickness nf the boulder-bearing sands and clays has been estimated at

this locality to be 60 feet.

3. Lower Creraceous ( APTIAN)

Roma ForMATION

Fossiliferous blue-grey, yellow and white marine shales of Lower Cretaceous

age (Aptian) are exposed extensively in the Muloowurtina area. North of the

horiestead they have a shallow easterly dip of 2-3°, and form extensive tablelands

capped by a hard siliceous Durierust. Wonoluough (1927), discussing this super-

ficial deposit, states:

“All the Duricrust in this locality possesses a more or less well marked

conecretionaty stricture. Sometimes this results in spheroidal] nodules; but, in

some instances, the concretions are much elongated in a direction perpendicular

to the original surface... . In one place, near Muloowurtina, the avetagé diameter

of the nodules is over three feet and they reach a length of at least fifteen

feet ....”

These features were noted by the writer, but in places the Duricrist above

the Cretaceous marine beds is represented as a dense indurated quartzite, and

in still further cases a3 a porcellanised prayel unit,

To the south of Muloowurtina the Cretaceous beds have been extensively

folded, the major fold axes trending roughly N.W.-S.E, Easterly dips of up to

35° have been measured, and in cases reverse dips to the west of up to 20° have

been introduced. Woolnough {1927} also states:

"Tn addition to this folding along the strike there has been subordinate dip

faulting, so that the Duricrust remnants are disposed ‘en echelon’.”

The {nlding of this area thus post-dated the formation of the Duricrust,

and has been largely responsible for the formation of the series of low rounded

foothills along the eastetn Flinders scarp which are overlain by a heavy “gibber”

scree of derived Duricrust. North of Muloowurtina the Cretaceous sediments in

descending order consist of :

Lithology Thickness

(1) Massive pebbly chert and dense quartzite, grey and stained reddish-brown,

with sub-rounded white and grey quartz pebbles = - - - - I

(2) Grey silty gypsiferaus clays 5-6" which pass transitionally into a seyerely

kaolinised white micaceous soft sandstone with abundant free gypsum. The

upper 12 feet of these white beds are mottled pink with small orange-pink

erystals of selenite gypsum, bedded and disseminated; some purplish rem-

nants and dark brown ferriginous conerctions 7 - - - 4y

(3) Yellow gypsiferous clays with limonitic bands and ferruginous Senses and

containing the foraminifera Haplophragmoides dickinsoni Crespin and

Ammobaculoides romaensis Crespin, etc. - - - - - 28°

(4) Dark blue-grey to mottled greenish-brown gypsiferous clays with large

plates of selemte gypsum, the clays weathering into powdery greenish-bluc

detritus. The clays enclose gypsum covered concretions of fine-grained

blue-grey dolomitic limestone between 18 inches and 2 feet in diameter. In

addition, lower Cretaceous marine fossils, including belemnites (Prrato-

belus oxys) and pelecypods (Maccoyella sp.; Nucwlana cf. randsi),

were obtained = - - ~ ~ - - - - 420°+-

South of Muloowurtina where deformation has been more pronounced the

\tpper section has undergone more severe alteration. Here ferruginisation and

mottling in shades of red, yellow and mauve obscure the original nature of the

sediments. The lower blue-gtey shales have also undergone incipient alteration,

the ferruginous banding fo awing bedding structures in these sediments. Minor

faulting has taken place along lines parallel to the strike of these marine beds.

Gypsum, abundant as both bedded and disseminated masses, is largely of

secondary origin, the result of leaching and redeposition during periods of aridity.

Fine-grained dolomitic nodules within the beds are surrounded by crystalline

gypsum which encloses. an intermediate yellow-brown to dark ferruginosis layer.

The fauna, while not abundant, definitely indicates a lower Cretaceous

(Aptian) age for these sediments, They belong therefore tao the Roma Group

and not, as previously stated ( Woolnotigh and David, 1926) to the Winton Beds.

Latr Carnozorc — Recent

Piedmont boulder beds, alluvial clays and aeolian sand deposits overlie the

Mesozoic sediments cast of the Flinders Ranges. Downcutting by Hamilton Creek

has exposed more than 15 feet of coarse boulder conglomerates and reddish-brown

clays unconformably overlying the Mesozoic sediments, Dissectian and breaking

up of the “Duricrust” has resulted in the accumulation of coarse chert "gibbers”

in areas formerly overlain by this bed,

IV, STRATIGRAPHIC POSITION OF THE PLANT-BEARING

SEDIMENTS

The lowermost Cretaceous deposits described fram the Great Artesian Rasin

are terrestrial strata, dominantly arenaceaus in coniposition with subordinate coal-

bearing phases. These sediments, defined originally by Lockhart Jack (1895) as

the “Blythesdale Braystones” underlie the Rolling Downs Formation ( Aptiag-

Cenomanian) :

“In mapping the eastern limit of the Lower Cretaceous fotmation we find

that at the base there is a series of soft grey very friable limestones, grits and

conglomerates. ...- To this rock we felt it necessary to give a distinctive name,

the ‘Blythesdale Beaystone’, as it is well developed at Blythesdale near Roma, . -

Hitherto it has been convenient to speak of the beds designated the Blythes-

dale Braystone as being of similar composition throughout. This, however, is not

the case, us the braystone of normal composition is ‘parted’ in places by beds of

sandy shale and calcureous sandstone. We may imagine coarse sandy and gravelly

sediments brought down to the margin of a shallow lower Cretaceous sea hy

numerous tributary rivers and spread out along the shore and out to sea by the

action of waves and currents. The sea in which the Blythesdale Braystone was

deposited ..... was very shallow throughout .- . . swept from end to end by

currents .. .. sufficiently powerful , .. . to account for the wide distribution of

the sand and gravel which is evidenced by the Artesian Wells.”

The sediments become paralic in fheir upper development (Whitehouse,

1952). The Blythesdale Sandstone is known in South Australia principally from

Stuarts Range and south-east of Lake Eyre, where it has been regarded as basal

Cretaceous and/or Upper Jurassic in age. (Recent foraminiferal investigations

from bore cores by Miss I, Crespin (1945) have yielded a number of foraminifera

fram “carbonaceous shales and sandstones’ which are of lower Cretaceous age

but the stratigraphic position of these sediments is not clearly indicated),

In the Orallo and Vingerhay districts, Queensland, the Blythesdale beds

have been recognised as late Neocomian—eatly Aptian in age (Whitehouse (1952

. 97), The non-ealcareous upper Blythesdale is succeeded by the calcareous

Rolling Downs Formation, but there is no initial time break,

The lower sequence of coarse arenaceous grits, sands, gravels and inter-

bedded carbonaceous shales and boulder beds of Muloowurtina are ascribed to

the lower Cretaceous and are considered as equivalents of the Blythesdale Sand-

stones. As in the case of the more fully developed Queensland depusits the upper

Bivthesdale has a paralic developricnt in this locality, intercalated blue-grey

shale bands forming hetween the gritty sandstone members in the upper part of

the section. The srenaceous beds are overlain conformably by the Aptian marine

shales and no time break is indicated from geologic evidence. Also the presence

of a late Mesozoic dora, including lycopod stigmaria related to those from

European Lower Cretaceous deposits, supporis the contention that these beds

are of similar aye,

Stratigraphic correlation of these strata is made with a sequence of coarse

ferruginous sands, grits, gravels and plant-bearing quartzites which overlie

rey eet Precambrian rocks and are themselves conformably overlain by

the Roma beds at Algebuckina Hill west of Lake Eyre, The sediments examined

earlier by the writer represent exposures from the Blythesdale Sandstones recog-

nised previously from Stuarts Range and south-east of Lake Eyre, Interbedded

coarse sandstones and sibordinate clay shales underlying lower Cretaceotis marine

beds and regarded by Whittle (1952) as Jurassic, more probably represent the

basal Cretaceous Blythesdale Sandstones.

It should be noted that although the so-called Eyrian (early Tertiary) beds

of Mt. Babbage ( Woolnough and David, 1926) have now conclusively beety shown

as Lower Cretaceous in age, the presence of Tertiary continental deposits has been

proved from subsurface investigations by Lockhart Jack (1925) at Cordillo

Downs, where 365 feet of dominantly arenaceous sediments overlie unconform-

ably lignite-bearing upper Cretaceous beds,

V. PALAEONTOLOGY

Identification of the plant fossils from the Blythesdale sandstone formation

(Glaessner and Rao, 1955) are listed below:

Nathorstianella babbagensis (H. Woodward). Locality: Mt. Babbage.

Cladophlebis australis (Morris). Locality: Woolshed section, Muloowurtina and

two miles north-east of Flinders No. 5 tale mine.

Tacniopteris spatulata McClelland, Locality: Fiat-topped hill about + mile north-

east of Mt. Babbage and Woolshed section, Muloowurtina station.

Otosamites bengalensis (Oldham and Morris). Locality: Flat-topped hill about

4 mile north-east of Mt, Babbage.

Cycadites sp. Locality: Woolshed section, Muloowiirtina.

Nilssonia schoumburgensis (Dunker). Locality: Woolshed section, Muloowurtina,

(Collected by Miss M. J. Wade.)

Elatoctadus planus (Feistmantel), Locality: Flat-topped hill about $ mile north-

east of Mt, Babbage.

In addition to this flora, fossil wood specimens have been collected from

Mt, Bahbage, Hamilton Creek and 24 miles south of Muloowurtina station,

T he Aolltiientg invertebrate fossils have been provisionally identified by

Unio sp.: From quartzite belonging to the Blythesdale Sandstone. Locality:

Mt. Babbage.

Pevatobelus oxrys (Tenison Woods) and Maccoyella ef, barklyi Moore, From

blue clays of the Roma formation, Locality: £ mile north of Muloowurtina

station.

Nuculana cf. randsi Ethridge. From blue clays of the Roma Formation. Locality :

24 miles south of Muloowurtina station,

Ammobaculoides romacnsis Crespin and Haplophragmoides dickinsoni Crespin.

Arenaceous foraminifera found in yellow clays of Roma Formation. T.ocality ;

14 miles north-west of Muloowurtina station,

VI. REGIONAL CORRELATION

1. Brery Sperncs AREA

West of Muloowurtina, ferruginous grits, micaceotis shaly sandstones and

pehble conglomerates have been deposited in isolated shallow lacustrine basins.

Concerning the Billy Springs area Sprigg (1951) states: “A small outlier of

sandstones . .. . has heen noted by S. B. Dickinson on a low divide about

one mile N-E. of Billy Springs. The sediments contain vegetable matter, but at

present their age is unknown. . . . . the material has the appearance of certain

eas sandstones but .... many Tertiary sandy beds preserved in the adjacent

Frome sunklands, appear similar.”

The sediments which were examined by the writer consist of finely laminated

baff to pale-brown micaceous sands with intercalated eritty and pebbly lenses,

the thickness exceeding 30 feet. The sediments are lithologically similar to the

micaceous sands underlying the fossiliferous quartzite of Mt, Babbage. Lithologic

similarity of these beds with the Mt. Babbage section suggests them to be of the

same age (Lower Cretaceous).

2. West or Frinpers RaNcEs

Bordering the western foothills of the Flinders Ranges high tablelands reveal

in descending order:

Lithology Thickness

(i) Massive grey “Duricrust” chert with subordinate gypsum = - - - +1)

(2} Blue-grey gypsiferous clay shales laminated yellow-brown and ferruginised 7

(3) Dark-brown limonitic band = - - - - “ = _ 6

(4) Fine cross-bedded yellow-brown to buff quartz grits passing into laminated

red and brown ferruginous quartz sands = - - - ~ - 2

(5) Laminated grey to yellow-brown fine micaceotis: silty sandstones, semi-

consolidated with occasional quartz and shale pebbles and carbonaceous

Shale lenses yielding lignitic fragments and leaf impressions of Clado-

bhlebis australis (Mortis) - - - - ~ - &

(6) Blue-grey micaceous silty clays with disseminated gypsum and bands of

consolidated yellow-brown limonitic iron, grading transitionally into

laminated yellow-brown sandy clay shales = - - - - 2B

(7) Dark-brown micaceous gritty sandstane with intercalated pebbly lenses and

ferruginous bands - - - - - - - - +3

Total exposed thickness - - ~ +74!

The presence. of Cladophiebis australis indicates that these sediments. may

be of Upper -Jurassic~Lower Cretaceous age. These lacustrine deposits

have a gentle westerly dip which conforms with the main direction of current

bedding, indicating the sediments to have been deposited in a widesptead region

of depression marginal to the Precambrian source rocks of the Flinders Range,

3. One Mize Sours or Copitey TowNnsHip

Seventy-one feet of current bedded lacustrine sediments tentatively classed

as Jurassic (Parkin 1953) overlie Triassic coal-beating beds one mile south of

Copley. The sediments in descending order are:

Lithology Thickness

(1) Grey chert cementing quartz. “Duricrust’ eappilig containing impressions

of fossil wood, plants, ete. “ - - - - ~ +10

(2) Coarse current-bedded buff to yellow-brown micaccous qttartz grits becom-

ing ferruginous and consolidated at the surface, the grains sub-angular. In

this bed ate intercalated white micaceous fine-grained, sandy shale bands

3-4” in thickness with gritty laminae and some fossil wood impressions, At

the base are silty kaolin bands with a coarse gravel bed of cemented slate,

chert, and quartzite boulders - - > - - - - 49

(3) Coarse cross-bedded micaceous pirple quartz grits with intercalated gravel

lenses, white sands and kaolin nodules - - - - - 17

(4) Basal conglomerate, dark purple in color of variable thickness showing

cut and fill effects and marking the unconformity with the underlying

Precambrian slates ~ - - - 2 - os a 9’

While confirmatory evidence of a Jurassic age for these deposits is lacking,

the presence of fossil wood remains similar to those from Mt. Babbage and other

areas, and the lithologic character of the deposits suggests them to correspond to

the widespread lacustrine accumulations of Jurassic-Cretaceous age described

above. Torrential stream deposition is clearly eviderwed by the pronounced current

bedding and coarse clastic nature of the sediments,

GEOLOGICAL MAP

MULOOWURTINA AREA

yf.

‘4 og MULOQOWURTINA

AL HOMESTEAD

TERRAPINNA

y WA ares

STRATIGRAPHIC SUCCESSION

ALLUVIAL SANDS

@ 0] 420" SEOMONT GRAVELS, BOULDER BEOS & CLASTIC SANDS

UNCONFORMITY

QUATERNARY { @

WAQUMITIG SILTY SANDS, SUPERFICIAL QUARTZ:TE

FOSSILIFEROUS VELLOW CLAY SHALES

Lower

CRETACEOUS

@prian) FOSSKIFEROUS MARINE BLUE GREY SHALES

(ROMA FORMATION) ee M4

o t

LOWER (BLVTHESDALE SANOSTONE}

€RETACEOUS

4100" INTERBEDOED COARSE ANGULAR SANDS, GRAVELS, BASE MAP COMPLED FROM AERAL PHOTOGRAPHS

Al RBONACE

WEOCOMAN) Gai OUS SHALES & BOULDER B£OS DRAWN BY E.8,SUMMERS. 1953

ADELAIOE STURT TILUITE & ASSOCIATED GRANITE COMPLEYES

SYSTEM

GEOLOGICAL SECTIONS MULOOWURTINA

HORIZONTAL SCACE

HABE

ang

May

MESOZOIC

GENERALISED STRATIGRAPHIC COLUMN

MULOOWURTINA

RECENT ORIFT SAND, RIVER GRAVELS, ETC.

LATE CAINOZOIC — RECENT PIEDMONT GRAVELS, BOULDER BEOS, ETC

SUPERFICIAL PORCELLANISEOD GRAVELS, ETC

MOTTLED WHITE. REO, YELLOW SILTY

KAOLINISED SANDS.

MOTTLED YELLOW GYPSIFEROUS CLAY

SHALES WITH HAPLOPHRAGMOWMES ,

AMMOBACULOIDES, ETC.

LOWER CRETACEOUS

ROMA FORMATION

(Aeriam}

FOSSILIFEROUS MARINE BLUE ~ GREY

GYPS/IFEROUS CLAY SHALES WITH

MACLOYELLA, PERATOBELUS ETC

GREY QUARTZITE WITH PLANT FOSSILS OR

BOULDER BEDS WITH COARSE SANDSTONES

ANDO FOSSIL TREES

YELLOW-BROWN, CROSS-BEDDED

QUARTZ SANOS, GRAVELS & CARBONACEOUS CLAYS

LOWER CRETACEOUS WITH PLANT FOSSILS ~ LYCOPODS,

: FAENIOPTERIS OTOZAMITES, ETC

BLYTHESDALE SANDSTONE

LATE MECCOMUN TO EARLY APTN}

PRE-CAMBRIAN GRANITE COMPLEX

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This research project was made possible through research funds of the

Geology Department, University of Adelaide. The writer is indebted to Professor

A. R. Alderman, and to Dr. M. F. Glaessner, for their assistance in this project

and for much helpful criticism and advice concerning the preparation of this

manuscript. The writer also expresses his appreciation to Mrs. E, B. Simmers,

and to Messrs. B. Daily, A. W. Kleeman and V. R. Rao for assistance concerning

various aspects of this work, Air photos were kindly made available by the Survey

Branch, Department of the Army.

LIST OF REFERENCES

Bowes, D. R. 1952 “The Transformation of Quartzite by Migmatisation at Mt. Fitton,

South Australia.” Sir Douglas Mawson Anniversary Volume, Adelaide

Davin, Size T. W. E.,, ed. W. R. Browne 1950 “The Geology of the Commonwealth of

Australia.” London

Cresemy, 1. 1945 “Preliminary notes on a microfauna from the Lower Cretaceous deposits

in the Great Artesian Basin.” Dept. of Supply and Shipping; Min. Res. Surv. Rept.

No, 1945/6, February 1945

Du Tort, A. L. 1917 “Problem of the Great Australian Artesian Basin.” Journ. Roy, Soc.

N.S.W., 51, 135-207

Fairarincr, RW. 1953 “Australiat: Stratigraphy,” 2nd ed, University of Western Australia.

Grazssner, M. F., and Rao, V. R, 1955 “Lower Cretaceous Plant Remains from the

vicinity of Mt. Babbage, South Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 78

Jack, R.L. 1895 “Artesian Water in the Western Interior of Queensland.” Publ, Geol,

Surv., Qld., No.. 101 (Bull, 1)

ParKIN, - a 1953 “The Leigh Creek Coalfield,” Geol. Suty,, S. Aust, Bull. 31, chap, III,

Sprice, & c. Pads “Regional Geology in the Mt, Fitton Talc Area.” Geol. Sury. of S. Aust.,

ull.

Warrenouse, F. W, 1926 “The Correlation of the Marine Cretaceous Deposits of Aus-

tralia.” Rept. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 28

Vistrsnocal, ru in 1952 “The Mesozcic Environments of Queensland,” Aust. Assoc.

v. Sci,

Warrrte, A. W. G., and Cueeorarey, N. 1952 “Stratigraphic Correlations by Petrographic

Methods Applied to the Australian Bores in the Lake Frome Area.” Sir Douglas

Mawson Anniversary Volume, Adelaide

Woopwarp, H. P. 1885 “Report on the Country east of Farina and northward to lat

23° 10°." Parl, Paper 40, Gov. Printer, Adelaide

Wootxoucn, W. G. 1924 “Evidence of Glacial Action in Central Australia in Late Meso-

zoic Time.” Rept. Aust, Assoc, Adv. Sci., 17, (Adelaide)

Woo.noucn, W. G., and Davm, T. W. E. 1926 “Cretaceous Glaciation in Central Aus-

tralia.” Quart, Journ. Geol. Soc, Lond., 82, 332

Wootxouch, W. G. 1926 “Geology of the Flinders Ranges, South Australia, in the neigh-

bourhood of Wooltana Station.” Proc. Roy, Soc. N.S.W., 60, 300-330

Wootnouce, W. G, 1927 Presidential Address, Pt. 2, “The Duricrust of Australia.” Journ.

and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 61, 29-46 ,

THE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF THE PLIOCENE STRATA

UNDERLYING THE ADELAIDE PLAINS

PART II - PELECYPODA

BY N. H. LUDBROOK*

Summary

Part II of the study of the mollusca recovered from borings into the Dry Creek Sands of Pliocene

age consists of a systematic revision of the Pelecypoda. The nomenclature of 120 species has been

completely revised and 20 species described as new. One new name is introduced.

The geological and environmental background of the fauna, together with an analysis of its

relationships with molluscan faunas outside Australia, was discussed in Part I, published in the

Transactions of the Society, 77, pp. 42-64, 1954. A map showing the position of the bores from

which material was examined was included in Part I.

THE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA OF THE PLIOCENE STRATA

UNDERLYING THE ADELAIDE PLAINS

PART II — PELECYPODA

By N. H. Lupnroox *

[Read 13 May 1954]

SUMMARY

Part Il of the study of the mollusca recovered from borings mto the Dry Creek Sands

of Pliocene age consisis of a systematic revision of the Pelecypoda, The nomenclature of

120 species has heen completely revised and 20 species described as new. Onc new name is

introduced.

The geological and environmental background of the fauna, together with an analysis

of its relationships with molluscan faunas outside Australia, was discussed in Part I, published

in the Transactions of the Suciety, 77, pp. 42-64, 1954. A map showing the position of the

bores from which material was examined was inclitded in Part 1.

INTRODUCTION

In the following systematic siudy, diaguosés of species have been made, where possible,

from the holetypes. Where the holotype was not available, the diagnosis has been made from

specimens found im borings made. available to the writer. Similarly, dimensions cited are,

wherever possible, those of the holotype.

Abbreviations o.d. for original designation and s.d. for subsequent designation of type

species have been employed throughout.

Collections in which specimens are lodged are abbrevited as hereunder:

Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, for Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide.

S. Aust. Mines Dept. Coll., for Collection of the South Australian Mines Department.

S. Aust. Mus. Coll, for South Australian Museum Collection, Adelaide.

Aust. Mus, Coll., for Australian Museum Collection, Sydney.

Nat. Mus. Coll., for National Museum Collection, Melbourne.

Geol. Surv, Coll, for Collection of the Geological Survey of Victoria, Melbourne.

Melb. Univ. Geol, Dept, for Collection of the Geology Department, University of

Melbourne,

BM, Coll., for British Museum (Nattiral History) Collection, Lotidon.

Class PELECYPODA

Order FILIBRANCHIA

Family NUCULIDAE

Genus Nucuta Lamarck, 1799

Nucula Lamarck, 1799, Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat., Paris, p. 87

Type species (Monotypy) Arca nucleus Linné

Subgenus Ennvcura lredale 1931

Ennuctla Tredale, 1931, Rec. Aust. Mus,, 18, (4), p. 202.

(Evntcula Tredate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. S.A. Mus. 8, (4), p. 655, 656, lapsus calomi for

Fvnucula). L i

Type species (o.d.) Nucula obliqua Lamarck

Nucula (Ennucula) kalimnae Singleton,

pl. 1, fig. 1, 2

Nucula tumida Tenison Woods, Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 127, pl. 6,

fig. Gi, 6b.

Nucula tenisont Pritchard. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), p. 146.

Nucula obliqua Lamarck. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 55, p, 150.

Nucula kalimnae Singleton, 1932. Proc. Roy, Soc. Vict, 44, (18-), (2), p. 292-94, pl, 24,

fig. 7-9.

* Department of Mines, Adelaide.

Diagnosis—Shell relatively large, heavy, moderately inflated ; anterior hinge

area gently arcuate, less arched than in the Recent NV. obliqua; inner yentral

margin sometimes obscurely crenulate.

Dimensions—Length 20°5; height 15; thickness (right valve) 6°5 mm.

Type Locality—Cutting on maim road above bridge, Jemmy's Point, Kalimna,

Victoria; Lower Pliocene.

Location of Holetype—No, 1312, Melb. Univ. Geol. Dept.

Observations—Adelaide specimens are smaller and less heavy than the

Gippsland Lakes holotype, but approximate more closely to kalimnae than to

vbligua, which is a broader and less tumid shell, more arched on the anterior

dorsal margin, The writer agrees with Singleton that the differences exhibited

hy Muddy Creek (and also Adelaide) shells are not of sufficient magnitude to

warrant specific distinction. There is a lineal descent from N. tenisoni through

N, kalimnae and its Muddy Creek, Adelaide, and Werrikooian examples, in that

order, to the Recent N. obliqua, with which Adelaide specimens have been pre-

viously identified.

Material—7 valves, maximum dimensions length 11 mm., height 8 mm.,

from Wevmouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower to Upper Phocene,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria, to Adelaide, South Aus-

tralia,

Nucula (Ennucula) beachportensis Verco

pl. 1, fig. 3, 4

Nucla beachportensis Verco, 1907. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 31, p- 216, pl, 27, fig. 3.

Ennucula beachportensis Verco. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938. Moll. §. Aust, p. 41, text fig. 14

Diagnosis—Very small, anterior dorsal margin straight and clongate,

nosterior margin short and somewhat truncate, ventral border uniformly ctirved.

imbo at about posterior one-sixth. Inner margin minutely crenulate.

Dimensions—Length 4-9, height 4°6 mm.

Type Locality—Ott Beachport, 40 fathoms, Recent.

Location of Holotype—S, Aust. Mus. Reg. No. D 11310.

Observations—This is a very small species, recorded fossil For the first time.

It is distinguishable by its elongate posterior margin and finely crenulate inner

ventral margin.

Materia_—One complete specimen, 10. yalves, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creel Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribulion—Yasmania; Beachport to Cape Jaffa, South Atis-

tralia.

Nucula (Ennucula) venusta N. H. Woods

pl. & fig. 1

Nucula venusta NW. 1£ Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 55, p. 147, pl. 7, fig. 2.

Diagnosis—Solid, ventricose, mmbo very prominent, inclined markedly to

posterior, Ventral margin flattened or obsoletely denticulate.

Dimensions—Leneth 56, height 48 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, South Australia; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ. of Adclaide. T 1678

Observations—The one perfect left valve is of approxiinately the same size

as the holotype fram the Abattoirs Bore. The chondrophore ts very oblique

falmost horizontal), narrow, and deeply grooved. The inner ventral margin is

obsoletely denticulate.

Material—Holotype ; four left valves, one almost perfect, and two right valves

from Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphicol Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs and Weymouth’s Bores, Adelaide.

Genus PRoNucuLa Hedley, 1902

Pronucula Hedley 1902. Mem, Aust. Mus., 4, (5), p. 290

Type species (o.d.) Pronucula decorosa Hedley

Pronucula morundiana Tate

Nueula mortundions Tate, 1886. Trans. Ray. Soc. S. Aust., 8, p. 128.

Nucula morundiana Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Vict, 1, (2), p. 122.

Nucida morundiana, Tate. N, H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 150.

Pronucula morundiana Tate. Cotton, 1947, Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 655,

Diagnosis—Shell minute, tumid, trigonal, inner margin of valves minutely

denticulate, surface sculptured with fine, equal, concentric ribs.

Dimensions—Length 3, height 3, thickness through both valves 2 mm,

" Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs near Morgan, South Australia; Lower

iocene.

Location of Halotype—Tate Mus. Coll. Univ. of Adelaide, T 1042A.

Observations—Adelaide material so far examined is vety poorly preserved

and it is doubtful whether this species is smorundiana,

Material—1 yalye, Hindmarsh Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide, South

Austrahia.

Family NUCULANIDAE

Genus Nucutana Link, 1807

Nuculena Link, 1807. Beschr. Nat. Samm], Univ, Rostock, (3), p. 155

(Leda Schumacher, 1817. Ess. Vers. test., p. 55, 173)

Type species (monotypy) Arce rostrata Gmelin

Subgenus ScaroLepa Iredale, 1929

Scaeoleda Iredale, 1929c, Rec, Aust. Mus., 17, (4), p. 158

Type species (0.d.) Leda crassa Hinds

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) woodsi (Tate)

pl. 1, fig. 5.

Leda inconspicua Tenison Woods, 1878. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 3, p. 139, pl. 21, fie, 3.

Leda woodsti Tate, 1886. Trans.. Roy. Soc. $. Atst., 8, p. 133, pl. 9, fiz. 8,

Leda woodsii Tate, Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans. Rey, Soc. §. Aust, 17, (1), p. 224.

Nuculana woodsti Tate (sp.). Harris, 1897. Cat; Tert, Moll. Brit, Mus., p. 349,

Leda woodsij Tate. Dermant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 122, 138.

Nuculana woodsii Tenisaty Woods. N. H, Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust, 55, p. 150.

Diagnosis—Small compressed, with angular posterior ridge from umbo to

ventral margin; surface finely ribbed, ribs passing over ridge.

Dimenstons—Length 12, height 6; thickness through both valves 3*5 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; {?) |.ower Miocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. Univ. of Adelaide. T 1039.

Material—Two complete specimens, 5 valves, Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet.

7 valves, Weymouth’s Bore, 310-330 feet,

Straligraphical Range—? Oligocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia,

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) crebrecostata (Tenison Woods)

pw, 1, fig. 6

Leda crebrecostats Tenison Woods, 1877. Proc. Roy. Soc, Tas, for 1876, p. 112.

Leda crebrecostata Tenison Woods. Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 8, p. 143, pl. 5,

g. Ja-b. h

Leda creprerortats T. Woods. Nennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2),

p. 123.

Nuculana crebrecostata T, Woods, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150.

Diagnosis—Trigonal, oblong, angular, gaping, Posterior area markedly

depressed, cut off by narrow ridge from umbo to ventral margin, Surface sculp-

tured with numerous fine lirae interrupted by ridge.

Dimensions—Length 8, height 5, thickness through both valves 3 mm.

Type Locality—Table ‘Cape, Tasmania,

Location of Holotype—Roy, Soc. Coll.,, Tasmania.

Material—Four valves, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigrap hical Range—? Oligocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Table Cape, Tasmania; Spring Creek, Victoria;

Adelaide, South Australia.

Nuculana (Scaeoleda) verconis (Tate).

pl. 1 fig. 7

Leda verconis Tate, 1891. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., for 1890, 14, p, 264, pl. 11, fig. 4.

Naculana verconis Verco. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, p. 147, 150.

Diagnosis—Elongate-ovate, posterior side shortly acuminated, with slightly

curved keel. Surface sculptured with about 30 concentric lirae slightly incurved

towards the posterior margin,

Dimensions—Length 8, height 5, thickness through both valves 3°5 mm.

Type Locality—Yankalilla Bay, South Australia; Recent.

Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus. Reg, No. D 11340.

Moterial—Two valves, Weymouth’s Bore; 5 valves, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range——Dry Creek Sands and Recent,

Geographical Distribution—-South Australia.

Superfamily ARCACEA

Family ARCIDAE

Gens Arca Linné, 1758

Arca Linmé 1758. Syst. Nat. ed, 10, 1, p. 693.

Arca Linné. Reinhart, 1935. Mus. Roy. d’Hist. nat. Belg, 11, (13), p. 14 (Synonymy).

Type species (s.d. I.C.Z.N, 1945) ‘Arca none Linné

Arca negata Cotton

Arca navicularis Brug. Tate, 1890a. Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust., 13, (2), P

“rca xavicularis. Brug. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., ae . 146,

Arca navicularis Tate. N, H. Woods, 1931, pra Roy. Soc. S. Aust,, 55, Pp. is0.

Arca neguta Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), p. 656, pl. 20, fig. 1, 12.

Diagnosis—Umbones distant, acuic, harp ridge from umbo to posterior

ventral margin; sculpture of fine, close radial ribs anterior to angle about 7

per mm.; cancellate in young stages.

Dimenstons—Length 24, height 11 mm.

Type Locality—Bore 65, 385-395 feet, Adelaide, South Australia; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—S. Anst, Mus. Coll., No. 8361.

Moterial—Fiolotype; 1 right valve, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Dtstributien—Abattoirs Bore; Bore 65.

Genus BarrattA Gray, 1842

Barbatia Gray, 1842. Syn, Cont. Brit. Mus., p. 81

Type species (s.d, Gray, 1847) Arca barbata Tinné

Subgenus RARRATTA 5. str.

Barbatia (Barbatia) epitheca Cotton

Arca (Burbutix) pistachia Lamarck. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 150.

Barbatia epitheca Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 657, pl, 20, fig, 14, 17,

Diagnosis—Subquandrangular, anterior rounded, posterior longer and

obliquely truncate, surface sculpture of fine and numerous radials crossed by

equal concentrics.

Dimensions—Length 23, height 12 mm,

Type Localtiy—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, South Australia; Pliocene.

Location of Hvlotype—S. Aust, Mus. Coll, No. 8313.

Observations—The species described by Cotton is, according to its author

(personal communication), smaller, longer, and more finely sculptured than the

Recent pistachia with which it was originally identified,

Material—Ilolotype.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs Bore.

Subgenus Acar Gray, 1857

Acar, Gray, 1857, Ann. Mag. Nat, Hist., ser, 2, 19, p. 360.

Type species (8.d, Woodring, 1925) 4rca gradata Lroderip and Sowerby

Barbatia (Acar) coma (Cotton)

Acar coma Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 657, pl. 20, fig. 25, 26.

Diagnosis—Subquadrangular, umbones close, sculpture of radial flattened

ribs crossed by frilled Jamellac,

Dimensions—Length 23 mm,, height 10 mm,

Type Locality—Weymauth’s Bore, 345-350 feet: Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—S, Aust. Mus., No. 8404.

Material—Two left valves, Weymouth’s Bare, 310-330 feet.

Sirutigruplical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geegraphical Distribution—Weymouth’s Bore, Adelaide,

Gentis CucuLrLaea Lamarck, 1801

Cucullaea. Lamarck, 1801. Syst. Anim, sans Vert,, p. 116

‘Type species (s.d, Schmidt, 1818) Cucullaea auriculifera

Lamarck = Arce concamera Bruguiére

Cucullaea corioensis MeCoy

pl. 1, fig. 8, 9

Cucullaea coriensis McCoy, 1876, Prod, Pal. Vict. 3, p. 32, pl. 27, fig, 4, 5.

Cucullaea coricensis McCoy. Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust. 8, p. 144,

Cucullaeu carioensis McCoy. Jotnston, 1888. Geol. Tas. pl. 29, fig, 4, 4a.

Cucullaea corioensis McCoy. Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 17, (1),

p. 224.

Cuculluea corivensis McCoy. Pritchard, 1896, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 8 (ns.), p. 131,

Cucullaea coriognsiy McCoy, Harris, 1897, Cat, Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. 336.

Cucullaea corioensis MeCoy. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree, Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), pp. 122,

138, 145 (pars).

Crcullava coriaensis McCoy, Chapman and Gabriel, 1914. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 26, (2),

(1.8.), p. 302,

Cucnllaew curioensis MeCay. Singleton, 1932. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet., 44, (tus,), (2), p. 300-303,

Diagndsis—Large, heavy, obliquely trapezoidal; ratio anterior to posterior

part oi hinge generally less than 1, Sculpture of fine radiating ridges, 3 per mm.

at 8 mm. frotn umbo, crossed by closely spaced growth lines with undulations

on the ribs.

Tupe Locality--Bird Rock, near Spring Creek, Victoria.

Location of Hololype—National Museum, Melbourne,

Material—Tive complete, 1 bruken valye, Weymouth’s Bore; 13 valves,

Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, 14789, L6598, L42238-42, 70411, B.M. Coll, 1 valve

Werribee, Victoria; 5 valves River Murray, South Australia.

Stratigraphical Range—? Oligocene to Pliocene (B.A.S., N /H.L.).

Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia.

Cucullaea praelonga Singleton

pl. 5, fig. 15

Cucullaea corioensis McCoy, 1876. Prod, Pal. Vict., 3, pl. 27, iz. 3 (7), 3a (om 4, 5S),

Cuctllaea corioensis McCoy. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), 9, 138,

Cueullaea coriaensis praclonga Singleton, 1932. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 44 (ns.), (2),

p. 303-304, pl. 26, fig. 20a, b,

eta pragiehge- (Singleton 1932), Singleton, 1945. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 56, {1.3.),

yp. 257.

Cueullaea proelonga Singleton, Cotton, 1947. Rec. 5, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 658.

Diagnosis—Less inequilateral thai corioensis, less tumid, tatio anterior ta

posterior part of hinge greater than 1.

Dimenstons—Length 61'S, height 51, inflation (right valve) 21 mm.; Jength

anterior to hinge 7°5, of hinge 42°5, posterior to hinge 11-5; maximum height

¢: hinge arom ventral border 43-5 mm. Ratio of anterior to posterior part of

hinge 1-13.

Type Locality—Forsyth’s, Grange Burn, near Tamilton, Victoria; Lower

Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—No. 1320 Melbourne University Geology Department.

Observations—Cotton (1947) has recorded this species from the Dty Creek

Sands, although the exact locality is not specified. He remarks that specimens ane

common in the “Adelaidean” and appear to be praelonga rather than cortoensis.

With the exception of one sample Irom Kooyonga Bore, the specimens examined

satisfy the general criterion for corioeusis established by Singleton (1931, p. 302) ;

t.e., the ratio anterior: posterior part of hinge is less than 1. The writer is there-

fore in agreement with Singleton that Adelaide examples are corioensis, It

seems possible that one true species only is represented, and that praelonga is,

as originally described, merely a subspecies of corimensis. A wider range of

specimens, numerically and geographically, should be examined to determine

statistically whether two species are present or not.

Matertal—1 valve, Kooyonga Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Pliocene and Dry Creek Sands.

Geogruphical Distriintion—Gippsland, Victoria; Adelaide, South Australia.

Family LIMOPSIDAE

Genus Limopsis Sassi, 1827

Limopsis Sassi, 1827. Giorn, Ligust., 1, (5), p. 476.

(Trigonocaela Nyst and Galeotti, 1835, Bull. Acad. Roy, Bruvelles, 2. p. 289.)

(Peclunculina VOrbigny, 1844. Pal. France, Cret., 3, (Lam), p. 182.)

(Cosmetapsis Rovereto, 1898, Atti Soc Ligust., 9, pp, 162, 177.)

Type species (s.d, Gray, 1847) Arca aurita Brocchi

Subgenus Limopsts s, str.

(Mersipella. Tredule, 1931. Ree. Aust. Mus., 18, p, 203.)

Limopsis (Limopsis) beaumariensis Chapman

pl. 5, fiz, 7

Fusmopsis forskah A. Adams. Tate, 1897, Trans, Ray. Soc. S. Aust. 21, p, 38

Limopsis forskali A. Adanis. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2),

, #122 (in part), p, 138, 146.

Limopsis beatimariensis Chapman, 1911. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 23, (4,5.), (2). p. 423-5, pl. 84,

_ fig. 6; pl. 85, fig. 12.

reece sare Chapman. Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1928. Ree. Geol, Surv. Vict.,

» (1), p. 152.

Timopsis beawmariensis Chapman, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust, 55, p. 150.

Lhmopsis afinitahs Chapman. N. H. Woods, ibid,

Limopsis beaumariensis Chapman. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93.

Diognosis—Subtrigonal, hinge line strongly arched; sculptured with. slightly

undulatmg primary riblets with from 0 to 4 secondary riblets between, crossed

by less conspicuous growth lines,

Dimensions—Length 21, height 20°25, inflation (1 valve) 6, length of hinge

line 9-25; height of ligament pit 1-75 mm.

Type Locality—Beaumaris, Victoria; Lower Piiocene,

Location of Holotype—Geol. Surv. Vic, Coll.

Observations—Although some of the “genera” created by Iredale in 1929

and 1931 for species of Limopsis are separable from Limopsis s. str., Verstpella

created for Limopsis tenisoni Tenison-Woods appears to have no recognizable

morphological chatacters to separate it from the type species Limopsts surite

Brocchi. Versipella is therefore considered a synonym of Lumopsis s. str.

Material —Twelve valves, Weymouth’s Bore, 2 valves Abattoirs Bore,

Stratigraphical Renge—Lower Miocene to Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria, Adelaide, South Australia,

Limopsis maccoyi Chapman

pl. 1, fig, 10

Limopsis belcheri Adams and Reeve. McCoy, 1875, Prod. Pal, Vict., 2, p. 25, pl. 19, fig. 8 9,

Limopsis forskali Adams. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 12%

138, 146 (in part).

Lyon pais {rae eioon 1911. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet, 23, (ms.), (2), p. 421-2, pl. 83,

& 7 P - y HE.

Fimohes sence Chaperan Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1923, Rec, Geol, Surv. Vict,

1, +P ‘

Limopsis maccoyi Chapman. Crespin, 1943. Min. Res, Surv, Bull, 9, p. 93.

Diagnosis—Shell elongate-ovate, very oblique, radial ornament stronger than

concentric, which is waving and fimbriate. Teeth short, curved, comparatively few,

at Dimensions—Length 28, height 25, inflation (1 valve) 56, length of hinge

“4 mm.

Type Locality—? Balcombe Bay, Victoria; Lower Miocene,

Location of Holotype—Naitonal Museum, Melbourne.

Material—T wo valves, Abattoits Bore. One valve, Tennant’s Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Vict. — Adelaide, S. Aust,

Limopsis eucosmus Verco

pl. 1, fig. 11

Limopsis eucosmus Verco, 1907, Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 31, pl. 219, pl. 27, fig. 2.

Limopsis eucosmus Verco, Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll. S. Aust, p- 55, text fig. 30.

Diagnosis—Small, orbicular, strongly sculptured with flat concentric nbs

of varying width and numerous radia) lirae increasing in number by intereala-

tion. Concentrics scalloped by radials and a tubercle generally formed at inter-

section. Interspaces depressed and circular.

Dimensions—i ength 7°5, height 8, inflation (both valves) 3°25 mm.

Type Locality—Off Cape Jaffa, 90 fathoms; Recent.

Lacation of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., Reg. No. 13048.

Observations—One valve only belonging to this species, its first fossil record,

was recovered from Weymouth’s Bore. Its small size and strong sculpture dis-

tinguish it from other fossil species.

Material—Hypotype, Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Tasmania to Western Australia-

Limopsis (Limopsis) vixornata Verco

pl. 1, fig. 12

Limopsis uixornata Verco, 4907. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 31, p. 219, pl. 27; fig. 1.

Limopsis vixornata Verco. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll. $. Aust, 9, 54, fig. 36.

Diagnosis—A very small Limopsis, orbicularly oval, smooth but for con-

centric growth striae except in the posterior area where the concentric sculpture

is crossed by radial striae. Hinge curved with eleven diverging teeth in a con-

tinuous series,

Dimensions—Length 6:4, height 5-7 mm,

Type Localitv—Neptune Islands, 45 fathoms; Recent.

Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., Reg. No. D13047.

Material—Figured hypotype and one other valve, Weymouth’s Bore, 28

valves, Hindmarsh Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Beachport — St. Francis Island, S. Aust,

Genus Lissarca E, A, Smith, 1879

Lissarca Smith, 1879. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., 168, p. 19, pl. 9, fig. 17,

(Austrosarepta Hedley, 1899, Proc. Linn, Soc, N.S.W., 24, p. 430.)

Type species (monotypy) Lissarca rubrofusca E. A. Smith

Lissarca rubricata (Tate)

pl. I, fig. 14

Limopsis rubricata. Tate. 18874. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p. 71.

Lisserco rubricata Tate, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 55, p. 150.

Lissarca rubricata Tate. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll., S. Aust, p. 58, fig. 40.

Diagnosis—Obliquely oval, inflated, umbo prominent, sculpture of regular

concentric striae, margins of yalves crenulate.

Dimensions—length 2-75, height 3, inflation (both valves) 1-75 mm.

Type Locality—32 fathoms, Backstairs Passage, S. Aust.; Recent.

Location of Holotype—S,. Aust. Museum.

Material—Six valves, Hindmarsh Bore; 4 valves, Recent, Vict., B. M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia to 80 miles

west of Eucla,

Lissarca rhomboidalis Verco

pl. 1, fig. 16

Lissarca vhomboidalis Verco, 1907. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, p. 221, pl. 27, fig. 7.

Diagnosis—Ovate, rhombotd, incquilateral, about twice as long behind the

umho as in front. Three or 4 marginal teeth at anterior, 4 at postdorsal and

3 or 4 obsolete teeth at ventral border.

Dimensions—Length 2-4, height 2 mm.

Type J.ocality—Macdonnell Bay and Guichen Bay, in shell sand; Recent.

Location of Holotype—No. 13050, S, Aust. Museum.

Material—Six valves, Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 feet, 3 valves Weymounth’s

Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia to Mac-

Donnell Bay.

Family GLYCYMERIDAE

Genus Giveyrmeris da Costa, 1778

Glycymeris da Costa, 1778. Hist, Nat. Test. Brit, p. 168.

Glycymeris Nicol, 1945. Jour, Pal., 19, (6), p. 6164 (synonymy).

Type species (absolute tautonymy) Arca glycymeris Linné

Subgenus Tucetona Iredale, 1931

Tucetuna Iredale, 1931. Rec. Aust, Mus., 18, (4), p. 202.

Type species (o,d.) Pectunculus flabellatus Tenison Woods

Glycymeris (Tucetona) convexa (Tate)

Peetunculus convesus Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 198, pl, \l, fig, 7a, b.

Pectunculus conviexus var. Tate, 1890. id. 13, (2), p. 175.

Pectunculus convexus ‘Tate and Deunant, 1893, id, 17, (1), p. 224,

Pectunculus convexus Tate. Harris, 1897, Cat, Tert. Moll. Brit Maus. 1) p. 342,

Glycomeris convera Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree. Geol. Surv. Viet, 3, (2), p 122,

138, 146.

Glycimeris maceoyt Johnston sp. Chapman and Gabriel, 1914. Proc Rey, Soc, Viet., 26,

(ns.), (2), p. d04, pl 24, fig. 5 (vom 1-4). ‘

Glycimeris maccoyt Jotinston sp. Chapman, 1916. Ree. Geol, Surv. Vict, 3, (4), pl, 67,

fig. 5 (non 1-4), f

Glycimeris convexu Tate sp, Chapin and Singleton, 1925, Trans. Roy, Soc. Vict, 37,

(ns), CL), p. 38, pl. 2, fig, loa, 1h b, 17-20; pl. 4, fig. 12, 13.

Glycimeris convera Tate, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 55, p. 150.

Glycymeris convexa Tate. Crespin, 1943. Min. Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93.

Tucetona crama Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8, €4), p, 660, pl. 20, fg. 1, 2

Diagnosis—Solid, tumid, with about 24 rounded clevated radial ribs crossetl

by thick concentric waving laminae.

Dimensions—Length 31, height 33, inflation (both valyes) 22 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria, Lower Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ. of Adelaide,

Observiations—This species is fairly common in the borings in the Adelaide

district. Chapman and Singleton noted (1925, p. 38) in Adelaide vxatnples a

tendency to flattening of the ribs and development of concentric sculpture; on

these features Cotton has raised the new species cram, Dlattening of the ribs

ig nat, however, a diagnostic or constant feature; all specimens from Weymouth's

Bore show very little if any flattening, while some topotypes have flattened tibs ;

vor is the development of the concentric sculpture a uniform characteristic, either

in the Weymouth’s Rore specimens under present consideration or in Muddy

Creek topotypes:

Increasing convexity with age is usual in the species. Juveniles are generally

only slightly convex, while gerontic specimens cant be extremely so. The feature

is characteristic also of the type species G. glvwewneris (Line), as exemplified

in a range of samples from the Red Crag of the English Pliocene in the collec-

tion of the Geological Survey of Great Britain,

The mode of preservation and the difference in habitat between Adelaide

and Muddy Creek shells is here also taken into consideration in accepting Chap-

man and Singleton’s determination of the species.

Maferial—Three topotypes, Muddy Creek, L4827, 1.0592, B.M. Coll,; seven

yalves Weymouth’s Bore, numerous valves Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Ratige—t.ower Pliocene and Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsiand, Victoria. — Adelaide, South Australia,

Subgenus Tucett..a Iredale, 1939

Tucettdhe Tredale, 1930. Bare. Reef Exped, Scient, Reps. Brit, Mus, Nat. Hist, 5, (f), p. 300.

Type species (original designation) Glycyineris capricornea Hedley

Glycymeris (Tucetilla) tenuicostata (Keeve)

Pectunculus lenuicostatus Reeve, 1843, Proc. Zoul, Soe, Lond. p. 80.

Pectunctdlus tenuicostutus Reeve, 1843, Couch, Icon. 1, pl. 6, fig. 35.

Pectunculus tenwicostatus Reeve, Lamy, 1912, Journ. de Conch, 59, p_ 103-8, pl 3, Ag. 3

Glycimoris deesionrtete Reeve, Gath! and Gubriel, 1910 b. Proe. Roy. Soc, Viet, 23, (hs)

(1), p. 9%

Glycyneris tenuicostata Reeve sp. Chapman and Singleton, 1925, Proc, Roy. Sav. Viet, 37

(ns.), (1), p 30-7.

Glycymeris denuicostota Reeve. N. Uf, Woods, 1931. ‘Trans, Rov. Soc. 'S, Aust, 65, p. 150.

Glycymeris tenuicostata Reeve. Crespin, 1943, Min, Res. Surv. Bull. 9, ja B43,

Tucetilla yota Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8 (4), p. 659,

Diagnosis—Rounded, moderately inflated, surface ornamented, with 4045

riblets tranisversed by concentric growth threads which become beaded where they

eross the radial costae.

Dimensions—Length 29-8, height 28-8, inflation (both valves) 19 mm.

Type Locality— Australia”; Recent,

Location of Holotype—B.M. Coll., No. 1950-6-6-1-3.

Observations—The species Tucetilla reta is identical in shape and sculpture

and the number of hinge teeth, the described diagnostic characters, with the

holotype of Glycyimeris teniicostata. G. tenuicostata has been found consistenly

from Balcombian to Werrikeoian in southern Australia, It is recorded from

Abattoits Bore, and one example from Hindmarsh Bore, a young and worn shell

length 8, height 7 mm., is undoubtedly tenuicosfata. The species is represented

in the British Museum by specimens other than the holotype having the following

dimensions :

Length 32, height 32, inflation (both valves), 20 mm.

Length 29-8, height 27, inflation (both valves), 18 mm.

Length 19, height 17 mm., inflation not measured as specimen glued to

tablet.

Material—Holotype: Three complete specimens, Brit. Mus. Coll.; 1 valve

Hindmarsh Bore, 17 valves Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—-Miocene to Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Quecnsland — South Australia.

Suborder SCHIZODONTA

Superfamily PTERIACEA

Family PTERIIDAE

Genus Prncrapa. Réding, 1798

Pinciada Réding ex Bolten 1798. Mus. Bolt, (2), p. 166.

Pinctada Thiele, 1935. Handb. Syst. Weicht., -p. 803 (synonymy).

Type species (s.d. Iredale, 1915) Mytilus snargaritiferus Linné

Pinctada ¢rassicardia (Tate)

Meleagrina crassicardia Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. 8, p. 121-2, pl. 9, fig. 6, 10,

tharos pyar Prenqearit Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1905. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2),

Pinctada crassicardia Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150.

Pinctada crassicardia, Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8 (4), p. 660.

Diagnosis—Slightly oblique, hinge line long, straight, anterior ear of Jeft

valve short, tumid, acute, of right valve depressed ; posterior wing, small pointed.

Surface with distant growth striae. '

Dimensions—Yoting example: Length of hinge 37, greatest length measured

from umbo to post-ventral margin 37 mm, Average sized adult specimens mea-

sure 60 mm. in length,

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Lower Pliocene,

Location af Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. ;

AMfaterial—One large broken valve, Tetinant’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland. Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Family PINNIDAE

Genus Pryna Linné, 1758

Pinna Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, ed. 10, p, 707,

Type species (s.d, Children, 1823) Pinna rudis Linné.

Subgenus Arrina Gray, 1847

Atrinag Gray, 1847. Proc. Zool. Soc, Lond., p, 199.

Type species (monotypy) Pinna vexulum Born,

Pinna (Atrina) semicostata Tate

Pinna semicostata Tate, 1886 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p, 122, pl. 12, fig. 9.

Pinna semicostada Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree, Geol, Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 138

Alrina Semicostata. Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec, S, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 650.

Dimensions—Length of dorsal matgin 130, width 65, inflation (both valves)

43 mm.

Type Locality—Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. Univ. of Adelaide, T997,

Observations—It is somewhat difficult to tell whether Tate’s type is a

Pinna s.str. or an Atrina, althongh the shape suggests Atrina. The writer fol-

lowed Winkworth (1929) and Thiele (1935-) in the use of Atrina as a sub-

genus, It is separable from Pinna only on the absence. of the internal medial

angulation and the resultant division of the muscular impression.

Material—Ilolotype Tate Mus. Coll. T997,

Stratigraphical Range—South Australian Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Aldinga—Adelaide, South Australia.

Family OSTREIDAE

Genus Osrrea Linné, 1758

Ostrea Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, ed. 10, p. 696,

Type species (s.d, Children, 1823) Ostrea edulis Linné,

Subgenus Lop#a Roding, 1798

Lopha Réding ex Bulten, 1798, Mus, Bolt., 2, p. 168,

ype species (s.d. Dall, 1898) Ostrea cristegalli Gmelin

ie Bolten mid Roding, 1798. Eames, 1951, Phil. Trans, Roy, Soc, ser. B. 627, 235, p. 342

synonymy).

Ostrea (Lopha) hyotidoidea Tate

pl. 5, fig. 1

Ostrea hyotis Linné. Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 8, p. 96, pl, 6, fig. $.

Osteen Kyotis Linné. Dennant, 1889. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Anst., 11, p. 49.

Ostrea kyotis Linné, Harris, 1897, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus, 1, p. 299.

Ostrea hyotidoidea Tate, 1890, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 12, p. 268,

Ostree kyotidoidea Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Surv, Vict. 1, (2), p, 11K

Ostrea hyotidoidea Tate, Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull. 9, p. 94.

Lopha hyotidoidea (Tate). Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 601.

Diagnosis—Irregular, with flattish radial ridges crossed by foliaccous scales,

sometimes somewhat spinose,

Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs; Lower Miocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide. T880,

Description of Hypotype—Shell of moderate size, fairly solid, irregularly

subquadrate, with several irregular flat obtuse radial folds. crossed by numerous

irregular and waving foliaceous concentric scales which are sometimes slightly

spinose. Margins of valves expanded, not plicated. Umbones depressed, resilifer

broad, triangular. Left valve convex,

Déimensions—Length 65, height 60 mm.

Hypotype—B.M. Coll. No. 6581, Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria

Observations—This long-ranging species is not uncommon in some borings

in the Adelaide Basin. None of the specimens ayailable are larger than about

65 mm. The species resembles the nepionic stages of O. hyotts Linné, but of the

examples examined only the holotype shows a tendency to the sharply angular

plications of the adult hyotis which ate diagnostic of the subgents Lopha,

Material—Holotype: Two valves Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, L6581, One

specimen River Murray Cliffs. 48803 B.M. Coll.; numerous specimens Abattoirs

Bore; 2 valves Hindmarsh Bore, -

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria. — Adelaide, South Aus-

tralia.

Subgenus OsTrea s.stt.

Ostrea (Ostrea) arenicola Tate

Ostrea arenicola Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, p. 97, pl. 10, fig. 6.

Osivea ayenicola Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv, Vist., 1, (2), p. 158.

Ostrea angast Sowerby, ibid., p. 145.

Ostrea arenicola Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 661. ; ;

Diagnosis—Solid, valves unequal, lower valve with depressed radial ribs

and foliaceous lamellae; upper valve smaller and flattish, with imbricating

lamellae.

Dimensions—Length 85, height 80, inflation (both valves) 25 mm.

Type Locality—Aldinga, South Australia, Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide. T921, 1

Observations—This oyster is common and numerous at the richly fossilifer-

ous level in the Adelaide Basin. It is distinct from the Ostrea startiana of the

River Murray Pliocene.

Material—One valve, Aldinga Bay, S. Aust, 110523, B.M. Coll. Ntimerous

valves, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria. — Adelaide, South Aus-

tralia.

Superfamily TRIGONIACEA

Family TRIGONIIDAE

Genus NeotraicontaA Cossmann, 1912

Neotrigonia Cossmann, 1912. Ann. de Paleo. 7, (2), p. 11.

Type species (0.d.) Trigonia pectinata Lamarck

Neotrigonia trua Cotton

Neotrigonia acuttcostata McCoy. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 55, p. 150.

Neotrigonia irua Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 661-2, pl. 20, fig, 5-6.

Diagnosis—Shell trigonal, convex, with about 28 radiating ribs closely set

with numerous lamellose tubercles,

Dimensions—Length 26, height 25 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Museum. P. 8360.

Observations—N. trua is distinguishable from its nearest fossil ally

N. acuticostata by its more trigonal shape, and by its greater convexity par-

ticularly in the umbonal region, Thete are 28 ribs generally in N. trua compared

with 32 in N. acuticostata. N. trua would appear to be intermediate in form

between the Cheltenhamian-Kalimnan acuticosfafa and the Recent South Aus-

tralian bedvalli which has 26 ribs,

Material—Holotype: Four topotypes, Abattoirs Bore.

Siratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical. Distribytton—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide.

Suborder ISODONTA

Superfamily PECTINACEA

Family PECTINIDAE

Genus CuLamys Roding, 1798

Chlamys Réding ex Bolten, 1798. Mus. Bolt. p. 161,

Type species (s.d. Hermannsen, 1847) Pecten tslandicus Muller

Subgenus CuLamys s.str.

akin Tredale, 1929 cc, ibid., p. 162.)

Mimachlaymys Iredale, 1929 c, ibid., p. 162.)

{Belcklamys Iredale, 1929, ibid. p. 164.)

Chlamys (Chlamys) polyaktinos sp. nav,

pl, 4, By. 16

Chlamys peront Tate. N. 11. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soe S. Aust, 65, (1), p. 150.

Diagnasis—Suborbicular, with from about 24 increasing by intercalation to

48 narrow riblets carrying imbricating scales with shagreen sculpture in the

interspaces,

Description of Holotype—(Iett valve), Shell small, rather thin, elongately

suborbicular, slightly convex, sculptures with about 24 radial riblets, increasing

by intercalation to 48 towards the ventral margin, of sub-equal strength, covered

towards the ventral margin with imbricating scales. Interspaces finely shagreened.

Auricles unequal, posterior auricle small, dorsal margin nearly horizontal, with

about 10 fine rays with imbricating scales; anterior auricle larger, dorsal margin

oblique, primary rays five with two secondary rays, crossed by fine growth

lamellae, not scaly ; byssal sintis moderately wide and deep.

Dimensions—Length 22, height 23-5, inflation (one valve), 3 mm.

Tape Locality—Ahattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Hulotype—Vate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F15120.

Observations—Although it resembles it fairly closely, this species is not the

Balcombian C. peront (Tate), from which jt is distinguished easily by the

shagreen sculpture between the ribiets. It is close to the Recent Cy aktines

Petterd, from which it differs in the more numerous riblets and in shape, being

fess elongate. The posterior atiticle is larger than in akiinos,

Material—tlolotype and 16 paratypes, Abattoirs Bore (single valves). One

valve Hindmarsh Bore, two fragments Tennant’s Bere,

Stratigvaphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis (Tate)

fl. 5, fig. 21

Pecten usperrimus yar; Tate, 1882. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 4, 1 44.

Pecten antiaustraliy Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 106, pl, 9, fig. Zac:

Pecten antjanstralis, Vale. Harris 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus., 1, p. 315.6

Pecten antiaustralis Tate, 1899. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 23, (2), p 269.

Peeten antioustrals Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol, Sury. Viet, 1, (2), p. 13%

Chiamys usperrimus antiuustralis (Tate, 1886) Gatliff and Singteton 1930, Proe, Rey, Sue.

Viet, 42, (ns.), (2), p. 71-3, pl. 2, fig. 3; pl. 3, tig. G, 7; pl. 4, fig. 10a, b.

Chlamys antiaustralis Tate, N. Ho Wools, 1931. Trans Roy, Soc, S, Aust, 55, p. 150

Mimachlamys antiaustralis Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S, Aust. Mus, 8 (4), p. 655.

Diagnosis—Suborhicular, with ahout. 25 radiating ribs flanted by one or two

smaller ribs on each, ribs convex, wider than in C. asperrima crossed by erect

lamellae. Ears large, unequal; atterior esr of right valve with finer and more

numerous radial ribs than in asperrini.

Himensions—Length 58, height 58, inflation (both valves) 25 mtn.

Type Locality—Aldinga Bay, South Australia; Pliocene,

Location of Halotype--Tate Mus, Coall,, Univ. of Adelaide.

Observations—Examination of a series of specimens of Chiamys islandica

(Muller), type species of Chlamys, of C. axperrima Lamarck, type species of

Mimachiamys and of P. opercularis, type species of Aeguipecten with which

Thiele has synonymized Mimachionrys, sufficiently indicates that there is no sub-

generic distinction hetween Mimachlamys and Chlamys.

The broad essential differences between islandica. and tsperriaad are the

somewhat unequal sculpture between the valves in islandiva, and the marked

serration of the ventral margin, wilh corresponding interlocking of the yalves,

in asperrima, The latter is, however, a variable feature and occurs to a modified

degree in some specimens of isiandica; it is a specific character dependent upon

the degree of development of the primary tibs. In asperrima they are strongly

RD |

and sharply developed, in islandica the subsidiary ribs become larger and

separate from the primary ribs, Opercularis is a round, broader sheil with an

undulating rather than a serrated margin.

Viewed in profile the ventral margins appear thus:

Ventral margin of C. asperrima = DB PAARAAN

Ventral margin of C. opercularis =~ ANNAN SL

Ventral margin of C. islendica - - A OS a

Other features considered by Iredale to be diagnostic of Mimachlaniys are

shared by all three species, The relative convexity of the valves is slightly

variable, but the tight valve is flatter than the left in all three.

The genus Chlamys s.str. is represented in the New Zealand Tertiary by

17 species (Marwick, 1928, p. 453) ranging from probably late Oligocene, The

writer has not seen actual specimens of C. chathamensis Marwick (1928, p. 456,

figs. 18, 19), but from the figures the species appears to be generically comparable

whih asperrtia.

In the European Tertiary, the genus s.str, is represented by the Chlamys

varia series (C, varia, C. costai, C. justiana, C. jaklowectana, C, muitistriata,

C. islandica, and G. princeps (Roger, 1939, p. 150-172, pl, 27, pl, 28, figs, 1-6)

while tslandica forms a connecting ink between European and North American

faunas.

The genus s.str. is represented in the post-Miocene of the Red Sea region

by C. squamosa, C. squamaia, C. senatoria, and C. senatoria var. alexandri (Cox,

1929, p. 190-1), Iredale (1939, p. 350) has placed senatoria in Monachlamys, thus

sugresting its synonymy with Chlamys.

Material—Numerous specimens, Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 fect, 2 valves

Thebarton Bore, 11 valves and fragments Kooyonga Bore, 3 valves Adelaide,

42698 » 2 valves Muddy Creek L 6579, 1 valve South Australia. 33789 B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Western Victoria — Adelaide, South Atistralia.

Subgenus Eouicuramys Iredale, 1929

Equichlamys Iredale, 1929c, Rec, Aust. Mus, 17. (4), 9. 162.

Type species (o.d.) Pecten bifrons Lamarck

Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate)

Pecten consohrinus Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, p. 104, pl. 3, fig 6.

Pecign consobrinus Tate, Tate and Dennant, 1893. id, 17, (1), p. 224,

Perten conshrinus Tate, Harris, 1897. Cat, Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus., p. 317,

Pecten consobrinus Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903.-Rec, Geol. Sury. Vict, 1, (2), p, 133,

Pecten consabrinus Tate. N. H. Woods 1931. Trans. Ray. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150.

Equichlamys consobrinus Tate. Cotton 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 654,

Diagnosis—Subinequivalve, with 8 radial folds and about 100 rigid, unequal

riblets separated by minutely granular interspaces usually broader than the riblets,

Dimensions—I ength 85 height 85 mm. :

Type Localtity—Aldinga Bay, South Australia; Pliocene.

J,ocation of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ of Adelaide,

Material—Several fragments. Abattoirs Bore; several fragments, Tennant’s

Bore; 3 valves, Aldinga Bay, 5. Aust. L,10533, L.9919 (iopotypes) B.M, Coll,

Stratigraphical Range—South Australian Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Aldinga Bay — Adelaide, South Australia.

Subgenus Mesorerituaw Iredale, 1929

Mesopeplum Iredale, 1929. Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, (4), p, 163.

Type species (o.d.) Mesapeplum cayoli Iredale

Chlamys (Mesopeplum) incerta (T, Woods)

pl, 5, fig. 8, 9

Pecten coarclatusy (7) Sturt, 1833, Two Exp. §. Aust, 2, p 254, pl 3, fig. 13.

Pecten coarctatus (7) Tenison Woods, 1862. Geol. Obs. S. Aust, p 76.

Pecten incertus ‘Cemson Woods, 1867. Proc, Phil, Soc. Adel, for 1865, (2), p, 1, pl i, Ge, LL

Pecten polymorphuides Ziitel. Tate, 1886, Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust. 6 p, 1f3, pl, & fig. 2,

Pecten bolymorphoides Zittel. Tate and Dennant, 1893. id., 17, (1), p 224.

Pecten polymorphoides Zittel. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, 9, 316.

Pecter polymorphaides Zittel. Dennant and Kitson 1903, Ree: Geol, Surv. Viet, 1, (2), » 120.

Diagnosis—Inequivalve, left almost flat; valves with 5-7 broad folds with

numerous bifurcating radiating ridges crossed by fine waving evenly spaced

stales.

Dimensions—Length 44, height 40, inflation (both valves) 16 mm.

Type Locality—? River Murray Cliffs; ? Lower Miocene,

Lecation of Holotype—Not known at present.

Observations—This is a very variable species not previously recorded from

the Adelaide Pliocene. Four right and two left valves were obtained from Wey-

mouth's Bore. The fossil species resembles C. (M_.) caroli Tredale from New

South Wales more closely than the South Australian species €. (M.) triggt,

Cotton and Godfrey. It is easily distinguished by its almost flat left valve, its

Ke broad folds with their numerous ribs crossed by fine waving, evenly spaced

scales.

Matertal—Six valves, Weymouth’s Bore, 310-330 feet; 2 valves Bairnsdale

L341. 1 valve Muddy Creek L4815 B.M. Call.

Stratigraphical Range—l.ower Miocene to Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide, South

Australia.

Genus Lentrpreten Marwick, 1928

Lentipecten Marwick, 1928. Trans. N.Z. Inst, 58, p. 455.

Type species (0.d.) Pecten hochstetters Zittel

Lentipecten adelaidensis sp. nov.

pl. 1, fig. 13.4, b, ¢

Amusinin hochstetiers Zittel. N. TT. Woods, 193L. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 55, p. 150.

Diagnosts—Thin and fragile, compressed, both yalves smooth except for

fine microscopic growth striae externally, apical angle 105° increasing to 120°.

Ears subequal, anterior ear rayed, separated from valve by byssal notch and

somewhat scaly; posterior ear broad, obtuse, smooth,

Deseription—Right valve, juvenile. Shell of moderate size, thin, fragile,

smooth except for growth striae; equilateral except for ears, somewhat higher

than long. Apical angle 105°. Dorsal margin slightly concave, Ears unequal, broken

in the holotype, dorsal margin slightly oblique upwards, posterior ear smooth,

anterior ear tayed with five weak rays, somewhat scaly or roughened from in-

cremental ridges, with a byssal notch which docs not form a radial ridge. Hinge

margin natrow internally, intersected by resiliary pit. No ctenolium. Shell smooth

internally, musciilar impression sub-circilar,

Dimensions—Length 11°3, height 12, inflation (one valve} 1 mmm,

Paratypexs—Hinge portion of right and left valves of adults, with ears nearly

complete. The posterior ear of the tight valve is of moderate length, slightly

oblique on the dorsal edge, then rounded towards the posterior extremity with

which it makes an angle of about 120°, Anterior ear somewhat roughened and

scaly, with fairly deep byssal notch. Apical angle about 120°. Both ears of the left

valve are smooth and apparently subequal. Estimated dimensions of the artule

shell are length and height about 30 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocche.

mano of Holotype and Paratypes—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ, of Adelaide.

* 15121.

Observations—The several species previously known as Pecten hochstetteri

have had a very chequered history in both Australia and New Zealand, The

history of the synonymy of the New Zealand Miocene hockstetter: has been

clearly explained by Marwick (1928, p. 450), and in the same publication (p. 455)

Use genus Lentipecten is raised and described. P. hochstettere Zittel, as delimited

by Hutton being cited as type species, Pseudamussium hutiont Park is a synonym

of hockstelteri, Park haying overlooked Hutton’s delimitation, and the ribbed form

figured by Zittel (1864, pi. 11, fig. Sb) is Serrtpecten polemicus Marwick (1928,

p. 451). Lentipecten parki Marwick from the New Zealand Eocene is closely

related.

The Australian species, wilh exception of an early erroneous identification

by Tenison Wonds (1876, p. 2, pl. 1, fig. 5) as Pectea plewronectes Gmelin, has,

until recently, also been known as P. hockstettert. Tate (1886, p. 114) compared

Australian with New Zealand examples, redescribed the smooth species, and “with

certainty” announced the identity of the Australian shells with the New Zealand

huchstettert. Marwick (1924b, p. 320) stated on erroneous grounds following

Park and at that time rejecting Hutton and Tate, that the Australian species wae

not Aechstetlert becaiise it had two smooth valves, but that only careful com-

parison of a number of specimens would determine whether the Australian

species were P. Astitons (f¢., Lentipecten hochstetteri in the correct sense) or

not. This error has recently been revived by Crespin (1950, p. 151), who has

evidently overlooked Marwick’s later references to hochstettert and has separated

the Australian “Janjukian” shell from hechstettert on the grounds that it has

two smooth valves. There is little doubt that the Australian species victoriensts

Crespin is distinct, although not for the reason given, Although wictoriensis is

identical in general appearance with hochstetteri, it has differently shaped ears;

in the left valve of Aockstetteri the cars have a straight horizontal dorsal margin;

in tictoriensis the margin ts oblique to convex upwards and the margin is serrated

as in the right valve af L. parkt Marwick. The byssal notch in the anterior ear

of the right valve seems stronger in hochstetteri. L. hochstettert is equiyalve, while

in wictortensis the right valve is gently convex, the left almost flat.

The present species adelaidensis,. also previously identified as hkochstetteri and

still known tmastly from fragmentary material, is distinguishable from wictoriensis

by its lower apical angle (120° as against 130° in victoriensis), and by the ears.

The ears are relatively large in adelatdensis and straight dorsally, while the dis-

crepant ornament on the ears is diagnostic.

Matertal—Holotype, 2 paratypes (incomplete valves), 2 portions of para-

types, Abattoirs Bore. Adelaide. 1 fragment Tennant’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Ranye—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Genus Proreanussium de Gregorio, 1884

Propeamtssiam de Gregoria, 1884. Natural. Sicil, 3, p, 19.

(Ctenammusium. Iredale, 1929b. Rec, Aust, Mus,, 197, (4), p. 164)

Type species (monotypy) Pecten (Propeamussinm) cecilioe de Gregorio.

Propeamussium atkingoni (Johnston)

Amusium Atkinsont Johnston, 1880, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. for 1879, p, 44.

Pecten Zitteh Hutton, Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p. 115, pl 7, fir. Sac,

Amusium alkinsont Johnston, 1888. Geol. Tas, pl. 31, Ge. 15, 15a.

Peeten sitteli Hutton, Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aush, 17, (1), p. 224.

Amussium siltel Watton, Tate and Dennant, 1895. Jd, 19, (1), p. 112.

Amussium sitteli Hutton (sp.). Harris, 1897, Car. Tert, Moll, Brit, Mus, t, 9, 324

Amussium sitteli Hutton. Tate,1899. Trans. Rey. Soc. S. Aust, 23, (2), p, 272.

Amussium sittels Hutton, Dennant and Kitson, 19901. Rec, Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), p. 120.

Anmussinm atkinsont Johnston. Marwick, 1924 Rep. Aust, Ass. Ady. Sci, 16, p. 318

Ere sepersrss Nadal (Johnston). Chapman and Singleton, 1927. Prot Roy, Soc. Viet, 39,

n8.), p. 117.

Ctenamusium athinsoni (Jolmston). Cotten, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), p, 660-1,

Diagnosis—Very small, equivalve, interior of valves concave, shining, with

nine to eleyen ribs which terminate truncately near the margin. Exterior of right

valve with varying reticulate sctulpttres, leit valve concentrically striated.

Pimenstons—Length 4, height 4 mm.

Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania.

Location of Holotype—? Hobart Museum.

Observations—This species was recorded for the first time from the Adelaide

Pliocene at 330 feet in the Salisbury Bore by Cotton, 1947,

Material—-20 valves, Muddy Creek, L 9876, B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—? Oligacene to Pliocene.

Geograpltical Distribuéion—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Genus Hinnitrres Defrance, 1821

Hinnites Defrance, 1821, Dict, Sic, Nat, 21, p. 169,

Type species (s.d, Blainville, 1825) Hinnites corlesyi

Defrance = QOstrea crispa Grocchi

Hinnites corioensis McCoy

Flinnites corioensis McCoy, 1879. Prod. pal. Vict., 6, ». 31, pl. 58, fiz. 1-5 a.

FHinnites corioensis MeCoy, Tate, 1886a. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 8, p 116.

Paecten deformis Tate 1887b, id., 9, pl. 18, fig, 4,

Hinntles corioensis McCoy. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol. Sury. Viet, 1, (2), p 120.

Hinnites corinensis McCoy, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150,

Hinnites corioensis McCoy, Crespin, 1950, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 60, p. 152, pl. 15, fig. 13.

Diagnosis—Young stage regular, ovate, with valves ornamented with inter-

calating ridges; adult stages irregular, upper or left valve flatter than right valve.

Dimensions—Length of large specimen 3-5 inches, height 3-5, inflation 1 to

2 inches,

Type Locality—Corio Bay, Victoria,

Location of Holotype—Vict. Mines Dept. Coll.

Material—Six fragments, Abattoirs Bore.

Strotigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geagraphical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Family SPONDYLIDAE

Genus SponpyiLus Linné, 1758

Spondylus Linné, 1758. Syst, Nat, 1, ed. 10, p. 690.

Type species (s.d, Fleming, 1818) Spondylus gaederopus Linné

Spondylus spondyloides (Tate)

pl. 2, fig. 1

Pecten spondyloides Tate, 1882. Trans. Roy. Sov. S. Aust., 5, p. 44.

Pecten spondvloides. Tate, 1886, id, 8, p. 112, pl. 4, fie. 6. num fi. 7.

Spondyles aldingensis Tate, 1896. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 20, (1), p. 120.

Spondwus aventcola Tate, 1896. Rep. Aust. Ass. Adv, Sci, 6, p. 318 (Cnet, mul,

Spondvius arenicola Tate, 1899. Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust. 23, (2), p. 275.

Spondylus arentcola Tate, Dennant.and Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), p. 138, $43.

Shondylus avenicola Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aunst., 55, p. 150.

Shondylus xpondyloides Tate, Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 655,

Ptagnosis—Shell_ equilateral, inflated, with seven to nine primary ribs,

between each pair of which there are two or three secotidary and a variable

number of tertiary ribs, all more or less spiny:

Dimensions—Length 44, height 44, inflation (both valves) 34 mm.

Type Locality—Aldinga Bay, South Australia; Pliocene,

Lacatian of Syntypes—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. T956, T948 A-D.

Observations—Although Tate (1896, 1899) changed the specific name on

account of its inappropriateness with the transfer to the genus Spondylus, the

original spondyloides, in accordance with the Infernational Rules of Zoological

Nomenclature, must stand,

Material—One valve, Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide, South Australia.

Family LIMIDAE

Genus Linta Cuvier, 1798

Lima Cuvier, 1798. Tabl. Elem, Hist. Nat. Anim., p. 421.

Type species (tautonymy) Ostrea lima Linné

Lima bassi Tenison Woods

Lima bassit: Tenison, Woods, 1877. Pap. Roy. Soc. Tas, for 1876, p. 112,

Liwnia peas Tesnsas Woods, Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy, Soc. 5, Aust, 8, p. 117, pl. 5, fig. 8;

Linier Bases Tenison Woods, Tate and Dennant, 1893. ad. 17, (1), p. 224.

Lima bassii ‘Tenison Woods. Tate and, Dennant, 1895. id. 19, (1), p. 112.

Tima bassii Tenison Woods, Pritchard, 1896, Proc. Roy, Soc. Vict., 8, (ns), p. 128.

Lima bassi Tenison Woods. Harris 1897. Cat. ‘Tert. Mall Brit, Mus. p. 130.

Lima Oar petieon Woods, Dennant and Kirson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Sury. Vict, 1, (2),

Absirolima ‘basst. Tenison Woods. N, HT, Wouds, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 151,

Laima bassit Tenison Woods. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Stirv. Bull, 9, p. 93.

" Diagnosis—Obliquely suhovate, rayed with about 25 imbricately sqtuamose

ribs.

Dimensions—Length 22, height 27 mm.

Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania.

Location of Holotype—Hobart Museum, Tasmania.

Observations—Lima bassi belongs to Liaa s.str. It is not here imtended to

investigate Recent species beyond their bearing on the present fatina, but the

{following comments are offered upon the genera into which South Australian

tnembers of the family have been placed (Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, pp. 104-

109). Austrolima Lredale, 1929, is not separable from Lime in the generic sense

(see also Thiele, 1935, p. 811), while Mantellum (type species, designated b,

Gray, Ostrea lima is a direct synonym of Lima (see also Winckworth 1930,

p. 116).

Materivi—Eleven specimens, Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, 14820, L9840,

B.M, Coll. 1 valve, Table Cape, writer’s collection.

Stratigraphical Range—t? Oligocene to Pliocene,

is Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Aus-

tralia.

Superfamily ANOMLIACEA

Family ANOMIIDAE

Genus Anomra Litiné, 1758

‘Anomia Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, 1, ed. 10, p. 700. '

Type species (s.d. Children, 1823) Anomia ephippium Tinne

Anomia tatei Chapman and Singleton

pl. 4, fig.

Placunanamin tone Gray. Tate, 1890.2. Trans. Roy Sov. 8. Aust, 13, (2), p. 175.

Placuianovia ione Gray. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 145.

yrs tahoe Rr and Singleton, in Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1928, id. 5, (1), p. 99,

pl, Ll, ng. 7/4, bh,

Monia ione Gray, N. H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, 55, p. 150,

Anomia tatei Chapman und Singleton. Crespin, 1943. Min, Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 92.

Monia tote: Chapman and Singleton, Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 654.

Diagnosis—Surface unevenly cotivex with depressed radial threads narrower

than the interspaces, crossing concentric undulose growth lines. Trregular ovate

muscle scar heneath anterior end of chondrophore; large subcentral area with

three muscle scars.

Dimensions—Probable length of shell when complete 60, height 50, inflation

(one valye) 10 mm. Dimensions of muscular impressions, length 18, height 26 mm.

Type Locality—Grange Burn, near Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holatype—Geol. Surv. of Vict. Coll.

Observations—Cotton has listed this species with the statement “Recorded

as Placunanomia ione Gray”. It is not clear whether this is intended to apply only

to Adelaide specimens or to those recorded from numerous localities and listed

by Dennant and Kitson (1903, pp. 118, 138, 145).

Materiel—The figures hypotype and 34 other specimens, Abattoirs Bore.

One valve, juvenile, Weymouth’s Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Suborder DYSODONTA

Superfamily MYTILACEA

Family MYTILIDAE

Genus Bracuinontes Swainson, 1840

Brachidontes Swainson, 1840. Treat. Malac., p. 384,

(Brachyodontes Agassiz, 1846, Nom. Zool. Ind. Univ., p. 51.)

Type species (0,d.} Modiola sulcata Lamarck

Brachidontes hirsutus (Lamarck)

pl. 4, fig. 15

Mytilus. hirsuius Lamarck, 1819, Hist. Nat. Anim. s. Vert.,, 6, (1), p. 120,

Trichomya. hirsuta Lamarck. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans, Roy Soc. S. Aust, 5S, p. 150,

Diagnosis—Strongly curved, ornamented with fine, close, bifurcating riblets.

Dimensions—Height 60, width 26 mm.

Type Locality—“New Holland” y Recent.

Location of Holotype—Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris.

i Material—Holotype; the figured hypotype and one other valve, Abattoirs

ore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—New South Wales to Great Australian Bight.

Order ANOMALODESMACEA

Superfamily LATERNULACEA

Family MYOCIIAMIDAE

Genus Myanora Gray, 1840

Myadora Gray, 1840. Ann. and Mag, Nat. Hist., 25, p. 306.

(Ayodora Gray, 1840. Syn. Cont. Brit. Mus., ed. 42, p. 150.)

Type species (monotypy) Pandora brevis Sowerby

Myadora alea Cottan

Myadora ovata Reeve. N. H. Woods, 1931. ‘Trans. Ray. Soc. 5. Aust., 55, p, 150.

Afyadora alea Cotton, 1947. Rec. S, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p. 665, pl. 20, fig, 20, 21, 22.

Diagnosis—Subovate, sculptured with about 36 concentric ribs in 11°5 mm.,

left valve smaller, less strongly sculptured.

Dimensions—Length 19, height 15 mm.

Type Locality—Salisbury Bore, 330 feet, South Australia; Pliocene.

Location of iZolot\pe—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. T1728.

Observations-—This species is very close indeed to the Indo-Pacific M. ovata

Reeve, The only diagnostic difference lies in the number of concentric ribs which

are 30 in ovata and 36 in alea (30 according to Cotton's description). The

posterior hinge is slightly more curved in ale. M. ovata is thinner and the

external ribs tend to be more conspicuously shown on the interior of the shell.

Material—T wo valves, Abattotrs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Salishury and Abattoirs Bores, South Australia.

Myadora tenuilirata Tate

Myadora tenuilirata. Tate, 1887b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p. 174, pll 17, fig. 9a-b.

Myadora tenuilirata Tate. Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans. Roy, Soc., S. Aust, 17, (1), p- 225.

Myadora tenuilirata Tate, Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit,, Mus., (1), p, 390.

Myadora tenuilirata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), 9. 127, 139.

Myadora tenuilirata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1951. Trans, Roy. Soc, S, Aust, 55, p, 150.

Diagnosis—Elongate-oblong, left valve flat, ornamented with close-set fine,

concentric ridges crossed by waving radial threads.

Dimensions—Length 16, height 10, inflation (both valves) 3 mm,

Type Locality—Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Miocene.

Lacation of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T1197.

Material—Three valves, topotypes. L9910, B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphicol Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene. ;

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Myadora corrugata Tate

pl. 1, fig. 17

Myadora corrugata Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 9, p 175, pl, 17, fig. 11 a-t.

Myadora corrugata Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus. 1, p. 391,

Myodora corrugata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2) mp 199.

Myadora corrugata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 150.

Myadora corvugata Tate, Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust, Mus., 8, (4), p. 655,

5 Pragnoeie Tegel ovate, with about 20 distant concentric ridges. Left

valve flat.

Dimensions—Length 18, height 14:5, inflation (both valves) 4 mm,

Type Locality—Upper beds, Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T1192,

Material—Five valves, topotypes. L4809, L9911, B.M. Coll., 2 whole valves,

2 portions, Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphica] Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—-Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Section ADELOSIPHONIA

Family PANDORIDAE

Genus CLEIDOTHAERUS Stutchbury, 1830

Cleidothaerus Siutchbury, 1830.- Zool. Journ, 5, (17), p. 97.

Type species (monotypy) Aspergillim strangei Adams

Humphreyia strangei (Adams)

Asperoilium strangei Adatns, 1852, Proc, Zool. Soc. Lond, 20, p. 91, pl. 15, fig. 5.

Hamphreyia stranget Adams. Tate, 1890, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. for 1889/90, 13, n, 174.

Humphreyia strangei Adams. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), 147,

Eiakpheeyia strangei Adams and Angas. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 56,

p. 150.

Diagnosis—Tube squarely rounded, obtusely keeled; valves squarely ovate,

Material—Holotype, B.M. Coll.; portion of sheath, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—New South Wales to Hardwicke Bay, South

Austraha.

Homphreyia incerta (Chenw)

nic al incertume Chenu, 1842. Illust. Conchyl. i, Aspergillum, p. 4, pl 4, fig. 5, Sa, 4,

a 2.

Diagnosis—Tube short, rounded, variously agglomerated, disc perforated

by several apertures with tubes up to 4 mm. in length,

Type Locality—Swan River, Western Australia; Recent.

Location of Holotype—-British Museum (Natural History).

Material—Holotype, B.M. Coll., Portions of disc, Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Disiribution—South Australia.

Family CUSPIDARIIDAE

Genus Cusrrparra Nardo, 1840

Cuspidaria Nardo, 1840. Atti. Ruin. Sci. Ttal., 1, p. 175.

(Neaera Gray, 1839. 8th Rep, Brit. Ass. (Neweastle) non Robineau-Desvoidy, 1830.)

Type species (monotypy) Tellina cuspidata Olivi

Cuspidaria subrostrata Tate

Neaera subrostrata. Tate, 1887 b. Trans, Roy. Soc. $. Aust. 9, p. 177, pl. 15, fig. 2 a-b,

Cuspideria subrostrata Tate (sp.) Harris, 1897, Cat, Tect. Moll. Brit, Mus., (1), p. 389.

Cuspidaria subrostrata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), p. 127,

Cuspidaria subrosirata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 55, p. 150,

Diagnosis—Moderately conyex, anterior dorsal margin slightly convex and

sloping, posterior dorsal portion longer, less oblique, moderately concave. Orna-

mented with coarse concentric growth lines becoming lamellose at umbo and

rostral insinuation,

Dimensions—Length 18, height 9, inflation (one valve) 3°5 mm.

Type Locahtyx—Muddy Creck, Hamilton, Victoria; Lower Miocene,

Localion of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide,

Material—Three topoty pes, Muddy Creek, 14810, L9845, B.M, Coll. 4 frag-

ments Abattoirs Bore,

Stratigraphical Ranye—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Onler TELEODESMACEA

Suborder DIOGENODONTA

Superfamily ASTARTACEA

Vamily CRASSATELLIDAE

Genus EucrassaTet.a Iredale, 1924

Fucrassatella Iredale, 1924, Proc. Liun, Soc, N.S.W., 49, (3), 197, p. 203.

Type species (o.d.) Crassatella kingicola Lamarelk

Eucrassatella camura (Pritchard)

pl. 5, fig, 4

Crassalellu oblonga T. Woods. Tate, 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 13, p. i75,

Crassatellites oblonga T. Woods: Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2),

C ‘asputetiigs camurus Pritchard. 1903. Proc. Roy, Soc: Viet, 15, (2), p. 96, pL 14, fig. 5,

Crassatellites oblonga T. Woods, N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust,, 55, p. 151.

Suerossatella camura (Pritchard). Cotton, 1947. Res. S, Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 662.

Diagnosis—Size tedium, anterior very short, posterior attenuated, umbo

strong, broad, medially depressed. Slightly to deeply concave posterior to beaks,

ventral margin very slightly convex, medial portion usually straight.

Dimensions—Left valve length 54, height 41, inflation (one valve) 14 mm.

Right valve length 55, height 37, inflation (one yalve) 12 mm.

Type Locality—Grange Burn, Victoria; Pliocene.

Lacation of Syntypes—Melb, Univ. Geol. Dept., Nos. 1761-1766.

Material—Numerous valves, Hindmarsh Bore, 1 broken specimen Wev-

mouth's Bore, 1 valve, Kooyonga Bore: 8 valves upper beds Muddy Creek,

14834, L6601, L9851, B.M. Coll,

Stretigraphical Range—Ptiocene.

Geographical Distributioa—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Eucrassatella kingicoloides (Pritchard)

pl. 5, fig. 6

Grusspleliites Binorecnlniies Pritchard 1903. Proc, Roy, Sec. Vict, 15, (2), p. 94, pl. 13,

fig. 1, 2, 3, ;

Eucrassatellis kingicoloides (Pritchard), Singieton, 1945, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. 56, (2),

({ns.), p. 257, 258,

Eucrassatella Fingiculvides (Pritchard), Crespin, 1950, id. 60, (ms.), p. 153, pl. 14, fig. 6

(lapsus calamt for kingicoloides).

Diagnosis—Broadly ovate, rather inflated near umbos but becoming de-

pressed ventrally and posteriorly. Posterior dorsal margin deeply concave to a

short straight posterior truncation. Ventral margin regularly convex. Umbos

strong aud tumid. Shell shallow internally.

Dimensions—Leneth 69, height 54 inflation (both valves) 36 m1.

Type Locality—Jemmy’s Point, Kalimna, Victoria; Lower Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Melb. Univ. Geol. Dept., No. 1756.

Observations—The two species. of Fucrassatella listed above were originally

classified as H. oblonga,

Cotton (1947, p. 662) has observed that the Adelaide species is not qttite

like E. oblonga nor quite like E. camura and figures a specimen approximating

more closely to camura, Specimens from Hindmarsh Hore are -, camura, while

those from Kooyonga Bore include both camura and Ringicolotdes. In the British

Museum a tablet of specimens identified as C. oblonga. from Muddy Creek, con-

tains four examples each of what were later described as kingicoloides and camura

respectively. Both species occur logether at Jemmy’s Point and in the Dry Creek

Sands,

Moterial—One complete leit valve, 3 portions, Kooyonga Bore.

Stratigraphical Raugé—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Genus Cuna Hedley, 1902

Cuna Hedley, 1902. Mem. 4 Aust. Mus., p, 314.

Type species (o.d.) Cuno concentrica Hedley

Cuna polita (Tate)

pl. I, figs 15

Carditelia polita Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 9, p. 158, pl. 20, fig. 20, 21.

Corditella polite Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 124, 139.

Cuna pohta Tate. N. £1. Woods, 1951. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, ». 151.

Diagnosis—Trigonal, slightly inequilateral, inner ventral margin crenulate.

Dimenstons—Length 2:5, height 2°5 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; ? Miocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide.

Material—Three valyes. Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Cuna aporema Cotton

Cuna aporema Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 6f2.

Diagnosis-——Subtrigonal, higher than long, smooth except for growth striae,

inner ventral margin without crenulations.

Dimensions—Length 4°25, height 5 mm.

Type Locality—Bore 41, 405 feet-407 feet: Pliocene.

Location. of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., P8407.

Material—One specimen, Tennant’s Bore,

Stratigraphical. Range—Dry Creck Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide Plains.

al)

Superfamily CARDITACLA

Family CARDITIDAE

Genius Carpita Bruguiére, 1792

Cardita Bruguiére, 1792, Ency. Meth. Vers. (1), p. 401. '

Type species (sd. Fleming, 1818) Cardita variegate Bruguiére.

Cardita compta (Tate)

pl. 2, fig. 2

Mytilicardia conipta Tate, 1886, Trans, Roy. Soc, 5. Aust., 8, p. 149, pi. 12, fig. 2.

Mytilicordia compta Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol, Surv. Vact., 1, (2), 9. 123,

138.

Cardita compta Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy, Soc S, Aust, 55, p, 151,

Cerdita compia (Tate). Cotton, 1947. Rec, S. Aust, Mus., 8, (4), p, 654,

Diagnosis -— Posterior side narfow; 15 narrow scaly ribs consisting of 7

anterior ribs, 4 primary ribs, then 2 narrow posterior ribs followed by 2 com-

pressed elevated ribs.

Dimensions—Length 29, greatest height 17, height at umbo 12 mm.

Type Lacality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll,, Univ, of Adelaide.

Matepial—Four valves. Weymouth’s Bore, 2 valves, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Cheltenhamian”™ to Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Disiribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Cardita subdeceptiva sp. nov.

pl, 4, fig. 14

Cardita preissi Menke. Tate. 1890.a. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 13, p. 175,

Curdita preissi Menke. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, {2}, p 146.

Cardttu pretsst Menke. N. H. Woods, #931. Tratis, Roy. Suc. S. Aust. 55, p 151-

Cardita compta Tate. Cotton 1947. Rec. ‘SS. Aust. Mus, 8, (4), p. 663,

Diagnosis—A. fairly large Cardita rectangularly ovate, moderately convex,

with 14 radial costae, 3 on the depressed posterior area, followed by 4 larger

and approximately equal costae, then 7 costae gradually descending in size

towards the anterior border. Interspaces wide, deep with steep sides; on the

anterior portion the ribs are more or less nodylose, hut the nodules fade out

on the dith rib from the posterior border, Kihs and interspaces crossed by

frequent concentric growth lamellae.

Description of Holotype—Shell rectangularly ovate, solid, fairly thick,

umbones slightly convex incurved, prosogyrate, situated at about one-sixteenth

from the anterior border, Posterior rnargin elongate, posterior side somewhat

expanded towards the ventral border but flattened in a long triangular area below

the dorsal margin. Surface sculptured with 14 axial costae, of which there are

3 narrow costae in the depressed posterior area, follawed by 4 larger approxt-

mately equal costae in the umbo-post-véntral area, then 7 gradually decreasing

in size towards the anterior margin. Interspaces decp, wide, with steep sides;

sibs more or less nodulose in the anterior portion, but nodules gradually becoming

obsolete on about the fifth rib from the posterior border; tibs and interspaces

crossed by frequent, crowded, concentric growth striae.

Inner margin of shell coarsely crenulate in conformity with the external

ribs, hinge oblique to the ventral margin, damaged in the holotype.

Dimensions—Length 32, height 24, inflation (one valve) 12 min.

Type Localitty—Dry Creek Bore, Adelaide District; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, F 15122.

Observations—This species very closely resembles Cardita incrassata Sowerby

= C_ preissi Menke) with which it was formerly identified. However, C, incras-

sata has 16 radial costae wider than the interspaces which are narrower than those

of C. subdeceptiva. C, subdecepltiva is broader than GC. morasseta. Tt has fewer

costae than the Jemmy’s Point species C, kalimnae (Pritchard) with 19 ribs of

which the posterior are scaly.

Material—Holotype and five paratypes, Dry Creek Bore.

Stratigraphcal Range—-Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Dry Creek, Croydon, and Abattoirs Bores, South

Austriala.

Genus GLans Megerle, 1811

Glans Megerle, 1811. Ges Nat. Fr. Berlin, Mag. 5, (1), p 68.

Type species (monotypy) Glons trapezia = Venus trapezia Linné

Glats spinulosa (Tate)

pl. 4, fig. 1

Cardita spinulosa Tate, 1886, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, p. 153, pl. 2, fig. 3,

Cardita spinulosa Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 123, 139.

Venericardia spinulosa Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 55, p. 151.

Diagnosis—A rotund-cordate Glans with high, tumid umbo; sculptured with

22 prominent, narrow, spinose ribs.

Dimensions—Length 33, height 31, length of anterior side 9, inflation (both

valves) 36 mm.

Type Locality—Blue clays, Schnapper Point, Victoria.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ, of Adelaide.

Observations—The hinge of sptnulosa is that of Glans. The figured hypotype

has the prominent laterally compressed costae of typical spinulosa, but the spinose

character disappears ventrally and the costae become lamellose. This, according

to Chapman and Crespin (1933, p. 68) is the principal diagnostic feature of their

variety dennanit described below as a separate species. In Adelaide specimens at

feast the degree of platiness of the adult sculpture does not appear to be diag-

nostic of spinulosa, although in dennanti the ribs are always lamellose towards

the margin. The two species are distinct in shape; spinulosa is more inflated,

shorter, with more prominent and tumid umbo. The costae of spinulosa are very

prominent and in the hypotype the interspaces, where they are not lamellose, are

finely shagreened.

Material—Hypotype, Abaitoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Glans dennanti (Chapman and Crespin)

pl. 2, fig, 6

Verericardia spinitlosa (Tate) var. dennanti Chapman and Crespin 1933. Trans. Roy. Sor,

Vict. 46, (1), p. 68, pl. 5, fig. 5, 6.

Veneritestia sfinulosa. var. dennanfi Chapman and Crespin, 1943, Min. Res, Surv. Bull., 9,

p. *

Diagnoses—A Glans, rectangularly ovate, not inflated, with 23 radial costae

bearing imbricating, scarcely-elevated spines at regular intervals. Towards the

yetitral margin the spines are less regularly disposed and the ribs become lamellose,

Anterior margin short and geritly rounded, post dorsal margin oblique then

descending at an angle of 120° before curving to the ventral border, Posterior

area flattened.

Dimensions—Length 24, height 19-5, inflation (ome valve) 8 mm,

Type Locality—(Tlolotype) Old Bunga-road, east of No. 1 bore, Lakes

Entrance, East Gippsland, Victoria.

Location of Holofype—Commonwealth Collection, Canberra, No. 53.

Loculity af Hypotype—Wevmouth’s Bore, Adelaide, 310-330 fect.

Lecition of Hypotype—S, Aust. Mines Dept. Coll,

Observations—Originally described as a variety of spinulosa this ts a distinct

species from spiulosa, from which it differs in shape, inflation and sculpture.

The dentition is that of Glans s.str, (Chavan, 1941, p, 99); the right hinge

determinable from a broken specimen orily having a weak AT, a weak 3a, a very

strong 3b and a weal PIT. ;

Shotld the species described by Tate and Basedow, 1902, as Carditu dennants

prove also to be a Glans, Chaprnan and Crespin’s species will need a new name,

Pending examination of the hinge of “Cardtic” dennanti to locate the species

more acctirately the name of the present species is not altered.

Material—The hypotype and 3 left valves, portion of 1 right valve, Wey-

mouth's Bore, Adelaide.

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Genus PLevROMERrs Conrad, 1867

Pleuromerisy Conrad, 1867a, Amer. Jour. Conch, 3, p, 12,

Type species (monotypy) Cardita tridentata Conrail,

Pleuromeris subpecten =p. noy

pl. 2, fig. 3

Diagnosis—A stall Pleuromeris, triangularly ovate, somewhat depressed,

with 17 tadial costae, equal to interspaccs, bearing mtumerous elongated oval

granules.

Description of Ilolotvpe—Left valve. Shell triangularly ovate, moderately

depressed but evenly convex. Umbo slightly elevated acute, at about two-tilihs

from anterior border, moderately incuryed and prosogyrate. Sculpture of 17

sharply defined radial costae with straight sides, abotit equal to the interspaces

bearing numerous (about 5 per mm.) elongate-oval granules crossing the whole

of the rib and projecting over the interspaces.

Hinge fairly narrow, with a long F Il, a long and well-developed 4b, a

small but high 2 and a small A IL, the pit between 4b and 2 is small and narrowly

triangular. Margin of valye crenulate, corresponding to external ribs.

Dimensions—Length 5°3, height 4-8, inflation (one valve) 1°6 mim,

Type Locality—Weymouth’s Bore 310'-330’.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. F 15125.

Paratype—Right valve. Like the holotype, hinge with AL weak, 3b promi-

nent and triangular, with a broad base, PTT small,

Dimensions—Length 5°2, height 4-7, inflation (one valve) 1-4 mm,

Observations—Pleurameris subpecten differs from P, pecten principally in

the number of radial costae, subpecten having 17, pecten 22, The posterior slope

in subpecten is not flattened and the shell is evenly convex throughout.

Material—Holotype, paratype, 5 topotypes, Wevmouth’s Bore. 18 specimens

Hindmarsh More.

Stratigraphical Ranye -Tyry Creek Sands.

Geographical Mistribution —(lindmarsh and Weymouth's Borers, Adelaide.

Pleuromeris pecten (Tate)

Cardita pecten Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy, Soc. 5. Aust. 8, p. 151, pl. 2, fig. 11.

Cardita pecten Tate. Dennant and Kitson. 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Viet., 1, (2), p. 139,

Menericaria pecten. Tate. N, TT, Woods, 1931- Trans. Roy, ‘Soe. S. Aust, 55, p. 151.

Fenertcardia pectes Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus,, 8 (4), p. 654.

Liagnosis—A very stall Pleuroweris, ovately triangular, depressed, with

22 compressed crenately granose ribs.

Original Nescription—Shell oyately triangular, transverse, rather depressed,

regularly convex, except tlie flattened posterior slope; tmbones small, acute,

antemedian, directed forwards; anterior margin of valves coarsely crenulated.

Surface ornamented with 22 narrow, compressed, crenately-granose, radial ribs;

interspaces flat, wider than the ribs.

Dimenstons—Length 6°5, width 2, length from umbo to posterior angle 6°5,

inflation (both valves) 3 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hanzilton, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide.

Material—Your valves Weymoauth’s Bore, 6 valves Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Renge—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Mnddy Creek, Victoria — Adelaide, South Aus-

tralia.

Pleuromeris trigonalis (Tate)

pl. 2, fig. 4

Cardita irigonalis Tate, 1886. Tratis. Roy: Soc. 'S. Aust, 8, p. 151, nl. 2, fg. 1.

Curditfa frigonalis Tate. Denoant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Sury. Viet, 1, (2), p. 123, 139.

Venericardia trigonalis Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 655,

Diagnosis—Triangular, with 15 nodulose ribs,

_ Original Deseription—Shell triangular, moderately convex, umbones elevated,

slightly oblique incurved, anterior posterior margin inclined, making with the

slightly arched ventral margin a roundly acute angle; anterior side rounded;

dorsally excavated. Surface ornamented with 15 crenately-nodalose, rounded,

radiating ribs, the interspaces wider than the ribs with transverse thick Jirae.

Inner margin of valves coarsely crenulated,

Dimensions—Length 7, height 6°5 mm.

Type Locality—Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay; Pliocene, —

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ. of Adelaide.

Material—Four valves, Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—(?) Miocene; Pliocene of South Australia.

Geographical Distribwtion—(?) Gippsland, Victoria —- Adelaide, South

Australia

Genus CyctocArpra Conrad, 1867

Cyelocardia Conrad, 1867 b. Amer, Journ, Conch., 3, p. 191.

Type species (monotypy) Cyclocardia borealis Conrad

Subgentis ScaLaricarpDIta Sacco, 1899

Scealaricordita Sacco, 1899, Moll. Terr, Terz. Piem., 27, p. 22.

Type species (monotypy) Venericardia scalaris Sowerby

Cyclocardia (Scalaricardita) subcompacta Chapman and Crespin

pl, 2, fig. 5, &

Penevicardia subcompacta Chapman and Crespin, 1928. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 5, (1}, p 102,

pl. 5, fig. 21; pl. 11, fig. 80

Femericardia subcompacta Chapman and Crespin, N, H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc.

S. Aust, 55, p. 151.

Veenesiitcia subcompacta Chapman and Crespin. Crespin, 1943, Min, Res. Surv. Bull. 9,

Diagnosis—Subttigonal, about as high as long, with 25 ovately beaded ribs.

In the juvenile the radial sculpture is obsolete in the umbonal area and the con-

centric striae are produced anteriorly.

Dimensions—Length 2°5, height 3-2 mm.

Type Locality—Sorrento Bore, Mornington Peninsula, 605 ft: Lower

Pliacene,

Location of Holotype—Geol, Sutv. Vict. Coll,

Material—T wo figured hypotypes and 23 valves, Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—“Mitchellian” to Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distvibutton—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Subgenus AucrureLurns Chavan, 1951

Arctirellina Chavan, 1951, Compt. rend, Soc, Geol., France, 12, p, 210.

(Arcturella Chavan, 1941, Journ, de Conch., 84, (1), p, 100 mom Sars, 1897.)

Type species (0.d.) Menericardia asperula Deshayes

Cyclocardia (Arcturellina) hindmarshensis sp. nov.

pl. 2, fig. 9

Lyagnosis—A small Arcturcllina, mflated, subtrigonal, with 19 radial costae

carrying in the earlier stages oval-shaped imbricating tubercles, and in the latter

stages icregular imbricating growth lamellae crossing ribs and interspaces with-

out interuption.

Desciption of Holotype—Right valve, Shell fairly small, thick solid, sub-

trigonal, inflated. Utibo subcetitral, high, incurved, prosogyrate, smooth at tip.

Sculpture of 19 radial costae, equal to the interspaces, bearing in the early stages

oval tubercles almost completely crossing the costae and in the later stages

irregular imbricating prowth lamellae crossing ribs and interspaces without

interruption. Lunule broad, cordate, smooth except for prowth striae, Escutcheon

long and smooth, well marked. Hinge very heavy, strongly curved; 3a well

developed, 3b strong; P lil damaged in holotype, otherwise high, Inner margin

heavy, ctenulate.

Dimensions—Length 8°5, height 9, inflation (one valve) 3-5 mm,

Paratype—Left valve, of which hinge is figured. Dentition PIL (weak),

4b and 2 strong and projecting, AIT fairly high,

Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore 450-487 feet; Pliocene-

serene of Holatype and Puratype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide.

F .

Observations—The specics hindmarshensis is close to C, (4.) gippslandica

(Chapman and Crespin). It is, however, a smaller shelf with a different sculp-

ture, The tibs in gippslandica ate beaded in the early and intermediate stages and

lamellose in the later stages. At no stage has gippslandica the imbricating oval

tubercles of hindmorshensts.

The subgenus Arcturellina to which hindmarshensis and peridonea, below,

belong is represented in the European Eocene and Paleocene by the species (all

of Deshayes asperula (Lutetian) atzensis (Montian and Cuisian), prevosti (Cui-

sian), pulchra (Cuisian), ambigua (Lutetian) and serrulata (Lutetian). (Chavan

1941, p. 100). It is the Indo-Pacific subgenus of the otherwise typically American

Cyclocardia and has apparently one surviyor in “Venericardia’ bimaculata Des-

hayes in Tasmania at the present day. (Chavan, 1949, p. 512),

Material—Holotype, paratype, and one topotype, [lindmarsh Bore, four

specimens Weymouth's Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribwtion—Hindmarsh and Weymouth's Rores, Adetfaide.

Cyclocardia (Arcturellina} peridonea sp. nov.

pl. 2, fiz. 7

Diagnosis—Triangularly ovate, not inflated, stall, fairly solid, with 18 ribs

bearing imbricaling scales.

Description of Holotype—Lett valve. Shell small, fairly solid, triangularly

ovate. Umbo moderately inflated, directed anteriorly, incurved, fairly prominent.

Dorsal margin straight, and sloping posteriorly, somewhat excavate and then

more steeply sloping anteriorly. Both posterior and anterior margins rounded;

anterior narrower and slightly directed dorsally while posterior margin is rounded

with a direction towards the ventral margin. Ventral margin deeply curved.

Surface sculptured with 18 radiating ribs, a little broader than interspaccs,

covered with narrow imbricating scales which tend to become platy towards the

ventral margin, Interspaces flat with fine and thin lamellae approximately corre-

sponding to the scales on the ribs. Internal ventral margin coarsely crenulated.

Hinge with teeth 4b and 2 widely divergent. Lunule impressed, smooth, elongate-

cordate.

Dimensions—Length 8-5, height 8-0, inflation (one valve) 2:8 mm.

Type Locality-~Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F 15125.

Observations—C, peridonea is closest to C. gippslandica; it has fewer ribs,

which are imbricate-scaly rather than tuberculate. The shell is smaller and less

produced towards the umbo, which lacks the prominence of gippslandica.

Material—Holotype, paratype, 9 topotypes Hindmarsh Bore; 24 valves Wey-

mouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Family CONDYLOCARDIIDAE

Genus Conpvrnocarpta Bernard, 1897

Condylocardia Bernard, 1897. Journ. de Conch. 44, (3), p. 169,

Type species (0.d.) Condylocardia sanchipauli Bernard

Condylocardia tenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel

pl. 1, fig. 18, 19

Cc ondylccaries fenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel, 1914. Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict, 26, (1),

2), 30

Condylocardia. kemuatetistag Chapman and Gabriel. Chapman, 1916. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict.

1: ), Pp. ?

Condylocardia tenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel, Chapman, Crespin, and Keble, 1928, Rec.

Geol. Sury. Vict, 5, (1), p. 156. ;

Condylocardia tenuicostaeé Chapman and Gabriel. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull,

9, p. 92.

Diagnosis—Broadly triangularly ovate, sculpture of about 36 marrow de-

pressed riblets dying out in the umbonal area and crossed by concentric prowth

lines.

Dimensions—Holotype (left valve), length 2°15, height 1-77 mm-

Type Locality—Bore No. 10, 310-320 feet, Mallee Bores near Ouyen, north-

west Victoria,

Lecation of Holotype—Geol, Surv. Vict. Coll.

Material—One yalve, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Superfamily ISOCARDIACEA

Family SPORTELLIDAE

Genus SportetLa Deshayes, 1858

Stortella Destayes, 1858, Anim, s. Vert. Bassin de Paris, 1, p, 593.

Type species (c.d.) Psammobia dubia Defrance

Sportella jubata Hedley

pl. 1, fig. 20

Sportella jubata Hedley, 1909, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 34, (3), p. 428, pl. 37, fig. 22-23.

Sportella jubute Hedley. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 55, p. 151.

Diagnoses—Subthomboidal, longer than high, sculpture of fine, radiating

threads increasing by intercalation. The lateral threads increase rapidly and

diverge sharply at the umbho-post-ventral and antero-ventral angle and curve

<oticavely towards the dorsal margin.

Dimensions—Length 8-5, height 6, inflation (one valve) 2 mm,

Type Locality—Ilope Islands, North Queensland, 5-10 fathoms; Recent.

Location of Holatype—Australian Museum, Sydney.

Observations—The identification of this shell, described from North Queens-

land, is surprising. There are 14 specimens from the Hindmarsh Bore alone

agreeing in all respects with the description of the type; dimensions of the

average adult shell are the same as those of the type. One adult attained the

following dimensions: Length 12, height 8-1, inflation (one valve) 2°5 mm.

Material—Fourteen valves Hindmarsh Bore, 2 valves Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District (Pliocene), North Queensland

(Recent).

Superfamily CHAMACEA

Family CHAMIDAE

Genus CHama Linné, 1758

Chama Linné, 1758. Syst. Nat, 1, ed. 10, p, 691,

Type species (s.d. Fleming, 1818) Chana lazarus Linné

Chama lamellifera Tenison-\W oods

Chama lamellifera. Tenison-Woods. 1877. Proc. Roy, Soc. Tas. for 1876, p. 114.

Chung daa Soe Tenison-Wonds. Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc... Anst., 9, p, 149, pi, 14,

ig. Sab.

Chama, jemellifora Tenison-Woods Tate and Dennant, 1893. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 17,

Ww 2ec.

Chama lamellifera Tenison-Woods, Pritchard, 1897. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet: 8, (ns), p. 133.

Chama lomellifera Tenison-Woods. Harris, 1897. Cat. ert. Moll. rit. Mus., 1, p, 369,

Chama lamellifera T. Woods, Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 125.

Chama lamellifera 'T, Woods. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Ray, Soc, S. Aust, 55, p. 151.

Diagnosis—Surface of both valves sculptured with distant, thin, irregular,

sometimes projecting lamellae. Lamellae finely radiately ridged and striated;

interspaces concentrically striated.

Dimensions—Length 24, height 22, inflation (both valves) 18 mm.

Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania.

Location of Holotwpe—Hobart Museum, Tasmania.

Material—Seven valves, Lower Heds, Muddy Creek, Victoria. B.M. Coll,

3 valves, Abattoirs Bore (? from pre-Pliocene strata).

Stratigraphical Range—Not definitely established.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Superfamily T.UCINACEA

Family |UCINIDAE

Genus Myrtea Turton, 1822

Myrtea Turton, 1822, Conch, Insul. Brit, p, 15, 133,

Type species (monotypy) Menus spinifera Motitagu

Myrtea fabuloides (Tate)

pl. 2, fig. 16

Lucina fabuloides Tafe, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 8, pl 12, fig, 5,

Lucina fabuloides Tate, 1887 b. ad, 9, p. 145.

me faintaes Tate, Detmuynt und Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 126,

Lucinu fubuloides Tate. N. HW. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., $5, ». 151.

Epicodgkia fubtloides Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus, 8 (4), p. 655,

Diagnosis—Oblong-ovate, compressed, surface with about 16 erect thin

lamellae. Hinge with two small cardinal teeth in right valve, one cardinal and

two distant laterals in left valve,

Dimensions—Length 9, height 7 mm.

Type Locality—Oyster beds, Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Uniy. of Adelaide,

Observations—M, fabuloides is widely distributed in small numbers in the

Dry Creek Sands. It is recorded in all bores under present consideration, from

the Dry Creek Bore, and by Cotton (1947, p. 655),

Material—Three yalves Weymouth's Bore, 3 valves Abattoirs Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Murray River—Adelaide, Sowth Australia.

Genus Mowritinora Iredale, 1930

Monitilora Tredale, 1930, Rec, Aust, Mus, 17, (9), p 390,

Type species (0.d.) Lucia ramsayt Smith

Subgenus MonitTivora s.str.

Monitilora (Monitilora) idonea sp, nov.

pl. 3, fig. 1, 2

Diagnosis—Rotund, subequilateral, umbo subcentral, prominent, incurved ;

sculpture of fine, sharp, concentric lirae, narrower than interspaces between which

are numerous fine radials weaker than concentrics, not always fegular and com-

pletely crossing the interspaces but sometimes merely producing the appearance

of fine pittings, Concentrics generally, but not always, show impresston of junction

with radials and are then minutely scalloped. Lunule rather sniall, elongate-

cordate, stnooth, deep.

Description of Holotype—Left valve. Shell thin, of moderate size for the

genus, convex, subcircular, subequilateral. Posterior dorsal margin genily sloping,

anterior dorsal margin slightly excavate near the umbo and gently oblique

towards the anterior border which is, like the posterior border, slightly truncate.

Ventral margin broadly rounded. Umbo subcentral, prominent, slightly inflated

and incurved, dirécted anteriorly. Lunule fairly smail, elongate-cordate, stnooth,

deep. Sculpture of numerous, fine, sharp concentric lirae, 5 per mm., narrower

than interspaces between which are numerous fine radials weaker than the con-

centrics, not always regular and completely crossing the interspaces, but short

and irregular, giving the appearance of fine pittings. Tunction of radials and

cancentrics nearly always indicated by scalloping of the concentrics. Hinge teeth

obsolete in left valve. Ligament groove long, internal. Internal ventral margin

smooth, area inside pallial line chalky and inclined to be pitted. Anterior adductor

scar elongate-oval, pointed dorsally, posterior scar shorter and broader and

pointed at both ends, Pallial line simple.

Dimensions—Length 12, height 11, inflation (one yalye) 3 mm.

Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet: Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus: Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F 15126,

Observations—Compared with the type species M. ramsayi (Smith) tdonea

is a smaller shell, with more valid radials and sharper concentrics, The shell is

more evenly rounded posteriorly. The umbho is more prominent and more

incurved; the lunule is deeper. Internally, the area inside the pallial line is not

so punctate as in ramsayi. The species is also very similar to M. elegans (De-

irance) from the European Eocene, from which it differs principally in shape

and rotundity. ‘There is no doubt that all three species are congenerie.

Materiol—Holotype and 5 topotypes, left valves, Hindmarsh Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Hindmarsh Bore, Adelaide.

Subgenus Proraetiora Iredale, 1930

Praphetilora Iredale, 1930. Mem. Qk Mus., 10, (1), p. 75.

Type species (monotypy) Prophetilora arizely. Iredale

Monitilora (Prophetilora) chavani sp. nov.

_ 2, fig. 13

Lacing Crglanmordic Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Sor, S Aust, 55, p 15 (mom

ate).

Diggnosis—Quadrately orbicular, posterior margin slightly truncated, sur-

face sculptured with numerous regular concentric lirae, narrower than inter-

spaces, slightly retroflexed anteriorly, Inierspaces with imconspicuoug and some-

what irregular radial grooves. Hinge edentulous.

Deseription of Holotype (vight valve)—Shell of medium size, quadrately

orbieular, anteriorly excavate beneath the umbo and rounded; slightly truncated

posteriorly. Umbo small, only slightly incutved, strongly directed anteriorly,

approximate. Lunule short, cordate, deeply impressed and transgressing the hinge

area, Hinge edentulous, ligament long, internal, deeply inipressed; asiterior

muscle scar very long, within the pallial line and parallel to it for two-thirds its

length; posterior scar elongate ovate, pointed at each end, Pallial line entire,

Interior inside pallial line chalky, roughened. Pallial line entire. Internal ventral

margin smooth, Shell externally sculptured with fine regular concentric lirat

3 per mm., slightly retroflexed anteriorly, narrower than interspaces, Interspaces

with fine conspicuous and somewhat irregular radials, visible only under magnif-

cation; two straight umbo-posterior radial grooves marking the posterior wing

and two tather deeper grooves, concave dorsally, on the anterior wing,

Dimensions—Length 18°5, height 17, inflation (one valve) 4 mm.

Paratype (left valve)—Hinge edentulous, lunule very deep, ligament deep.

Dimensions—Length 13, height 11+5, inflation (one valve) 2°5 mm.

Type Locality—Ahattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F 15127.

Ohservations—The nearest relative to this species is the Recent M, (P.)

arizele Iredale, trom North Queensland, The fossil species is more regularly

and strongly sculptured and the posterior radiaf grooves are less strong,

Material—Holotype, 2 paratypes,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Nistribulion—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide.

Genus Eomirt1A Cossmann, 1912

Eomiliha Cossmann, 1912. Act. Soc. Linn, Bordeaux, 66, p. 269,

Type species (o.d.) Lucina contorta Defrance

Subgenus Granoruciwa Cossmann, 1904

Gibbelucina Cossmann, 1904. Bull. Soc. Geol. Normandie, 23, p, 13,

Type species (monotypy) Lucing callosa Lamarck

Eomiltha (Gibbolucina) salebrosa (N. H. Wools)

pl, 6, fix 3

Codakia salebrosa N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc S. Aust, 55, p. 149, pl. 8 fig. 4, 5.

Epicodakia salebrosa. (Hooper Woods), Cotton, 1947, Rec. S, Aust, Mus, 8 (4), p. 603.

Diagnosis—Thick, rude, irregular, sculptured with concentric striae and

itregular growth lines hecoming lamellose near ventral margin, Hinge teeth

obsolete.

Dimensions—T ength 27:5, height 26-7 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoits Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of ITolotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Uniy, of Adelaide.

Observations—This species was described from the Abattoirs Bore, and

although Cotton has since recorded it, the writer has not seen it in any other

boring. [t is a typical Gibbolucinu, yery like the species G. ellipsotdalis from the

European Eocene, The appearance of the European genus in the Australian

Pliocene is worthy of some note, but there appears to be considerable similarity

between the lucinid fauna of the European Eocene and of the Adelaide Pliocene.

Material—Three topotypes, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creck Sands.

Gevgraphical Distribution-—Adelaide District.

~ Eomiltha (Gibbolucina) confirmans sp, nov.

pl. 2, fg. 11.

Diagnosis—A small Gibbolicina, moderately thick and rough, subglobose with

prominent elevated umbo, Sculpture of concentric ridges of trregular shape with

prominent growth folds near the ventral margin. Hinge rather coarse with a

central pit bordered by the posterior cardinal 4 overhanging the weaker median

2b in the left valve. Right valve with an oblique 3b and an anterior lateral AL

Posterior border rounded, anterior somewhat effuse,

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Sheil small, subglobose, moderately

thick and rough. Umbo prominent, elevated, well-incurved and prosogyrate.

Sculpture of concentric ridges about 6 per mm. somewhat irregular and crowding

near the ventral margin. Growth folds conspicuous. Lunule small and cordate,

deep, smooth, bounded by a ridge. Hinge fairly thick with the lunule transgress-

ing the area and attaching to the oblique 3b above, leaving a triangular pit

beneath. Anterior lateral AI well developed and conspicuous, Interior of walve

striate and secondarily thickened. Anterior adductor of moderate length, con-

siderably narrower in the ventral portion which is inside and separated trom the

pallial line, Posterior adductor elongate-ovate, pointed dorsally, Valve much more

convex inside the pallial line and flattening out between the pallial line and the

ventral border. Margin plain,

Dimensions—Length 9 (estimated unbroken 10), height 9, inflation (one

valye) 3 mm,

Paratype—Juvenile, left valve, somewhat doubtiully belonging to the same

species. Shell with anterior margin complete, expanded towards the dorsal margin,

posterior margin slightly broken in this specimen also. Lunule deep, transgressing

the hinge, Hinge with a small median cardinal 2b and a longer posterior cardinal

4 overhanging the 2b.

Dimensions—Leneth 8, height 7, inflation (one valve) 2 mm,

Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll. F 15128.

Observations—The presence of the second species of Gibbolucina tn the

fauna confirms the existence of the genus in the Australian Pliocene, It is a

small Gibbolucina, nearest to the type species callosa and considerably less rude

than salebrosa,

Material—Holotype and paratype, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Hindmarsh Bore, Adelaide.

Gentis Linca de Gregorio, 1885

Linga de Greporio, 1885. Bull. Soc. Malac. Ital., 10, p. 217.

Type spevies (s.d. Sacco, 1901) Lucina cofumbelia Lamarck

Subgenus Betitucrna Dall, 1901

Bellucina Dall, 1901. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus, 23, p. 806,

Type species (0.d.} Parvilucine eucosinia Dall,

Linga (Bellucina) nuciformis {Tate)

pl. 2, fig, #4, 15

Lucina nuciformis Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 8, pl. \2, fig. 10,

Lucina nuctformis Tate, 1887. id. 9, p, 144,

Lucina muciformis Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. 385-

Lucina nuciformis Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv., Vict, 1, (2), p. 139, 147.

Lucing nuciformis Tate, N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust. 55, p. 151.

Epicodakia nucifornis. Tate. Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p, 655,

* Diagnosis—Shell small, globose, very thick, sculptured with subacute con-

centric ridges, about 2 per mm., the interspaces sometimes crossed with fine

radials. Margins of valves strongly crenulated.

Dimensions—Length 9, height 9, section (beth valves) 8 mm.

Type Locality—Oyster beds, Blanche Pomt, Aldinga Bay; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll,, Univ. of Adelaide.

Observations—Together with Callucina balcombica, nuciformis is the most

commonly occurring lucinid in the Dry Creek Sands. It is a typical Bellucina

compatable with the European Eocent B. ligata. and with the Indo-Pacific type

species eticosptia Dall, It is not an Epicodakia,

Material—Five valves, Weyniouth’s Bore, 5 valves Abattoirs Bore, 5 yalves

Hindmarsh Bore. Six topotypes L 9871. B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range-—South Australian Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Aldinga and Adelaide, South Australia,

Genus Catiucrna Dall, 1901

Culltcina Dall, 1901. Proc. U.S, Nat. Mus., 23, p. 806.

Type species (0.d.) Lucitna radians Conrad

Callucina (s.1.) balcombica (Cossman)

pl, 2, fig. 10

Lucinn afinis Tato, 1887 b. Tratis, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 9, p. 143, pl 18, fig. 11.

Lucina afinis Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv, Viet, 1, (2), p, 126, 139, 14?.

Liteina balcombica (nom. mut. for affinis preoccupied) Cossmamn, 1912. Rey, Crit, de Paleo-

2ool,, 16, (3), p. 214.

Lucina balcombica Cossmann, Finlay, 1927. Trans. N.Z. Tnst., 57, p. 529.

Lucin uffinis Tate. N, H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 151,

Epicodakia afinty Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec. 5. Aust, Mus. 8, (4), p. 654.

Diagnosis—Roundly subquadrate, sculptured with numetous fine, concentric

threads about 8 per mm. Internal margin finely crenulate.

Dimensions—Length 6, height 5-5, inflation (left valve) 1-75 mm.

Type Localitty—Oyster beds, N.W. Bend, River Murray; Pliocene,

Location af Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide.

Observations—This species is of frequent occurrence in the borings, It is

not an Lpicodakia. The left valve has two divergent cardinal teeth, one (4b)

generally close to the timbo and coincident with the nymph, the other (2) lower

and sometimes sunken, laterals (PII and AIL) both weak or absent. Right

valve with a relatively strong high cardinal tonth (3b) channelled medially,

Laterals PI and AI weak to absent. The marginal crenulations are very fine

and narrow, on the margin only and scarcely extending on to the internal layer

of the shell. External sculpture is finely concetitric, with no suggestion of radials,

The species belongs to a group of Caillucina typified by “Lucina” albella ot

the French Eocene.

Materiai—Ten valves Weymouth's Rore, 9 yalves Ilindmarsh Rote.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Genus GonIMyRTRA Marwick, 1929

Gommyrtea Marwick 1929, Trans. N.Z. Tnst,, $9, p, 912.

Type species (0.d.) Loripes coucinia Hutton

Gonimyrtea salisburyensis sp. nov.

pl. 2, fig. 12

Loripes tetevica Reeve. N..H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. 55, p. 151.

Diagnosis—Shell small, thin, yuadrately orbicular, truncate posteriorly,

rounded anteriorly, Sculpture of fine concentric striae and microscopic irregular

radials. Obsolete curved radial sulci visible in oblique light.

Description of Holotype (left yalve)—Shell small, thin, quadrately orbicular ;

posterior margin truncate, almost vertical, anterior margin trowundly produced.

Post-dorsal margin straight, sloping; anterior-dorsal MMITEIN excavate tear umbe,

then almost horizontal, Ventral margin roundly curving; interior obscurely

crenaté. Sculpture of very fine and irregular growth striae between which are

very faint and fine crowded concentric threads visible only under magnification

crossed by microscopic somewhat irregular and bilurcating radial matkings, In

addition to the microscopic orhament, under strong light curved radii which are

concave anteriorly are visible. From the umbo Lo the postventral margin there is a

shallow and obsolete radial sulcus, Interior of valve striate. Hinge somewhat

natrow, with two diverging cardinal teeth with a triangular pit between, laterals

absent. Ligament pit long and narrow, sunken, Lunule elongate-cordate, only

slightly impressed, Adductor impressions well marked, anterior impression

elongate, inside pallial line.

Dimensions—Length 12-5, height 12, inflation (one valve) 3 mm.

Paratype (right valve)-—Ilinge with one triangular cardinal tooth and one

somewhat indefinite anterior lateral.

Dirnenstons (specimen broken)—Length 9, height 8, inflation 2 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tave Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F 15129.

Observations —This is the shell formerly recorded as Loripes icterica (Reeve).

Whether the Recent shell also known as Loripes icterico and Wallucina icterica

(Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, p. 203) is conspecific is at present left open ta

doubt until an opportunity is given to examine Recent South Australian speci-

mens. Examination of the holotype of Lucina iclerica Reeve in the British

Museum Collection has revealed that this shell is not a Lucinid but a Semele,

described from three Museum Cuming shells from an unknown Jocality. Ir has

heen identified in the British Museum Collection with Semele proficua Pulteney,

Tt is not here intended to investigate the correct identity of Reeve’s ictericu.

whieh is certainly not the shell hitherto known under that name from Australia.

The present species is somewhat difficult to place. It is not a Wallucina as the

hinge bears little resemblance to that of Lovipes (Wallucina) jacksoniensis, type

species of MWallucina; in relation to the width of the hinge the teeth of saltsbury-

ensis are small; in jacksoniensis the hinge is very narrow, scarcely wider than

the dorsal margin, while the cardinal teeth are relatively long and prominent, the

ligament of salisburyensis differs completely from that of jacksomensis which is

entirely internal and transgresses the hinge area. The hinge and general characters

approximate most closely to those of Callucina baleambica; both species have twa

cardinal teeth in the right valve, although in salisburyensis there is a tendency

to obsolescence of the posterior of the two.

Material—Holotype and Paratype, Abattoirs Bore; 3 valves Hindmarsh

Bore, 1 valve Weymouth’s Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Crevk Sands; (?) Recent,

Geographival Distributian—Fossil, Adelaide, (2) Recent Victoria — West

Australia.

Gonimyrtea ¢crassior sp, nav.

pl. 3, fg. 3, 4

Diagnosis —A fairly thick Gonimyrtca with a high conspicuous umbo, Lunule

juirly deep, moderately elongate-eardate, smooth but for growth lines. Sculpture

less regular than in the species wotabilior and walidioy and growth folds con-

spictious. Sculpture of concentric lirae 5 per mm. narrower than the interspaces

which are noi so flatas in the species notabilior or validior, é

Description of Holotype (right yalve)—Shell of moderate size, fairly thick,

tumbo subcentral, high, pointed, conspicuous. Posterior dorsal margin gently

curving, antetior dorsal margin excavate beneath the umbo, then almost strafeht.

Posterior margin truncate, anterior margin oblique for a short distance, then

roundly cirved. Growth folds conspictious and fairly deep. Sculpture of con-

centric lirae 5 per mm., narrower than interspaces which are only sometimes flat;

lirae tend to be truncated by an umbo-anterior-ventral sulcus, and tot all extend

over the whole of the shell, Lunule fairly deep, moderately elongate-cordate,

smooth but for growth striae. Interior of valve radially striate. Inner margitt

raised; pallial line impressed; anterior adductor impression fairly Jong and

moderately broad; posterior adductor snbevate, very pointed dorsally, Hinge

with a single cardinal (3b) and a well developed anterior lateral (Al),

Dimensions—Length 9-5, height 9, inflation (one valve) 3 mm.

Paratype (left yalve)—Einge with a deep subymbonal pit for the reception

of 3b in the right valve and two diverging cardinals 2 and 4b, 2 bordering the

lunule. Ligament pit long and deep.

Dimensions—Length 8, height 7, inflation (one valve} 2°5 mm,

Type Locality—Weymouth’s Bore, Adelaide, 310-330 feet; Pliocene,

: Bova of Holotype and Paratype—Tate Mus. Coll., Uniy. of Adelaide,

I 15130.

Observations—The height of the umbo, coarser sculpture, and greater thick-

ness of the shell are distinguishing features of the species,

Material—Holotype, 2 paratypes, Weymouth's Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Weymouth's Bore, Adelaide,

Gonimyrtea validior sp. nov.

pl. 3, fig. 5, 6

Diagnosts—A Goniimyrtea of moderate thickness with a relatively low umbo,

sculptured with well-spaced concentric lirae about 4 per mm. with fairly broad,

flat interspaces about three times as wide as the lirae, Inner margin raised,

Lunule shallow, inconspicuous, not margined.

Description of Holotype (lett yalve)—Shell small, moderately thick, sub-

orbicular, moderately inflated, Umbo subcentral, moderately inflated, gently

incurved, prosogyrate. Shell depressed and somewhat broadly sulcate in the

anterior dorsal area. Dorsal margin nearly straight, posterior margin gently

curved, anterior margin descending obliquely at an angle of about 120° to the

dorsal margin, then roundly curving to the ventral margin. Ventral margin

strongly curved. Sculpture of fine concentric lirae about 4 per mm., broadly

spaced, narrow, and where they are not broken inclined to be recurved towards

the umbo; interspaces nearly three times as wide as lirae, broad flat, showing

faint growth threads. Lunule shallow, inconspicuous, not margined. Hinge nearly

straight with two small sharp diverging cardinals (2 and 4b) curved convex to

the posterior ; laterals absent except for an obsolete pit for the reception of the

anterior lateral of the right valve, Anterior adductor impression of moderate

length and fairly bread, posterior adductor ovate, pointed dorsally. Pallial line

punctate at broad intervals. Interior ventral margin raised.

Dunensions—Length 9, height 8, inflation (one valve) 2 min.

Paratype (right valve)—Hinge with an oblique posterior cardinal (3h) and

a weak antérior Jateral (A 1).

Thimensions—Length 8, height 7, inflation (one valve) 15 mm,

ype Locality—Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet: Pliocene.

Lacation of Holotype and Paratype— Tate Mus. Coll,, Univ. of Adelaide,

¥ 5131,

Observations—The relatively more widely spaced concentric sculpture,

together with the rather low umbo, serve to distinguish this species from the

other small Gonimyrtea species described, 14 has the characteristic raised inner

margin of Gonimyrtea and typical hinge, with laterals somewhat obsolete,

Matevial—Holotype and paratype, Hindmarsh Bore. Ten paratypes Wey-

mouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphicol Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Weymouth's and Hindmarsh Bores, Adelaide.

Gonimyrtea notabilior sp, nov.

pL 3, he. 7, 8

Diegnosis—A rather thin Gonimyrtea with a moderately high umbo very

smooth at the tip, well incurved and prosogyrate, sculptured with fine regular

concentric lirae about 5 per mm., nearly half of which extend over the central

part of the shell only, separated by interspaces about twice as wide as the lirae,

Inner margin only slightly raised. Lunule elongate-cordate, bounded by Tidge

crossed by growth striae.

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Shell of moderate size, fairly thin,

suborbicular, longer than high, inflated. Umbo swb-central, fairly high, smooth at

tip, well incurved, prosogyrate. Sculpture of fine regular smooth concentric lirae,

about 5 per mm., almost every other one of which extends over the central part

of the shell only, so that there are fewer lirae on the posterior and anterior por-

tions. Interspaces smooth and flat, about twice as wide as the lirae. There is a sulcus

extending from the umbo to both the post-ventral and anterior ventral borders.

Lunule elongate-cordate, bounded by a ridge, crossed by concentric growth striae.

Interior of valve radially striate particularly inside the pallial line. Margin only

slightly raised; pallial line marked but not conspicuous in the holotype ; isiterior

adductor of moderate width, posterior adductor ovate. Hinge with a bifid cardinal

(3b) and a conspicuous anterior lateral (A 1), ligament pit long and deep,

Dimensions—Length 11, height 10 inflation (one valve) 3 mm.

Paratype (left valve)—Hinge with two diverging cardinals (2 and 4b).

Laterals absent.

Dimensions—Length 10, height 9, inflation (one yalve) 3 mm.

Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet; Pliocene,

Localtion of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll,, Univ. of Adelaide, F 15132,

Observations—This species is separable from the preceding G. validior by

its conspicuous lunule, relatively close concentric sculpture and less raised taner

margin. The umbo is higher than in validtor.

‘Material]—Holotype and paratype and six topotypes, Hindmarsh Bore; four

valves Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Hindmarsh Bore, Adelaide,

Genus Mr.tHa H, & A. Adams, 1857

Miltha TW, and Adams, 1857. Gen. Rec. Moll, 2, p. 468

Milthoidea Marwick, 1931, N.Z. Geol. Sury. Pal, Bull, 13, p. 70.

Type species (nionotypy) Tellina childrent Gray

Miltha hora (Cotton)

Dosinia. grandis N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, 5, Aust, 55, p. 148, pl. 7, fig. 5, 4

(non grandis Nelson 1870),

Miltha (Miltthoidea) grandis (Hooper Woods, 1931). Singleton and Woods, 1934, Proe. Roy.

Sor. Vict. 46, (u.s.), (2), p, 208-210, pl. 8, fig. 1-3.

Miltha grandis N. H. Woods, Chavan, 1938. Jonr. de Conch, 82, (3), ». 230.

TeNCiCeee OM (nom. mut, for grandis preoce.) Cotton, 1947, Rec, S. Aust. Mus, 8, (4),

Dp. 2

Diagnosis—Large, solid, slightly convex, sculpture of irregular numerons

raised threads about 1 mm. apart in the adult portion of the shell, the inter~

spaces with ore or more fine threads crossed hy fine radials, Hinge plate with

broad, triangularly elongate ligament groove and triangular area for resilium,

Lunule deeply impressed, transgressing hinge area,

Dimensions (estimated)—Length 70, height 70 mim,

Type Locality—Abattwirs Bore, Adelaide: Pliocene.

.ocation of Syntypes—Tale Mus. Coll., Uniy, of Adelaide, T 1687.

Observations—It is almost impossible to get complete specimens of this large

and characteristic species, owing to the fact that shells of such size are invariably

shattered by the percussion drill. Chavan (1938, p. 230) has placed the species

in Miltha, and clsewhere (p. 656) has expressed the opinion that Milthoidea is

synonymous with Mtha, M. Chayan has confirmed this in a personal communi-

cation, stating that he is unable to recognize good criteria for separating

Milthoidea from Miltha, The juvenile specimen from Hindmarsh Bore seems

at least conspecific with the Flinders Island example described by Singleton and

Woods as Miltha (Milthoidea) grandis flindersiena, probably also a juvenile.

Afateriai—Four hypotypes, one of which is a juvenile, Hindmarsh Bore.

One hypotype, Kooyonga bore,

Stratigraphicat Ronge—Plioceue.

Geographical Disivibution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide, South

Australia; Flinders Island,

Genus Diyacucina [redale, 1936

Divalucina Tredale, 1936. Rec. Aust. Mus, 19, p. 273.

Type species (monotypy) Liteina cumingi Adams and Angas

Divalucina cumingi (Adais and Angas}

pl. 3, fi, 9

Lucina (Cyclas) crwningt Adams and Angas, 1863, Proc. Zoel. Soe, b. 426, pl, 37, fiz. 20,

Lucine dentuta Wood, ‘Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 8, pl. 12, fig. 3.

Lacing guadrisulcute d’Orbigny. Tate, 1887. td, 9, (45,

Laconia guadrtenieate W'Orbigny. Dennant and Kitson, 1903 Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2),

Divarivelld gquadrisnlcata @'Orbigny. N, if. Wonds, 1931. Trans. Ray. Soe, S. Aust, 55 p. 151.

Divelucina entypoma Cotte, 1947, Rec. S. Aust. Mus,, 8, (4), p. 663, pl. 20, fie. 9, 10,

Diagnosis—Orbicular, truncated posteriorly, longer than high, finely setlp-

tured with divaricate ridges which are approximately 4 per mm, near the umbo

and become progressively more distant towards the ventral margin; at 20 mm.

from the umbo about 1 per mm.; distances somewhat variable between indi-

vidiials; ridges generally becoming abruptly obsolete near the anterioy dorsal

margin.

Prmensions—Length 41, height 38-5 mm,

Pype Locality—St. Vincent Gult, South Australia; Recent.

Location of Holatype—Brit. Mus, (Natural History).

Observations—This is one of ihe conumonest species in the Dry Creek Sands,

The writer has compared a number of examples from Weymouth's Bore with

the Adams andl Angas type and also with a range of examples of cumingi from

Tasmania and fron) Sydney Harbour, and is convinced that the fossil examples

are esseritially the same species, In his diagnosis of the new species ent pomus

Cotton has stuted that the Fossil specios is closely related 1o the South Australian

Recent species cumingi though differing in fineness of sculpture, On fitting fossil

specimens against the holotype one finds that the sculpture over the same portion

of the shell is the same in both. The number of ridges per 10 mm. (measured

at the angle of the divaricate sculpture) in the last 10 mm. of an Adelaide shell

is 20. and the number of ridges im the corresponding portion of the holotype

{measured at the same distance [rem the umbo) is 20, The reason for the

apparent difference in fineness of sculpture is that the number af tidges so

measured decreases towards the ventral margin with the increasing size of the

shell, The holotype of D_ enmingi isa large shell for the specics, ayyiraximately

dowible the size of the average frssil specimen. Specimens of ¢utingt from

Tasmania and frori New South Wales are somewhat larger than, but other-

wise similar to those from the Dry Creek Sands. The relative dimensions of the

holotype and a typical Dry Creek Sands specimen are as follows;

Holotype Dry Creek Sands Specimen

Height - - - - 383mm. 19 mm.

Length - - ~ - 41 20°5

Inflation =~ - - - 20 i0

The genus Divalucina was created by Iredale for Divaricella cumingi on the

absence of a deep pseudo-lunule, the presence (not absence as stated by Cotton,

1947, p. 664) of notable lateral teeth and the size of the cardinals. The ornamenta-

tion of Divaricella is of raised sharp ribs, of Divalucina imbricating ridges,

Material—Holotype, 6 valves Sydney Harbour, 6 valves Tasmania, 16 valves

Hindmarsh Bore, 26 valves Weymouth’s Hore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent,

Geographical Distribution—New South Wales and South Australia.

Family UNGULINIDAE

Subfamily UNGULININAE

Genus Drrroponra Brann, 1831

Diplodonia Broon, 1831. Erget, nat, Reisen, 2, p. 484,

Diplodonta Brovn, Thiele, 1935, Handb. Syst. Weicht., p. 863 (synonymy).

Type species (s.d. Gray 1847) Penns lupina Brovehi

Subgenus Dir.oponta s.str,

Diplodonta (Diplodonta) solitaria N. H. Woods

pl. 6, fig. 4

Piplodonta solitaria N. H, Woods, 1931, Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust. 55, p. 149, pl. 8, fig, J.

Zemysiu solitaria Hooper Woods, Cotton, 1947, Ree, S. Aust, Mus, 8, (4), 9, 654,

Diagnosis—Orbicular, fairly stout, only moderately convex, higher than long.

Umbo. subcenitral.

Dimensions—Length 22-8, height 26°7 mm,

Type Locality—Abattoirs Rore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ. of Adelaide. T 1685.

Observations—Thete are no further specimens of this species described

from Abattoirs Bore material. Its identity with “D. subquadrata Tate” has been

queried (Cotton, 1947, p..654). The specific nae subquadrata being preoccupied

hy Carpenter (1855, Proc. Zool, Soc., p. 230) for a Californian shell, Tate’s

subquadrata was renamed D. balcombensts by Pritchard (1906, Vict. Nat., 23,

p. 119). DP. soliteria is orbicular and not subquadrate.

Tt is a fairly large stout shell, higher than long, with the umbo subcentral.

D. balcombensis is a thin, inequilateral shell, longer than high, with the umbo

at about one-third ftom the anterior border; one specimen itt the British Museum

measures, length 23:5, height 22 mm.—about twice the size of the holotype.

Zemysia was introduced by Finlay for Lucina selandica Gray, no generic diag-

nosis being given. Thiele has placed it in synonymy with Diplodonta. The writer

has not been able to examine the New Zealand lineages quoted by Finlay, but

considers that South Australian shells at least are Diplodonta, congeneric with

the type species D. Iupina. (Brocchi). D, tasmanica is very close to the Cali-

fornian D, subguadrata Carpenter,

Material—Holotype, T 1685.

Stratigraphicol Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distributton—Adelaide District.

Genus NumeEtta Iredale, 1924

Numella Tredale, 1924 Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S\W,, 49, (3), p. 206.

Type species (0.d.) Mysia adapist Angas

Numella suborbicularis (Tate)

Sacchia suborbicularis Tate, 1887. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Nv By 147, pl. 8, fig. 10 a-c.

Mysia (Felania) suborbicularis Tate, 1894. Jour. Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 27, p. Tes

Diplodonta suborbicularis Tate (sp.) Harris, 1897, Cat. Tert, Moll. Brit. Mus. 1, p. 376.

Dapodone, ayborhiestorls Tate. Dennant and Kitson 1903 Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2),

fh 2 ’

Diagnosis—Triangularly orbicular, rounded posteriorly and somewhat pro-

duced anteriorly. Umbones smooth, remainder of shell with distant growth folds.

Dimensions—Length 7:5, height 8, inflation (one valve) 3-75 mm.

Type Locality—Oyster Beds, River Murray Cliffs; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ, of Adelaide, T 1081.

Material—Three valves, Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide South

Australia.

Subfamily THYASIRINAE

Genus Trryastra Lamarck, 1818

Thyosira Lamarck (ex Leach MS), 1818. Amim. s. Vert., 5, p. 492,

Thyasira Lamarck. Thiele 1935. Handb. Syst. Weicht, p. 864 (synonymy).

Type species (monotypy) Tellina flexuosa Montagu

Thyasira sinuata (N. H. Woods)

pl. 6, fig. 6

Cryptodon sinuatum N. H. Wonds, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 55, p. 149, pl 8 fig. &

Diagnosis—Small thin, very inflated, sculptured only with growth striae,

anterior border truncate, posterior with two folds,

Dimensions—Length 81, height 8°2 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, S. Australia; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Uniy, of Adelaide, T 1653.

Observations—The gentis Cryptodon Turton, 1822, in which this species was

originally described, is, among others, a synonym of Thvasiva, The full synonymy

of the genus is given in Thiele, 1935, p. 864.

Material—Holotype T 1653.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geogrephical Distribution—Abattoirs Bore,

Superfamily LEPTONACEA

Fatnily KELLIIDAE

Genus Bornia Philippi, 1836

Rornia Philippi, 1836, Enum. Moll. Sicil., 1, p. 18

Type species (0.d.) Erycina corbuloides Philippi

Bornia trigonale (Tate)

pl. 3, fig, 10

Leptan trigonale Tate, 1879. Trans. Phil, Soc. Adel. for 1878/9, p. 131, pl. 5, fig. 9.

Lepton trigonole Tate, 1890 a. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 13, (2). p p. 175.

Lepton trigonale Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Viet, 1, (2), p. 146,

Lepton trigonale Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Auust., 35, p, 151,

Diagnosts—Triangularly ovate, somewhat flattish, smooth in the middle but

shagreéned or punctate marked on the anterior and posterior sides.

Dimensions—Length 3:8, height 3-5 mm.

Type Locality—Holdfast Bay, South Australia; Recent,

Location of Holotype-—S, Aust, Mus., Reg. No. 12904.

Observations—Although not numerous, this shell has appeared in all the

bores examined, It was also recorded by Tate as frequent in the Dry Creek Bore.

Materiali—One valve, Weymouth’s Bore, 3 valves Hindmarsh Bore, 3 valves

Abattoirs Bore, Eight valves South Australia, 12 valves Victoria, Recent B.M.

Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Southern Australia.

Family ERYCINIDAE

Genus, LitTictEL1.a Monterasato, 1909

Litigtella Monterasato, 1909, Journ. de Conch. 56, (4th ser. 10), 7. 254,

Type species (Monotypy) Erycina crerott Lamy — Lepton glabrum Fischer

Litigiella adelaidensis sp. nov.

pl. 3, fig. 11

Lepton crassem Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust., 55, p. 151.

Diagnosis—A small, subovate, moderately thick, moderately solid, genth

convex Litigiella. Umbo post-median, inconspicuous, slightly inflated. Surface

shining, smooth but for fine concentric growth lines. Anterior and posterior

margins rounded, ventral margin nearly straight, dorsal margin gently arched.

Adductor scars and pallial line inconspicuous. Right valve with a very small and

inconspicuous anterior cardinal and a long posterior and anterior lateral

separated by a deep subumbonal inflexion in the hinge.

Paratype—Left valve with the hinge slightly broken in the posterior. A

single strong cardinal, posterior lateral and anterior lateral,

Dimensions—length 4-5, height 3-5, inflation (one valve) 1 mm.

Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore, 450-487 feet; Pliocene.

ara of Holotype and Paratypes—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ, af Adelaide,

F 15133.

Observations—The Dry Creek Sands species is differently sculptured from

the probable Miocene species with which it is formerly identified. it is nearly

smooth, and lacks the concentric grooves and ridges of Litigiella crasse (Tate).

Material—Holotype and two paratypes.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Hindmarsh and Abattoirs Bores, Adelaide,

Genus Mytrita d’Orbigny and Recluz, 1850

Myllita. d’Orbigny anid Recluz, 1850, Tourn. de Conch, 1, (3), p. 288.

Type species (monotypy) Mvyllita deshayesi d’Orbigny and Recluz.

Type species (monotype) Myllita deshayesi d’Orbigny and Recluz.

pl. 3, ig, 12 —

Diagnosis—Elongate-ovate, sculptured with about 23 concentric Tirae

obsolete anteriorly and posteriorly and bifurcating radial striae which are

dominant on the anterior and posterior.

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Shell small, fairly solid, elongate-

ovate, inequilateral, anteriorly dilated and rounded. Posteriorly narrower and

more sharply ovate, Umbo small, smooth, somewhat depressed. Surface sculp-

tured with about 235 concentric lirae prominent in the middle and becoming

obsolete both anteriorly and posteriorly; interspaces ctossed by very fine radial

striae. On the anterior and posterior areas the radial striae gradually increase in

strength and length and soon cross and dominate the concentric sculpture, produc-

ing the effect of bifurcating lirae curving concave to the dorsal margin. Hinge

with no cardinal but two lateral teeth atid two long lateral pits for the reception

of the left laterals.

Dimensions—Length 3-8, height 2-6, inflation (1 valve) 1 mm,

Paratype (left valve) —Hinge with a single sharp almost vertical cardinal

tooth and two strong laterals.

Dimensions—Length 3, height 2:4, inflation (1 valve) 0°8 mm.

Type Locality—Hindmarsh Bore, Adelaide, 450-487 feet; Pliacene.

Location of [Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ of Adelaide, F 15134.

Material—Holotype and paratype only, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Dtstribiution—Hindmarsh Bore, Adelaide.

Family 1EPTONIDAE

Genus Proreryerya Cerulli-Lrelli, 1908

Properycina Cerulli-[relli, 1908. Pal. Ttal,, 14, p. 6 ;

Type species (s.d.) Erycina mariana Cerulli-Lrelli

Properycina micans (Tate)

pl. 6, fig. 15

Kellia micans Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 9, p. 148, pl. 19, fig. 13,

Kellya micans Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol, Sury. Vict, 1, (2), p. 139.

Frycina micans Tate, Chapman atid Crespin, 1928. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 5, (1), p- 157.

Erycina micuns Tate, N, H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 55, p. 151,

Diagnosis — Minute, transversely ovate, anterior side produced, dorsal

margins oblique, ventral margin rounded. Surface sculpture of concentric striae.

Dimensions—Length 3, height 2:5, inflation (one valve) 2 mim.

Type Locolity—Muddy Creek, Humilton, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T. 1077.

Material—Holotype and three paratypes; 5 valves, Abattwirs Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australis.

Properycina torrensensis; sp. noy.

pl. 3, fig. 13

Diagnosis—Flattish, transversely oval, smooth, equilateral.

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Shell smail, thin, smooth, equi-

lateral. Umbo very small, depressed, scarcely projecting above the dorsal margin.

Hinge narrow. with one oblique cardinal tooth beneath the umbo, a lang posterior

lateral and a shorter but prominent anterior lateral, Shell very slightly produced

anteriorly; evenly rounded posteriorly, Anterior-dorsal margin shghtly more

oblique than posterior; ventral margin straight. Surface smooth but not shining,

under magiification showing weak concentric growth folds and microscopic

irregular pittings,

Dimensions—Length 7, height 5-1, inflation (1 valve) | mm,

Paratype (left valve)—Iimge with an obsolete cardinal visible only in

oblique light and one very weak lateral on either side, bordering the Jower edge

of the hinge, Grooves far the reception of the laterals of the right valve well

marked.

Dimensions—t.ength 5+5, height 4, inflation 0-8 mm.

Type Locality—Ilindmarsh Bore, 450487 feet; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype and Parutypes—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide.

F 15135.

Material—Ilolotype, two paratypes,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Géagraphical Distribution—Uindmarsh Bore.

? PLATOMYSIA sp.

A single right valve, conspicuously concentrically lirate.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

(scographical Distribution—Hindmarsh Bore,

Genus Montacuta Turton, 1822

Montacuta Turton, 1822. Conch. Insul. Brit, p. 58.

Coriareus Hedley, 1907. Rec. Aust. Mus., 6, (4), p, 301. .

Type species (s.d. Gray, 1847) Ligula substriata Montagu

Montacuta sericea Tate

pl. 3, fig, 15

Montacuta sericea Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust., 9, p. 148, pl. 14, fig. 6

Myseila sericea Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol, Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 124, 139.

Montacuta sericea Tate, N, H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust. 55, p. 151.

Rochefortia donaciformus Angas. N. H, Woods. 1931, ibid.

Moniacuta sericea. Tate. Crespin, 1943. Min. Res, Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93.

Coriareus sericea Tate, Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 8, (4), p. 654,

Diagnosis—Very inequilateral, rather solid, glossy. Umbones sited at

one-quarter total length from anterior edge, small, curved anteriorly.

Dimensions—Length 6°5, height 5, inflation (both valves) 3 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Kalimnan.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll, Univ. of Adelaide. Numerous

specimens, Abattoirs. Bore, 7 valves.

Material—Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Genus Myseria Angas, 1877

Mysella Angas, 1877. Proe, Zool. Soc., p. 176, pl. 26, fig, 22.

Rochefortia Velain, 1877. Aych. Zool. exp. gen., Paris, 6 p, 132.

Type species (monotypy) Afysella anomala Angas

Mysella anomala Angas

pl. 3, fig. 14

Mysella anomala Angas, 1877. Proc. Zool. Soc,, p. 176, pl. 26, fig. 22.

Mysella anomaia Angas. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict., I, (2), p. 146.

Rochefortia anomola Angas. N, TI. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, p. 151.

Piagnosis—Triangularly ovate, compressed towards the ventral edge, very

finely and regularly concentrically ridged; umbo at about one-quarter to one-

third length from anterior edge.

Dimensions—Length 9°5, height 7, inflation (both valves), 3 mm.

Type Locality—Shark Island, Port Jackson, 12 fathoms: Recent,

Location of Holotype—B.M. Coll.

Observations—Fossil specimens are somewhat narrower than typical

enomala.

Material—Holotype, 1 paratype, Shark Island, 1 complete specimen and

3 valves, S. Australia. Recent, B.M, Coll., 3 valves Abattoirs Bore, 1 valve Hind-

marsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent,

Geographical Distribution—New South Wales to South Australia.

Mysella ovalis Tate

Mysella ovalis Tate, 1892. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 15, p. 128.

Mysella ovalis Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, id., 55, p, 151.

Diagnosts—Transversely oval, hinge line arched, the anterior slope incurved

and shorter than posterior, which is straight. Anterior margin truncately rounded,

posterior somewhat pointed. Uumbones antemedian,

Dimensions—Length 14-5, height 10, inflation (both valves) 4-25, anterior

radius 6, posterior radius 8°5 mm.

Type Locality—Hardwicke Bay, 10 fathoms; Recent.

Location of Holotype—S. Aust. Mus., No. D 12893,

Material—Holotype.

Stratigraphical Kange—Dry Creek Sands and Recent,

Geographical Distribution—Beachport - Wallaroo, South Australia.

Mysella macer (N. H. Woods)

pl. 6, fig. 8

Rochefortia macer N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 151, pl. 7, fi. 3.

Diagnosis—Broadly subevate, relatively high, somewhat narrowly produced

posteriorly, postero-dorsal margin at about 45°.

Dimenstons—Length 11°1, height 9:3 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene,

Location of Holatype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1679.

Material—Holotype; one specimen Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs and Hindmarsh Bores, Adelaide.

Mysella tellinoides (N. H. Woods)

pl, 6, fig. 7

Rochefortta tellinoides N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 148, pl, 7, fig. 4.

Diagnosis—Narrowly ovate; umbones small, not tumid, sittiated at about

one-third from anterior margin.

Dimensions—Length 5:7, height 3-6 mm.

Type Locakty—Abattcirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1676.

Observations—Except for one right valve from the Hindmarsh Bore, refer-

able to this species, from which it differs in its relative dimensions (length 6°5,

height 5 mm.), examples of Mysella tellinoides have not been found in any other

bote than Abattoirs, from which it was described,

Material—l right valve, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Ahattoirs Bore, Hindmarsh Bore.

Suborder CYCLODONTA

Superfamily CARDIACEA

Family CARDITDAE

Subfamily TRACHYCARDIINAE

Genus Vasticarnrum Iredale, 1927

Pusticardium Iredale, 1927. Rec. Aust. Mus,, 16, (1) p, 75,

Type species (o.d.) Cochlea nebulosa Martyn = Cardium elongatum Bruguiére

Subgenus VASTICARDIUM 5.str.

Vasticardium (Vasticardium) submaculosum sp. nov.

pl. 4, fig, 18

Diagnosis—A small thin Vasticardium: somewhat obliquely ovate, truncated

posteriorly, sculptured with 56 fine, radial costae smooth dorsally and ornamented

with evenly spaced inbricating scales towards the ventral border. Posterior

ornament discrepant, consisting of ten pairs of ribs alternately one smooth and

narrow and one sharply tuberculate, each narrowet than interspaces.

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Shell small for the genus, rather

thin, longitudinally ovate, somewhat depressed, slightly oblique, stubequilateral.

Anterior margit: rounded, posterior margin more rapidly descending and sotne-

what truncated; ventral margin roundly curving. Umbo fairly high, smooth,

incurved, prosogyrate, subcentral, Hinge typical, fairly short, nearly straight,

with a prominent cardinal (3b) and one obsolete, divergent, almost horizontal

cardinal (3a) and one anterior (LAT) and one posterior lateral (I.P 1). Nymph

él

prominent. Sculpture of 56 delicate, evenly-spaced radial costae, slightly wider

than interspaces. Costae smooth in the couvex umbo-dorsal area, scu|piured on

the posterior side with regular imbricating scales towards the ventral margin;

geales extending over the ribs anteriorly. The posterior 10 short ribs divide and

develop into one narrow smocth rib and one sharply tuberculate rib, each narrower

than the interspaces. Last three anterior short ribs are tuberculate for almost their

entire length, Interior of ventral margin crenulate; posterior margin digitate.

Pallial line invisible, adductor impressions prominent, sub-equal.

Dimensions—Length 23:6, height 28-7, inflation (one valve) 8*5 mm.

Type Locality—Weymouth’s Bore, Adelaide, 310-330 feet; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ, of Adelaide. F15136, _

Observations—This shell ig very close indeed to the Recent Vasticardinam

maculosum (Wood) (1835, p. 218, pl. 52, fig. 3) from the Indian Ocean and

North Australia. The fossil species is a thinner shell with the following differ-

ences from marculosum der posterior ribs (one smooth, one tuberculate) are

arranged in the fossil so that the smooth narrow rib is above (dorsal) and

close to the adjacent tuberculose rib; in the Recent shell the relative positions

are reversed and the smooth rib is below the tuberculose rib. For most specitnetis,

the main ribs are more definite and sharply squamose in the fossil. This character,

however, varies to a certain degree in the Recent species. The antenor six ribs

in maculosum are much more definitely tuberculate in contrast to the main ribs

than are the corresponding ribs in subsmaculosum. The close relationship between

the two species is noteworthy, Both species belong to a group of smal] species

of Vasticardium represented also by V. transcendens {Melvill and Standen),

examples from the Amirante Is,, and FV. mawritianvm (Deshayes), examples

from the Molluccas, The FV. maculosum lineage would appear to have degenerated

in Recent times in Australia. On the evidence of material available in the British

Museum, specimens from North Queensland are all small, and at most half the

size of examples of maculosim from the Gulf of Oman and Ceylon, and of the

fossil submaculosum. The type locality of maciloswn is not exactly known, but

examples in the British Museum are Indo-Pacific.

Vasticardinn was created by Iredale for Cocklea nebulosa Martyn =

Curdixm elongatum Bruguiére, a Jarge Indo-Pacific shell. The genus as 2 whole

is Indo-Pacific, with the following generic characters: Shape longitudinally oval,

hinge nearly straight, short; sculpture discrepant on posterior slope where ribs

are divided and are alternately tuberculate and smooth, main ribs numerois,

ornamented with imbricating scales on posterior sides. Posterior margin digitate.

The genus is closely related to Acrosterigma of Dall (type species Cardiwm dali

Heilprin) from the Tertiary of Florida. The type species of Vasticardivm has

longer hinge than that of Acrosterigma dalli; the shell is more ovoid, the umbo

more tumid and the cardinal teeth less divergent. The subumbonal median

internal rib of Acrosterigma is not present in Masticardium not is there the

internal umbonal-post-ventral rib-like thickening which occurs in A. dailé.

x Material—Holotype, Weymouth’s Bore, one broken left yalve Thebarton

ore.

Sivatigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Disiribution—Weymouth's and Thebarton Bores, Adelaide.

Stibgenus Recozana Iredale, 1936

Regosure Iredale, 1936. Rec. Aust. Mus., 19, p. 275,

Type species (o.d.) Regosara olivifer Tredale

Vasticardium (Regozara) praecygnorum sp. nov.

pl. 4, fig, 12

Cardium cygnorim Deshayes. Tate, 1890a, Trans, Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 13, p 175,

Cardium eygnorum Deshayes. Dennant and Kitson. 1903. Rec Geol. Sury. Vict, 1, (2), p. 146.

Carditm cygnormm Deshayes. N. H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc S. Aust. 55, 7, 151.

Diagnosis—A small Regosara, roundiy ovate, sculptured with 48 radial ribs

of which the posterior seven are narrow, with a row of widely spaced scales in

the interspaces, Ribs elsewhere flatly rounded, with narrow interspaces, sculp-

tured on the posterior side only with narrow widely spaced diagonal ridges which

extend further across the rib towards the anterior where they are almost tubercu-

late. Interspaces crossed by growth lamellae which show as indistinct striae on

the ribs.

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Shell stall, rather thin, but imma-

ture, toundly ovate, subeqiilateral, umbo prominent incurved, subcentral. Hinge

of moderate length, gently curved, with a prominent cardinal (Ja), one anterior

(LA1), and one posterior (LPI) lateral. Nymph broken in holotype but promi-

nent. Sculpture of 48 radial costae, the posterior seven of which are narrow with

a row of widely-spaced scales in the interspaces. Ribs elsewhere flatly rounded

with narrow interspaces with steep sides, sculptured on the posterior side only

with fairly smooth and widely spaced diagonal ridges which extend further across

the ribs towards the anterior where they are almost tuberculate, Interspaces

crossed by [requent growth lamellae which show as indistinct striae on the ribs.

Interior of ventral margin crenulate, posterior margin digitate,

Dimensions—Length 22-5, height 23-5, inflation (one valve) 9 mm,

Type Locality—Dry Creek Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene-

Location of Hololype-——Tate Mus, Coll, Univ. of Adelaide. 715137.

Paratype—The holotype is an immature shell and a larger broken specimen

is selected from the tablet of six specimens mounted by Tate from Dry Creek

Lore, with the following dimensions: Length 33, height (estimated) 35 mm.

Observations—This species has now heen compared with the holotype and

two paratypes of “Cavdinm’” eygnerwm Deshayes, and is distinet from that

species. "C’, cugnount is a large shell with 45 radial costae which are ornamented

on both sides over all the shell, Iredale (1936, p, 276) has pointed out that New

South Wales shells referred to “Cardin” cygnorum (typically from Western

Australia) are not referable to cygnorum. From examination of a limited number

of specimens in ihe British: Museum, the writer is inclined to ayree with this

opinion; the species described above as praecygnorum appears ta Le more closely

related to the New South Wales “cygnorum” than to cugnorum s. str,

Material—Holotype and five paratypes, Dry Creek Bore; many fragments

Abattoirs Bore.

Strotigraphical Ranye—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Dry Creek and Ahattnirs Bores, South Australia.

Subfamily LAEVICARDUNAE

Genus Furvra Gray, 1853

Frlvia Gray, 1853 Ann. Map. Nut. Hist, Ser. 2, 11, p. 40.

Type species (monctypy) Cardium apertum Bruguiére

Fulvia tenuicostata (Lamarck)

pl. 4, fig. b3

Cardiuny lenvicostatom Lamarck, 1819. Aram. s. Vert. 6, (1), p. 5,

Cardron racketts Donoyan, 1825. Nat. Repos., 4, nl 124.

Cardium tenuicastatunt Sowerby, [832. Couch. 111, 5, fy. 19, 36, 62.

Curdium tenuicostatum Lamarck. Netesaert, 1841, Ree. de Coq. par Lumarck, pl. 11, fig: &

Cardivm tenuicostahins Lamarck. Reeve, 1843. Conch Teen, 11, pl, 10, fig. 50.

Carditun denuicosiatem Lamarck. Catlow aml Reeve, 1845. Conch, Nomen, p, 45.

Cardivm tenuicostatun Lamarck, Tate, 18904, Trans, Roy. Soc. S Aust, 13, (2), p. 175.

Cardivm tenuicostatuny Lamarck. Denuant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, £2),

p. 146,

Curdium racketti Nonovan. Hedley, 1917. Proc, Linn, Sac, N.S.W., 41, (4), p. 685.

Cardivm rucketti Donovan. May 1921, Check List, p. 22.

Cardium racketli Donovan. May 1923. 111. Ind, p. 23, pl. 9, fig. 15.

Cardtum racketti Donovan, Cotton and Godfrey, 1938 Moll, S. Avst., 1, po 227.

Diagnosis—A thin fragile, ventricose, quadrately-orbicular Fulzie swollen

at the umbones, sculptured with from 45 to 50 fine smooth axial costae, equal

to the interspaces which are faintly crossed by concentric growth stride,

Description of Hypotype (Dry Creek Bore)—Shell yentricose thin, fragile,

quadrately orbicular, umbo prominent, prosogyrate, smooth, Surface of shell

sculptured with 46 fine smooth radial ribs, sharply defined and equal to the

interspaces, which are crossed by concentric growth striac. Posterior area some-

what discrepant with sculpture in the interspaces generally more prominent anc

inclined to be more widely spaced. There is 2 narrow smooth triangular area

at both the posterior and anterior boarders. Posterior margin smooth, not digitate.

Dimensions of Hypotype—Length 19, height 19 mm.

Dimensions of Hylotype—Length 56 mm.

Type Locality—Timor.

Location of Holotype—Mus. Hist, Nat., Paris.

Observations—Hedley (1917, p. 685) has advanced reasons for rejecting

Lamarck’s name fenyicostata and replacing it by Donovan's racketti for Aus-

tralian shells, on the grounds that Delessert’s figure represents a differently

shaped shell, which cannot be identified. This is incorrect. The holotype of

tenwicostata is lodged in the Lamarck Collections in the Natural History

Museum in Paris where it was seen by the writer. Most of the examples of

tenxicostata in the British Museum agree with Delessert’s figure of the holotype

in which the characteristic roseate colouring of the umbonal area is reproduced.

The general shape of a wide range of specimens is that of Lamarck’s type. One

example from Port Jackson is slightly narrower and more abruptly sloping

posteriorly, like the shel] figured by Donovan. Hedley has also argued that Deles-

sert’s specimen is larger than Donovan's racketti, This surely js not a valid

reason for rejecting a species; in any case, specimens from Western Australia

are over 50 mm. in width, The rejection of tenwicostata on purely geographical

grounds is fallacioiss.

It is difficult to reconcile the green colouring of Donovan’s figure with the

familiar white and pink colour of tenicostata, and as the holotype of racketh

has disappeared, its identification is impossible; the use of the name recketti for

the Australian shell should be abandoned.

Reeve (1843, pl, 10, fig. 50) has noted that the number of ribs varies

hetween individuals, Both Lamarel's and Donovan's shells have 47-48 ribs; the

writer has counted over 50 in some specimens.

The species is represented in the Dry Creek Sands by four small examples

from Dry Creek Bore, which show some shght divergence by having the inter-

spaces somewhat more heavily crossed by concentric growth striae in the posterior

area in most specimens.

_ Material—Holotype. The figured hypotype arid three other specimens. Dry

Creek Bore; numerous specimens. Recent, Australia, B.M-. Coll,

Siratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geagraphical Distribution— Australia generally; Indo-Pacific {Challenger

Expedition).

Subfamily PROTOCARDITNAE

Getiis Nemocarpium Meek, 1876

Nemocardiuns Meek, 1876. Dep. Int. Rep. U.S. Geol. Sury, Terr., 9, p, 167.

Type species (s,d. Sacco, 1899) Cardiuim semiasperum Deshayes.

Subgenus PraTutum Iredale, 1924

Pratilum Tredale, 1924. Proc. Linn. Sac, N.S,W., 49, p, 1&2,

Type species (o.d.) Cardivem thetidis Hedley

Nemocardium (Pratulum) proterothetidis sp, noy,

pl, 3, fig, 16, 17

Cardium hemimeris Tate, N. H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 151,

Deagnosis—Small, quadrately orbicular, longer than high. Umbo incurved,

very slightly prosogyrate. Posterior tuberculate ornament over 4 little more than

one-third of shell, with about 32 fine tuberculate ribs. Remainder of shell with

fine smooth radials about 6 per mm, There is a marked umbo-post-ventral sulcus

and a corresponding post-ventral insinuation,

Description of Holotype—Left valve. Shel] thin, small, broadly quadrately

ovate, longer than high, subglobose; 1imbo submedian, elevated, smooth, incurved

and only very slightly prosogyrate, Ornament discrepant, posterior siphonal area

a little more than one-third of shell with about 32 (5 per mnt. ventrally) fine

tuberculate radiating ribs; remainder of shell with very fine smooth radials, about

6 per mm. measured at the ventral margin, faintly and irregularly crossed by

concentric growth striae, There is a marked umbo-post-ventral broad sulcus,

producing a corresponding insinuation at the post-ventral margin. Dorsal margin

gently rounded, anterior margin rounded, vertral margin only slightly rounded;

posterior margin somewhat truncate, insinuate. Interior crenate all round, Hinge

arched, narrow, with a prominent cardinal (2) and very small posterior cardinal

(4b). Laterals (A Il and PII) triangular and rather weak.

Dimensions—Length 9, height 8, inflation (one valve) 3 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Phocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F15138,

Observations—This is not the Janjukian-Balcombian N. (P.) Hemimeris

(Tate), as formerly identified. N. (P.) hemtmeris is higher than long, has a much

more strongly curved umbo, markedly prosogyrate, while the tuberculate posterior

sculpture extends over half the valve. NV. (P.) proterothetidis approximates more

closely to the Recent thefidis Hedley, from which it differs in baying a less inflated

umbo, a longer hinge line and weaker marginal crenulations. The umbo-post-

ventral sulcation is well marked in proterothetidis but is only faintly present in

thetidis. The posterior margin is shorter and less oblique and there is nol the

tendency for the post-ventral margin to he produced as in thetidis,

Material—Holotype, Abattoirs Bore; 1 valve Hindmarsh Bore, 6 valves

Weymouth’s Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—-Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Suborder TELEOQDONTA

Superfamily VENERACEA

Family DOSINITIDAE

Subfamily DOSTNIINAE

Genius Dostnra Scopoli, 1777

Dosinia Scopoli, 1777. Introd. Hist. Nat, Prague, p. 399,

Type species (s-d. Gray, 1847) Venus exoleta Linné

Suhgentis Kereta Marwick, 1927

Kereia Marwiols, 1927. Trans, N.S. Inst. 57, p. 583.

Type species (c.d.) Dostnia greyi Zittel

Dosinia (Kereia) johnstoni Tate

Dosinia sohnstoni Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 9, p. 161, pL 14, fig. 9, 12,

Dosinia johnstont Tate, ‘Tate and Dennant, 1983. id. 17, (2), p. 225.

Posixia johnstoni Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv., Vict. 1, (2), p. 125, 139.

Desinia johnstoni Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., $5, p. 151,

Dosinie johnstoni Tate. Crespin, 1943, Min. Res, Surv, Bull, 9, p. 92,

Djagnosis—Sculptured with regular, thick, depressed concentric ridges, with

reflexed acute edges, separated by deep linear sulci about 20 per 10 mm, near

the ventral edge.

Dimensions—Length 27, height 25, inflation (one valve) 7 mm.

Type Locality—Upper Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1159,

Material—One complete specimen, 3 broken valves, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria ~ Adelaide, South Australia,

Family MERETRICIDAE

Subfamnily MERETRICINAE

Genus Notocaruista Iredale, 1924

Notocallista Iredale, 1924. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S-W., 49, p, 182,

Type species (o.d.) Cytherea kingi Gray

Subgenus StrracaLiista Marwick, 1938

Striacalista Marwick, 1938. Trans. Roy, Soc. N.Z., 68, p. 68,

Type species (o.d.) Cytherea multistriata Sowerby

Notocallista (Striacallista) mollesta Marwick

pl. 5, fig. 2

Macrocallista submuliistriata Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 151

(pars).

Noten, (Siriacallista) mollesta Marwick, 1938. Trans, Roy. Soc. N.Z., 68, p. 73, pl. 13,

g. 7-9.

Diagnosis—Umbones low, sculpture of fine, regular concentric grooves and

Denslied ridges 4-5 per mm. persisting across the disk, Ligament deep with high

walls.

Dimensions—Length 26°S, height 19-5, inflation (one valve) 6°5 mm.

Type Locahty—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location af Holotype—N.Z, Geol. Surv. Coll., Wellington, N.Z.

Material—Hypotype (figured) Abattoits Bore. Two valves Weymouth’s

Bore; 2 valves Thebarton Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Notocallista (Striacallista) pestis Marwick

pl. 5, fig. 3

Momeallsta {otriocallista) pestis Marwick, 1938, Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z., 68, p. 73, pl. 13,

go, 4.

Diagnosis—Umbones moderately conspictious, sculpture of concentric

grooves and ridges about 4 per mm. on the anterior and posterior parts and

dying out over the middle of the disk. Ligament shallow, walls low.

Dimensions—Length 27, height 19, inflation (one valve) 5°5 mm,

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Auckland Museum, New Zealand,

Material—Four valves Weymouth’s Bore, 1 yalve Thebarton Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Family VENERIDAE

Subfamily VENERINAE

Genus AnTicona Schumacher, 1817

Antigona Schitmacher, 1817. Ess. Nouv. Syst. vers, Test, p, 155.

(Prozichione Iredale, 1929p. Aust. Zool., 5, (4), p, 339.)

Type species (monotypy} Antigona lamellaris Schumacher

Subgenus ANTIGONAa 6.str.

Antigona (Antigona) cognata (Pritchard)

Chione cognata Pritchard, 1903. Proc. Roy, Soc. Viet. 15, (2), 1Ol, pl. 12, fig 5.

Antigona dimorphylla Tate. N, H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S.. Aust, 55, p, 154,

Diugnosis—Vety large, solid, moderately tumid, umbo broad and only some-

what inflated, at anterior one-fourth, strongly directed anteriorly but not

markedly incuryed, Lunule impressed, finely lamelfose, bounded b incised line.

Ligament groove deep and long. Sculpture of high concentric lamellae corrugated

anteriorly and posteriorly and numerous interstitial recdials broader than inter

spaces,

Dimensions—Length 68, height 53 mm.

Type Locality—Grange Burn, near Hamilton, Victoria ; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Melb. Uniy, Geol. Dept,, No, 1755.

Observations—Although in small numbers, the species has appeared in

Ahattoies, Hindmarsh and Kooyonga Bores. Material under present observation

is fragmentary, as the shells have been broken by the percussion drill, and

accurate diagnosis is difficult. Previously, Adelaide examples have been placed in

dimorphophylla (Tate), but on closer examination of a series of topotypes and

other specimens of dimorphophilla it is considered that they have been wrongly

placed and should be placed in cognata. The umbo of the present species is

broader and less inflated than that of dimorphophylla and it is not so markedly

incurved. The specimens are larger than cognate from the type locality and much

heaviet and more solid than dimorphophylla; estimated dimensions are length

82, height 65 mm, They very strongly resemble the Recent Indo-Pacific species

A, listeri (Gray) and A, reticulata (Linné) the concentric lamellae are further

apart than they are in listeri and the interstitial radials are finer and more closely

set. The shape of the pallial sinus is more angular in cogitata than in either listert

or reticulata,

Matevial—Two broken valves, Hindmarsh Bore; 2 broken valves Koouyonga

Bore.

Stratigraphical Ranye—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribuiion—Gippsland, Victoria —- Adelaide, South Anstralia.

Genus Dosina Gray, 1835

Dosind. Gray, 1835, in ‘Yate, Account N.Z, Shells, p. 309.

(Dorsina Gray, 1840, Syn. Cont. Brit. Mus, ed. 42, p. 149.)

(Dosinula Finlay, 1926. Trans. N.Z. Inst., 57, p. 470.)

Type species (motlotypy) Dosing sclundica Gray

Subgenus Ilva Marwick, 1927

Hina Marwick, 1927, Thid., p. 602.

Type species (0.1.) Morama pinguis Marwick

Dosina (Hina) cainozoica Tenison-Woods “?

ul. 5, fig, 5

Venus (Chione) cuinogoica Tenison-Woods, 1877.. Proc. Roy, Soc. Tas. for 1876, p, 113.

Chione cainozoicu Tenison-Woods. Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, 9, p. 156, pl. 16,

fig. Sa-b,

Chione cainoscica ‘Lenison-Weods. Johnston, 1888. Geol. Tas, p, 233, pl. 32, fig. &8a,

li-tia.

Chiane aa go Tenison-Woods, Tate and Dennant, 1893, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust. 17,

(1), -p. 225

Chione caimogoica. Tenison-Woods. Tate and Dennant, 1895, id., 19, (1), p. 113.

Chione cainogoica Tate. Pritchard, 1896. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 8, (m.s.), p. 135.

Chiante cainozoicd Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree. Geol. Surv, Vict. 1, (2), p. 125, 147.

Callanuitis cainosoica T. Woods, N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 55, p. 157.

Diagnosis—Somewhat globose, ornamented with numerous fine concentric

threads, which at intervals are raised and lamellous; lamellae close and more

() Listed in Part I, p 57, as Antigona (Hina) cainozvinn.

numerous at anterior and posterior margins, thin and fragile; inter-lamellar

threads are fine and equidistant. Inner ventral margin very finely crenulate ;

antero-dorsal margin also very finely crenulate, but not continuously with the

ventral margin.

Dimensions—Length 22, height 18, inflation (both valves) 17 mm.

Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania.

Location of Holotype—Hobart Museum, T asmania.

Observations—A. single left valve from Weymouth's Bore belongs to this

species which has been recorded also from Abattoirs and Croydon Bores, The

Weymouth’s Bore specimen, like a large adult specimen from the lower beds at

Muddy Creek in the British Museum, shows a strong tendency to fine radial

ornament, generally visible between the lirae in the adult portion of the shell,

but most obvious on the under side of the lamellae where they have not been

broken, The lamellae and lirae become almost frilled where the radials are well

developed. The species is evidently long-ranging and very widespread; it has

been recorded from almost every locality in Victoria, South Australia, and Tas-

matiia, from Oligocene to Miocene, and survives to the Pliocene of the Dry Creek

Sands,

Subfamily CIRCINAE

Genus Garrariuw Rodding, 1798

Gafrariion Roding ex Bolten, 1798, Mus. Bolt., p. 176i,

Type species (s.d. Dall, 1902) Venns pectinata Linné

Gafrarium perornatum N. IT. Woods

pl. 6, fig: 9

Gartariuny herortari N. H. Woods, 1931. ‘Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust, 55, p, 148, pl. 7,

g. 7, 8

Diagnosis—Fairly small, transversely ovate. Umbones at anterior third.

Sculpture of fine curving radials, separated by linear interspaces agulated and

diverging at anterior third and also at posterior third; curving concavely towards

dorsal margit.

Dimensions—length 9-6, height 7*5 mm.

Moterial—Holotype ; one left valve, Weymouth’s Bore, five specimens Lower

Beds, Muddy Creek, L9888, one specimen L10587, B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—? Oligocene to Miocene; Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Southern Australia,

Subfamily CHIONINAE

Genus Tawera Marwick, 1927

Tawera Marwick, 1927. Trans. N.Z. Inst., 57, p. 613

Type species (o.d,) Venus spissa Deshayes

Tawera pernitida (N. If. Woods)

pl. 6, fig. 5

Antigona pernitida N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. 55, p. 148, pl. 8, fig. 1, 2,

Antigone dichia Tate (2?) = Anétigona pernitida Hooper Woods. Cotton, 1947. Rec. 5S, Aust.

Mus., 8, (4), p. 634.

Diagnosis —Transversely subovate, sculptured with fine, sharp, concentric

raised threads, about 5. per mm., becoming lamellose towards the ventral border,

with fine radial threads crossing the interspaces. Iriner ventral margin finely

erenulate all round except above post-dorsal hinge area.

Dimenstons—Length 12-3, height 9°4 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T 1673.

Observations—Cotton has with some justification queried the identity of

the above species with Tawera diciua (Tate). The two species are similar in

general characters, but the radial sculpture is dominant in dictua, while the con-

centric sculpture is dominant in pernitida, Concentric sculpture in pernitida is

more regular and sharper. T. dictua is a narrower shell than pernitida, the teeth

are differently shaped, the umbo is higher and more inflated in pernitida, the hinge

is shorter and broader in pernitida. Tt may be that habitat and mode of preserva-

tion account for the differences, which are none the less apparent.

Material—Holotypes, and paratypes, Abattoirs Bore, numerous specimens

Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs and [indmarsh Bores.

Tawera gallinula (Lamarck)

pl. 3, fig. 20

Venus gallinula Lamarck, 1818. Hist, Nat. Anim. s. Vert., 5, p. 592.

Chione propingua T. Woods, var. Tate, 1890. Trans. Roy. Soc, 5, Aust., 13, (2), p. 175.

Chione propinana T, Woods, var. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol, Surv. Viet, L, (2),

Antigona propingivat Tate. N. H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. $5, p 151 (pars).

Diaguosis—Elongate-ovate, somewhat truncate both anteriorly and posteri-

orly, sculptured with thin, erect lamellae, Whitish, with reddish-brown angular

lines,

Dimenstons—Length 35 mm.

Type Locality—King Island, Tasmania; Recent,

Location of Holotype—Mus. Hist, Nat., Paris.

Observations—A single juvenile right valve from Abattoirs Bore formerly

classified as Antigona propingua is here referred to the species gallinula,

Attention is here drawn to the fact that the figures for the two specics

Tuwera gallinula and Tawera lagopus in Cotton and Godfrey's “The Mollusca

of South Australia” have been transposed,

Material—One valve, Abattoirs Bore. Seven complete specimens. locality

not specified, and eight complete specimens, Tasmania, B.M. Coll,

Stratigraphical Rangr—Dry Creek Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—Southern Australia frony New South Wales to

Western Australia.

Tawera incurvilamellata sp. nov.

pl. 3, fg. 18, 19

Ptgine fropimyrie Tate. N, Tl, Woads, 1931, Trans, Roy. Suc. S. Aust, 65, (1), p. 151

pars).

Diagnosis—A fairly flat Tawera with wnibo at anterior two-fifths sculptured

with raised lamellae about 7 mma. apart, each meurved towards the ventral miurgit.

Radials obsolete.

Description of Holotype (right valve)—Shell fairly small, elongate-oval,

inequilateral, somewhat attenuated at the post-ventral edge, fairly flat. Umbho

prosogyrate, moderately inflated, incurved, situated about two-fifths from anterior

margin. Prodissoconch smooth, shining small. Early part of shell with twelve

slightly raised lamellae, five per mm, followed in adult shell hy twelve raised

Jamellac, about three -quarters of a mm. apart, rounded and incutved towards

the ventral margin. Towards the posterior border the lamellae flatten out and

become somewhat waving as they converge towards the margin. Underneath the

overhanging portions, ou the ventral side of each lamella are obsolete tadial

riblets. These extend faintly into the interspaces and ate visible only in reflected

light, Interspaces with frequent insignificant gtowth striae. Hinge typical of

Tazwera, well developed. Inner margin finely crenulate. Pedal retractor well

marked, separated from anterior adductor. Pallial sinus deep, ronnrled,

Dimensions—-Length 13°6, height 9-5, inflation (one valve) 3 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide. F15t39,

Observations—This shell is unlike any other examined. In general shape it

bears resemblance to the foregoing shell classified as T. gallinula, from which it

differs in its very characteristic concentric sculpture which distinguishes it also

from the so-called “Chione” propinqua of the “Kalimnan.” A larger example

reaches a length of 20 mm.

Material—The holotype and 11 paratypes, Abattoirs Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dty Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide.

Genus PracaMen Iredale, 1925

Plocamen Iredale, 1925, Rec, Aust. Mus. 14, (4), p. 225

Type species (monotypy) Pectunculus fasciatus Da Costa

Placamen subroborata (Tate)

pl. 4, fig. 2, 3

Chione subrobarate Tate, 1887b: Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p, 156, pl. Ey fig. 17.

Chione subroborata Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. ;

Chione subroborata Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict,, 1, (2), p. 125,

139, 146,

Clausinella subroborate Tate. N. H. Woods, 193L Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p, 151.

Placamen subroborata Tate. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938. S. Aust., p. 238.

Diagnosis—Trigonal, broad in front, subrostrate posteriorly. Sculpture of

about 15 concentric lamellae which are rather thick and recurved except on

posterior slope where they are erect.

Dimensions-—Length 25, height 24, umbo to post-ventral angle 25, inflation

(both valves) 14 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1169,

Material—Five valves, Weymouth’s Bore, all juveniles; 11 valves, including

the figured hypotype Muddy Creek, Victoria, No, L6605, 9884, 14830, 125790;

4 yalves, Bairnsdale, L355, B.M. Coll.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Genus BAssina Jukes-Brown 1914

Bassina Jukes-Brown, 1941. Proc. Mal, Soc., 11, p. 81.

(Callanaitis Tredale, 1917. td. 12, (6), p. 329.)

Type species (o-d.) Venus paucilamellata Sowerby

Bassina allpotti (Tenison-Woods)

Venus allporti Tenison-Woods, 1876a. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. for 1875, p. 26, pl 3, fig. 10.

Chione allporti Tenison-Woods. Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p. 154.

Chione allporti T. Woods. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol, Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p- 125,

Bassina wllporit T. Woods. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 151.

Diagnosis—Oyately oblong, anterior subangulated, sculptured with 12 distant

lamellae.

Dimensions—Length 29, height 19 mm.

Type Locality—Table Cape, Tasmania.

Location of Holotype—Hobart Museum.

Material—Two valves, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Oligocene to Pliocene. ]

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Genus Timocitea Brown, 1827

Timoclea Brown, 1827, I. Conch, GB, & T, pl. 19, fig, 12.

Type species (monotypy) P’enus ovata Pennant

Subgenus Vuremorpa Iredale

Feremelpa Iredale, 1930, Rec. S, Aust. Mus, 17, p. 397.

(Glycydonta Cottou, 1936, Rec, S. Aust, Mus, 5, (4), p. 503.)

Type species (monotypy) Veremalpa cthica Iredale

Timoclea (Veremolpa) protomari¢a (Cotton)

Glycydonta protamarica Cotton, 1936. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (4), p. 504, text fig. 1.

Diagnosis—Hinge with twelve Glycymerid-like teeth on cither side of the

three cardmals; sculpture of about twelve concentric lamellae, with mumerous

regular, subordinate radial ribs which fimbriate the concentric lamellae.

Donensions—Length 9, height 7*8, inflation 5-4 mim.

Type Locality—Torrensville Bore 490 fect; Pliocene (cited in original

description as 49:0 [cet, Upper Pliocene).

Location of Ilolotype—St. Aust. Mus., Reg. No. 1912888.

Observations—This species has apparently not been found since it was

described from Torrensville Hore. It is obyiously yery close indeed to the Indo-

Pacific “Venus” murica Linné which Cotton cited as the type species of Glycy-

donta, ‘The alleged differences between this genus and Lredale’s Ieremelpa scem

(o be ontogenetic and hardly of gencric magnitude,

Muterial—Holotype.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Torrensville Bore, Adclaide District,

Genus. Culoneryx Iredale, 1924

Chioneryx Tredale, 1924, Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 49, (3), 197, p. 210,

Type species (0.d,) Venus striatisstina Sowerby

Chioneryx dennanti (Chapman and Crespin)

pl. 4, fig. 19

Chione striatissima Sowerby, Tate, 1890. Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust. 13, (1), m. 175.

Chione striatissima Sowerby. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Sucw Vict., 1, (2), p. 146.

Antigona Somers Chapman and Crespin, 1928. Rec. Geol. Sury. Viet., 5, (1), p. 104, ph 12,

if. tee

Antigons striatissima “ate, N, IL Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. 151,

tnitiyona dennanty Chapman and Crespin. Crespin, 1943. Min. Res. Sury, Bull, 9, p. 92.

Dyegnosis—Fairly small, umbo at anterior third; adult shell with about 22

waving, slirhtly raised concentric lamellae, about 16 per cm, Interspaces crossed

hy strung flattish radial riblets, equal in width to the spaces between them,

undulation on the lamellae corresponding to the riblets, and somewhat irregulat

and undulating concentric growth lines crowding the interspaces between the

lamellae,

Diniensions—Length 25, height 19, inflation (both valves) 12 mm,

Type Lecality—Jommy's Point, Lakes Entrance, Victoria; Kalimnan.

Location of Holotype-——Dernant Coll,, National Museum, Melb.

Description of Hypotype (right valve)—Shell small, solid, transversely oval,

umbo prosogyrate, situated one-third of length of shell from anterior margin,

somewhat elevated and tumid, incurved, Predissoconch polished, smooth except

for concentric threads, of which there are five, and faint incipient radial riblets,

Adult shell with 22 waving, slightly raised concentric lamelfae, about 16 per em.

Interspaces crossed by strong flatttsh radial riblets, equal in width to the spaces

between them, the undulations on the lamellae corresponding to the riblets, and

somewhat irregular and undulating concentric growth lines crowding the inter-

spaces between the Ianiellae. Latnule large, nearly smooth, elongate-cordate,

bourne hy a sharply incised line cutting across the concentric lamellae and

rai

growth lines which continue weakly uver the Iunule. Escutcheon narrow, long,

bounded by a slight ridge. Hinge teeth widely divergent, consisting in the right

valve of a small, entire, narruw, inoderately strong anierior (3a) parallel to the

lunular margin, a median triangular grooved (1), and a strong posterior

cardinal, raised atid grooved (3b). Pallial sinus short, rounded. Pedal retractor

small, separated from the anterior adductor.

Internal margin crenate, with the exception of the posterior dorsal eige,

Dimensions—Length 15:3, height 13-2, inflation (one valve) 4 mm, (left

yalve), Hinge wilh a high posterior cardinal (4b), joined to the nymph, sub-

triangular moderate and unequally divided median (2b), and an entire, high,

narrowly-iriatigular diverging anterior cardinal (2a),

Dimensions—Length 11-1, height 8-8, inflation (one valve) 2-9 mm,

Material—Numerous specimens, Weymouth’s Bore,

Observations—This shell has previously been identified as Menus striatissina

Sowerby (= Erycina cardicides Lamarck) the type species of Iredale’s gentis

Chioncryx. Iredale (1924, p. 210) has puinted out that in transferring Erycina

cardivides to Venus, Sowerby changed the specific name to striatissima, since the

name cardioides was already preoccupied in Venus by Lamarck’s Menus cardioides

(1818, p, 590). With creation of a new genus Chioncryx for the species, Iredale

advocated a reversion to Lamarck’s name cardivides, The species is now listed

in Australian literature as Chioneryx cardioides (Lamarck) (Cotton and Godfrey,

1938, p, 240, et al.). it must be pointed out, however, that the name cardiaides

is a stsppressed homonym for this species, and carnet be used again (Int, Rules

Zool. Nomen., Art 36), Secondly, there has not been universal acceptance of

full generic status ior Chionerye. In (Thiele, 1935, p. 890) Chioneryx ts given

subgeneric rank tinder Menus, which still leaves cardioides as a homonym. In view

of these factors, the specific name strialissima should be used as formerly and

curdioides kept suppressed.

The fossil species dennantt is superficially like sfriadtssima particularly ta the

external sculpture, but the shape of the shell generally differs in its grearer relative

height, and it is only occasionally subfostrate; the umbones are higher and more

inflated; the marginal crenulations are finer in denuanti. The hinge of dennantt

jis intermediate between Tawerm and Chioneryx, the teeth being less divergent

than in Chioneryx, but nearer to Chioneryx than to Tawera; the strength nf the

sadial sculpture is intermediate between the two, but nearer ta that of Chioneryr

than to that of Tawiere. Matwick (1927, p. 613) has suggested that Chioneryx

may he a Recent development of the Tawera stock. Present evidence strongly

supports this and dennants is undoubtedly antecedent to Chionerys in the Tawera-

Chioneryx lineage.

Tn shape the species dewnanti is yariahle; ratio length: height varies from

1:26 in the longer shells to 1-15 in the relatively higher shells.

Materials—About 70 valves, Weymoutl’s Bore, 4 valves Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range-—Phucene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippdand, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Subfamily TAPETINAR

Genus Papara Roding, 1798

Paphia Réding ex Roltnn, 1798 Mus. Bolt, p. 175,

Type species (sd. Dall, 1902) Paphia alapapilionis Roading

Paphia sp.

Paphie fabagelloides Tate. N- 1f. Wonds, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, p, 151,

Observations—A Tate manuscript name appears to have been used for a

specimen from Abattoirs Bore. As the single specimen so named has been

damaged and description is impossible, the name should be removed From the

list of species occurring in the Dry Creek Sands.

Genus VENERuPIS Lamarck, 1818

Penerupis Latnarck, 1818. Anim. s. vert., 5, p. 506.

Type species (s.d. Children, 1823) Venus perforans Montagu

Venerupis paupertina Tate

Venerupis paupertina Tate, 1887b. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 9, p. 162, pl. 14, fig. 15.

Venerupis paupertina Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv, Vict, 1, (2), p. 139.

Venerupis paupertina Tate, Cotton, 1947. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, (4), p: 654.

Diagnosis—Umbo large, conspicuous, cordate, lunule well defined; sculp-

tured with flat radial ribs equal to the interspaces.

Dimensions—Length 12, height 7, inflation (both valves) 5 mm.

Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holatype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T 1206B.

Material—One broken specimen, Abattoirs Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Superfamily TELLINACEA

Family SANGUINOLARIIDAE

Genus Garr Schumacher, 1817

Gart Schumacher, 1817, Ess. Nouv. Syst. Test, pp. 44, 131,

(Psammobia Lamarck, 1818. Hist. Nat. Anim., s, Ver., 5, p. 511.)

Type species (tautonymy) Gari vulgaris Schumacher = Tellina gari Linné

Gari hamiltonensis (Tate)

pl. 4, fig. 17

Psammobia [amiltonensis Tate, 1885. Southern Science Record, p. 4 (fide Tate, 1887).

Psammobia Hamilinnensis Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 9, p. 167, pl. 16, fig. 15.

Gari ,hamiliomensis Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus. 1, p. 377.

Geri hamiltonensis Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict., 1, (2), p. 125, 139.

Psammobia hanviltonensis Tate. NH. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust. 55, p. 154

Gori hamiltonensis Tate. Crespin, 1943, Min, Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93.

Diagnosis—-Attenuated anteriorly, obliquely truncated posteriorly, post-

dorsal margin gently sloping, post-ventral margin roundly curved to mieet

oblique posterior margin.

Dimensions—Length 31, height 15 mm.

Type Locality—Upper Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Pliocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1190A.

Observations—Both this and the following species have been found jn the

Abattoirs Bore only.

Material—The figured hypotype, Abattoirs Bore; 10 topotypes, B.M-. Coll,

Nos. L4819, 19891, 125789,

Stratigraphical Range—? Miocene; Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Gari aequalis (Tate)

Psammobia aequalis Tate, Southern Science Record, Jan, 1885, p. 4 (fide Tate, 1887).

Psammobia aequalis Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Atist, 9, p. 168, pl. 16, fig. 10.

Gari aequalis Tate. Harris, 1897, Cat. Tert. Moll, Brit. Mus. 1, . 378.

Gart aequalis Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 125, 1349

Psaminobia uequalis Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc, 5. Aust., 55, p 151.

Diagnosis—Roundly truncated posteriorly, umbo medial, depressed, no

posterior keel.

Dimensions—Length 22, height 11 mm.

Type Lacalitv—Upper Beds, Muddy Creck, Victoria; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1189B,

“73

Material—Seven topotypes B.M. Coll., Nos. L.4819, L.9891.

Stratigraphical Range—Miacene and Pliocene, ,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Family TELLINIDAE

Genus Macoma Leach, 1819

Macotia Leach, 1819, in Ross, Voy, Dis, Baff. Bay. Appendix 2, pl. 12,

Type species (monotypy) Macoma tenera Leach = Tellina calcarea Linné

Macoma ralphi (Finlay)

pl. 4, fig. 9, 10

Tellina be grad? Tate, 1887b Trans. Roy, Soc, S, Aust. 9, p. 166, pl, 16, fig. Sa-b, 9a-b,

19,

Teltina aequilavera Tate. Tate and Dennant, 1893. td. 17, {1}, p. 225.

Teliina cequilatera Tate. Harsis, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll Brit. Mus., 1, p, 187.

Tetlina aequilatera Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 127, 139,

Teliina ralphi (Finlay, 1927). Trans. N.Z. Inst., 57, p. 530. nom, mut. for aequilatera)-

Diagnosis—Somewhat convex, posi-dorsal margin straight, more steeply

sloping than in front. Anterior margin broadly rounded, slightly incurved;

posterior narrower, abruptly and narrowly rounded at the edge. A shallaw and

somewhat broad radial sulcus from the umbo to ihe post-yentral border, produc-

ing a slight insinuation at the border.

Ditnensions—Length 52, height 35, inflation (one valve) 8+5 mm.

Type Locality—Upper Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Pliocene,

Lacation of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll,, Univ. of Adelaide, T 1213A,

Observations—The species occurs rarely in the Miocene only at Camper-

down and near Morgan, and has a sparse though wide distribution in the Lower

Fliocene of Victoria.

Muaterial—Two topotypes, No. 9863, B.M. Coll., 3 valves Weymouth’s Bore,

2 valves Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene,

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Atstralia.

Genus Tenia Linné, 1758

Telling Linné, 1758, Syst, Nat., ed. 10, p. 674.

Type species (s.d. Children, 1823) Tellina radtata Linné.

Tellina masoni Tate

Telling masoni Tate, 1887b. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 9, p. 165, pl, 16, fig. Gab.

Teliina yuisoni Tate. Tate and Dennant, 1893, id. 17, (1), p. 225.

Trllina masont Tate, Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. 387.

Teliina masoni Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol, Sury. Viet. 1, (2), p. 127.

Tellina masoni Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust, 55, p. 151.

TeNina masoni Tate, Crespin, 1943, Min. Res. Surv. Bull, 9, p, 94,

Diagnosis—Transversely oblong, rather convex, umbo situated at posterior

third, Anterior dorsal margin almost horizontal, anterior margin elotngately

rounded. Post-dorsaf margin oblique, narrowly truncated at posterior. Ventral

margin rounded, arched anteriorly and slightly incurved at the umbo-postventral

edge. Left valve with a shallow concave depressjon behind the slight posterior

carination.

Dimensions—Length 18, height 11, inflation (both valves) 6 mm.

Type Locatity—Lower beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Miocene.

location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1212A.

Observations—Vhis species was formerly recorded only from the Miocene,

It has, however, been found in the Lower Pliocene of Gippsland (Crespin, 1943,

p. 4), and in addition to the record of its occurrence from Abattoirs Bore. it is

here recorded rather doubtfully from Weymouth’s Bore, a single small valye

being obtained.

Material—14 valves Abattoirs Bore. Three topotypes, Muddy Creek, Vict.,

1.9865, B.M. Coll.; one left valve, Weymouth’s Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene and Pliocene. . ;

Geogruphical Distribution—Gippsiand, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Tellina albinelloides (Tate)

pl. 5, fig, 12

Tellina albinelloides Tate, 1887 b. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p 164, pl. 16, fig, 4a-b.

Tellina olbinelloides Tate. Harris, 1897, Cat. Vert. Moll, Brit. Mus., 1, p. 386.

Tellina sploswelinides Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 139,

147.

Diagnosis—Inequivalve, umbones subcentral, right valve markedly depressed,

Anterior-dorsal slope straight, inclined, anterior margin elongately rounded ;

posterior side rostrated, broader than anterior, dorsal inargin less oblique, edge

abruptly truncated. Sculpture of thin, narrow imbricating striae raised into thin,

narrow, imbricating lamellae on the angulated posterior slope.

Dimensions—Length 44, height 22, inflation (both valves) 5:5 mm.

Type Locality—-Upper Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Uniy of Adeliade, T 1211.

Material—Four complete, 2 broken valves, Weymouth’s Bore 2. topotypes,

B.M. Coll., No. 9864.

Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria ~ Adelaide, South Australia,

Genus Psrunarcoracta Bertin, 1878

Pseudarcopagia Bertin 1878. Nouy. Arch, Mus. His. Nat., Paris, p. 204.

Type species (s.d. Cotton and Godfrey, 1935) Tellina decussate Lamarck

= Pseudarcopagia victoriae Gathft aid Gabriel

Pseudarcopagia detrita N. H. Woods

pl 6, fig. 2

Pseudoarcopagia detrita N. EH. Woods, 1931. Trans. Rey, Soc. S. Anst., 55, pl 149, pi. 9,

fig, 9 Clapsus calami for Psendarcopayw.

Diagnosis—Trigonal, inequilateral, broadly rounded anteriorly, shorter and

somewhat truncated posteriorly, ventral margin straight. Sculpture of numerous

fine radial striae bilurcating ventrally.

Dimensions—Length 4°8, height 4-2 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Mhocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T 1677.

Material—Two right valyes, Weymouth’s Hore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands,

Geographical Distribution—-Abattoirs and Weytouth's Dores, Adelaide

District.

Family SEMELIDAE

Genus Syme Schumacher, 1817

Semele Schumacher, 1817. Ess. vers. Test. p. 165, pl. 18, fig. 2.

(chnphidesma Latnarck, 1818 Anim. s. vert., 5, p. 490.)

Type species (monotypy) Semele reticulata Schumacher

= Telling proficua Pulteney

Semele vesiculosa (Tate)

Semele vesiculosa ‘Tate, 18876. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 9, p. 169, pl. 16, fig. 12.

Semele vesiculosa. Tate. Tate and Dennant, 1893, qd. 17, (1), p. 225.

Semele wesiculosa Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., (1), p. 388,

Semele vesiculosa Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Viet., 1, (2), p. 127.

Semele vesiculosa Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans, Rey. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. {51

Diagnosis—Inequilateral, somewhat inflated, anterior side roundly produced,

posterior side obtuse-angled. Right valve less convex than left. Post dorsal margin

slightly arched, oblique; ventral margin broadly arched anteriorly and medially,

slightly insinuated posteriorly,

Dimensions—Length 9, height 6, inflation (both valves) 5 mm.

Type Locality—Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Miocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T1199.

Material—Two valves, Hindmarsh Bore 4 toputypes, Muddy Creck, BM.

Coll., Nos. 9862.

Siratigraphical Range—Miocene; Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Dtstribution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria — Adelaide, South

Australia:

Family DONACIDAE

Genus Sorecurtts Blainville, 1824

Solecurtus Blainville, 1824. Dict. Sci, Nat., 32, p. 351.

Type species (s.d. Deshayes, 1829) Solen strigilatus Linné.

Solecurtus dennanti Tate

Solecurttes dennanti Tate. 1887 b. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 9, p. 181, pl. 16, fig. 17,

Solenocurius dennant Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), p. 126.

Solecurtus dennanli Tate. N. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy; Soc. S. Aust., 55, p. 181,

Diagnosis—Moderately convex, umbo situated at anterior third; anterior

and posterior extremities approximately equally rounded, anterior dorsa! margin

slightly incurved, post-dorsal margin nearly straight, gently sloping and slightly

narrowed towards the posterior margin. Sculpture of concentric growth lines,

fine radial striae on the anterior and posterior and oblique distant lines about

1 mm. apart, which are nearly straight in the medial portion of the valve and

curve gently to the post-dorsal slope.

Dimensions—Length 29-5, height 12°5 mm.

Type Locality—Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Lower Miocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T 342.

Material—Nine fragments, Abattoirs Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene; Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distytbution—Port Phillip Bay, Victoria —- Adelaide, South

Australia,

Solecurtus subrectangularis N. H. Woods

pl. 6, fig, 10

Selscuetty subrectangularis N, FH. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, p, 149, pl. 8

g 7,

Diagnosis—Small thin, slightly gaping, umbo situated at anterior two-fifths.

Posterior side broad, expanded, post-dorsal margin horizontal and parallel to

ventral border which is also horizontal; posterior margin truncate-rounded.

Anterior narrower; anterior dorsal margin sloping at angle of about 30°, then

steeply descending to the ventral border at the anterior margin, Surface sculp-

tured with coarse concentric growth lines and crowded fine radial striae bifurcat-

ing towards the ventral margin,

Dimensions—Length 7-7, height 4-6 mm.

Type Locality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location af Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T 1684.

Material—Two excellently preserved right valves, Hindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creek Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Abattoirs and Hindmarsh Bores, Adelaide.

Superfamily MACTRACEA

Family MACTRIDAE

Genus Macrra Linné, 1767

Muactra Linné, 1767. Syst. Nat. ed, 12, p, 1,125,

Type species (s.d, Fleming, 1818) Afactra stiultornme | inné

Subgenus Erecrromacrra Iredale, 1930

Electromactra Iredale, 1930 .Rec. Aust. Mus, 17, (9), p. 400.

Type species (c.d.) Maclra parkestana Hedley

Mactra (Electromactra) howchiniana Tate

pl. 4, fis. 8

Mactra howchiniana Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy, Soc. 5. Aust, 9,.p. 171, pl 1%, fig, 3a, 3h

Muctra howchiniana Tate, Tate and Dennant. fd. 17, (1), p. 225,

Mactra howchiniuna Tate. Harris, 1897. Cat, Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. 380.

Mactra kowchimanu Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict. 1, (2), p. 126,

Mactra howehiniana Tate. N. H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust, 55, p. 151,

Mactra howchiniana Tate, Crespin, 1943. Min. Res, Surv. Bull, 9, p. 93.

Diagnosis—Elongate-ovate, attenuated at both ends, umbo at about three-

cighths from anteriot ; anterior-dorsal margin slightly concave, post-dorsal margin

slightly arched, ventral margin almost straight medially, ascending more rapidly

posteriorly than anterforly. Posterior side somewhat produced.

Dimensions—Length 41, height 23, inflation (both valves) 12 mmm.

Type Locality—-Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, Victoria; Miocene,

Location of [Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll,, Univ of Adelaide, T 1195,

Observotions—Tate (1887h, p. 171) has noted that large numbers of young

shells of this species are not uncommon in the calciferous sand-rock of the River

Murray cliffs near Morgan. This may also be said of certain borings in the

Adelaide District, In both Abattoirs and Ilindmarsl Bores, very many juvenile

exaimples were recovered, although in Weymouth’s Bore not one valve was found.

In other borings with a less numerous molluscan tauna, the species appears in

sinall numbers, but with relative constancy. The species is long-ranging aud

widely occurring; in the Gippsland area it has been recorded from the “Mitchell-

ian” and “Kalimnan” only,

Material—Two specimens Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, 1.9880, B.M. Coll,

numerous specimens Hindmarsh and Abattoirs Rores,

Stratigraphical Ranye—l.ower Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographicol Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Genus ANArEzs.A Dall, 1895

Anapella Dall, 1895, Proc. Mal, Soc, Lond, 1, (5), p. 213.

Type species (o.d.) Anapa triquetra Hanley

Anapella variabilis Tate

Anapa varinbilis Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 9, p. 172, pi. 17, Gx. Sab

Anapella variabilis Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Ree, Geol, Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p, 139.

Anapella variabilis Tate, Cotton, 1947, Rec, 5, Aust, Mus., 8, (4), p. 655.

Diagnosis—-Ovately trigonal, inequilateral, posterior side longer, bluntly

founded, anterior side rounded, front dorsal slope slightly incurved.

Dimensions—Length 17:5, height 13°5, inflation (both valves) 11 mm.

Type Locality—Oyster Banks, Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay, South Aus-

tralia; Pliocene,

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ of Adelaide, T 1209.

Materiai—Two valves, Holden’s Bore, 355-380 feet.

Stratigraphical Range—South Australian Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Aldinga Bay and Adelaide, South Ausiralia.

Genus ZENATIOpsts Tate, 1879

Zenatiopsis Tate, 1879. Trans. Phil. Soc. Adel. for 1878/9, p. 129

Type species (monotypy) Zenatiopsis angustula Tate

Zenatiopsis angustata Tate

Zenatiopsis angustota Tate, 1879, Teans, Phil. Soc. Adel. for 1878/9, p. 129, pl. 5, Ag. 6

Zenatiopsis angustata Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 9, p. 172.

Zenatiopsis angustata Tate. Harris, 1897, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus. 1, p, 381, p

Zenahopsis angusiata Tate, Dennant and Kitsan, 1903. Rec. Geol, Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p 124,

Zenatiopsis argustate Tate. N. El. Woods, 1931, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 55, p. ISL.

Diagnosis—Compressed, narrowly oblong, anterior side very short, rounded ;

posterior side long, rounded. Umbo anterior, supported internally by a thick rib

extending half way across the valve; narrowly gaping at both ends; cartilege plate

prominent, cardinal teeth distinct. Lateral teeth absent. Sculpture of fine growth

plications and numerous crowded fine striae.

Dimensions—Length 46, height 18, length of anterior side 6 mm.

Type Locality—Upper Beds, River Murray Cliffs, near Morgan; Pliocene.

Location ef Holatype—Tate Mus. Coll., Uniy of Adelaide, T 1205,

Matertal—Portions of three valves, Weymouth’s Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Miocene to Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia.

Suborder ASTHENODONTA

Superfamily MYACEA

Family CORBULIDAE

Genus CorsuLa Bruguiére, 1797

Corbula Brugwiére, 1797, Ency. Meth. vers., 2, pl 230.

(Aloidis Megerle, 1811. Ges. Naturf,, Berlin, Mag, 5, 9, 67.)

(Notocorbula Tredale, 1930, Rec, Aust. Mus., 17, p 404.)

Type species (s.d. Schmidt, 1818) Corbala suleata Lamarch

Corbula ephamilla Tate

pl. 4, fig. 4,5, 6 7

Corbula sulcafa Laroarck, McCoy, 1865. Ann. Mag, Nat. Hist, ser 3, 16, p 114.

Corbula sulcata Lamarck, Tenison-Woods, 1876. Pap. Roy. Soc, of Tas. for 1875, p. 16.

Corbula sklcate, Lamarck. Etheridge, R., Jr., 1878. Cat, Aust. Ross, , 154

Corbula ephapulla Tate, 1885. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. for 1884, p. 229-

Corbula ephamilla Tate, 1887 b. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust. 9, p. 176, pl. 17, fg. 1da-b, 14.

Corcula ephamilla Tate. Tate and Dennant.. id. 17, (1}, p. 225. j

Corbula ephamilla Tate, Pritchard, 1896. Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict. 8, (1.3,), B, 140,

Corbula ephamilla Tate. Harris 1897. Cat, Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., 1, p. 382,

Conbaie: annie Tate. Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p, 126,

43 .

Corbula ephamilla Tate, N, H, Woods, 1931. Trans. Ray. Sac. S, Aust, $5, p 181.

Aloitis (Notocorbula) ephamilla (Tate). Crespin, 1943. Min. Res, Surv. Bull, 9, p. 91.

_ _ Diagnosis—Solid, very inequivalve; posterior margin obliquely truncated,

Fight valve with more than 20 very thick, rounded prominent concentric ridges,

ridges and interspaces with numerous fine, somewhat irregular concentric striae.

Left valve ovately chee fg nearly flat, pointed posteriorly, surface with

irregular growth striae. Shells easily decorticated, surface after decortication

smooth with only faint ridges.

Dimensions—Length 21, height 16, inflation (hoth valves) 10 mm,

Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs, Morgan, South Australia; Miocene.

Location of Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T. 335.

Observations—The name Corbula was first published in 1797 by Bruguiére

at the head of plate 230 of the Ency, Meth., figuritig several species of the genus,

without specific names or generic description. Roding published the name in 1798

for a genus determined by both Winckworth (March, 1930, p. 15) and Iredale

(June 1930 p. 404) as a synonym of Asaphis Modeer, 1793. Lamarck diagnosed

Corbula of Bruguiére in 1799 (p, 8), the type species C, sulcafa being designated

by Schmidt (1818, p. 17} and tater hy Gray (1847, p. 191), Under earlier

determinations of the International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature Brugtiere’s

genus was invalid, although the name was accompanied by sufficient figures to

make the import obvious. Lamurck’s name then became a homonym of Corbula

Réding, and the next available name was Aloidis of Megerle, <loidis has been

accepted and employed by several authors on these grounds, but by a recent

amendment of the International Rules a genus is valid if introdiiced with an

indication, and Corbula Bruguiére is acceptable under this amendment.

Material—Twelve yalves, Weymouth’s Bore; 1] valves including the hypo-

types figured pl. 4, figs. 4, 5, 7; 22 valves Lower Beds, Muddy Creek, and 8

valves Lower and Upper Beds, Muddy Creek, B,M, Coll,

Stratigraphical Range——Miocene to Upper Pliocene.

Geographical Distribution—Gippsland, Victoria — Adelaide, South Australia,

Corbula adelaidensis nom. nov.

pl. 6, fig. 11

Corbula equivalis N.. H. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soe. §, Aust, $5, p. 150, pl. 8 fig. 8, 9

{non Philppi, 1836).

Iiagnosis—Elongate-ovate, nearly twice as long as high, equivalve; umbo

at anterior third. Posterior side produced, weakly keeled. Surface sculptured

with fine irregular concentric striac,

Dimensions—Length 14-2, height 9-3.

Type Lecality—Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide; Pliocene.

Location of Halotype—Tate Mus. Coll., Univ. of Adelaide, T. 1682,

Observations—The Recent Corbula flindersi (Cotton) is very close to this

species, which is, however, more equivalye atid more strongly sculptured, The

species known as Corbitla coxi Pilshry identified from the Kalininan of Victoria

(and not C_ coxt) is the nearest fossil ally, The name eguivalets N. H. Woods is

a homonym of eguivalvis employed by Philippi for a Cuban shell.

Material—Two valves, Weymouth's Bore; 1 complete specimen, 30 valves

and several portions of valves, [lindmarsh Bore.

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creck Sands.

Geographical Distribution—Adelaide District.

Family HIATELLIDAE

Genus Hiaterca Dandin, 1801

Hiateflla Daudin, 1801, in Bose, Hist. Nat, des. Coq, 3, p, 120,

(Saricava BelWeyuc, 1802. Journ. Phys., 64, p. 5.)

Type species (8.4, Children 1823) Mayu arctica. Linné,

Hiatella australis (Lamarck)

pl 5, fie, 10

Corbula atstrelis Lamarek. 1818 Anim, 3. Vert, 5, p. 495,

Saxicova ausiralis Lamarck, ibid, p. 502.

Saxteava venertformis, ibid, p. 502.

Corbula australis Lamarck, Blainville, 1825, Man, de Malac., p. 561, pl. 78, fig. 3.

Corhiula australis Lamarck 1835, Anim s. vert. (ed. 2 Deshayes and Edwards), 6, p. 138, Ne 1,

Savicava australis Lamarck, Reeve, 1875. Conch, Icon., 20, pl. 2, fig. 8.

Saxicava australis Lamarck, ITutton, 1880. Man. N.Z. Moll, p. 134.

Sanicavs apstralts Lamarck. Tate, 1886. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 8, pl, 12, fig. &

Saxicayva arctica Linné. Tate, 1887, id, 9, p. 178,

Samer meeeg T.inné Dennant and Kitson, 1903, Ree, Geol. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 126,

, 147,

Saricawa australis Lamarck, N, TI. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 151,

Hiatella australis Lamarck, Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Moll, S. Aust, p. 284.

Diagnasis—Usually oyate-oblong, very inequilateral, rugose, posterior side

longer, sculpture of irregular, concentric raised, often anastomosing riblets,

erewded anteriorly, distant and rather lamellar posteriorly.

Dimenstons—Very variable, an ayerage South Australian example measures

length 37, height 26, inflation 22 mm,

Type Locality—King George Sound, W. Aust,; Recent,

Location of Helotype—Mus. Hist. nat. Paris,

Observations—As a footnote to 6, p. 138, of the 1835 edition of Lamarck’s

Anim. s. Vert. Deshayes and Edwards have explained that the shell described

by Lamarck is not. a Corbula but a Saxicava, Lamarck having failed to notice

that the ligament is external, the valves are gaping, irregular, unequal and that

the hinge has a projecting tooth characteristic of most of the Sasicavas. As a

footnote to p. 153, Deshayes and Edwards have expressed the view that Corbula

australis, Saxicuva australis, and S. veneriformis are one and the same species;

as they temark, “such diverse forms deceive the most talented observers, particu-

larly when they have examined only a small number of individuals. The three

species should be united.” Hanley disagreed (1843, p. 51) with this view on the

evidence of Blainville’s figures, but as Deshayes and Mdwards had presumably

seen the actual specimens, authors have followed their opinion, and the specimen

originally described as Corbula australis is accepted as type.

Materiai—Three valves, Hindmarsh Bore,

Straligraphical Range—Miocene to Recent,

Geographical Distribution—Aastralia, New Zealand, America,

Hiatella angasi (ngas)

pL 5, fg. 13, 14

Sasicava angasi Angas. ex Adams, 1865. Proc. Zool, Soc, p. 643,

Saxtcava angastti Adams. Sowerby, 1878. Conch. Icon, 20, pl. 2, fig. 11.

Soxicoua subalata N. UW. Woods, 1931. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 55, p. 151.

Hiatella anrgast Adams. Cotton and Godfrey, 1938. Moll, S. Aust,

Diagnosis—Irregularly rhomboidal, anterior side very short, anterior dorsal

edge steeply sloping to the rounded ventral edge. Post-dorsal margin straight,

posterior side oblong, inflated, gaping, rectangular on posterior edge.

Dimensions—Length 53-5, height 35-5, inflation (both valves), 25 mm.

Type Locality—Oyster banks, Port Lincoln, South Australia, living in sandy

mud at from 5 to 8 fathoms; Recent,

Location of Holotype—British Museum (Natutal History).

Observations—The small species occurring in the Dry Creek Sands was

previously identified by the writer with the Victorian subaluta Gatliff and

Gabriel, Comparison with authentic specimens of subalata and with the holotype

of angasi leads to the opinion that the fossil shells are small examples of ongasi,

They are thicker, stouter, more gaping, less regular than, and lack the granula-

tion characteristic of subalata,

Materiaul—Holotype; 2 complete valves, one portion, Hindmarsh Bore,

Stratigraphical Range—Dry Creck Sands and Recent.

Geographical Distribution—St, Vincent Gulf, South Australia.

SUSPENSE List

The following species have been recorded by Cotton from the Dry Creek

Sands, As the material cannot now be traced, they are not included in the fore-

going list, particularly as in one or two cases there are several species which

closely resemble one another and confusion is possihle.

Giycymeris (eletuceta) subradians Rasedow,

Amusiunt lucens (Tate).

Lithophaga brews (Tate), pl. 6, fig. 13, As the holotype has never been figured,

opportiinity is taken here of doing 50,

Gonimyrtea araea (Tate), The holotype of this species has wholly disintegrated,

and identification is impossible.

Loripes simulans Tate.

“Kellie” planiuscula Tate.

Bassina, paucirugata (Tate),

Plebidonax depressa (Tate).

Brachidontes submenkeanus (Tate)

pl. 6, fig. 12

Mytilus submenkeanus Tate. 1886, Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 8, p. 124.

Mytilus sebmenkeanus Tate, Dennant and Kitson, 1903. Rec, Geoi. Surv. Vict, 1, (2), p. 139.

Brachyodonies submenkeana Tate. Cotton, 1947, Rec, S. Aust, Mus. 8, (4), p, 655,

Diagnosis—Sculptured with about eight broad, longitudinal ribs.

Description of Syntypes—Shell subtrigonal, probably natrow, umbonal-

yentral ridge smooth, posterior to ridge without longitudinal ribs and sculptured

only with growth folds. From ridge to anterior border about eight radiating broad

longitudinal ribs which appear to be slightly tuberculated by the growth folds

towards the ventral border.

Dimensions (estimated from syntypes)—Height 35 mm., width 10 mm.

Type Locality—Hallett Cove; Pliocene.

Location of Syrtypes—Tate Mus. Coll,, Univ. of Adelaide, T 994.

Observations—This species has never been fully described or figured.

Material available for description is still very poor, but opportunity is here taken

of describing the syntypes and of figuring them.

Matertal—Three syntypes.

Stratigraphical Range—Ptiocene.

Geographical Distribution—Hallett Cove, South Australia,

LIST OF REFERENCES

Avams, A, 1852 Descriptions of New Shells from the Curmingian Collection, Proc. Zool,

Soc., 20, p. 90-95, pls. 15, 16

Apams, A. 1862 Description of sore New Species of Limopsis from the Cutmingian Collec.

tion, Proc: Zool, Soc, p. 229-231

Apams, A,, and Ancas, G. F, 1863 Descriptions of New Species of Shells from the Aus-

tralian Seas in the Collection of George French Angas, Proc. Zool. Soc., p. 418-428,

pl.37 ;

Avams, H., and AvAMs, A. 1853-1858. The Genera of Recent Mollusca.

Acassiz, J. L. R. 1846 WNomenclatoris Zoologici Index Universalis, p. viii, 393

Ancas, G. F, 1865 On the Marine Molluscan Fatma of the Province of South Australia,

with a list of all the species knowi up to the present time; together with remarks

on their habits and distribution. Pt. i, Proc, Zocl, Soc, p. 643-657

Awoas, G. F. 1877 Descriptions of one Genus and twenty-five species of Marine Shells

from New South Wales. Proc. Zool. Soc., p. 171-177, pl. 26

Basepow; H, 1902 Descriptions of New Species of Fossil Mollusca from the Miocene

Limestone near Edithburgh Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 26, (2), p. 132

Brexaen, F. 1895 Premiere Note sur le Dévelloppement et la Morphologie de Ia Coquille

chez Jes Lamellibranchs. Pt. i, Bull. Soc. Geol. France, 23, (2), p. 104-154

Bernarn, F, 1896a ibid. pt. 2, id. 24, (1), p. 54-82.

Beenarp, F. 1896b ibid. pt. 3, id. 24, (3), p, 412-449, ,

Bernarn, F, 1897 Etudes Comparatives sur Ja Coquille des Lamellibranches, Condylocardia.

Journ. de Conch, 44, (3), p. 169-207, pl. 6

Bertin V. 1878 Revision des Tellinidés du Museum d'Histoire Naturelle. Nouy, Arels.

Mus. d'Hist. Nat,,. ser. 2, 1, p, 201-361

Brarsvitte, H. M. D, ne 1824 in Dict; ‘Sci, Nat., 32

Bratsvinte, H. M.D, pe 1825 Mantel de Malacologie et de Conchyliologie

Bosc, L. A. G. 1801 Histoire Naturelle des Coquilles

Brown, pie 1831 Ergebnisse meiner naturhisturisch-Gconomischen Reisen. Heidelberg and

selpzig

Brown, T. 1827 Tllustrations of the Conchology of Great Britain and Treland

Brucurerr, J. G. 1792 Encyclopedie Methodique Tlist. Nat. des Vers., 1

Brucurerr, J. G. 1797 ibid., 2.

Catiow, A., and Reeve, LZ, A. 1845 The Concholegist’s Nomenclator, p. viii, 326

Craucet-Irenus, S. 1908 Fatuna Malacologica Mariana. Pt- ii, Pal, Ital, 14, p, 1-03, pla. 1-12.

Capmany, F. 1911 A Revision of the Species of Limopsis in the Tertiary of Southern

Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Viet, 23, (2), (ns), p. 419-432, pls. 83485

Caarman, F. 1915 Report on a Collection of Fossils made by Dr. A. Wade from the

Cainozoic Series of South Australia. Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Buil., 4. App. 2, p 44-50

Caarman, F. 1916 Cainozoic Geology of the Mallee and other Victorian Bores., Rec, Geol,

Surv. Vict. 3, (4) ;

Cuarman F, and Cresein 1, 1933 New and Rare Tertiary Mollusca from Deep Barings

in Gippsland, Victoria, Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict, 46, {1), (1.5.}, & 66-7, pl 5 \

CHAPMAN, F., Crespin, L, and Keates, R. A. 1928 The Sorrento Bore, Morningtent Penin-

sula, Rec. Geol. Sury. Vict, §, (1), 195 pp. 12 pls. . ,

CuarMan, F,, and Gaswier, C. H, 1914 Description of New and Rare Fossils obtained

by Deep Boring in the Mallee. Part 2, Mollusca. Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict, 26, (2),

(u.s.), pp. 301-330, pls. 24-28 i 4

CHarman, F. and Stnevetox, F. A. 1925 A Revisioti of the Cainozolc Species of Glycy-

meres in Southern Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict. 37, (1), (ns), pp. 18-60, pls 14

Crarman, F. and Srvcteton, F. A. 1927 Descriptive Notes on Tertiary Mollusca from

Fyansford and other Australian localities. Part 1. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict, 39, (2),

{ms}, pp. 113-124, pls. 10-11 .

Caavan, A 1937-8 Essai critique de classification des Lucines. Journ. de Conch., al, (2),

vp. 133-153; (3), pp. 198-216; (4), pp, 257-282; 82, (1), op. 59-130

CHAVAN, erent Sur deux nouveaux Groupes de Carditidae. Journ. de Conclt, 84, (1),

pp. Y7-102

Cnavan; A, 1954 Dénominations stipraspécifiques de Mollusques modifies ou navvells.

Comp. rend. séances Soc, Geol. France, 12

Crenu, J.C 1842-53 Illustrations Conchyliologiques

Crrcupken, J. G. 1822-4 Lamarck’s Genera of Shells, Quart, Journ. Sei, Lit. Arts, 14,

pp, 64-86 (1882), pp. 298-322 (1823); 15, pp, 23-52 (1823); pp. 216-258 (1823);

16, pp, 49-79 (1823) ) pp. 241-264 (1824)

Conwan, T. A. 1867a Descriptions of New Genera and Species of Fossil Shells. Amer.

Journ. Conch, 3, pp. 8-16.

Conran, T. A. 1867b Description af a New Genus of Astartidae, Amer. Journ, Conch,

3, p. 19

Cossmann, M, 1904 Fatine Eocenique du Cotentin (Mollusques}, Se Article. Bull, Soc

Geol. Normandie, 23, pp. 11-30, 5 pls,

CossMANN, Ms wee Rectifications de Nomenclature, Rev. Crit, de Paleozool, 16, (3),

pp. 213-

Cossmann, M, 19126 Stir I'Eyolution des Trigonies. Ann. de Paleo, 7, (2)

Corton, B.C. 1936 A New Fossil Biyalve Molluse from South Atistralia. Rec, $, Aust,

Mus, 5, (4), pp. 503-504

Corton, B, C, 1947 Some Tertiary Fossil Molluscs from the Adelaidean Stage (Pliocene)

of South Australia, Ree, S. Aust, Mus, 8 (4), pp. 653-670

Corton, B. C., atid Goprrey, F. K. 1938 The Molluscs of South Australia. Port 1. The

Pelecypoda. Handb. Brit. Sci. Guild

Cox, I, R. 1929 Notes on the Post-Miocene Ostreidae and Pectinidae of the Red Sea

Region, with zemarks an the geological Significance of their distribution Proc, Malac.

Soc., 18, (4), pp. 165-209

Cresrin, I, 1943 The Stratigraphy of the Tertiary Marine Rocks in Gippsland, Victoria

in oo Dept. Supp. Shipp. Min Res Sury, Rull, 9, (Pal. ser. 4) (mimeo-

grapher

Creseix, I, 1950 Some Tertiary Pelecypoda from the Lakes Entrance Oil Shaft, Gipps-

land, Victoria. Prac. Roy, Soc, Vict, 60, (t1.9.), pp. 149-156, pls, 14-17

Cuvier, G. U. C, FD, 1798 Tableau elementaire de histoire waturelle des animaux.,

Mm xvi, 710, 14 pls, ,

pa Cosra, FE. M. 1778 Historia Naturalis Testaceorum Britanniae

Darr, W. H. 1895 Synopsis of a Review of the Genera of Recent and Tertiary Mactridae

and Mesodermatidae. Proc. Malac. Soc., 1, (5), pp. 203-213

Dat, W. H, 1901 Synopsis of the Lucinacea and of the American Species, Proc. U.S.

Nat. Mus,, 23, pp, 779-833, pls. 39-42

Derrance; M. J. L. 1821 Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles, 23, yp. 169-170

Detesserr, B. 1841 Recueil de Coguilles décrites par Lamarck

Dennanr, J. 1889 Notes om the Muddy Creek Beds, with briel Remarks on other Ter

tiary Strata of South-western Victoria. Trans, Roy, Soc, S. Anst., 11. pp. 30-59

Drvsant, J., and Kitson, A, E, 1903 Catalogue of Described Species of Fossils {Except

Bryozoa and Foraminifera) in the Cainozoic Fama of Victoria, South Australia and

Tasmania. Rec, Geol. Sury, Vict, 1, (2), pp. 89-147

TinspAves, M. G, P. 1857-41 Description des Animatix sans Vertebres découverts dans

le Bassin de Paris

Dowovayn, E. $825 The Naturalists’ Repository, 4

Eames, F. E. 1951 A Contribution to the Study of the Mocene in Western Pakistan and

Western India. B. The Description of the Lamellibranchia from Standard Sections

in the Rakhi Nala and Zinda Pir Areas of the Western Punjab and in the Kohat

District. Phil. Trans. Rey. Soc. Lond., Ser. B, No. 627, 235, pp, 311-482, pls, 9-17

Erarrres, R., Jun. 1878 A Catalogue of Australian Fossils, Camb. Univ. Press

Frrurns, J. ("().Q.") 1818 Conchology. Supplement to 4th, Sth and bth Editions Encyelo-

pedia Britannica, 3, pp. 284-316

Frizzeuz, D. L. 1936 Preliminary Reclassification of Veneracean Pelecypods, Bull, Mus.

Ray. d'Hist. Nat. Belg., 12, (34), 84 pp.

Gaviser, J. Hand Gasrret, C, J. 1910 Additions to the Catalogue of the Marine Shells

ef Victoria, Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict, 23, (1), (n.s.), pp, 87-98

Gaturr, J, H., and Srxuueron, F. A. 1930 On the Relationship_between “Pecten” asper-

rimus Lamarck und “Peeten" antianstralis Tate, with a Description of an Allied

Fossil Form. Trans. Roy. Soc Vict., 42, (2), (tus), pp. 71-77, pls, 2-4

J. E, 1239 Ona new lirttish Shell, 8th Rep, Brit. Ass. (Newcastle 1838), pp. 110-114

Gray, J. E, geet NR on Dr. Philigpi’s Zoological Notes. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, 4 (25),

pp. 3)

Grav, J. E. 1840 Synopsis af the Contents of the British Muserini. Natural Histary, ed 42

Grav, J. F. 1842 ad, pp, 10-92

Grav, J- 1. 147 List of the Genera of Recent Mollusca, their Synanyma ancl Types. Proe

Zool. Soc, 15, pp. 12219

Guay, |. E, 1849 On the Species of Anomiadae. Proc. Zool. Soc., pp, 113-124

Gray, J, E, 1853 A Revision of the Genera of some of the Families of Conchifera or

Bivalve Shells, Aum Mar. Nat Hist., ser. 2, 11, pp. 33-44

Grav, J. E. 1857 A Revision of the Genera of some of the Familics of Comchifera or

Bivalve Shells, id., ser. 2, 19, p. 369

(ausowo, A, ne 1884 Nata intorno ad Alewmie Nuive Conchiglie Mincenische di Sicilia,

Nat, Sicil. Avn,, 3, (4), p. 1L9 (ide Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 232)

Grreowo, A. pe 388+5 Studi su Talune Conchiglie Mediterranee viventi ¢ fossili, Dull.

Soc. Malac. IJtal., 10, pp. 36-288 ;

Hasets, G, F, 1897 Catalogue of the Tertiary Mollusea in the Department of Geology,

British Museuin (Natural History). Part 1, The Australasian Tertiary Mollusca.

Brit. Mus. (Nat, Tlist.)

Trem, AS pote The Mollusca of Funafuti. Aust. Mus. Syd. Mem, 3, The Atoll of Puna-

ul. Pt. 7

Heuty, C. 1899b Description of a New Genus Austrosarepta, and Notes on other Molluser

from New South Wales. Proc. Lim, Soc, N.S.W., 24, (3), pp. 429-434. 7 text figs.

fiemtey, C, 1902-3 Scientific Results Trawling Expedition H.M.C.S.. “Thetis? off the Coast

ot New South Wales. Mollusca. Mem. 4, pts. 5 and 6. Aust, Mus., Syd.

Henny, C. 1907 The Results of Deep Sea Investigation in the Tasman Sea. 3. Mollusca

from Tighty Fathoms off Narrabeen. Rec. Aust. Mus. 6, (4), pp. 273-304, pls. 54-56

Heotry, C, 1909 Mollusca from the Hope Islands, North Australia. Proc, Lint, Soc.

NLS.W., 34, (3), pp. 420-466 ;

‘Heotey, C. 1917 Studies in Australian Mollusca. Tart 13. Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W,, 41,

4), pp. 680-718, ply. 46-52

Hepiey, C, 1918 A Check List of the Murine Fama of New South Wales, Part fF

Mollusea. Journ Ray. Soc. N.S.W., 51, Supp. 41 pp.

Horton, F. W, 1880 Manual of New Zealand Mollusca. Col. Mus. and Geol, Surv, Depe

IREDALE) T, 1917 More Molluse Name Changes. Proc. Malac. Soc., 12, (6), pp. 422-330

Trevarr, T. 1924 Results From Roy Bell's Molluscan Collection, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W,,

49, (3), 197, pp. 179-278, pls. 3-0

luepate, T, 1925 Mollusca from the Continental Shelf of Esslern Australia, Rec. Aust.

Mus., 14, (4), pp. 243-270, pls. 41-45

Trenate, I. 1927 New Mollusca from Vanikoro. Rec, Aust. Mus., 16, (1), pp. 73-78

TRRvALE, T. 19292 Strange Molluscs in Sydney Harbour, Aust. Znol, 5, (4), pp. 337-382

ImEDALE, T, 1929h Mollusca from the Continental Shelf of Iastern Australia, Ree, Aust.

Mus. 17, (4), pp, 158-189

Trrvare, T. 19304 More Notes on the Marine Mollusca of New South Wales. Rec Aust.

Mus., 17, (9), pp. 354-407, pls, 62-65

InrpAtz, T. 1930b Queensland Molluscan Notes. No, 2, Mem. Qld. Mus., 10, (1). pp. 73-88,

pl. 9

pena, Ti, 51 crested Molluscan, Notes. No. 1. Rec. Aust. Mus, 18, (4), po. 201-

, pls. 22-25

Terpane, T. 1936 Atistralian Molluscan Notey. No, 2, Rec, Aust, Mus., 19, (5), op. 267-340

Ipenare, T. 1939 Mollusca. Part 1, Great Barrier Reef Ixpedition, 1928-9. Scientific

Reports, 5, (6), pp. 209-425, Brit, Mus, Nat. Hist.

Jorvston, R. M. 1880 Third Contribution to the Natural History of the Tertiary Marine

eds of Table Cape, with u deseription of 30 new Species of Mollusca. Proc, Roy.

Soc, Tax. for 1879, pp, 29-41

Jonnston, R. M, 1888 Systematic Acconnt of the Geology of Tasmania

Joxes-Riowm ue i 1914 A Synopsis of the Family Veueridae. Part 2. Proc. Malac, Soc.,

» PP, 5

Keen, A. M. 1937, Nomenclatural Units of the Pelecypod Family Cardiidae, Bull, Mus.

Rov. d'Hist. Nat. Belg., 13, (7), pp. 1-22

Tamarcr, J, B: 1799 Pradrome dune Nouvelle Classification des Coquilles Mem. Soc.

d’ Hist. Nat. Paris

Lamaack, J. B. 1801 Systeme des Animaux sans Vertebres

LaMmarcx, J. B. 1818 Histoire Naturelle des Animaux sans Vertebres, 5

Lamarcr, J. B. 1819 ibid. 6

Lamy, E. 1912 Revision des Pectunculug yivants du Museum dHistwire Naturelle de

Paris. Journ. de Conch., 59

Leacs, W. 1819 in Ross, J, Voyage Discovery Baflin’s Bay- Appendix 2, pl. 12

Link, D. Ti. F, 1807 Beschreibung der Nuaturalien-Sammlung der Universitat 2. Rostock.

3, May, pp. 101-165

Livne, C. 1758 Systema Naturac, ed., 10

Linne, C. 1767 ibid, ed. 12

Marwick, J, 1924 An Exatination of seme of the Tertiary Mollusca claimed to be

cammon to Atistralia and New Zealand. Rep Aust, Assoc Adv. Sei, 16, pp. 316-331

Manwres, Merits The Veneridue of New Zealand, Trans, N.Z, Inst. 57, pp. 567-635,

pls, 5)

Marwics, J. 1928. The Tertiary Mollusca of the Chatham Islands, including a Generic

Revision of the New Zealand Pectinidae. Trans. N.Z. Inst., 58, pp. 432-506, 148 figs.

Maunwick, J, 1929 Tertiary Molluscan Fauna of Chatton, Southland. Trans. N.Z. Tnst.,

59, pp. 903-934

BEasesR, i cae The Tertiary Mollusca of the Gisborne District. N.Z. Geol, Surv. Pal,

ull. No,

Marwick, J. 1938 Notocallista and its Allies, Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z., 68, pp, 60-81, pls, 10-14

McCoy, F. 1865 On the Occurrence of Limopsiz Belcheri, Corbula sulcata and some other

recent shells in the fossil state in Miocene Tertiary Beds near Melbourne, Ann, and

Mag. Nut, Hist. ser. 3, 16, pp. 113-114

McCoy, F. 1866 On the Atistralian Tertiary Species of Trigenia. Geol. Mag., 3, (11), 29,

pp. 31-32, text figs. 1,2

McCoy, zi ph Prodromus of the Palaeontology of Victoria. Decades 1-7, Geol

sury. Vict,

Meex, F: B, 1876 Invertebrate Cretaceans and Tertiary Fossils of the Upper Missouri

Country, U.S. Geol. Surv. Terra., 9

MearkLe vow Munem, 1811 Entwurf eines nenen System’s der Schalthiergehaiuse. Maz.

Gesells. Naturf, Freunde, Berlin, 5, (1), pp. 38-72

Mowverogata, T. A. di 1909 Note say ’Erycma cnenoli Journ. de Conch., 56, (4th series,

10), pp. 253-255 ;

Naropo, i ee to, pte Prima Rivnione degli Scienziati Italiani: Sez. Zool. Anat, Comp.

isa, 1, p. 175

Nico, D. 1945 Genera and Subgenerit of the Pelecypod family Glycymeridaec. Journ. Pal.

19, (6), pp. 616-621

Nysr, H, P, and Gareort, H. 1835 Sur un nouveau genre de voquilies de ta iamille des

arcices, Bull. Acad. Roy. Sci, Bruxelles, 2, pp. 287-296

a'Oxsiony, A, 1844-7 Paleontolegie Francaise. Terrains Crétaces, 3

Purippr, R, A. 1836 Enumeratio Molluscorum Siciliae, 1, 267 pp., 12 pls.

Perrenany, G. B. 1896 A Revision of the Fossil Fatina of the Table Cape Beds, Tasmania,

with Deseriptions of New Species. Proc. Roy. Soe. Vict, $, Crs), pp. 74-180, pls. 2-4

Parrosarn, (. B. 1903 Contrifstions to the Palaeontology of the Older Tertiary of Vie-

torja. Lamellibranchs. Part 3, Proc. Ray. Soc. Viet, 15, (2), pp 88-103, pls, 12-15

Rreve, L. A. 1843a Descriptions of New Shells about to be Agured in the “Conchological

Teonica". Proc: Zool. Soci, pp, 79-81

Rezve, L. A. 1843b Conch. Icon, T,ondon, 1, 2.

Rurmuart, PF, W. 1935 Classification of the Pelecypod Family Arctdie. Bull. Mus. Roy,

d’Hist, Nat. Belg, 11, (13), 68 pp,

Ronmc, P, F. 1798 Museum Boltenianum, Hambure, 2

Roczr, J 1939 Le Genre Chlarnys dans les Formations Néogtnes de I'Eurape, Soc. Geol,

Trance

Roverem, G. 1898 Note proventive sui pelecipndi del tongriann ligure. 2, Atti della Soc,

ligust. Genova, 9, (2), pp. 153-187

Sacod, F. 1890 T Mollusehi dei Terreni Terziarii del Piemonte e delfa Liguria, Pact 27

Sasst, A, 1827 Saggio geolugico sopra il Bacino terziario di Albenga. Giorn. Ligust,

Genova, 1, (5), pp. 467-484

Scrusacuer, C.F, 1817 Essai d'un Nouvean Systéme des Vabitaiones des Vers Téstaces.

Copenhagen, 287 pp., 22 pls.

Scorart, A. 1777 Intraductio ad Histotiam Naturalem . - . - Prague

Sincreron, F, A, 1932 Studies in Australian Tertiary Molluscz, Part 1. Proc. Roy. See.

Vict... 44, (n.5,), pt. 2, pp, 289-308

Srvereron, F, A. 1945 A Catalogite of Type and Figured Specimens of Fossils in the

Melhanrme University Geology Department. Proc. Roy, Soc. Vict., 56, (2), (ns),

pp. 220-284.

Stxcreroy, F. A., and Woons, N. H. 1934 On the Occtrrence of the Pelecypod Genus

Miltha in the Australian Tertiary. Proc, Roy, Soe, Viet. 46, (2), (n.s.), pp 207-213

Smits, E. A. we Transit of Venus Experition, Mollusca. Phil, Trans. Roy, Soc. 168,

Pp 1-2

Sowrssy, G. B. 1832 The Conchological Mustrations. §

Sowenzy, G. B. 1878 im Reeve, Conchologia Iconica, 20

Sturt, C. 1833 Two Expeditions into the Interior of Southern Australia. London, 2,

Appendix 1, pl. 3

StutcHeury, S. 1830 On two new Genera of Testaceous Mollusca and five tew Species

6£ the Genus Anatina, lately discovered at Port Jackson, New South Wales, Zool,

jJourn,, 3, pp. 95-101

Swamson, W. 1840 A Treatise on Malacology, __

Tate, R. 1879 Zoologica et Palaeontologica Miscellanea, chiefly relating ta South Ans-

tralia. Trans. Phil, Soe, Adelaide for 1878/9, pp, 129-140

Tate, R. 1882 Diagnoses of New Species of Miocene Fossils from South Austraha. Trans.

Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 5, pp, 44-46

Taze, R. 1885 Description of New Species of Mollusca of the Upper Eocene Beds al

Table Cape. Proc, Roy. Soc. Tas, for 1884, pp. 226-235

Tate, R. 1886 The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia, Part 1, Trans.

Roy. Soc. $. Aust. for 1885, 8, pp. 96-158, pls. 2-12

Tare, R. 1887a Descriptions of some new species of South Australian Marine and Fresli-

water Mollusca, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 9, pp, 62-75, pls, 4-5

Tate, R_ 1887b The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia. Part 2. Trans

Roy. Soc. S, Aust. 9, pp, 142-2), pls. 14-20

Tate, R. 1890 On the Discovery of Marine Deposits of Pliocene Age in Australia. Trans.

Rov. Soc. S. Aust, 13; (2), pp. 172-480

Tate, R, 1891 Description of New Species of Australian Mollusca, Recent and Fossil.

Trans, Roy. Soc. 5, Aust, 14, pp. 257-269, pl, 11

Tare, R. 1892 Descriptions of some New Species of Marine Molliisca from Austraha.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 15, pp. 125-132, pl 1

Tare, R, 1896 in Tate, R., Howchin, W,, and David, T. W. E. Evidence of Glaciaticat

at Fallet's Cave. Rep. Aust. Assoc. Ady. ‘Sci. 6th Meeting (1895 Brisbane), pp, 315+

32)

Tarz, KR, 1897 Critical Remarks on some Anciraliaie Mollusen. Trans, Roy, Soe, S. Aust,

21, pp, 40-49

Tate, R. 1899 A Revision of the Older Tertiary Mollusca of Australia. Purt 1, Trans,

Roy, Soc, S. Aust., 23, (2), pp. 249-277

Tate, R., and Denwant, F. 1893 Correlation of the Marine Tertiaries of Augltalia. Part tL.

Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 17, (1), pm 203-226

Taty, R. 1895 ibid. Part 2. Victoria. Trans, Roy, Soe. 5, Aust, 19, pp, 108-121

Tmiete, J, 1935 Handbuch der Systematischen Weichtierkunde, 2

Turron, W. 1822 Conchylia Insularum Britannicarum, The Shells of the Rritisli Islands

Venrco, J.C. 1907 Notes on South Australian Marinc Mollusca, with Deserijtions of New

Species. Part 6. Trans. Roy. Soc. S$, Aust., 31, pp. 213-230, pl. 27

Winckwoxtn, R. 1930 Notes on Nomenclature, 5. Proc, Malac. Soc., 19, (1), pp, 14-16

Woon, W. 1835 General Conchalogy

Wodns, J, E. Tentson 1862 Geological Observations in South Australia.

Woons, J. E. Tentson 1867 The Tertiary Rocks of Soh Australia, Part 2, The Morni

Gambier Fossils. Pap. Adel. Phil. Soc. for 1864-5

Wotvs, J, E. Tentson 1876 On some Tertiary Fossils. from Table Cape. Proc. Roy, Sor

Tas. for 1875, pp. 13-24

Woops, J. E. Tentson 1877 Notes. on the Fossils referred to in the Forepoilig’ Paper.

Proc, Roy, Soc. Tas. for 1876, pp, 91-116

Woops, J, E. Tenison 1878 On some New Marine Shells, Proc. Linn. Svc. N\S.W, 2,

Mr 262-266

Woons, N. H, (afterwards Luparcox) 193], Pelecypota from the Abattoirs Rare, iicluding

12 new species. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust,, 55, p. 147-151

Fe ON aes

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Prate I

Nuetla (Ennucula) Ralimnag Singleton, Weymouth’s Bore, left valve, extertral

view, x 2-6.

Nucule (Ennucula) kalimnae Singleton. Weymouth's Bore, left valve, mternal

view, * 276.

Nucula (Ennucula) beackportensis Verco. Hindmarsh Bore, left valve, external

view, x 8-6.

Nucula (Ennucula) beachportensis Verco. Hindmarsh Bore, left valve, internal

view, x 8°6.

Nuculona woodst (Tate). Hindmarsh Bore, right valve, x 4-3.

Nuculane crebrecostata T. Woods. Abattoirs Bore, left valve, x 3:4.

Nuctlana verconis Tate. Abattoirs Bore, right valve, x 3:4.

Cucullaea corioensis McCoy. Weymouth’s Bore, juvenile, left valve, x 8-6.

Cucullaeo coricensis McCoy. Weymouth's Bore, adult, left valve, x 1-4.

Limopsis ma¢¢oyi Chapman. Tennant's Bore, right valve, x 1:7.

. Limopsis eucosmus Verco. Weymouth’s Bore, right valve, x8-6.

Limopsis vixornaia Verco. Weymouth's Bore; left valve, x7.

Lentipecten adelaidensis sp, nov, Abattoirs. Bore: a, holotype x 1:7; b, parasyntype,

right valve, x 0-9; c, parasytitype, left valve, x 0-9.

Lissarca rubricata (Tate). Hindmarsh Bore, right valve, x7.

Cuna polita (Tate). Hindmarsh Bore, right valve, x 8-6,

Lissarca rhomboidalts Vereo. Hindmarsh Bore, right valve, x 8-6,

Myadora corrugata Tate. Weymouth's Bore, Jeft valve, x 3-4.

Condylocardia tenxicostee Chapman atl Gabriel. Hindmarsh Bore, left valve,

external view, x 8-6.

Condylocardia tenuicostae Chapman and Gabriel. Hindmarsh Bore, left valve,

internal view, x 8-6,

Sportella jubata Hedley. Hindmarsh Bore, left valve, x3; hinge x 3-4.

Prats If

Spondylus. spondyloides Tate. Weymouth's Bore, x1-4; left hinge, x 1-4,

Cardita compta (Tate). Weymouth’s Bore, right valve, x 1:7.

Pleuromeris subpecten sp. nov., holotype, x 4:3,

Pleuromeris trigonalis (Tate). Weymouth’s Bore, x 3-4; hinge, x43,

Cyclocardia (Scalaricardita) subcompacta (Chapman and Crespin). Weymouth's

Bore, x 3-4; hinge, x5°1.

Glans dennanti (Chapman and Crespin). Weymouth’s Bore, x 1+4.

Cyclocardia (Arcturelling) peridonea sp. nov, holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, x3;

hinge, % 4-3-

Cyclocardia (Scalaricardita) subcompacta (Chapman and Crespin), juvenile. Wey-

mouth’s Bore, x 7; hinge, x §-6.

Cyclocardia (Arcturalina) findmurshensis sp. siov., holotype. Hindmarsh Bore,

x3; hinge, x 4-3.

Callucina balcombica (Cossmann), Weymouth’s Bore, right valve, internal and

external views, x 1-7; left hinge, x 3-4.

Eomiltha (Gibbolucina) cowfirmans sp. nov., holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, x 2-6;

hinge, x 3-4.

Gonimyrtea salisburyensis sp. nov., holotype. Abattoirs Bore, external and internal

views, x 1-7; right hinge, x 2-6.

Monitilora (Prophetilora) chavoni sp. nov., holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 1-7; left

hinge, x 2°6; mght hinge, x +7.

Linga (RBellucina) nuciformis (Tate). Abattoirs Bore, right valve, x2:L

Linga (Bellucina) nuctformis (Tate). Abattoirs Bore, internal view, x21; left

hinge, x 2-6.

Myrtea fabuloides (Tate), Abattoirs Bore, right valve, x2-6; left himge, x2-6;

right hinge, 2-6.

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

Fic.

Fig,

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

Sepaovyangunye

_—

—

ux hw

17,

aes

Pirate III

Monitilora idomea sp. noy. Hindmarsh Bore, holotype, exterior view, 2-1.

Monitilura idonea sp, noy, Tindmarsh Bore, holotype, interior yiew, x 1+7.

Gonimyrtea crassior sp. nov. Weyimoutl’s Bore, holotype, x 2:6; hinge, x 3-4

Gondmyrlea crassior sp, nov., paratype. Hindmarsh Bore, x 3.

Gonimyrlea validior sp. nov., holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, external view, x 2-6;

hinge, paratype, x 2-6,

Gonimyrtea validior sp. twy., holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, interual view, x 276.

Gonimyrtea pabiney sp. nov., holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, external view, *x2°6:

hinge, x 2:6.

Gonimyrten nittabilior sp. nov., paratype, internal view, x 2*6.

Divalucina cympingt (Adams and Angas). Weytnoutl’s Bore, x 1-4.

Bornia trigonale (Tate), Hindmarsh Bore, left. valve, x 8-6; hinge, 8-6.

Litigrella adeluidensis spr. nov,, holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, x 6.

Myllita hindmershensis sp. nav., holotype. Hindmarsh Bore, x 8-6; hitige, x 12,

Praperyeina forrensensis sp. nov., holotype, Hindmarsh Bore, x6; right hitge

(oit Jeft), left hinge (on right), x 6,

Mysella anomala Angas, Abattoirs Bore, right valve, x 3-4; hinge, x 4+3

Montacuta sericed Tate, Hindmarsh Bore, tight valve, x3; hinge, x4,

Nemucurdinune (Pratuhwn) proterothetidis sp. nov., holotype. Abatloirs Bore, x3+4,

Herkotntisun, (Pratulim) proterothetidrs sy. nov. holotype. Abattuirs Bore, internal

view, x 3-4.

Tawera incurvilamellakt sp. nov., holotype, Abattoirs Bore, external view, x 2-6.

Tawera incurvilamellata sp. nov., bolotype. Abattoirs Bore, internal view, x 2-6.

Tawera gallinula Lamarck. Abattoirs Bore, right yalye, x 2-6; hinge, x 2:6.

Pratt IV

Glans spinitlosa (Tate). Abattoirs Bore, x 1-4.

Placumen subroborata (Tate). Muddy Creel, Victoria, left valve, x 1-4.

Placamen subraborata (Tate), Weymouth’s Bore, juvenile, tight valve, x26. +

Corbula epharmila Tate. Hindmarsh Bore, right valve, external view, x 1:7.

Corbula ephamilla Tate. Hindmarsh Bore, right valve, internal view, x 1-7,

Corbula epkamilla Tate, Abattoirs Bore, both valves, x 2°1.

Corbula ephamilla Tate. Hindmarsh Bore, left valve, x 2-4,

Mactra (Electromactra) hoqwehinjana Tate. Hindmarsh Bore, x 1+7.

Macoma ralph (Finlay), Weymouth’s Bore, left valve, external view, x 1*7.

Macome ralphi (Finlay). Weymouth's Bore, left valve, internal view, x 1-7.

Anomia tater Chapman and Singleton, Ahattoirs Bore, x 0°85.

P eaicee ine (Regosara) proecygnorum sp. nav., holotype, Dry Creek Bore, right

valve, x 17.

Fuleia- tenvicostaia (Lamarck). Dry Creek Bore, right valve, x 1: 7,

Cardite subdecepiion sp. nov., holotype. Dry Creck Bore, x 0:85.

Brachidontes hirsutys (Lamarck). Abattoirs Bore, left valve, juvenile, x 2-6.

Chlomys (Chlamys) polyaktinos sp. uov., holetype, Abattoirs Bore, x 1-7,

Gari kumiltonensis: (Tate). Abattoirs Bore, juvenile, x 3-4.

Vasticardium submaculosum sp. nov., holotype. Weymouth’s Bore, x 1-7.

Chioneryx dennunti, (Chapman and Crespin), Weymouth’s Bore, x 1-7.

Pirate V

Ostrea (Lopha) hyokdvidea Tate. Abattoirs Bore, x 0*85.

Notocallista (Striacallista) mollesta Marwick, Abattoirs Bore, x 0+85.

Noatocathsfa (Striacallista) pestis Marwick. Weymouth's Rore, x 2-1.

Eucrassatella camura (Pritchard), Kooyonga Bore, x 0:85.

Fig. 5. Dosina (Hina) cainosoica Tenison - Woods, Weymoutli’s Bare, x | +4.

Fig. 6. Eucrassatella kingicoloides (Pritchard). Kooyonga Bore, x0-85.

Fig. 7. Limopsis beaumariensts Chapman. Abattoirs Bore, x 1-4.

Fig. 8 Chlamys (Mesopeplum) incerta Tenison-Woods. Weymouth’s Bore, right valve,

x 1-7,

Fig. 9. Chlamys (Mesopeplum) incerta Tenison-Woods. Weymouth’s Bore, left valve, x1-7.

Fig. 10. Hiatella australis (Lamarck). Hindmarsh Bore, x 3-7.

Fig. 11. Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis Tate. Kooyonga Bore, x 0°85.

Fig. 12. Tellina albinelloides Tate. Immature specimen, Weymouth’s Bore, x t-7; hinge, x 2:6.

Fig. 13. FHiatella angasi (Angas), Hindmarsh Bore, internal view, x 4.

Fig. 14. Hiatella angast (Angas). Hindmarsh Bore, external view, x 3°7.

Tig. 15. Cucullaea praclonga Singleton. Kooyonga Bore, x 0°85

Pirate VI

Fig. 1. Nuctla venusta N. H. Woods. Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 4-3.

Fig. 2. Pseudarcopagia detrita N. H. Woods. Holotype, Abattoirs Bore, x 4+3.

Fig. 3. oghtaa § Kesivencen) salebrosa (N. H. Woods). Holotype. Abattoirs Bore,

x 0°85.

Fig. 4. Dipledonta solitaria N. H. Woods. Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 1+1.

Fig. 5. Tawera pernitida (N. H. Woods). Abattoirs Bore, x 2:1.

Fig, 6. Thyasira sinuata (N. H. Woods). Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 2-2.

Fig. 7, Mysella tellinoides (N. H,. Woods). Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 5+1.

Fig. 8. Mysella macer (N. H. Woods). Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 2-6.

Fig. 9. Gafrarium perornatum N, H. Woods. Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 2-6.

Fig. 10. Solecurtus subrectangularis N. H. Woods. Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 3.

Fig. 11. Corbula adelaidensis nom. nov. Holotype. Abattoirs Bore, x 1-7.

Fig. 12. Brachidontes submenkeanus (Tate). Syntypes. Hallett Cove, x 0+85

Fig. 13. Lithophaga brevis (Tate). Holotype. Hallett Cove, x 1-4.

Fig. 14. Lima bassi Tenison-Woods. Abattoirs Bore, x 2-6.

Fig. 15, Properycina micans (Tate), Hinge, x 8-6,

Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 1955 Vol. 78, Plate I

Vol. 78, Plate IL

Trans. Roy, Soe. S. Aust., 1955

PLATE 2

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955 Vol. 78, Plate IIT

PLATE 3

Vol. 78, Plate 1V

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955

PLATE 4

Vol. 78, Plate V

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955

PLATE 5

Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust. 1955 Vol; 78, Plate VI

PLATE 6

AUSTRALITES PART VI

SOME NOTES ON UNUSUALLY LARGE AUSTRALITES

BY CHARLES FENNER*

Summary

Maps showing world distribution of tektites, and the distribution of australites in Australia as at

1954 have been prepared, together with a schedule briefly describing some particularly large

australites.

AUSTRALITES PART VI

SOME NOTES ON UNUSUALLY LARGE AUSTRALITES

By Cartes FENNER *

[Read 8 April 1954]

SUMMARY

Maps showing world distribution of tektites, and the distribution of australites in

Australia as at 1954 have been prepared, together with a schedule briefly describing

some particularly large australites.

INTRODUCTION

From time to time, among the objects that have fallen on the earth, various

puzzling glassy blobs known generally as tektites have been found, The earliest

recorded are the Moldavites from along the Moldau River in Czechoslovakia, an

analysis of which was published by Dufreney in 1847. During the subsequent

century many swarms of these silicecus objects have been discovered and an

extensive literature has been built up. Many tektites must have fallen in the oceans

and some marginal to continents. Those peculiar to Australia are known as Austra-

lites, thousands of which have been handled, measured, and classified by the writer.

For this paper a schedule of some particularly large Australites has been prepared

and some of them illustrated. The map, fig. 1, shows the world-wide distribution

of tektites and pseudotektites roughly in order of discovery.

Fig. 1

Mercator’s Projection, showing World Distribution of Tektites,

* Geologist, South Australian Museum, Hon. Research Fellow, Institute of

Meteoritics, University af New Mexico, New Mexico, U.S.A.

Moldavites from the River Moldau, Czechoslovakia.

Billitonites from the Island of Billiton, Indonesia.

Australites, over the southern half of Australia.

Rizalites from the Rizal Province in the Philippines.

Indochinites from Indochina.

Javanites from Java, Indonesia.

Borneoites from Borneo and adjacent islands.

Tektites from the Iyory Coast, West Africa,

Darwin Glass, from Mount Darwin, Tasmania.

10. Libyan Glass, from Libya, North Africa.

11, Tektites from Colombia, South America.

12, Bediasites from Grimes County, Texas, U.S.A.

ONNDSUWON

Fig. 2 shows the distribution of Australites as at 1954.

Qustralites

* =torico

o zLarger forms

x =DarwWin'’s Qustralite

Fig. 2

Map of Australia, showing the known strewnfield of the Australites as at 1954,

The areas of some of the chief large collections (Shaw, Kennett and Baker)

are outlined,

‘pua Jaypews

ye apt sz pue

BIOJLA ‘[Ooq Jehu, yw Spm ‘Teq-quinp

‘sanyans -ureusse ean | 62 ‘sre IE TZ] 6 Jeorsjauudsu | 2t ON

JAMO, UO $9A0033 JapiMm autos pur

‘goejins iaddn uo saaoord duietp eyerjsny ol

‘anasnj | -er Jo Jequinu aSaey ‘as09 sud] 40D | -yqnog ‘surerg TT pure

ueyRaysny YyINOS | sksep jo aydmexa yoojtod AA ‘0 "HM JOGIEL[UN LE X Gb X 6F 86 3103 suay |] OT SON

THA Fld

| OrAsecy

“aoRjans Soptey) edo pasurpy 6 ‘ON

zoddn uo Surmoys aiqqnq jsinq ws OpresMo'T

ase, & pue yno paddryo asard wading pue epuocos 8 pur

aBie 9uUG ‘az09 sual yeao ATYBYS WaMO -ey uaamteg | Soe SIS X Tes aa ation suey | £ SON

“TaIaAOISIP

yo saqysnep ‘soruase weumny Aq Ayurey SP[PUPloD

R weyypr_ “M Sst | -199 ‘sautfuoqe Aq Ajqrssod ‘pad meyyey_ ueypesjsny 9 pue

yO uorssassod U] | -diyo yonur ‘adeys ut peorraydsqns “AN wsayseM | €¢ XS 8px Sg e'PST g “SON

‘aaeyins doy uo Suny

pue soul] Moy “yjzea 94; UO Burd] ‘WHO} ,y0u

Udy ATaxl] VIOW JO PBT} Jo avd -Ueq,, Mo1}] WOIS

‘aprepapy ‘uinasnpL | soyey Sulunp sdeysad ‘yo payeyy | AoOPl SosSf -eiqe Aq pads b pue

ueyesjsny yINeS | ussq sary wood pu saps AMNeW.O A} “W'S ‘Bpuoowey | OLEX BOF * 28 680Z | -2P wWio0oy jeog ¢ ‘SON

“SEPNS U0} j ‘To8Il

‘Yyyaaq ‘umasnyy | -}oq uo sSurysreur yenspun siwos pute Sogo “WM Z pue

uetperjesny useysaA, | ‘aoezins do} wo paytd Ajdaaq ‘ZuysvaR ayeT | p'6E XG'b9X $9 R1Z UO} SuaT T ‘SON

\ ILA 281d

Woneso'y juasarg SHIBUII YT 10329 ]102) AQEOO'T slesubaneeaes ag GA aypersny jo adiy “aes

| ee

SALIIVALSNV BDAVT

“mnasnyy

ueyEasny yes

‘umMasnyq

ueyeasny ying

“uImasnyy

uryensny yinos

“tunasnyy

URTeEIISHY 1419}S9 4.

Trpe ‘ON wmasnypy

Uerpesjsny W19}s9 4

‘mUMaSN FL

ueyensny yynos

worjZ207] Juasalg

‘sapts uo Surey ayuyap A13A

pue asejins do} vo sau] Moly

*SOUITMOY

yusuimesd =ou faspa payeyy ON

‘sayoyejos pue

sa]qqng jetisn jo ploAsp Ajaduesys

‘peAowe1 diyd Jusdes a8sE] BUC)

Pepeiqe-pues pue WioM Ata A

SYLEDIO I

“W'S ‘SANT Puy

-UsuItIq, 41zaN

‘FABUIUDY TeIN

eleajsny

[esquag

Spry ‘sayy | = “FIO MoI

eyessny

[eaqua7)

ware Ay ‘ayy | ‘S8usdg ssrourz

qed

Treysaeyw JO yste soytit

|) °O OzT ‘UrTeqeg

Hotel pue

SOf0S2 “VM

‘UEUBINg sxe]

"VM ‘UBsHI0D

meYysoyqs

“ML | “WM ‘ores

A905 viM

D-H 'M ‘WETUaSIO NY

uoysuyol ws ‘u0on

‘H 'f | -819 uspsompoy

40}99 [19D Apea0'T

SGLITVALSNV ADA T

saxeUIT TY Ut

S}DswWsiInsEayy 32S

sex Zs BL

S"e8

SC*OE*XS9 } £'80

S@X6zZX¥ 62 | 8°98

SLE Xx Op xX es |

GSE X OS X L'6r TOT

Peexsosxnrs | Itt

ITEM 32 PEM

92 WyBueT 68

siesd UT

dospies ],

dosipie3 7,

yeog

"1]24-qUuiInp a0)

-2g 01 Sutpus}

(jeao ‘10;

AOMeU) yeog

[eao peoig

9109 sua]

2109 sya]

Teq-qung

aqyyesisny jo sday,

g] pue

SI ‘SON

FT "ON

eT ‘ON

Jaquin jy

tla (8

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 1955 Vol. 78%, Plate VIL

Large Australites, Nos. 1-9.

Trans, Roy. Suc. 8. Aust., 1955 Vol, 78, Plate VIII

Large Australites, Nos, 10-16

A HYBRID SWARM BETWEEN EUCALYPTUS ODORATA BERHR.

AND EUCALYPTUS LEUCOXYLON F. MUELL.

BY L. D. PRYOR*

Summary

Morphological and field evidence together with a progeny test strongly support the view that a

segregating hybrid swarm exists between Eucalyptus odorata Behr. and E. leucoxylon F. Muell. in

the vicinity of Burnside, South Australia. It is considered that individuals from this swarm should

not be referred to E. jugalis Naudin, and that this name should be discarded as a nomen dubium.

There is evidence that at least four distinct major populations of Eucalyptus leucoxylon exist which

might well be described as sub-species.

A AYBRID SWARM BETWEEN EUCALYPTUS ODORATA BEHR AND

EUCALYPTUS LEUCOXYLON F, MUELL.

By L. D. Prror *

(Communicated by T. R. N. Lothian)

[Read & July 1954]

SUMMARY

Morphological and field evidence together with a progeny test strongly sup-

port the view that a segregating hybrid swarm exists between Eucalyptus odorata

Behr. and FE. leucoxylon F. Muell. in the vicinity of Burnside, South Australia.

It is considered that individuals from this swarm should not be referred to

&, jugelis Naudin, and that this name should be discarded as a nomen dubinm.

There is evidence that at least four distinct major populations of Eucalyptus

lewcoxylon exist which might well be described as sub-spectes.

INTRODUCTION

It is known from studies in eastern Australia that hybrids are found between

pairs of Eucalyptus species under certain conditions, The irequency with which

they occur differs considerably from place to place, They are much more common

between some pairs of species than others. They are particularly common between

pairs of species belonging, one each to the two systematic groups of the genus,

Porantheroideae and Terminales. For example, a hybrid swarm of this kind

between &, albens and E. sideroxylon is well developed in the neighbourhood of

Gundagat (Pryor, 1953). Similar cases have been found between such paits of

species in other parts of New South Wales and in Victoria. It is of interest,

therefore, fo record an examination made of a similar pair of species in South

Australia, namely, #. odorata and FE. lexcoxylon, which belong respectively to

the same groups and where the conclusions correspond closely with those reached

in the other instances mentiotied.

FIELD AND MORPHOLOGICAL EVIDENCE

The rising slopes between the Burnside tramway terminus and the Green

Hill Road in the Adelaide suburbs pass through a boundary between the E. odorata

association and the £. lewcoxylom association, As a rule through this and adjoining

areas, the Ewo species occur separately as the only trees in pute stands.

The area has been much cut over and otherwise disturbed by settlement

and there are many fewer trees than there were originally in the virgin state,

though some may still remain which ante-date settlement. H. camaldulensis alsa

oceurs in this area, but is rather sharply cut off in its distribution by being con-

fined to particular sotl types-

There are a number of trees here which can be assigned readily to either

E. odorate or E. leucoxylon, as they conform quite closely to the types of those

species. On the other hand there are some groups of trees which contain indi-

viduals with characters forming a grading series between the two species, The

most striking field character to show this gradation is the barle F. leucoxylon is

smooth-barked throughout, whereas FE. odorata has a rough, dark greyish-brown

sub-fibrous hark extending over the trunk and larger limbs to the small branches,

Between these Ewo extremes individuals are found with a small amount of rough

bark at the base only, others with hark extending half way up the trunk, and

then stili others with it extending to the first large limbs and even to the smaller

limbs, The same kind of variation can be seen in the general branching habit

and form of the tree, but is more difficult to desctibe. In the inflarescence, buds

and fruits similar variation is strikingly displayed. EF. odorata has an inflorescence

made up of “umbels mostly seve or more flowered, although often reduced

accidentally to fewer than seven as shown by remaining scars, whereas

* Department of the litetior, Canberra, A,C.T-

E. lencorylon has three-flowered “umbels”, Intermediate conditions are found on

trees which also have the bark variations described above, Likewise, the same

kind of grading occurs between the sub-cylindroid shortly petiolate buds of

E. odorafa to the ovoid, shortly rosrate, long pedicillate buds of £. leucorylon.

It was possible to obtain a series of fruiting umbels which illustrate the type ot

variation clearly, These are illustrated in fig. 1) which shows the graded change,

particularly in fruit shape, size and pedicel length between the two species,

It will be nuticed that specimens 50/782 and 50/781 occupy a position some-

where near the centre of the range of variation.

In progeny 50/781 the flowers had no staminodes which is a character of

£. odorata, and therefore indicates a degree of independent assortment of charac-

ters since the fruit, at Jeast in size and shape, approaches that of LZ. leucox lon

more closely than &, odoratd. On the other hand, the flowers of 50/782 have

staminodes present, some of which are tipped with an oil gland. The presence of

staminodes is charactetistic of E. feucoxrylon, but the staminodes tipped with

an oil gland has been found to be characteristic of hybrids between Porantheroi-

deae and Terminales. It is found in both cases that the anther shape is irregtilar

from anther to anther and covers a range the average of which is intermediate

between the forms characteristic fur Porantheroideae and Terminales. This kind

of variation has been recorded by Todd (1953) between material at Kew now

thought to have derived from hybrids between £, siderophioia and LZ, poniculata ia

New South Wales. It is also chavacteristic of the intermediates between £. albens

and E. sideroxylon mentioned above (Pryor ibid.),

Since this evidence is closely in accord with that which has been found itt

hybrid swarms elsewhere, a progeny test was made.

PROGENY TEST

Seed was collected from open-pollinated capsules of several trees from the

supposed swarm in this area, which covered the range between E, leucoxylon and

E. odorata. From cach of these progenies up to fifty plants were raised and

examined when the eighth pair of leaves was fully developed. The juvenile leaves

of the two supposed parent specits are quite distinct at this stage. E. leucoxwon

has sessile, opposite, somewhat ovate leaves which are cordate at the base, and

E. odorata has petiolate, alternate, rather broadly elliptical leaves,

& oe Se

‘5n/78o hy iad AOA 50/72

50/785

EU LCVCOAYLOM

SLC. ODOR AIA

a] 1 ? =

Fig. 1

In previous studies of this kind, measurement of leaf shape expressed by

the ratio of length/breadth was used, but in this particular case the overall

dimensions of the two species are rather similar and the simple representation

of leaf shape is not available from this ratio. Measurements were therefore made

of the length of petiole and the distance between the point of attachment of the

petioles from each pair of leaves. The results of these measurements are set out

in histegtams in fig. 2. Tt was felt, however, when this material was examined and

the supposed hybrid origin of the individuals supported by the progeny test,

that progenies 50/786 and 50/783, although morphologically close to, or even

identical with, the respective species, may ¢ach have had some inheritance from

the other member of the pair. There was a tendency to this in the characters dis-

played by at least one of them (50/783). Unfortunately, also, both progenies

were ver'y small.

It was considered necessary, therefore, to raise two additional progenies,

5286 and 5287, from E. odorata and E. leucoxylon respectively, which were grow-

ing a substantial distance from a field junction between the two species. I owe

my sincere thanks to Mr. C. D. Boomsma for collecting and sending the seed

from which these two progenies were raised subsequent to the members of the

swarm.

Petiole Jenath of pth Pair of eaves ration f Pairs (Ath pa

2 oo

mt S

Sy 2

es Wo 5266 ont2s3 TSU HH iste le.

1 awe “Te =: a

* $ i 2 cc $

aq) 23 4:8 6-7 -#-S HH 2 bOATa4 O44 PSF F EF E Ci eset

Se.

b o

50/785 on 4 567 FFM IIE

50/786

50/781

3 Je

Qt 22 4 F-6 7 SMH 1314)

so/TB2

= 1a

SS)

SY/THS Oj} 2345S £7 8 OH Mies

o'r2z2e¢5 67 BIHWH LK 5287 ers ee

. Re

Fig, 2

Tt will be noted in the histograms of the length of petiole in the eighth pair

of leaves, that there is a shift in the modal length through the various progenies

from one parent to the other. It will be seen also that the same trend is followed

in the measurement of the distance of separation of the point of attachment of

petioles in the eighth pair of leaves, but that is not so clearly displayed because

the variance in the pure E. odorata progeny is so much grcater than in the

remainder.

The sequence of this change through the progenies does not correspond

closely with the sequence of variation shown for the Erut characters in fig. 1,

indi¢ating a degree of independent assortinent of characters,

DISCUSSION

The evidence collected strongly supports the view that a hybrid swarm

exists between FE. lencoxylon and . odvrate in the area studied, and supple-

mentary field observations suggest that such swarms are of frequent occurrence

wherever @ junction occurs in the field between the areas occupied by these two

species. They are therefore quite widespread. The conclusion could be supported

more rigorously by the manipulatied synthesis of the Fl hybrid hetween these

two species and the raising of an F2 generation from that hybrid. This would,

of course, take some years, and cannot be attempted yet, although it has been

in progress for some time with a few other hybrid combinations. There is small

doubt, however, from the evidence already accumulated, that the variation found

in these individuals is correctly interpreted through hybridization leading te the

development of a segregating hybrid swarm.

NOMENCLATURE

It has been the practice to refer some hybrid material (such as 50/781 and

50/782) to E. jugalts Naudin. Blakely (1954) equates £. jugalis Naudin with

E. leucoxylor var. paxperite J, E. Brown. This raises some interesting points in

nomenclature. J. E. Brawti (N, D.) describes the type of E. leucoryton b. Muell.

as occupying the atea of the central districts, Z. lewcoxylon var. pauperita J- E.

Brown is desctibed as occurring separately and in drier, more inland areas than

the type, and E. lencoxylon var. macrocarpa J. E, Brown (in two forms differing

only in filament colour) as occupying a rather narrower zone closely along the

south coast in cooler and wetrer areas than the type. These three taxa approxi-

mately typify three substantially distinct populations of E. /eucoxylon and might

very well be regarded as geographic sub-species, each taxon fairly reptesenting

a distinct and quite extensive population, The position is rendered a little less

clear; however, by J. E. Brown’s description of E, lewcoxylon var. pauperita,

which distinctly says that the untbels are two, three, or four-floweted. Syntype

material examined in the Nationa] Herbarium, Sydney. shows it to be exclusively

three-flowered. It seems likely that some minor, irregular variation in his type

specimen led Brown to deseribe a four-flowered umbel; in the same way he

described a two-flowered umbel which wowld certainly result from abortion or

accidental loss of one flower in the umbel at some stage, Two-flowered ambels

are shown in his plate in the Forest Flora of South Australia.

Maiden’s illustration of F, jugalis Naudin corresponds closely with

E, leucoxylon var, pauperita J. E, Brown, and also includes a pair of two-flowered

umbels which may have been the condition which led to Brown describing a

four-fowered umbel. On the other hand, Naudin’s original description (in

French) quoted by Maiden (Critical Revision) clearly says that the inflorescences

are often three-Alawered but sometimes have five ot seven flowers and are shortly

pedicellate. The presence in individuals which have many three-flowered umbels

of some containing five or seven flowers, has been found in all cases so far

critically examined, to be exclusively associated with hybridization, It seems

highly probable, therefore, that the type of E, jwoalis Naudin was a hybrid, but

unless the original tree described by Naudin and planted presumably at Villa

Thuret in France, ean be found and a progeny (est carried out, it is unlikely that

it can certainly be identified. From the evidence available from the description,

a tree conformitg fairly closely to this description could have more than ene

hybrid origin, Tt may, for example, be a hybrid between El lencoxylow var.

Poupertta and E, catcicultrix, or between BE. leucorylon and E, ederata, or

perhaps between Z£. leucoxylon and E. micracarpa. It is interesting, also, to note

that another geographic form of &. leucoxylon occurs extensively in Victoria,

as, for example, from the vicinity of Stawell to south-west New South Wales,

aiid also probably in parts of South Australia. Ilere the juvenile leaves are

extremely glaucous, as also are the buds and fruits. The fruits have a relatively

short pedicel and are also rather more hemispherical than the type. It could well

be that Z. jugalis Naudin was a hybrid derived from this form as the E. leucory-

jon parent, because Naudin refers particularly to the very glacous buds, which

is not characteristic of any of the three forms in South Australia, although @

limited degree of glaucousness may at times ocetir in them,

There is little doubt that E. jugalis had some . leucoxylon parentage and

it stems, therefore, that the name “jugalis” can be applied legitimately only to a

particular hybrid, the natural occurrence of which is not at present known nor

likely to be revealed in the future. Not is it likely that the “box” parent can be

deduced. =

It seems clear, therefore, that Blakely’s synonymising of E. jugalis with

E, leucorylom var. pauperita cannot stand, Moreover, it is unlikely that any

specimens can be referred with certainty to £. jugalis. It is considered, therefore,

that the name &. jygalis should be regarded as nomen dubiwm and be discarded.

It is apparent that satisfactory treatment of &. leucoxylon must tecognise

at least four distinct geographic populations, which might be well deseribed as four

sub-species, These are at present teptesented by E. leucoxrylon F. Muell,

£. leucoxylon yar, pauperita, J. E. Brown, E. lewcoxylon var. macrocarpa J. E.

Brown, and the population largely north-east and west of the Grampians in

Victoria extending at least to Bordertown and Naracoorte with pruinose buds,

fruits and juvenile leaves which possibly corresponds with E. leucorylon var.

pruinasa F. Muell. ex Mig.

Jt seems from this and similar investigations that a revision of many species

of Eucalyptus can only be satisfactorily made if extensive planned collection and

examination is made of each species throughout its range. Is must be expected

in the course of such surveys that in many places, especially where in the pre-

settlement state the area occupied by one species came in contact with the area

of distribution of a species with which it could form hybrids, extensive hybrid

swarms are now likely to exist and that the pattern of variation will be influenced

often by this,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I have pleasure in thanking Mr. C. D. Boomsma for assistance with supply

of seed; Mr, L.A. S. Johnson for discussion, particulatly on matters of nomer-

clature; and Mr. R, H. Anderson for free access to the collections in the Her-

barium, Sydney.

REFERENCES

RiakeLry, W. F, 1934 A Key to the Eucalypts

Brown, i E, N.D. The Forest Flora of South Australia, Government Printer,

. Aust.

Mammen, J. H. 1924 A Critical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus, Government

Printer, N.S.W.

Pryor, T. D, 1953 Anther Shape in Eucalyptus Genetics and Systematics.

Proc, Linn, Sac. N.S.W., 78, 43-48

Toon, Marvy A. 1953 The Types of Eucalyptus paniculata Sm, and E, sideraph-

lo ott and Their Probable Relationship. Kew Eutletin, No, 2,

NOTE ON THE EUCOSMID (OLETHREUTID) MOTH CRYPTOPHLEBIA

OMBRODELTA (LOWER)

BY NORMAN B. TINDALE*

Summary

At the request of Mr. J. D. Bradley of the British Museum a search has been made in the Oswald B.

Lower collection, at the South Australian Museum, for the type of the Eucosmid (Olethreutid) moth

described from Sydney by Lower (1898, p. 48) under the name Arotrophora (?) ombrodelta.

There were five specimens in Lower's main collection preserved in the South Australian Museum,

standing above a name label reading Argyroploce illepida Butler. Two examples were from

Kuranda, Queensland, and three from Brisbane. Two of the latter bore his register number, L.2857.

NOTE ON THE EUCOSMID (OLETHREUTID) MOTH CRYPTOPHLEBIA

OMBRODELTA (LOWER)

By Normans B, Tinnacs *

[Read 12 August 1954]

At the request of Mr. J. D. Bradley of the British Museum a search has

been made in the Oswald B. Lower collection, at the South Australian Museum,

for the type of the Eucosmid (Olethreutid) moth described from Sydney by

Lower (1898, p, 48) under the name Arotrophara (7) ombrodelta.

There were five specimetis in Lower’s main collection presetved in the South

Australian Museum, standing above a name label reading Argyroploce illepide

Butler. Two examples were from Kuranda, Queensland, and three from Bris-

tine. Two of the Jatter bore his register number, L.2857.

Under this number an entry was found, reading :—“Arotrephora ombrodelta

Lower. 5 specimens Sydney and Brisbane.” Internal evidence suggested this

entry was made between the years 1897 and 1900,

Lower seems subsequently to have made an amending entry indicating his

later conclusion that the name ombrodelta was a synonym of Argyroploce illepida

Butler, Another entry, possibly still later, says. “? pyrrhias Meyrick.”

The five examples grouped together by Lower in his collection agree with

Cryptophlebia ombrodelia (Lower) as defined by Bradley (1953), and with

ones from the T. P. Liicas collection picked out as C, ombrodelta by Mr. J. D.

Bradley when making a brief passing visit to Adelaide in February 1954. Thus

deductions made by him about the identity of Lower’s species are confirmed,

lf further check be needed it can be deduced from the register entries that

the Brisbane specimens numbered L.2857, by O. B. Lower, belong to the species

regarded hy him as ombradelta, and that at the time he made the entry he had

acquired several Brisbane examples as well as possessing a Sydney specimen

which was his type.

The Sydney specimen itself unfortunately was not present in the series

in his main cabinet. It could have been destroyed. However, search in other

drawers of duplicates produced a solitary female specimen, with one wing injured

and labelled merely as “Australia, Lower Coll.” This label had been placed on

the specimen at the time of its acquisition by the South Australian Museum.

Agreement between this specimen and the original description proved very close,

and with reasonable certainty it may be regatded as the type. It can be assumed

only that when Lower came to consider his species synonymous with Butler's

illcpida, he placed it among his duplicates as an example no longer of particular

interest,

In view of the renewed interest in it the specimen has been restored to the

main collection and provided with an approprtate label by the present writer,

An entry has been made also in Lower's Register to indicate the circumstances

of its recovery.

Fig. 1 is based on the type specimen, enlarged to approximately x4. The

general colour of the wings and body is pale brown with darker greyish-brown

markings, The large semilunate spot near tornus of forewing is rich chocolate

brown outlined with pale ochreous brown.

As indicated by Bradley (1953, p. 681) the identification of Cryptophlebdia

ombrodelta has had the effect of replacing the somewhat more familiar, but later

published name C. carpaphage Walsingham for this economically important pest

of tropical and sulitropical pods, fruits, seeds and stems,

® South Australian Museurn.

Study of the South Australian Museum specimens enables some new locality

records to be made so that its range, as so far known, is:—

Distribution in Australia—New South Wales: Sydney. Queensland: Bris-

bane, Duaringa, Kuranda, Northern Territory.

Distribution outside Australia (fide Bradley)—Java, Philippines, Guam,

Dampier Island, Formosa, Ceylon and Sotith Africa.

Foodplants on which it has been reported include:—Parkinsonia aculeata

(leaves and pods), Cassia (pods of C. fistula and C. occidentalis), several species

of Acacia, Aegle marmelos (fallen fruits), Sesbania aculeata (pods), S. grandi-

flora (seeds), Feronia (fruits), Bauhinia purpurea (pods), Adenanthera pavonia,

Pithecolobium dulce, and it has occurred ot orange fruits, litchi fruits and seeds,

and tamarind fruits.

Fig, 1, Cryptophlebia ombrodelta (Lower). Type, a female, Sydney.

Seventeen other species of this genus are on record, of which the following

have been reported from Australia :—

Cryptophlebia iridosoma (Meyrick)

Queensland: Brisbane, December 1905 (Lectotype in British Mu-

seum). This species is represented in the South Australian Museum

by specimens from Brisbane, October 1885, Cairns district, and

Kuranda,

Cryptophlebia rhynchias (Meyrick)

Reported from Queensland by Bradley but not represented in the

South Australian. Museum collection,

REFERENCES CITED

Brabtey, J, D. 1953 Bulletin of Entom. Research, London, 43, 682

Lower, O. B, 1898 Proc. Linnean Soc. New South Wales, Sydney, 23, 48

THE EVAPORATION PATTERN OVER AUSTRALIA FOR THE MONTHS

OF JANUARY AND JULY

BY C. W. BonyTHon,”” J. A. COLLINS” AND J. A. PRESCOTT”?

Summary

The evaporation pattern over Australia has previously been determined from actual evaporimeter

measurements. It has now been re-computed, using evaporation rates calculated from physical

theory and assuming there to be four effective meteorological factors, viz., radiant energy, mean air

temperature, humidity and wind. Mean rates have been calculated for January and July. These data

have been compared with evaporimeter measurements and with an empirical derivation from

saturation deficit.

The resulting evaporation pattern differs little from previous versions, but there is an anomaly

meriting further study appearing in January in the Victoria- Tasmania region.

THE EVAPORATION PATTERN OVER AUSTRALIA FOR THE

MONTHS OF JANUARY AND JULY

By C. W. Bonyrnon,® J. A. Corzrns) and J, A. Prescorr(?)

[Read 14 October 1954]

SUMMARY

The evaporation pattern over Australia has previotsly been determined from

actual evaporimeter measurements, It has now been re-computed, using évapora-

tion rates calculated from physical theory and assuming there to be four effective

meteorological factors, vic., radiant energy, mean air temperature, humidity and

wind. Mean rates have been calculated for January and July. These data have

been compared with evaporimeter measurements and with an empirical derivation

from saturation deficit.

The resylting evaporation pattern differs little from previous versions, but

there is an anomaly metiting further study appearing in January in the Victoria-

Tasmania region.

INTRODUCTION

The rate at which moisture is leaving the surface of the earth is recognised

as an important climatological concept and its relationship to precipitation has

been the subject of many discussions and the formulation of many climatic

indices. These moisture indices form the basis of modern climatic classifications

such as that of Thornthwaite (1948).

Much of this loss of mvuisture occurs as transpiration from the leaves of

vegetatioti, some occurs as evaporation from soil and some as evaporation from

the free surface of water. Transpiration, although different from evaporation,

is usually close to and directly related to it.

Evaporation from a free water surface is that most readily measured and

most easily reproduced when the extent of surface is specified. It has therefore

become in itself a useful climatic index. Practical measurements are usually made

from open vessels of water termed tank or pan eyaporimeters.

Such tank evaporimeters have been tised in Australia for many years and

Foley (1947) has discussed the results of such measurements, and this dis-

cussion has formed the basis of the publication of a series of mean annual,

tnean six monthly, and mean monthly maps hy the Commonwealth Meteorological

Pranch (1954) from data revised up to May 1953. These maps are based on

estimates of evaporation based on the so-called Waite formula:

B=22 (te-ts) 9- = 5 7 2 * = * Q)

where E is the mean monthly evaporation

and (fs -~a) is the corresponding atinospheric saturation deficil, ps being

the saturation water vapour pressure al the temperature of the air and

Pa the actual vapour pressure, In this case vapour pressures are

expressed in inches of mercury, as established by Prescott (1938), and

nodified by reference to actital evaporation records for tanks.

Yank evaporimeters are not, however, sufficiently numerous, nor sufficiently

evenly distributed to show accurately in themselves the complete pattern of

evaporation, and they are subject to certain hazards and practical difficulties,

@ LCL. Alkali (Australia) Pty. Ltd.

(@) Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide.

some of which have been described by Foley and by Bonython (1950). However,

since it is known that the evaporation from a free water surface is dependent

upon fully understood physical principles involving parameters relating to meteo-

rological factors which are all measurable, there is some advantage in calculating

evaporation according to these principles in order to avoid the practical difficulties.

inherent in the use of evaporimeters.

The accuracy of these meteorological observations then becomes important,

but the individual factors are often widely measured and their variations are

well understood, so that vatues which are most representative of large areas of

country can be derived and used. This is particularly true of the wind factor.

It is difficult to ensure that an evaporimeter is exposed under the mean wind

conditions of the district, but in the calculations. to which reference is made, it

becomes possible to use values for wind speed extrapolated either from wind

measured at a high level or from the geostrophic wind and in this way avoid

becoming involved in the microclimatic complexities of the locality.

Penman (1950) has determined the evaporation pattern of the British Isles

by means of such calculations.

AUSTRALIA

RELATIVE SUNSHINE 7%,

JANUARY

THe Prysicat THrory

The physical theoty of natural evaporation from a free water surface has

been placed of a sound basis by the work of Penman (1948) and Ferguson

(1952). These workers recognised that solar and atmospheric radiation, air tem-

perature, humidity and wind are the four teteorological factors determining

the rate of evaporation. It is proposed here to use the equation of Ferguson.

101

This equation is based on the Dalton equation (2), into which is then incor-

porated a method of calculating the vapour pressure at the water surface from

the four meteorological factors.

wek(—-b) - - 7 7 7 7 ttt

where w is the weight of water evaporated in unit time from a unit area,

k is the coefficient of mass diffusion between the water and the air,

Py is the vapour pressure at the evaporating surface, and pe is the

partial pressure of water vapour in the air above the surface as

indicated above.

Ferguson has shown that, on the basis of the empirical relationship between

the cocfhcients of heat and mass transfer for evaporation of water into air:

—= 0:50 ee C2)

where h is the coefficient of heat transfer and L is the latent heat of vapori-

zation when temperatures ate in degrees Centigrade and the vapour

pressure is in millimetres of mercury.

The vapour pressure of the evaporating surface can be expressed by:

t= Xa = + 2mm + Oe) | Sk te oe we Fe

where X, is a futiction of the water temperature, Q is the nett gain of

radiant energy by the water surface and 6¢ is the air temperature,

Substitution in equation (2) gives rise to the equation:

2h e -

E=— Xg [2h + @a — ha - » > - (5)

L h

where k has been teplaced by its equivalent in h, and w by E,

Expressed in specific terms (5) becomes:

E,,=h E fa 2a“ , —fa} - - *% . - (6)

where E,, is the rate of evaporation in inches per month of 31 days, h is

the coefficient of heat transfer in cal./em*/hr./°C, Q is the nett gain

of radiant energy in cals./em.2/hr., pa is the atmospheric humidity

expressed as the partial pressure of water vapour in mm, of mercury,

fa. ; i air temperature and Xg is a function of temperature (see

Table 1).

By a coincidence the numerical constant of equation (6), for the specific

combitiation of units and rates, is 1°O and hence no numerical constant is shown.

Strictly Xe is referred to the temperature of the water, but as this is one of

the unknowns the appropriate values are found from the air temperatiire 6a .

This is admissable in practice since under most natural conditions the tem-

peratures of the air and water are close together and X,» changes only slowly with

temperature.

102

Taste I

values of Ng for values of @ for water

Temperature (4) Xp Temperature (@) Kg

eC *{;

5 > - - - 0-361 1% ~ - - - 0317

G - - * ~ 0349 19 - - os - 0-317

7 - - - - +341 20 - - - - 0-318

S- =~ = = O334 21 - - = = 0326

9 - - - - 0-328 2z - - - - +322

wm - - - - 324 23 - - - - 0324

ll - - - - 0-320 a- (C - - 0°326

12 - - - ~ 0-318 25 - - - ~ 0-328

i - - - ~ 317 26 - - - ~ +330

14 - - - - 0-316 27 - - - ~ 07935

15 - - - - 0-315 28 - - - - 0335

l@ - - - - 0-315 29 - - - - 0°337

17 - - - - 0-316 30 - - - - 0-340

Equation (6) is for the steady state where no term for heat storage is

necessary, and hence no allowance is made for the constantly varying conditions

and the changes in stored heat so characteristic of natural conditions. Ferguson

has shown, however, that equation (6) gives reasonably accurate results when

the mean yalues of the meteorological data are used providing that the pond is

shallow and that the period of time consideted is at least two or three days.

CALCULATING THE RATE oF EVAPORATION

Equation (6) has been used in calculating the monthly rate of evaporation

for the appropriate stations listed in Pamphlet 42 of the Council for Scientific

and Industrial Research (1933). The appropriate meteorological data provided

in this pamphlet are the mean monthly values for maximum and minimum tem-

peratures and for relative humidity. Two hundred and ninety stations are repre-

sented in the calculations. The values so obtained haye been entered on a map

of Australia and appropriate lines of equal evaporation drawn for the two months

of January and July. In view of the possible early publication of ip-to-date

nortals for these meteorological factors and in view of the fact thal the calcula-

tions were intended primarily to be a test of the Ferguson equation, it was. not

considered desirable at this stage to carty the calculations further so as to

include all months of the year. The basic climatic values have been derived and

handled as follows:

Nett gain of radiant energy—This quantity Q includes radiation of two

types—short-wave solar radiation and long-wave atmospheric radiation. [nsolation

reaching the water surface suffers a small loss by reflection, the balance entering

the water where it is assttmed to be fully absorbed. The water surface radiates

out long-wave energy almost as a black body, but this loss is partly offset by

a downward streatn of long-wave radiation from the atmosphere,

Insolation ts frequently measured by means of the solarimetric thermopile,

but very few regular measuremetits are made of atmospheric radiation and this

is usually estimated from meteorological data using empirical formulae like those

listed by Brunt (1944) and more recently by Anderson (1952). In Australia

there are so few direct measurements of insolation available that for the purpose

of this paper the quantity has been derived from relative sunshine, using for this

purpose maps supplied by the Commonwealth Meteorological Branch, of the

duration of sunshine for January and July based in part on sunshine recorders

AUSTRALIA

——— 42 87 une ——

| ts

RELATIVE SUNSHINE "iy

JULY

a et

Tig. 2

and in part on observations of cloudiness. These two maps of relative sunshine

are illustrated in figs, 1 and 2.

Black, Bonython and Prescott (1954) have shown that the insolation reach-

ing the earth’s surface can be calculated from relative sunshine by means of the

equation:

=atb— - - - - - - - - - (#7)

a N

where Q is. radiation actuaily received, Q, is the theoretical radiation

for an aitless earth (Angot’s value), # is the actual duration of sun-

shine and NV is the maximum possible duration of sunshine, In these

calculations for Australia the parameters in this equation for the observa-

tions at Dry Creek, South Australia, have been selected, namely

a =0-3 and b=0°5, There is a suggestion in some of the detailed

records examined that the parameter @ varies with latitude, but this 1s

not confirmed by the broader statistical analysis of the wider records.

The loss by reflection on clear days in temperate latitudes is small and is

practically constant throughout the year. It can be approximately corrected for

”

cloudiness by multiplying by relative sunshine —.

104

The nett loss of long-wave radiation is allowed for in a simple manner by

taking into account cloudiness and humidity but not air temperature. The com-

bined short-wave and long-wave expression appropriate for the calculation of

nett radiation received is:

n (Oz Pa

O=0°3 —|—-+— -114) -1 - ~ 8

Q, +— (= +: (8)

where Q is the nett gain of radiant energy for a horizontal surface in

cals./cm.?/hour.

| AUSTRALIA eo)

ESTIMATED NETT Hanes RECEIVED Sia

CALS /CM?/ HR. 17-0) is

JANUARY Geos + C+ ie-irs)- 7s he g |

=e ir a a ee See, ae 2

Fig, 3

Air temperature—This quantity 0a is the mean of the mean monthly maxi-

mum and minimum teniperatures. It is expressed in degrees Centigrade.

Humidity—This quantity pe is derived from the mean temperature as

defined above and the relative humidity. It is expressed as mm. of mercury.

Heat transfer coefficient—This parameter fh is interchangeable with the mass

tranfer coefficietit Rk. It is preferable to use the former because its value on an

hourly basis is conveniently close to unity under most conditions of natural

evaporation. These transfer coefficients are empirically related to horizontal

wind speed, and for the present purposes the value of ft is based on the relation-

ship to wind velocity found by Bonython (1950) for the standard Australian

tank evaporimeter three feet in diameter, In view of the difficulties of obtaining

105

records of wind velocity over the continent, B. Mason) calculated the mean

wind speed for a height of one metre by extrapolation from the geostrophic wind,

using as check points the wind speeds measured by Dines anemograph at the

main Australian airports. This pattern of wind spced expressed in terms of

the parameter h was presented in the form of maps for January and July.

E. L. Deacon“? has confinned the admissability of this procedure in refer-

ence to certain wind stations on Salisbury Plain in England.

For January the value of A ranges from 1-8 near to Cape Leeuwin to less

than 0:75 in parts of the interior, for July the values range from 1-2 to 0°8,

Ht a

‘ = ;

ESTIMATED NETT RADIATION RECEIVED

CALS AMER. Fay / ~

jury gros cerge-nat-i| | | __|% f Se

Fig. 4

pease pera jj P25

je ee es ; a=

Maps of the nett guin of radiant energy and of the rate of evaporation

derived from. the equations (8) and (6) are given in figs, 3, 4, 5 and 6 for the

two months concerned.

The observed and calculated values of evaporation for 41 evaporimeter

stations are given in Table 2. For a number of these it has been possible also to

list the evaporation calculated from the normal published values of saturation

deficit, using the “Waite formula” of the Commonwealth Weather Bureau.

106

TABLE 2

Comparison of observed and calculated evaporation for January and July

JANUARY JULY

Qbseryed ~ Calculated Calculated Observed Calculated Calculated

* LOCALITY from energy from satura- from energy from satura-

balance tion deficit balauce tion deficit

ins./month ins,/month ins./month ins./month ins./month ins./month

Western Australia

Chapman ~~ - 11:94 12-80 — 2:47 3°50 —

Merredin - - 12:96 12-60 — 2-12 2-10 =

Narrogin - - 9-19 12-10 —_ 1-62 1-80

Perth - - 10°37 12-65 8°83 1-76 2:64 2-07 —

Marble Bar - 11-00 14-28 18-03 5*60 6°00 7+64

Coolgardie - 12-48 12-11 _ 2-44 2-47 —

Eucla - - 6°75 10-20 7+26 2-49 2-84 —_

South Australia and Northern Territory

Adelaide - - 9-27 12541 11-33 1-39 2:07 1:88

Alice Springs - 1240 13°35 13+83 3°75 3°73 3:00

Darwin “ - §+28 7°60 3-13 8-23 7°29 4-69

Kybybolite - 7°47 10-00 6°64 1-28 1-50 0-69

Waite Institute - 8:57 10-76 8-44 1-71 1-92 1-93

Yudnapinna - 14-62 12-35 10:61 3-04 2-50 1-91

Queensland

Riloela - - 9-39 8-70 7°26 3-66 3-70 2-44

Brisbane - - 6:74 8-90 7-01 2-69 3415 5:76

Rockhampton = - 5-68 9-1 6°95 2°67 3:99 3°26

Gilruth Plains - 14-33 12-25 14-90 3°60 2-84 2:75

New South Wales

Burrenjttck - 6-19 9-00 — +85 1-49 —

Canberra - 8-84 9-34 7°14 1-33 1-44 1:00

Cowra - - 8-44 9-60 11°52 1-55 1-60 1-25

Griffith - - 9°32 10-13 -- 1-46 1-68 _

Dubbo - - 10°91 10-41 10°26 1:40 1:74 0:95

Leeton - - 8-58 10°46 10-58 1°13 1:63 1-25

Yenda - - 8-91 10-48 — 1°38 1:64 _

Trangie - - 10-40 1085 — 1-68 1-89 —_

Rathurst = - - 7°21 8°79 6°32 1-18 1:60 0-88

Hume - - 7:21 10-07 — 0-87 1-35 —

Lake Victoria - 9-48 11-50 8:39 1-57 1°74 1-06

Sydney - - 5+42 8°76 570 1:56 2-06 1:88

Umberumberka - 12-71 12+43 11°89 2-92 2°21 3°13

Walgett - - 8-08 11-15 11-77 2:00 2-26 1:57

Wilcannia - - 9+46 12:71 14:52 1-95 2-17 1-88

Victoria

Geelong salt - 6-89 9-14 5-38 1-95 1-52 1-19

Laverton - 7°74 9-17 — 1-36 1-39 =

Melbourne - 6-45 9-40 6-39 1-12 1-51 1:13

Merbein - - 9-71 10-38 — 1-78 1-70 _

Rutherglen - 8-63 10-92 — 0°86 1+41 —_

Walpeup = - - 10-56 10-60 —_ 1-37 1-40 _

Werribee - ~ 6:97 9-17 — 1-31 1-39 =

Tasmania

Cressy - - 5-11 8-81 4-95 0-97 0-85 0-69

Hobart - - 4-84 8-62 5-01 0-94 0-99 1-25

107

DISCUSSION

The evaporation map for January (fig. 5) shows mainly concentric lines

roughly parallel with the coast, the rate increasing inland. There is a central

atea of highest evaporation over the Lake Eyre basin, and a secondary closed

system of equally high evaporation in the far west between Latitudes 20° and

30° S. The map for July (fig. 6) shows lines of equal evaporation stretching

across the continent, approximately along the parallels of Latitude and showing

an increase in evaporation from south to north. The maps show considerable

resemblance to the official maps of 1954, so far as the general pattern is con-

cerned, with the best agreement for the month of July. The region of greatest.

disagreement is Victoria and Tasmania for the month of January, where the

evaporation shown in fig. 5 considerably exceeds that of the official maps. These

AUSTRALIA

« eoete er mene

EVAPORATION

INCHES PER MONTH

JANUARY — E = blag 2 42 7,+8,)~ fal

TT ——————

Fig. 5

differences are emphasised in the data of Table 2 where the observed evaporations

and those calculated from atmospheric saturation deficit are derived as far as

possible from the ctrrent meteorological summaries. The differences between

the cbserved values and those calculated from the Ferguson equation of energy

balance are greater in January than in July, In general, calettlated evaporations

are greater than observed evaporations, The discrepancy between observed and

calculated evaporation for Victoria and Tasmania needs further investigation,

particularly as the calculations from saturation deficit are generally much. closer

to the observed values. Certain stations listed in Table 2 were discussed by Foley

108

as recording anomalous values: for evaporation, Of these, Marble Bar, Walgett

and Wilcannia record lower values than would be expected from the saturation

deficit, and Yudnapinna records much higher values. It will be observed from

the Table that these deviations are maintained when the evaporation is cal-

culated from the’ Ferguson equation. A first inference is that observations of

evaporation for these places are suspect. Another is that the meteorological

parameters common to the two processes of calculation are in some way

erroneous.

AUSTRALIA

eee

EVAPORATION

INCHES PER MONTH

=e +2 tq t ba) ~ je

Vig. 6

In any case it is interesting to speculate why a calculation based on satura-

tion deficit, which involves only temperature and humidity, should correlate so

well with one involving also radiant energy and wind, In the first place it should

be noted that equation (1) which is used in the calculations involving saturation

deficit is a purely empirical one based on the regression equation between

observed values for evaporation and saturation deficit, whereas those derived

from the Ferguson equation are based more directly on physical principles, with

empirical factors relating only to standard meteorological elements.

Equation (1) is in fact only a particular case of Equation (2) where k

remains constant and fg =}, , that is, the evaporating water is at exactly air

temperature. The good correlation can therefore be explained by the fact that,

at a given time & (or h) may not vary very greatly over a considerable area of

country, and also by the fact that the difference in temperature between air

and evaporating water is frequently small over quite a range of natural condi-

109

tions. Another point is that the rise and fall of mean air temperature usually

follows closely the rise and fall of the mean rate of insolation, the nett result

being that when insolation and temperature are high or low, saturation deficit

is similarly high or low. The factor that militates against the use of these simpler

correlations is that evaporation is never quite in phase with the individual

meteorological parameters, except possibly with those based on air movement.

It is interesting to recall here the further empitical correlations which have

been found between evaporation and insolation and between evaporation and

temperature by Prescott (1940, 1943). In essence, evaporation of any kind calls for

a source of energy, in this case solar radiation, and there is no doubt that the.

estimation of evaporation in the future will take into account this source of latent

heat as well as the atmospheric factors of temperature, humidity and air move-

ment.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The authors are indebted to Mrs. I. Mathison of the Waite Agricultural

Research Institute for organizing the necessary computations, to Mr. B. Mason,

South Australian State Climatologist of the Commonwealth Meteorological

Branch, for determining wind patterns over Australia, and to Dr. C. H. B,

Priestley and Mr. E. L. Deacon, of the Section of Meteorological Physics,

C.S.LR.O., for advice concerning vertical wind structure. They also wish to

thank the headquarters of the Commonwealth Meteorological Branch for prepar-

ing sunshine maps of Australia, and in particular Mr. J. C. Foley of that Branch,

for helpful advice on the handling of observed Australian evaporation data,

REFERENCES

Anperson, E. R. 1952 U.S. Geol. Surv. Circular 229, Lake Hefner Studies,

Brack, J. N., Bonytuon, C. W,, and Prescott, J. A, 1954 Quart. Journ. Roy:

Met. Soc., 80, 231-235

Bonytuon, C. W. 1950 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 73, 198-219

Brunt, D, 1944 Physical and Dynamical Meteorology, 2nd Ed., Cambridge

Univ. Press. 137

CoMMONWEALTH MeTeoroLosicaL Brancu 1954 Maps of Annual, Six-

monthly and Monthly Evaporation

C.S.LR. 1933 Pamphlet 42

Fercuson, J, 1952 Aust. Jour. Sci. Res., 5a, 315-330

Forey, J. C. 1947 Report Aust. N.Z. Ass, Adv. Sci. (Perth), 302 (in title

only, text privately circulated)

Penman, H.L. 1948 Proc. Roy. Soc., A, 193, 120-145

Penman, H.L. 1950 Q. J. Roy. Met. Soc., 76, 372-383

Prescorr, J. A. 1938 four. Aust. Inst. Agr. Sci., 4, 33-0

Prescott, J. A. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 64, 114-118

Prescott, J. A. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 67, 1-6

THornTHWaiTs, C. W. 1948 Geogr. Rev,, 38, 55-94

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

NO. 6”

BY ERNEST H. ISING

Summary

The paper describes one new genus and seven new species of South Australian plants. Five of them

are in Chenopodiaceae, viz., Atriplex sessilifolia n.sp., Kochia concava n.sp., K. ovata n.sp.,

Malacocera biflora n. sp. and Bassia holtiana n. sp.

Carinavalva glauca n. gen. et n.sp. in Cruciferae and Goodenia helenae n.sp. in Goodeniaceae are

also included.

Species recorded for the first time in South Australia are Lepidium strongylophyllum F. v. M. in

Cruciferae and *Osteospermum calendulaceum L. f. in Compositae. The latter species is an

introduction from South Africa, as is the showy yellow daisy, *Senecio pterophorus DC., which is

spreading near Mount Lofty and could become a pest on cultivated land.

All the new species were found in the Oodnadatta district, mostly on Evelyn Downs, the property of

Mr. R. G. Holt.

110

NOTES ON THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

No. 6(1)

(With descriptions of one new genus and seven new species)

By Ernest H. Isine

Communicated by C. M, Eardley *°

'y y*)

[Read 12 August 1954]

SUMMARY

The paper describes one new geus and seven new species of South Australian. plants.

Five of them are in Chenopodiaceae, vis., Alriplex sessilifolia nsp., Kochia concava n.sp.,

K, ovata n.sp., Malacocera biflora nm. sp. and Bassia holizana nu. sp.

Carinavalva glauca n. gen, et np. m Criciferae and Goodenia helenae n.sp. in Goode-

tiiaceae are also included,

Species recorded for the first time in South Australia are Lepidtant strongylephyllum

F. v. M. in Cruciferae and *Osteospermauii calendulacenm L. £, in Compositae. The Jatter

species is an introduction from South Africa, as is the showy yellow daisy, *Senecio ptero-

phorus DC, which is spreading near Mount Tofty and could become a pest on cultivated land.

All the new species were found in the Oodnadatta district, mostly on Evelyn Downs, the

property of Mr. R. G. Holl.

Most of the species mentioned in this paper were collected by me on Evelyn

Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, a sheep station owned by Mr, R. G.

Holt. Through the hospitality of Mr. and Mrs. R, G, Holt and the transport

provided, I have been able to collect botanical specimens during the past five

years.

The abbreviations set out below have been used for the names of the herbaria

mea toned, according to “Index Herbariornm,” Pt. I, 2nd Ed., by J. Lanjouw and

F, A, Staflen.

AD... Herbarium of the University of Adelaide, soon to be hotised in the new

State Herbarium, Botanic Garden, Adelaide.

Kk .. The Herbarium, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England.

MEL... National Herbarium of Victoria, Melbourne.

NSW ..., National Herbarium of New South Wales, Sydney,

GRAMINEAE

Digitaria coenicola Nees. Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta,

E. H. Tsing, No. 3628, 8.10.53. This is the first record for our Far North.

Identification by Mr. L, D. Williams.

PROTEACEAE

Adenanthos terminalis R. Br, Wanilla, Eyre Peninsula, £. I. Ising,

No. 3413, 2,9,38, First record for Eyre Peninsula.

LORANTHACEAE

Additional host plants can now be recorded for three species of Loranthus,

all from Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadaita, E. H. Ising.

Loranthus exocarpi Behr. On Acacia tetragonophylla EF. v. M., October 1950

and 317.51; on Pittosporum phillyracoides DC, 31.8.51 and 7.10.53; Eremophila

dutionii F.v. M,, 20.7.51; on Cassia phyllodinea R. Br., 22,9.53.

L. preissii Mig. On Acacia cambagei R, 'T. Baker, 26.7.51 and 9.8.51,

L, maidenti Blakely. On Acacia cambagei R. T. Baker, 26.7.51.

* University of Adelaide,

@) Paper No, 5 in this series appeared in 1937, Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 61, 221.

CHENOPODIACEAE

Atriplex sessilifolia n. sp.

Suffrates usque ad 15 cm, alt., perennis, unjsexualis, ramis procumbentibus

demutn erectis, subalbis, squamo-tomentosis; folia 4-7 x 3-5 mm, ovata,

acuminata, integra, sessillia, glauco-yirentia, tomento syuamoso albido, in ramis

distaliter conferta; flores axillares, fasciculati; bracteoli fructus circa + mm. long,,

et 5 mum. Jat, tenui, resticulati, suborbiculati, basi cordati, margine integri,

miucronibus venarum palmatarum exceptis, usque ad basin aperti; appendices

nullae; pedicellus 1 mm, lony,; stylt 2, circa 2 mm. long,; sendin erecta, racicula

laterali.

Undershrub up to 15 cm. high, perennial, branches procumbent and finally

erect, whitish with scaly tomentum; leaves 4-7 mm. long, 3-5 mm, wide, ovate,

acuminate, entire, sessile, pale green with whitish scaly tomentum, densely placed

specially in upper part of branches; flowers dioecious, in axillary clusters; frrit-

ing bracteoles about 4 mm. Jong and 5 mm, wide, thin, reticulate, suborbicular,

cordate at base, margins entire except for mucro terminating each of the palmate

veins, open to base; appendages absent; pedicel 1 mm. long; styles 2 about halt

as Jong as bracteole; sced vertical with lateral radicle. Male plant not seen,

Mount Willoughby Station, about 80 niles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. 4,

Jsing, No. 3570, 12.8.52, fig, 1, 14-16, the halotype. The Aolotype (AD). conststs

of one complete plant and one piece (isotype NSW), Another complete plant

(paratype) was collected at the same time and at the same place and this is also

in the Adelaide University Herbarium, This is all that was collected, both of them

female plants and both bear the No. 3570, aud all are covered by the description

herewith,

The new species is nearest to Atriplex cerdijolia J. M. Black but differs in

being a woody perennial; leaves smaller, entire, pale greet with whitish scales,

nat cordate; flowers dioecious; fruiting bracteole suborbicular with margmal teeth

at extremity of palmate veins.

Bassia holtiana n.sp-

Suffratee usque ad 25 cm, alt., ramis diffusis, albo-tomentosis; folia plana,

lineatia, 5-15 mm. long., villosa, dispersa; flores solitarii; pertanthus fructus durus,,

albo-tomentosus, circa 3 mm, long, et diam., membro subnullo, facie anteriore

subplana, verticaliter pluri-costata, facie posteriore breviter gibbosa; basis

perianthi fortiter concava, oblonga, obliqua, magna; spinae 2, glabri, tuberculati,

longiori 6-7 mm. divergenti, breviore 34 mm, Tatius divergenti (raro tertius brevis

adest) ; senzina erecta.

Small undersheub up to 25 cm. high, branches mostly diffuse, white-tomentose ;

leaves flat, Jinear 5-15 mm, Jong, scattered, villous; ffowers solitary; frutling

peridnth hard, white-tomentose, about 3 mm. Jong and broad, limb almost want-

ing, anterior face almost flat with several vertical ribs. posterior face somewhat

gihbous; base deeply hollowed, oblong, very oblique, large; spines 2, glabrous,

mostly with a tubercle, rarely a third short spine, the longer one 6-7 mm., diver-

gent, shorter one 3-4 mm. and more widely divergent; seed vertical, Evelyn

Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, found on this Station and named in

honour of the owner, Mr. R, G. Holt. F. H. Ising, No. 3624, Angust 1953,

fig. I, 17-19, the Aolotype (AD) consists of ten pieces off the type plant (iso-

types} and all are covered by the description herewith. Besides the holotype,

I collected, from the same locality and at the same time, different specimens of

the new species and these are given different numbers (paratypes). K, NSW, and

MEL isotypes.

The new species differs from Bassia uniflora (R. Br.) FP. v. M. in base oblong

and more oblique, Hat villous leaves and vertical seed. From B. paralellicuspts

R. H. Anderson in divergent, longer, glabrous spines and shorter villous leaves.

Bassia blackiene EF, H, Ising, Specimens from Condiments Plain (near Mount

Batty Station), 45 miles south of Oodnadatta, show that the leaves are up to

20 mm. long, sessile by a broad base: fruiting perianth to 4 mm. long, remaining

fomentose; spines sometimes only slightly recurved; base oblique, A. #7,

ising, No, 3583, 13.7.52.

Kochia concava n. sp.

Suffrulex, erectus, 30-40 cm. alt, cattle ramisque lignasis, adpresse alba-

pubescentibus; folia 12-32 x 1°5-3 mim,, linearia vel lanceolata, acuta, crassa,

sessilia, basi lata, adpresso-sericea, albo-pubescentia, utrmaue longitudinaliter

costata vel rugosa; periontius fractus concavus, 4-10 mm, diam, ala inclusa,

tomento denso albo-lanato intricatn abditus: w/a 2-4 mm. fat., annulata, corface:,

adscendens; /eba 4-7, inaequalia, irregularia, obtusa; tubus convexus, 1-2 mm,

long., circa 4 min. diam.; basis parva; semine horizontals, oblonga, plawa, brunnea,

2 mm. longa.

Erect. shrub 30-40 em, high; stem and ltanches. woody, with white silky

appressed pubescence; eaves 12-32 min. long, 1°5-3 mm. wide, linéar-lanceolate,

acute, thick, sessile, attached by broad base, longitudinally ribbed or rugose oan

hoth faces, pubescence white, silky appressed ; fruiting perianth concave, 5-10 mm.

diam. including wing, hidden by dense white loose woolly hairs; wing 2-4 mm.

wide, annular, coriaceous, ascending; dobes 4-7, very unequal and irregular, obtuse;

fube 1-2 mm. long, about 4 mm, wide, convex; base small; sced horizontal, oblonz,

2 nim. long, flat, brown.

Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, K. H. Tsing, No. 3561.

3.9,52 fig. T, 1-5, the holotype consisting of three pieces off the type plant and

are covered by the description herewith (NSW isotype), Only one plant seen

and collected from. JZolotype AD.

This new species differs from Kochia seleroptera J, M, Black im hairs un

branches pubescent: leaves longer and with prominent longitudinal ribs on both

faces; fruiting perianth larger and with villous bairs; wing annular and very

unequally labed and tube not ribbed.

Although the new species js alrnost identical with Kochia ertantha BP. v. M.

in stem, branches, leaves and in the hairs of the fruiting perianth, it differs radi-

cally in shape and consistency of the fruiting perianth which is hard and thick;

wing concave, ascending, very unequally lobed; in tube convex and seed horizontal.

Kochia ovata n. sp.

Suffrutex, circa 13 em. alt., ramis paucis plerumaiie procumbentibus; ramulis

Jateralitas numerosis, 5-20 mm. long., circa 3 mm, diam., folia et tomento meliusis;

lanta tota densissime albo-lanata et caulo foltisque abditis; folia plerumque 2 mm.

long., sessilia, ovata, subconcava, obtusa, integra, conferta, allernata, sursnin

villosa; perianthus fructus 2-3 mm. diam, ala horizontali inclusa, glaber sed

loba villosa; ala tenuiter metnbranacea, dilute atirea, circa O-5 mm. lat, I-fissa

vel irregularis; tubus homisphacricus, circa 1 im. long., dilute brunnenus, nitens;

eostue una vel plures distinctae; basis parva, orbiculata, minute concava; semina

horizontalis, 1 mm, diam., atro-brunnea, nitens,

Small widershrub about 13 cm. high, branches few, mostly procumbent;

numerous Jateral branchlets 5-20 mm, long and 3 mm. thick including leaves and

wool; whole plant so densely white woolly tomentose as fo hide all stems and

leaves; leaves usually 2 mm. long, sessile, ovate, somewhat concave, obtuse, entire,

closely placed, alternate, villous hairs on upper face; fruiting perianth 2-3 mun.

diam,, including horizontal wing, glabrous except Inbes which are villous; wing

thin, membranons, pale-golden, once cleft, about O°5 mm. wide, sometimes uneven;

tube hemispherical, about 1 tm. long, pale brown, shming; ribs one with often

several others more or less distinct; base amall, circular, minutely hollowed; seed

horizontal, 1 mm, diam., dark brown, shining.

113

Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, £. H. Ising, No. 3563,

10,10,52, fig. I, 10-13, the holotype. The teletype (AD.) consists of three pieces

off the type plant which are covered hy the description herewith, Only one plant

was collected from and each piece bears the same number, No, 3563 (NSW iso-

type}. Many other specimens were collected from the type locality in 1954,

Differs from Kochia enchylaenoides J. M, Black in leaves ovate and smaller;

perianth hase smaller, 1-6 ribbed, mot turning black and clothing densely woolly.

From K. tamariscina (Lindl.) J. M. Black in the clothing, leaves and perianth

tube.

Malacocera biflora n- sy).

Suffrutex usque ad 25 cm. alt, ramis numerosis, lateralibus procumbentibus,

totis albo-tomentosis; falia alternata, linearia vel oblonga, acuminata, sessilia, basi

lata, villosa, im aetate subglabra, 3-9 x 1-5 mm, (in plantas juvenilibus usque ad

25 mm. longa); flores parvuli, bini axillares, in ramis distaliter conferti, dense

tomentosi; perianthus obtuse paullum 5-lotatus, fructum tegens; stigmata 2;

perianthus fructus planus, citea 5 mt. long., sursum 3-5 mm. diam.; aloe J, circa

1-5 mm, long., horizantales, obtusae vel acntae, stimbolles, 2 superioribus cornict-

latas, ab inferiore late separatas (raro ala quarta lateralis adest); basis perianthi

orbiculata, centralis, dense tadianto-villosa; fubus brevissinus, comvexus; semina

horizontalis, biconvexa,

Small undershrub up to 25 cm. high; branches numerous, lateral ones pro-

cumbent, all hidden by white tomentum; leaves linear to oblong, acuminate, villous,

more or less glabrous with age, 3-9 mm. long x 1-5 min, wide (up to 25 mm. long

on young plants), sessile with broad base, alternate; flowers small, consistently

2 in axils, crowded at top of branches, densely tomentose; perianth with 5 small

lobes which close over the fruit; stigmas 2; frititing perianth flat, about 5 mm.

long and 3-5 mm. wide at summit; wings usually 3 about 1°5 mm. long, horizontal,

obtuse or pointed, more or less soft, the two at the top horn-like in appearance

and widely separated from the basal one, sometimes a fourth lateral one; base

small, circular, central, surrounded by dense yillous radiating hairs; tbe very

short, convex; seed horizontal, hiconvex,

Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. H. Ismg, No. 3616,

27.10.53, fig. I, 6-9, the holotype, The Avlotype (AD) consists of twelve pieces

off the type plant which are all covered by the description herewith. Besides the

holotype, I also collected, from the same locality and at the same time, different

specimens of the new species and these are given different numbers (paratypes).

NSW and MEL isotypes.)

Malacocera was described by R. H. Anderson in 1926, Proc. Linn. Soc.

New South Wales, li, 382 and inter alia he describes the flowers as solitary in

the axils with three horizontal horns on the perianth, but he agrees (in a letter

to me} that the new species should be placed in this genus although the flowers

are consistently two in the axils and there is sometimes a fourth horizontal wing,

The new species differs from Malacocera tricornis (Benth.) R. H, Atiderson

in flowers always being two im the axils and the flat wings broader and shorter,

also ina much larger perianth. M. tricornis and M. biflora n. sp. grow intermingled

with one another on Evelyn Downs,

CRUCIFERAE

Lepidiuws pseudo-ruderale Thell. Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of

Oodnadatta, E. HW. Ising, No. 3452, 5.8.52. Dirst record for Far North,

L. strangylophiylium F. v, M, Undershrub up to 25 cn. high, at least biennial,

glabrous; stem and branches striate, hard and woody, erect, stem at base to 3 num.

diam. ; eaves obovate, up to 24 mm. long and 14 mm. wide, abruptly tapering

into a short petiole of 3 mm,, entire, obtuse, thick, rigid, midrib prominent at

il4

base and decurrent on stem; racemes terminal, dense, lengthening in fruit to

10 cm. and persisting on the plant for two or more seasons, a new branch spring-

ing trom the base of old raceme; fruiting pedicels very spreading, 5-6 min. long,

rigid, persistent; sepa/s with white margins, 4 mm. long, oblong, broad at base,

keeled at summit; petals white, oblanceolate, 5 mm. long. narrowed to base; pod

almost orbicular, 5 mm. long, 4 mm. wide, valves boat-shaped with narrow wing;

style 1-2 mm. long; stigma capitate, small; notch shallow, slightly divergent; seed

one in each cell, pendulous; sephuw narrow. — Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-

west of Qodnadatia, EB. HH. Ising, 10.10.51, No. 3562. First record for South

Australia. Previously recorded from Central Atistralia and Queensland.

Carinavalva noy, gen.

Trom Latin carina, keel; velea valve; the valves of the pod are keeled.

Sepala 4 oblonga, duabus exterioribus basi saceatis; petala tenuiter lanceolata,

longe acuminata; sfanting 6 tetradynama; fructus brevis latusque, lateraliter com-

pressus dehiscens; wvaleis cymbiformibus, mediis netvis conspicuis; septa tenni

elliptico, muris cellularum plus mimusye quadratarum epidermidis undulatis; stignw

2-lobatunt; stylus brevissimus; ovariuam sessile bi-cellulare; owu/a numerosissima ;

coiwledanes incumbentes, tenuiter oblongis, compressis, breviter stipitatis, — Herha

annua; segmentes folti lineares ; flores racemosi, peduncults mudis,

Sepuls 4 oblong, 2 outer ones saccate at base; petals narrow lanceolate with

long point; stamens 6, 4 long and 2 short; ped short and broad, compressed laterally,

dehiscent; valves boat-shaped, midnerve conspicuous; sepliuim narrow elliptical,

af tight angles 1o greatest diameter of pod, with more or less square-shaped epi-

dermal cells whose walls are wavy; stigma 2-lobed; style very short: ovary sessile,

2-celled; ovules very numerotis; colyledons incumbent, narrow oblong, flattened,

shortly stipitate. — Annual herb; leaves with lineat segments; Sowers racemose,

peduncles naked,

Oo-S5 mm.

a a SEE |

Text Fig. 1

Epidermal cells of septum of Carinavulva glauca nov, spec. showing tndulate walls.

Camera lucida drawing by Miss C. M. Eardley.

This new genus differs from Cuphonotus O. E. Schulz in the plant glaucous;

petals with a long claw and point; anthers larger, oblong; short style; pod tapering

at base; mid-nerve conspicuous on valves of pod; seeds exuding an unbroken

mucus when moistened and ovules very numerous. From Hywtendlobus Nuttall

it differs in the plant glaucous; in different leaves, petals and anthers; mid-

nerve on valves of pod not winged; very numerous ovules; the presence of a style

and cotyledons. stipitate, From Phlegmatospermum O, E. Schulz in the plant

glaucous ; Jeaves pinnatisect ; petals narrow lanceolate; pod bluntly notched; ovules

very numerous; seeds yery small and cotyledons incumbent. From Stenopetalune

R. Br, it differs in the plant glaucous: two outer sepals saccate at base; midnerve

183

conspicuous on valves of pod; stigma 2obed; ovules and seeds very numerous.

It is very interesting te note that the new genus has the long slender petals of

Stenopetalum.

O. E. Schulz's monograph) on the Cruciferae separates the genera into

tribes and subtribes and although Carinavalva nov. gen. comes near to the tribe

Lepidieae it cannot be placed in it at present because the honeyglands have not

been satisfactorily observed. Schulz uses this character in his descriptions. These

floral nectaries, if present, are extremely small and in spite of much searching

they were not clearly seen, but it is helieved that each of the two lateral stamens

-has a pair of minute spur-like glands close together at its outer base. The new

genus definitely does not agree with tribe Lepidieae in the epidermal cells of the

septum, being more or less square-shaped with undulate walls in Carinavalva

while in tribe Lepidieae the cells have almost straight walls. It appears that a

new tribe is necessary to accommodate the new genus. The characters which are

common to Carinavaiva and tribe Lepidieae are (a) statnens shorter than petals,

not sunk in horizontal receptacle and erect, (b) sepals erect, (c) fruit without

gynophore, laterally compressed, septum narrow and (d) cotyledons narrow, not

folded.

Carinavalva fits into the key in the Flora of South Australia, J. M- Black,

1948, Fart II, second edition, 370-1, as follows :—

Silic ulosae—

H. Pod broad, compressed.

I. Valves folded and keeled, at right angles to the narrow

septum, pod laterally compressed,

L. Cells 2-many seeded.

M. Cotyledons incumbent.

N. Seeds mucose.

NN. Ovules about 140 in ovary, style short, pod

obovate, glabrous = Zip ain _.. CARIN AVALVA

NN. Ovules up to 20 in ovary, style absent.

Pod ovate or oblong, rounded on, back and

stimmit, ovules 6-12 in ovaty rere . CUPHONOTUS

Pod ovoid, rounded at stmmit, ovules 12-20 in

ovary, valves winged ke is ,. HyMerd.osus

M, Cotyledons accumbent of oblique, ovules. 6-12 in

ovary, style short, pod ovate, pubescent .. PHLEGMATOSPER MUM

Carinavalva glauca n. sp.

Planfa annua, usque ad 30 cm. alt,, glabra, glauca, erecta, lateralilter Tamosa ;

folia usque ad 6 cm, longa, pinnatisecta, segmentibus lateralibus 3-6, linearibus,

usqite ad 20 mm, longis, terminali usque ad 40 mm. longi, obtuso; racemus florum

@) In Engler and Prantl Nat. Pflanzentan, 2936, 2te Aufl, Bd. 176, pp. 227-658.

Fig, I, 1-19

Kochia concova o.sp. No. 3561, Irniting perianths with hairs. removed: 1, side view;

2-4, top view; 5, vertical section.

Malacocera biflora n.sp. No, 3616, fruiting perianths with hairs removed: 6 and 8, top

view; 7, view from below; 9, yertical section.

Kochia pvata n.sp. No, 3563; 10, side view of fruiting periadth; 11, vertical section of

fruiting perianth; 12, top view of feat with hairs removed; 13, side view of leaf with hairs

removed.

Atriplex sessilifolia ¥. sp. No. 3570: 14, fruiting bracteole showing outer side; 15,

inside of fruiting bracteole showing lateral tadicle; 16, lea£.

_ Bassia holtiane n. sp. No. 3624, fruiting perianths with hairs. retnoved - 17, anterior face;

18, posterior face; 19, vertical section.

1i7

terminalis, usqtie ad 12 cm. longus; pedunculum circa & cm, long., erectum; sepala

45 mm. longa, viridula, albo-marginata, obtusa; petala usque ad 15 mm. longa,

cremea; stamina 4 longa et 2 brevia; stylus circa 1 miu. longus; fructus obovatus,

usque ad 11 mm. longus ct 6 mm, latus, apice obtusus vel subincisus, in valvis

2 cymbiformis lateraliter compressus, reticulatus; pedicellus frucfus circa 5 mm.

longus, erectus; stigma 2-lobatum; sepium transversum; ovula 2-seriata, circa

70 in valve tino} senna brunnea, oblonga, muco exudentiz..

Annual up to 30 em. high, glabrous, glaucous, erect, with several lateral

branches; Jeaves to 6 em, long, pinnatisect with 3-6 linear segments about 20 mm.

long, terminal one up to 4 cm, long, obtuse; flowers in a raceme up to 12 em.

long, terminal, peduncle about & cm. long, erect; sepals 4-5 mm. tong, pale green

with white margin, ohtuse; petals up to 15 mm, long, cream); stamens 4 long and

2 short; style about 1 mm. long; pod obovate, up to 11 mm. Jong, 6 mm, wide,

obtuse or slightly notched at summit, compressed laterally into 2 boat-shaped

valves, reticulate: fruiting pedicel about 5 mm. long, erect; stigma visually 2ohed ;

sepium at right angle to valves; ovules in 2 rows, about 70 to each valve; seeds

mid-brown, oblong, exuding mucus. In some flowers the adjacent median filaments

were joined in pairs from the hase almost to the anthers.

Evelyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, E. H. Ising, No. 3569,

10.9.52, the holotype, fig. IL, 1-7. The holotype consists of four complete plants

(AD.), which were all collected by me in the same Jocality and at the same time

and are covered by the description herewith (NSW isotype). The following

specimens of this new species were also collected—6 complete plants, No, 3642,

at Evelyn Downs on 2.8.52 (MEL, K, paratypes); 15 complete plants, No. 3643,

at Mount Barry Station, 60 miles south of Oodnadatta, owned by Mr, R. D.

Kempe, on 26,8.51, these are paratypes and are located in the same place as the

holotype.

LEGUMINOSAE

Avacta argyrophylla Hook, Kanmantoo, E. H. Ising, No, 3407, 15.5.38. A

solitary shrub of about 2 m. in height with the typical golden shoots to the

branchlets: in bud and young fruit. The most southerly place yet recorded for

this species.

FRANKENJACEAE

Frankenia foliosa J. M- Black. Mount Willoughby Station, 80 miles south-

west of Oodnadatta, FE, H. Ising. No, 3576, 1.8.51, The identification was made

at the Royal Botenic Gardens; Kew, England, and is an additional locality for

the Far North.

GooDENIACEAE

Goodenia helenae n.sp-

Frutex erectus, perennis, 30-40 cm. alt., deorsum lignosus ; caulus 10 mm.

diam.; rami numerosi, costati, subviscost, 1 ubescentt; folia basalia non visa, illas

cauli Jate ovata vel orbiculata, obtusa, pubescentia, margine basi excepta crasse

triangulatu-dentata, usque ad 50 mm. longa petiolo incl., superiora breviora,

nervis totis bilateraliter prominentibus, deorsum nervo medio in petiolo et caula

decurrenti, aliis in petiolo decurrentibus, basi conjunctibas et in caulo costas

Bi $$

Fig. II, 1-10

; Carinavalva glauca n. gen, et H.sp. No. 3569: 1, leaf; 2, fruit; 3, septum, showing

funicles in ome valve; 4, petal; 5, transverse section of fruit showing seeds; 6. embryo,

cot, — incumbent cotyledons, tad.=radicle; 7, transverse section of seed, tad. = radicle,

cot. = cotyledons.

Goodenia helenae n, sp. Nos, 3626 and 3626A = §, lower surface of leaf, showing attuch-

rete at node; 9, corolla Taid open; 10, showing two rows: of curved teeth or ribs decurrent

rom isinus.

119

lateralia 2 decurrentia efformantilus; petiolwn usque ad 25 mm, longum; peduncn-

tex 1-3 floreseens, 245 mm. longum, summo bracta lincatia 2, 2-4 mtn, longa

ornatum ; pedicellum usque ad 8 mm. longum; bracteola 2, linearia, 2 mm. long.,

Horis 2-3-cymosis bracteolis distantibus; sepala lanceolata, pubescentia, 5-6 mm,

longa; coralla flava, 20-25 mm. longa, haud saccata, extrinsecus pubescens, in

tubo villosa et sub sino 2-costata, costis deorsum uni-seriato-dentatis, dentibus

acutis desuper curvatis, extus in floris maturis costi prominenti; alae apice

obtusae, auciculis mulliss oathera apiculata; situs 10-12 mm. longus deorsum

villosus, apice post indusiuwm ciliatum expansus pilosusque: capsi/a usque ad

12 mn. longa, olovoidea, septo circa 5 trm. longo; seming 15-20, oblonga, circa

4:5 mun. longa et 3 mm, lata, coneava, pallida, punctulata, tenuiter marginata.

Shrub erect, stout, perennial, 30-40 cm. high, with woody base: smatn stem

about 10 mm. thick, lateral branches numerous, ribbed, somewhee viscid, pubescent ;

radical leaves not seen, stem leaves broad-ovate to orbicular, obtuse, pubescent,

coursely triangular toothed except at base, up to 5 cm. long including petiole,

becoming smaller upwards, nerves prominent on both faces including marginal

one, on lower surface midrib decurrent on petiole and stem, lateral and niarginal

nerves decurrent on petiole and joining at its base to form a decurrent nil) on

stem, one on either side of midrib; pettole up to 25 mm. long; peduncles 1-3-

flowered, 2-6 mm. long with 2 linear bracts 2-4 inm. long at summit. pedicels to

8 mm. long with 2 hnear bracteoles 2 mm. long distant from the flower when

there are 2-3 flowers ina cyme; sepals 3-6 mm. long, lanceolate, pubescent ; corolla

yellow, 20-25 mm, long, not pouched, pubescent outside, villous in tube and 2 ribs

decurrent from sinus with a row of acute downward curved short tecth an each

int lower half, ribs prominent on outside of mature flowers, wings broad at sum-

nuit, auricles absent; anthers apiculate; style 10-12 mm, long, villous in lower half,

a tuft of hairs at its expanded summit at back of indtusium which is ciliate at

summit; capsule to 12 mm. long, obovoid, dissepiment about 5 mm, long; seeds

15-20, oblong, about 4-5 mm. long and 3 mm, wide, concave, pale, punectulate,

rim narrow.

Eyclyn Downs, 90 miles south-west of Oodnadatta, EZ. I. Ising, No. 3626,

15,9,50, fg. IL, 8-10, the holotype: No. d626A, 15.10.50 the paratype. Holatupe

and paratype (AD.). The holotype consists of 9 pieces off the type plant (NSW,

MEL, K, isotypes), and the paratype consists of 13 pieces off the type plant

(MEL, I), and both are covered hy the description herewith. Both the holotype

and the paratype were collected in the same locality but on different dates, the

latter was chiefly used for the description of the ripe fruits.

The new species ts named in honour of my daughter (Mrs. R. G. Hole of

Evelyn Downs). Tt was only found growing in loose stones and rock at the base

of an 3-foot cap of almost solid rock persisting on the flat-topped ranges about

100 feet ahove the strrommding plain,

dt differs from Goodenia rotundifolia R. Br. in heing a stout erect wonidy

shrab, well branched; petioles not tapering; peduncles stout, much shorter than

stem leaves, hracteoles distant fram flowers; larger flowers, no auricles style

longer, villous in lower half, indusium hair-tufted at back; capsule Tonger. From

G. grandifiera Sims in being a stout woody perennial; simple leaves and petioles;

corolla without protuberance, villous in tube; style glabrous in upper patt; capsule

obovaid, seeds concave, punctulate. From G. decurrens R. Br. in stems leafy all

aver; in the clothing; leaves smaller; indastum with tuft of hairs at back; capsule

laryer, seeds concave, inargin thin,

ComposiTaz

Catotis brevirndiata (E. H. Ising) G. L. Davis. This plant was described by

me (1922, Trans, Rey, Soc. South Australia, 46, 608) as a variety of C. wwlticaulis

(Turez.) Domin and has now been raised to specific rank by Dr, G. L. Davis,

120

1952, Revision of the genus Calotis R. Br., Proc. Linn. Soc. New Suuth Wales,

77, (3-4), 186, It is a rare species, only recorded in this State on the Nullarbor

Plain at Watson and Hughes and at Eucla im West Australia.

*Osteospermum calendulaceum L.f. (Oligocarpus calendulaceus Less.) ; tribe

Calenduleae, Annual, stems many from the crown, at first ascending, then diffuse,

procumbent or trailing, much branched and widely spreading, pubescent and

glandular, as well as the leaves; young parts cobwebby. Leaves alternate, 1-2

inches long, 4-10 mm. wide, tapering at base or subpetiolate, oblong or lanceolate,

irregularly few-toothed, repand or subentire, the upper small, sessile, linear,

Pedicels terminal and axillary, one-headed. Heads small, few flowered, Involucral

sciles lanceolate, acute, variably membranous-edged. Achenes of many forms, on

the same plant or in the same head; 1. very much pitted and ridged across,

obconical, crowned with an inflated hollow cup-like beak; 2. slightly wrinkled

with a similar heak; 3, very much cross-ridged and beakless or nearly so; 4, scab-

rous, but scarecly wrinkled, with an obsolete beak; 5, scabrous or smooth, terete

or 3-cornered, with a long, horn-like, solid beak; 6. 3-cornered, the angles minutely

winged; 7. cross-ridged and furrowed, with three membranous wings, exactly as

in Tripterts, Hab—Cape Colony, South Africa. (Taken from the description bv

Harvey, 1864-5, Flora Capensis, 3, 433.)

Port Augusta, E. H. Ising, No, 3585, 22.10.52, This is the first record of

this plant for South Australia. Identified by the Chief, Div, of Botany, Dept, of

Agriculture, Pretoria, Union of South Africa, who. reports:—‘Tycho Norlindh

working on the Calenduleae has sunk the genera Tripteris and Oligocarpus in

Osteospermim, and we have arranged our herharium accordingly. Studies in the

Calenduleae I, Monograph of the genera Dimorphotheca, Castalis, Osleospermum,

Gibboria and Chrysanthemoides, By Tycho Norlindh, 1943."

, clandestinum (Less) Norlindh, 1943, loc. cit., 328 (Tripteris clandestine

Less.). This change of nate is necessary us Norlindh has sunk 7vipteris in Osteo-

spermaon. Recorded already from fields near Brighton and Marino.

Senecio pteraphorus DC. Crafers and Stirling (Mount Lofty Range), 2. Fi,

Fsing, No. 3623, January to March, 1954. Identified by the Chief: Div. of Botany,

Department of Agriculture, Pretoria, Union of South Africa, This introduction

is spreading in the above district and could become a pest. It seeds prolifically,

germinates readily and quickly occupies cultivated land. It is a perennial growing

up to 3m, in height and has already been recorded in this State.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

T wish to acknowledge with thanks yery helpful criticism and surgestions, as

to some of the species, from Mr. R. H. Andetson, B.Sc, (Agr.), Chief Botanist

and Curator, Botanic Gardens, Sydney; Mr. A. W. Jessep, Director and Goyern-

ment Botanist, Melbourne Botanic Gardens and National Herbarium; Dr. J. G.

Woaud, Professor of Botany, for permission to use the herbaritt «under bis control

aul Miss C. M. Eardley for much technical assistance and conumunicating the

paper, both of Botany Department, University of Adelnide; Dr. C. G, Hansford,

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Glen Osmond, for composing the Latin

descriptions; and Miss L. Sherwood, Botany Department, University of Adelaide,

for executing the drawings.

THE "GRAND" UNCONFORMITY BETWEEN THE ARCHAEAN

(WILLYAMA COMPLEX) AND PROTEROZOIC (TORROWANGEE

SERIES) NORTH OF BROKEN HILL, NEW SOUTH WALES

BY R. B. LESLIEAND A, J. R. WHITE*

Summary

A structural and petrological study has been made of a small portion of the unconformity between

the older Precambrian (Willyama complex) and the later Precambrian (Torrowangee Series). A true

angular unconformity has been recognized but post-Torrowangee folding and shearing has in places

complicated this primary feature.

The Willyama rocks are a complex of metasediments, cataclastic schists and pegmatites, which has

been intruded by a leucocratic muscovite granite-the Mundi Mundi granite. The sediments of the

Torrowangee Series are of glacial origin. The basal beds of this glacigene series are notable in that

they contain for the most part material derived from the immediately underlying rock. This has

given rise to some peculiar rock types such as granite tillites and slate tillites.

Petrological studies made on the Torrowangee sediments and the boulders contained in them, as

well as on the rocks of the Willyama complex give indisputable evidence of the pre-Torrowangee

age of the Mundi Mundi granite. The Torrowangee sediments have in places been highly folded

with some local dynamic metamorphism but in the area studied at least, there is no evidence of

post-Torrowangee igneous activity.

121

THE “GRAND” UNCONFORMITY BETWEEN THE ARCHAEAN

(WILLYAMA COMPLEX) AND PROTEROZOIC (TORROWANGEE

SERIES) NORTH OF BROKEN HILL, NEW SOUTH WALES

By R. B. Lesztre and A, J, R. Wirrre *

SUMMARY

A structural and petrological study has been made of a small portion of the

unconformity between the older Precambrian (Willyama complex) and the later Pre-

cammbrian (Torrowangee Series), A true angular unconformity has been recognised

but post-Torrowangee folding and shearing has in places complicated this primary

feature.

The Willyama rocks are a complex of metasediments, cataclastic schists and

pegmatites which has been intruded by a leucocratic muscovite granite—the Mundi Mundi

granite. The sediments of the Torrowangee Series are of glacial origin, The basal beds

of this glacigene series are notable in that they contain for the most part material

derived from the immediately underlying rock. This has given rise to some peculiar

rock types such as granite tillites and slate tillites,

Petrological studies made on the Torrowangee sediments and the boulders con-

tained in them, as well as on the rocks of the Willyama complex give indisputable

evidence of the pre-Torrowangee age of the Mundi Mundi granite. The Torrowangeée

sediments have in places been highly folded with some local dynamic metamorphism

but in the area studied at least, there is no evidence of post-Torrowangee igneous

activity.

INTRODUCTION

(a) Location

The area is situated 26 miles due north of Broken Hill in the Barrier

Ranges of New South Wales (fig. 1). It comprises some 15 square miles cover-

ing the unconformity between the Torrowangee Series and the older rocks of

the Willyama complex.

LOCALITY PLAN

SCALE

aE EP

Fig. t

Locality plan showing prin-

Sem cipal landmarks in the area.

7 sirannacce pf Xt A geological map of the

wine {> hatched arca is included in

this paper.

Meche, \

puriamaars use |

/ rh

oe ™

‘ \

AMT FRAMES (

* Department of Geology, University of Adelaide.

122

(ty) PurysrocraPay

The area is one of low hills usually sparsely covered by a typically semi-

arid vegetation consisting predominantly of mulga (/fcacta aneura), dead finish

(Acacia tetragonophylla) and beefwood (Grevilea striatd), together with the

ever-present saltbush. The hills of the area fall naturally into three well-defined

groups. Jagged, craggy ridges im the schist area stand up in marked contrast to

the rounded boulder-strewn hills of tillilte and the pale tor-covered hills of granite,

fiecause of the paucity of vegetation and a general lack of soi cover the

rock outcrops are usually particularly good.

The country is well dissected by uumerous streams, the largest of these

being the Brewery and the Wookookaroo Creeks. These streams, like others in

the Barrier Ranges, are not permanent but flow only alter heavy rains. Low-

ever, deposits of water-bearing sands along their sccmingly dry beds support

large red gutns which give welcome relief from the scant vegetation of the hills.

The first major contribution to the regional geology of the Barrier Ranges

was published by Mawson in 1912, He recognised the unconformity between the

Willyama complex and the Torrowangee Series and correlated the latter with

the Adelaide System of South Australia, Mawson published an analysis of a

younger pre-Torrewangee granite (vide pp. 126), which he called a “protogine

granite.” The Geological Survey of New South Wales, Andrews and his asso-

ciates, published a monumental work om the geology of the Broken Fill district

in 1922, and although this work contributed much to the regional geology it

was particularly concerned with the lode and its immediate environment. Andrews

used the time terms Archacan and Proterozoic for the Willyama complex and

Torrowangee Series, respectively, He also termed the “Newer” or “Protogine”

granite of Mawson, the Mundi Mundi granite. These terms are retained in this

paper.

tn 1953 King and Thomson published an account of the regional geology

of the Broken Hill district. Their map, the culmination of many years of field

mapping by geologists of the Zine Corporation, far exceeds the preyiouts sketch

maps in acctiracy and detail. An otttcome of this recent work was the proposed

post-“Vorrowangee age of the Mundi Mundi granite. They also suggested that

some of the pegmatites of the region post-dated the Torrowangee Serics.

The present investigation is an attempt tu elncicate the complexities of

the unconformity and to fix the relative age of the pegmatite and the Mundi

Mundi gramte,

STRATIGRAPHY

The basal rocks of Archaean age are part of the Willyania complex. ‘They

are overlain unconformahty hy a series of late-Proterozoic sediments, |he Torro-

wangee Series, which has been correlated with the Sturtian Series of the Adelaide

System. There is uo evidence of marine sedimentary deposition since Pre-

cambrian time.

The Willyama rocks were folded, metamorphosed, intruded and eroded

before the Torrowangee sediments were deposited upon them with marked uncon-

furmity. In places the unconformable contact is masked hy shearing, but clse-

where it is well shown. Exposures in the vicinity of Brewery Well show a marked

angular unconformity, the strikes of the older and newer beds bemg almost at

right angles. Where the unconformity trace swings southward on the eastern side

of the area, metamorphic convergence due to shearing has in places caused the

exact demarcation of the unconformity to become difficult.

123

THE WILLYAMA ROCKS

The term Willyatia complex was filst applied by Mawson (1912) to the

extensive tract of ancient rocks. outcropping in the Barrier Ranges af New South

Wales and the adjatent areas in South Australia. These rocks, which were

originally a series of argillaceotis, arenaceotis and calcareous sediments, now

appear as a complex of schists and gneisses due to intense pte-Torrowangee

metamorphism,

The highest grade of metamorphism occurs in the vicinity of Broken Hill

itself, as evidenced by the abundant development of sillimanite in this region,

The grade of metamorphism, however, dccreas¢s to the north, so that in the area

tuder investigation the rocks are of low grade, normally not exceeding the green-

echist facies.

(a) Tue Frne-crarsep METASEDIMENTS

The metasediments are dominantly very fine-grained arenaceous and argillace-

ous schists, sometiines finely laminated, together with graphite “chiastolite”

phyllites and thin-bedded chert-like rocks.

The chert-like rocks are extremely fine-grained (average '04 mm.), Although

they have a superficial resemblance to chert it is probable that they had a clastic

origin and are therefore better described as meta-siltstones, Their colour yaries

from) pure white to buff and almost black and many are flecked and banded.

They consist essentially of a recrystallized aggregate of quartz with subordinate

plagioclase (Ab 90). Flakes of green biotite and mitiscovite vary in amount, while

tourmaline, zircon and iron ores ate accessory. A feature of many is the

abundance of small black graphite inclusions in almost all of the minerals. Near

the granite, the graphite although Jess abundant, occurs as segregations up to

1 mm, across, suggesting that the metasiltstones have been somewhat modified

by the granite intrusion.

The other fine-grained metasediments of this area differ from these chert-

like rocks in the increased amount of argillaceous niaterial originally present in

the sediments; this is now represented by sericitic micas. The relative amount

of sericite and quartz varies up to the stage where sericite becomes the main

constitiient of the rock,

Tourmaline has a wide distribution throughout all the metasediments.

Usually it occurs as an accessory but at times it becomes an important con-

stituent.

From the unconformity, at a point about 1 mile E.S,E, of the Brewery Well

stockyards, thence continuing to the south, there occurs a distinctive formation

up to 1,000 feet thick of dark, bluish-grey phyllites and fine-grained arenaceous

schists which contains abundant but completely altered metacrysts of chiastolite

(9625). The metacrysts are sqtiate-shaped in cross section and often display

the zoning so typical of chiastolite, They are normally 4 inch across, but some,

especially those in the more arenaceous beds, are up to 1 inch across and

5 to 6 inches in length. When examined under the microscope the chiastolites

are seen to be entirely replaced by an aggregate of fine sericite, Both the dark

colour of the matrix and the zoning of the metacrysts fs the result of abundant

finely-disseminated graphite.

This rock ts very similar to the chiastolite phyllite described by Browne

{1922) from Mount Franks, some 15 miles further south. Im the case of the

rock from Mount Franks, however, some andalusite was recognised in the thin

section,

> The specimen numbers referred to in the text are those of the Rock Catalogue,

Department of Geology, University of Adelaide.

124

What appears. to be the same stratigraphical horizon somewhat modified

occurs in contact with the Brewery Creek pluton {an inirnsion of the Mundi

Mundi granite) on its southern and western sides. Here the rock (9668) is dark-

grey in colour and the "“chiastolites” are only about 4 to 1 mm. across and

1 cm. im length, Ul-defined spots several millimetres across consisting of aggre-

gates of biotite and muscovite are also present. The rock consists of pseudo-

morphs after chiastolite, irregular segregutions of biotite and large pocciloblastic

muscovite crystals ib a fine-grained matrix uf quartz, sericite, biotite and abundant

graphite. Iron ore (haematite) and tourmaline ave also present, The chiastolite

pseudomorphs, appear as square-shaped aggregates consisting either of quartz

poeciloblastically including fine sericite or of small muscovite flakes. Usually

the boundaries of the pseudomorphs are sharp, particularly when yuartz is the

secondary mineral. At times the cross sections are seen to be divided into four

segments by the diagonals of the squate and each of these segments seems to

be separately replaced, giving the appearance of a twinned crystal (pl. LX,

fig. 1 and 2), Quartz, apart from the Jarge crystals replacing the chiastolites,

eecurs abundantly in the matrix as tiny xenoblastic crystals averaging “02 mm.

in size. This recrystallized quartz is erowded with graphitic inclusions. Muscovite

is also present as fitie-prained aggregates and as larger poeciloblastic flakes

averaging *25 inm. in length. Biotite is not as abundant as muscovite. It vrcurs

mnainly in segregations about 2 mn. across showing decussate structure. It is

also present together with muscovite and quartz in the chiastolite pseudomorphs,

but im this case the pseudomorphs are irregular and not clearly defined. The

Inotite 1s a greemsh-hrown variety, X = pale brown, Y = Z-— dark brownish-

green. Hematite and graphite are abundant as small black opaque grains, while

tourmaline is accessory.

The “chiastolite* phyllites occurring near the southern margin of the Brewery

Creek pluton may have beet: formed by the thermal metamorphism of the granite

itself and then replaced, in the manner described above, by late stage metasomatic

activity, However, field evidence suggests that the chiastolites were formed on a

regional scale prior to the intrusion and then later locally modified by the

intrusion; the “chiastolites’ occtir in well-defined sedimentary bands and are

flevelnped an a regional scale in places often remote from. granite,

(b) Tare DyNamicatty Metamorpnosrp Writyama Rocks

The coarse-grained quartz-mica schists and micaceous quartzites which out-

crop in the eastern portion of the urea contrast sharply with the finer-grained

schists to the west, both petrugraphically and in their manner of outcrop; the

roarse-grainnd schists oulcrop as jagged razor-back crags which aften contain

open holes commonly a foot of more actoss.

All of the schists have a marked cataclastic texture ated consist of quartz

muscovite and chlorite. In some of the finer-grained varieties the structure seen

in this section is almust mylonitic. Streaks and bands of sericitic material alternate

with bands consisting dominantly of quartz. About one mile west of the Taps

soine of the schista examined contain an abundance of biotite and occasionally

pink garnet.

(cj) Pasre Rocks

Ag amphibolitic rock has been mapped within the great pegmatite mass near

Pollard's Well, This has not been examined in great detail, but ihe field and

lahoratory work suggest a metasedimentary origin,

(du) Tre Prematrres

Other authors refer to the great development of these rocks in the Willyama

complex of the Barrier Ranges. Mawson (1912) says: “In no other part of the

world can pegmatite formations occur on a more extensive scale,”

125

To the south of Pollard’s Well occurs a mass of pegmatite more than halt

2a mile wide.This niass is intimately mixed with country rock, particularly at the

margins, and is tlaversed by cross-cutting dykes of the pranite From which it

is easily distinguished both in the field and in the laboratory. From these cross-

cutting relationships it is inferred that the pegunatite pre-dates the granile, end,

although some pegmatite may have been associated with the granite, there is no

evidence to support this. Apart from this large mass several smaller masses

aceur, while dykes are very abundant. Where the dynamic metamorphism his been

more intense the dykes are usually parallel to the schistosity, whereas eisewhere

the dykes tend ta follaw the bedding. At times the pegmatites show evidence

of shearing at their peripheries, and In at least one case a pegmatite has been

completely sheared out. Although dykes of pegmatite quite commonly extend

to the uncontormily, they are never found in the adjacent Torrowangee rocks,

suggesting that in this area, at least, all pegmatites are pre-Torrowangee in age.

The pegmatite is usually very coarse-grained with felspars up to 3 inches

across. The average cumposition of the peymuatites is about 60% felspar (both

albite dnd microcline) and 40% quartz. Accessory minerals include musenvite,

garnet and tourmaline, Magnetite occurs rarely, Reddish-brown garnet which ts

widely distributed occasionally becomes an important constituent, sometimes

making up about 10% of the rock. Usually it occurs as rhombic dodecahedrons,

occasionally as icositetrahedrons, and is up to half an inch across. An approximate

analysis of some of this garnet gave 10% MnO.

I the field all stages from felspar-rich pegmatites to quartz reefs are seen,

although the intermediate stage is usually more of the nature of a composite

“Intrusion” of quartz within pegmatite, Tourmaline occurs. sporadically tn most

of the pegmatite, but seems to be concentrated in some of the yuartz reefs,

The general abundance of peymatites, together with the great stze and shape

of the Pollard's Well mass, suggest that the pegmatite has a replacement origin.

This hypothesis is supported by the fact that the foliation of the patches of relic

schist within this mass is parallel to the foliation of the schists occurring else-

where in the area,

te) Tae Granite

Post-dating the schists and pegmatites of the Willyama complex is an

intrusive leueocralic granite, he Mundi Mundi granite (Andrews and Browne,

1922).

Apart from the main mass of granite which has been termed the Brewery

Creek pluton, other smaller masses outcrop along the upper reaches of the

Wookookaroo Creek. These masses are more of less continuous and kave been

considered by King and Thomson (1953) to be an extension of the “dyke” which

extends from Yanco Glen to north of the Paps along the general trend of the

unconformity.

The northern extremity of this “dyke” has been stiudied, and no evidence

can be Found in this locality at least ta stiggest a dyke-like origin. Rather, it

seems to be part of the irregular roof of a larger granite mass below. This is

supported by the fact that the intrusive contact between the granite and the steep-

dipping schist is scen in places to he almost horizontal. The trace of the granite-

schist contact often follows the contours around the valleys running into the

main creek, therehy suggesting that it is flat, The present elongated outcrop

appears to be due to the ercck cutting through this flat contact and exposing

the granite.

Numerous smaller masses and dykes of the same granite are widely dis-

tributed throughout the castern part of the area. These dykes, which are usually

very thin, commonly follaw the schistosity. One such dyke only two feet wide

126

was followed along the foliation for about three-quarters of a mile. The abundance

of these smaller occurrences is also suggestive of the proximity of a larger granite

mass below.

The typical granites are leucocratic rocks in which the percentage of miafic

minerals rarely exceeds 4%. They are characterised by a high percentage of

muscovite and by a slight excess of plagioclase over microcline. The plagioclase

always. has a composition approaching pure albite. According to the Shand classi-

fication, these are per-aluminous sodi-potassic granites, while they compare closely

with the alaskites of Johannsen (1932) (wide Table I, Column V).

‘Towards the centre of the Brewery Creek pluton the granite is medium to

coarse in grain size, but elsewhere it is comparatively fine-grained. The granite

is stressed to ihe extent of producing undulose extinction in the quartz, with

some granulation at the edges of grains, but nowhere is any visible gneissic

structure developed.

The coarse-grained granite (9672) [rom the Brewery Creck mass is pale

pinkish-grey, The approximate mineral composition is quartz 30%, plagioclase

(Ab 95) 30%, microcline 25%, muscovite 10%, and biotite 5%, with tourmaline,

apatite, and zircon accessory. Both felspars are cloudy, the plagioclase usually

more so than the microcline. An interesting feature which is seen in all thin

sections of the Mundi Mundi granite from the area, is the abundant development

of small laths of colourless mica within the plagioclase crystals. These inclusions

ate also occasionally seen in the microcline, The quartz oflen contains strings of

fine inelusions and nuimerous hair-like rods, A chemical analysis of this rock is

given in Table 1, Column I.

Tasie L

i re tb Vv

SiO, me 7407 7340874507260, 75-08

ALOs ae MATZ 14-78 13-72-5499 13-48

FeO. nu OSL 0-67 6D O34 RA

FeO oe OG 7909078083

MgQ O16 2B 4-20

CaO eS ES SZ SBM

Na.O 3894-35 3-45 4330 4-20

KO 4-43 4:17 5-13. 45365403

H.0- O15 0:24 = O18 0-05

10+ 0-70 0-77 0-26 =a g 94

TiO... 0-19 0-2 = O17 O13 08

POs 0-10 0-11 0-27, O14 008

MnO O01 0-01 0-03 0-03 0-08

BaO — 0-02 0-05 = =

ZrO: 0-03 0-01 -— a= =

s me | “ES — -- = —

Others vise — = 0-11 — 0°03

100-01 100-07 100-35 100-45 100-20

I. Mundi Mundi Granite from Brewery Creck pluton, S. of Poolamiacca,

Barrier Ranges, N.S.W. Analyst: R. B. Leslie

II. Mundi Mundi Granite fram Wookookaroo Creek, S_ of Poolamacea,

Barrier Ranges, N.S.W. Analyst: A, J. R. White

TTT. Mundi Mundi Granite, NW. of Paps, Battier Ranges, N.S.W,

Analyst: J. C. H. Mingaye

TV. Soda-Potash Granite, E. end Binherrie Hill, $.A. (Boolcoomata granite),

Analyst: W, 5. Chapman

V. Average of three typical alaskites — Johannsen, 1932.

127

A specimen typical of the fine-grained granite in the smaller outcrops (9671)

was collected from the Wookookaroo Creck about two miles east of Brewery

Well, and was chemically analysed for comparison with the coarse-grained gramite

frown the pluton. This granite is comparable with the coarse-grained granite in

every detail except the grain size, Apart from the mineralogical similarity, the

chemical similarity is at once apparent in a comparison of the norms quoted below.

Norm of Brewery Creek Granite Norm of Granite from Wookookaroo Creel

Quartz 2. .. ... 3288 Quartz ea SSD

Orthaclase os -.. 26-22 Orthoclase {is woe 24°56

Albite Shaw ites ee § 83+358 Atbite ett byes wee §=SG*B2

Anorthite bee = 67 Anorthite vous we, 2°05

Corundium cau wea «6-286 Corundum 7 | Beds

Hypersthene —..., wy = «O73 Hypersthene a .- 323

Magnetite ee ED Magnetite es an 0-92

Timenite ... se 7 0-30 Imenite ... {res we = =030

Apatite itt ewe = O23 Apatite =... “om .- = =(024

Pyrite “oo <= .. O09 Pyrite _ ven witty —

Zircon _ a . Odd Zirean tee av we = (O02

Water wa Wr outt *B5 Water... es “4 1-41

From this study it is evident that the two granites are comagmatic. The

analyses also show close similarities with a phase of the Boolcoomata granite of

South Australia whick is probably part of the same Precambrian petrographic

province (Table I, Column 1V).

Although the granite is normally fairly w1iform in composition, certain local

yariations occur, This is usually reflected in the colour of the rock, which varies

from pale grey to pinkish-grey and dark grey. These variations are due to the

varying proportions of microcline and albite, the presence or absence of tourma-

line, and the relative amounts of biotite and muscovite.

Apart from a zone of felspathization twe inches or so wide at the immediate

contact and the replacement of the chiastolite in the “chiastolite phyllite”

(wide p. 124), there is very little evidence of contact metamorphism. However,

several aplite dykes were observed both in the granite and the adjacent country

rock on the south side of the Brewery Creek pluton,

The maximum extent of thermal metamorphism is seen in the roof pendants

and xenoliths of fine-grained biotite muscovite hornfels which are abundant at

the tiorthern end of the Brewery Creek pluton. All the xenoliths have a definite

lithological resemblance ta the fine-grained Willyama rocks immediately ta the

south of the pluton. The difference is chiefly in the microfabric; the micas im the

xenoliths show a lack of preferred orientation, while those in the schist often

haye a very pronounced orientation.

THE TORROWANGEE SERIES

The existence of 2 thick sequence of glacial and fluvio-glacial sediments on

the northern and north-eastern extension of the Barrier Ranges was first reported

by Mawson (1912). These rocks which overlie the Willyama complex with violent

unconformity he termed the Torrowangee Series, and from their characteristic

lithology they have been correlated with the Sturtian Series of the Adelaide

System of South Australia (Mawson 1949).

The Torrensian Series of the Adelaide region is here absent, and coarse

houlder beds or sometimes massive quartzite or silicified tillite mark the beginning

of the Later Precambrian sedimentation, The following stratigraphic succession

is given by King and Thomson;

1. Claystone with massive coarse-grained quartzite,

2. Cleaved shales or claystones with tillite horizons.

128

3. Limestone lenses in calcareous shales with minor glacial erratics.

4. Flagey sandstone and laminated shales with minor glacial erratics.

5. Tillite and glacial boulder heds, with massive quartzite and conglomerate

close ta the base of the series in a nuntber of places,

This paper is only concerned with the basal formation.

The siliceous bed, which forms the base of the Torrowatigee Series in much

af the Barrier Range region (Basal quartzite of Mawson and Andrews) is under-

lain by a considerable thickness of glactgene sediments in the yicinity of Brewery

Well, The thickness of sediment below this “basal quartzite” is probably. of the

order of 2,000 feel, although the lens-like nature of the beds and complicated

folding makes an accurate determination difficult,

These underlying beds are formed by overlapping deposition, possibly in a

glacial valley during the early stages of glaciation.

(2) LatHotocy

In the urea under investigation the “basal quartzite” horizon is répresented

by arenacteous tillite which often contains large numbers of siliccous blue-grey

quartzite erratics and interbedded grits. As the underlying beds decrease in thick-

ness this horizon become silicified and produces in places a dense quartzite tillite

which consists essentially of boulders of quartzite in a quartzite matrix.

Although intercalated stratified lenses of greywacke (grits) and slate occut,

the beds are in general completely unsorted, The size range is extreme, varying

from the finest rock flour up to boulders 12 feet across. Angular, sub-angular and

sometimes faceted boulders are present, but the majority of the coarser detritus

ig comparatively well rounded. This is in conformity with the well-rounded

material forming the terminal moraines of some present-day glaciet's.

Pressure grooving in the form of sub-parallel markings is occasionally seen

on the surface of boulders, but none which could be accepted as genuine glacial

striae were found. However, Mawson [personal communication) reports glacial

striae on a pebble found near Yanco Glen.

Many of the boulders are of local origin, particularly in the beds lying

stratigraphically helow the “basal quartzite’ horizon. These include most of the

ruck types occurring in the nearby Willyama complex, namely chiastolite phyllite,

Hecked and handed metasiltstones, fine-grained quartz-mica schists, pegmatites,

and most abundant of all fine, medium and coarse-grained granites. A number

of these gramite boulders were sectioned and examined under the microscope.

They were seen to be identical with the locally occtirring granite, thus giving

evidence in support of a pre-Torrowangee age for its intrusion. Boulders foreign

to the area (truce erratics) are less abundant in the lower beds, but become more

important higher up in the series. Of these a dense blue-grey quartzite is the

must conspicuous.

lt is considered that the lowest heds are the result of the action of local

land ice; this explains the abundance of boulders of the immediately underlying

rock, Higher up in the series, where the beds become more continuous, it is

probable that deposition took place ynder water.

The base of the Torrowangee Series in the area studied, cotisists far the

most pact of coarse boulder beds locally sheared but not sSilicified as is general

along the Yanco Glen—Paps line. Occasionally a band of arkosic grit, normally

only a few feet thick, can be seen resting on the Willyama schist.

Perhaps the most interesting basal rock is that seen resting directly on the

eroded surface of the Brewery Creck granite. This rock has been termed a

“granite illite’ as it consists almost entirely of granite boulders in an arkasic

thatrix, pl OX, fig. 3). The unweathered rock (9682) is pale grey in colour and

typically ansorted. Angular, suh-angular and rounded fragments showing great

L2o

variation in size are set in a pale grey base of fine rock flour, Most of the larger

fragments ate of grantte and many of the smaller individual and composite

grains of quartz and felspar have been derived from the grinding up of the tnder-

lying granite, Fragments of fine-grained slaty and chert-like rocks of the Willyama

complex are present but less abundant.

Because of the preponderance of granitic material the weathered surface of

the rock, as seen outcropping in the field, shows a marked resemblance to the

adjacent granite, In thin section the unsorted nature of the rock is most apparent.

Angular and sub-angular fragments yaty in size down to minute particles (pl, IX,

fig. +). Fragments of granite contain quattz, microcline, plagioclase, muscovite

and tourmaline, Quartz is the most abundant of the individual grains and this

often shows the thin hair-like rods which are common in the quartz of the local

granites, Felspar fragments consist of both microcline and albite. Small angular

grains of tourmaline and scattered throughout the rock, while detrital flakes

of muscovite are rare. The fine-grained base contains smaller particles of the

uiaturial which forms the larger fragments together with abundant sericite which

has been derived from the decomposition of Felspar.

Tillite occurring near the unconformity in the vicinity of Brewery Well

differs from the granite-tillite just described in (hai the majority of the rock frag-

ments have been derived from the Willyama metasediments, mainly fine-grained

metasiltstone.

Tt is noticeable that the lithology of the tillites in most of the area varies

sympathetically with the nature of the underlying parent rock. This is particularly

evident with the “granite-tillite’ and the tillite consisting predominantly of fine-

grained metasiltstone, Another variation is what may be termed a “slate-tillite,””

This rock consists mainly of slate fragments together with subordinate frag-

ments uf granite and quartz. The platy phenoclasts of dark grey slate have a

common orientation which is probably due to their tabular nature at the time of

deposition, This gives the rock a sheared appearance, unlike the adjacent tillite

in which the phenoclasts are equidimensional. This sympathetic variation of

lillite with the underlying rock has been observed elsewhere in the Barrier

Ranges. Kenny (1954, p. 43) described an “augen gneiss” tillite outcropping

on the Euriowié road some 12 miles due east of Poolamacca. He says, “Here

the tillite is composed entirely of angular fragments of augen-gneiss so closely

set that very little matrix is visible to the naked eye. On first sight the rock has

the general appearance of a mass of augen-gneiss, but close study reveals the

irregular and conflicting alignment of the folia in the gneissic fragments,”

Andrews (1922, p. 65) described a tillite rich in quartz magnetite boulders From

the Sisters locality near Broken Hill. He also pointed out that “granite waste

cemented with tillite material’ occurs at the unconformity near Poolamacea

homestead.

Above these basal beds are subaqueous glacigene sediments similar to those

of the Sturtian Series of South Australia. These consist of interbedded and

lens-like occurrences of tillites, greywacke type grits, washed arkoste grits, slates

and shales.

The glacigene sediments interbedded with the massive tillites occur as small

discontinuous beds normally only a foot or so in thickness, which lens out over

a distance rarely more than two or three hundred yards, The most abundant

of these intercalated sediments are arenaceous types which show all graduations

from well-washed quartzites to arkosic grits and greywackes, Some of these

arenaceous beds display cross bedding structures, while the more typical grey-

watke types show graded bedding or merely alternations of coarser and finer

material. The shales are always grey in colour and vary from normal argillites

tq calcareous and arenaceous types, Many are banded and finely laminated,

130

Sporadie bouldets and pebbles indicative of the presence of floating ice are

common, One isolated bed of butt-coloured impure limestone about owe foot

wide was traced in the field for 150 yards, Below the “basal quartzite” horizon

the lens-like character is very pronounced, The thin-hedded glacigene sediments

often Finger out into masses of structureless Lillite which must have been heaps

of glacial moraine on the depositional surface. The occurrence of this massive

tillite in the noses of many of the minor fold structures seems more than

coincidental and possibly these masses of coarse detritus have exerted soine

structural control,

{b) MeramorpHism oF ToRROWANGEE SEDIMENTS

Within the area studied the regional metamorphism of the Torrowangee

rocks has not been preat, and does not exceed the muscovite-chlorite subfacies.

Dynamic metamorphism along the unconformity has in places produced a

catatlastic schist from the tillite, in which elongate boulders may he seen. This

grades into the older Willyama schists through a zone of metamorphic con-

vergence which may be up to three yards in width but is usually quite arrow.

At (he unconformity near its north-castern extrentity there is a gradation from

sheared tillite, through tillite schist, to schist which cannot be differentiated tram

the Willyama schist,

Apart from the low grade regional and dynamic metamorphism which has

probably accompanied the folding, the Torrowangee sediments are unaltered. No

evidence of post-Torrowangee igneous activity has been found, but quartz veins

upto a foot or so wide and several hundred feet long commonly [follow the axial

plant direction, Occasional quartz blows of larger dimensions are seen.

STRUCTURE

(a) Tae Wittyama Rocas

To the south of Brewery Well the Willyama rocks arc metasediments in

which the original sedimentary bedding is still well preserved. These heds occupy

a position on the eastern limb of a south-pitching syncline, with dips generally

very steep and in places vertical or overturned. Phinge indicated by drag folds,

is ahowt 50° to the south. Puckering of the less competent Heds oectrs in the

noses of folds with simultaneous shattering of interbedded siliceous rocks.

To the east of these low grade metasediments the dynamic metamorphisin

gradually increases and the alder racks in the eastern portion of the arca appear

to have been the locus of intense shearing movements, The foliation of the

coarser-grained schists occurring here trends north-south and is usually vertical

but in places it dips steeply to the east. A strong Jineation in the plane of foliation

pitches south at 50° corresponding to the pitch of the structures in the low grade

metasediments further west. In the area of cataclastic schists the original bedding

structures have been almost obliterated, Occasionally bands of more competent

siliceous rock can be seen ctitting actoss the foliation, hut they cannot be followed

for any great distance in the field. An attempt has been made to plot these struc-

tures from serial photographs and the trend lines thus obtained indicate much

Gghter folding than in the western portion of the area. Prom the scanty field

evidence it appears that these structures also plunge steeply to the south. Thin

siliceous bands are often sheared out, giving boudinage structures. These at times

have the appearance of quartzite hoylders in « sclistose matrix and could be

mistaken. for ancient boulder beds,

(b) Tee Torrowancer Rocks

Within the arca studied the Torrowangee rocks show greater apparerit com-

plexity of folding than is. seen in the older racks which they overlie. They occupy

a position on the western limb of the Yancowinna syncline which in general is

a broad open field plunging to the north at a shallow angle. (King and Thomson,

i3l

1953.) The axis of this major syncline occuts some four miles to the east of the

Paps (wide fig. 1), The Willyama core of the corresponding anticline to the west

js seen a5 a triangular-shaped area of older rocks, with its apex directed co the

north, ‘This anticlinal axis lies to the west of the Brewery Creek pluton,

The axial direction of the minor folds is north-south. The north plunge

varies considerably, in places being almost 60°. Axial plane cleavage, usually

vertical but sometimes dipping stecply to the east, is well developed in the less

competent members of the series, and in places, particularly in the lower beds,

there appear to have been some shearing movements following this weakness.

Faulting of the Torrowangee beds is not common, although a major fault bounds

the northern side uf the Brewery Creek pluton. Here a small tongue of granite-

tillite which rests unconformably on the granite has been raised into contact

with normal tilites higher up in the series (vide geological map). In general the

beds of the Torrowangee series appear to be infolded into the older rock, suggeat-

ing that compression of the basement has heen the main cause of folding in the

cover strata, This basement folding hypothesis which has recently been outlined

by Lees (1952) is supported by several facts:

1, The dip of 60° of the unconformity off the Brewery Creek granite could

he oe by folding of the granite itself.

2. The trend of folding in both the cover rocks and the basement rocks

is north-south.

3, Folding of the basement in the eastern part of the area is more complex

than in the cover strata,

4. To the south of the Brewery Creel; pluton, where the folding of Will

vama appears to be more simple than that in the Torrowangee Series,

there dues appedr to be some swing of the older beds in harmony with

the younger beds, at the unconformity.

However, the relatively simple fold structures which exist in the basement

over a large part of the area, the big difference in plunge between the older and

the younger rocks, and the fact that Torrowangee fold pattern is not clearly

reflected on the older rocks, all suggest that other factors have contributed to the

complexity of the unconformity,

1. The overlying sediments may have folded independently of the basement

rocks,

2. Steep depositional dips are likely tu have occurred in the glacigene sedi-

ments, patticilarly in the case of the coarser boulder beds, although no

evidence of this could be found.

The topography of the pre-existing land surface, especially in the vicinity

wf the dynamically metamorphosed schists, is likely to have been kighly

irregular and would explain the presence of many sinall inliers and

outliers.

4. A small amount of folding of the basement rocks may produce com-

siderable crumpling of the overlying sediments if these are confined

hetween the relatively steep sides of a glacial valley.

5, Faulting in the basement rocks. may be reflected as folds in the cover

strata. Upthrusting of the basement from the south along pre-existing

squth--plunging’ linear weaknesses in the Willyama schist could explain

the abnormal plunge in the basal beds of the Torrowangee Series. An

pverihrust from the east has been mapped in the central portion of the

area,

6, Different fold patterns may have developed in the Willyama and Torro-

wangee rocks because of the difference in plasticity between these two

distinct lithological groups,

132

THE AGE OF THE GRANITE

For many years the granite was considered to be Middle Precainbrian; how-

ever, recently a post-Torrowangee age has been postulated mainly on

structural evidence (King and Thomeon 1953). From a study of the Erewery

Creek pluton and the adjacent Torrowangee sediments a pre-Torrowangee age

is indisputable.

Qn the eastern side of this pluton, contact metamorphic effects on the

Torrowangee sediments are entirely lacking while Willyama rocks, oceutting

as roof pendants and along the contact of the southern margin of the granite,

have been slightly metamorphosed. This, coupled with the abundance of granite

boulders in the basal beds of the tillite which averlies the granite, indicates that

the gtanite was introduced before tillite deposition commenced. This is confirmed

by outcrops in the Brewery Creck gorge in the vicinity of the Paragon mine,

which is situated about a half mile beyond the north-western limit of the area

mapped, Here the basal beds of the Torrowangee Series can be seen resting

unconformably upon the eroded basement of granite, Near the unconformity the

bedded tillite consists almost entirely of granite boulders in an arkosic matrix

(wide p, 128), but this grades into normal tillite higher up in the series, At

the contact between the Willyama sediments and the granite in this locality, the

granite has been intruded along bedding planes, giving a distinctive type of veined

tock. Boulders identical with this composite tock can he fonnd in the adjacent

tilhte (pl. X, fig. 1 and 2),

Although evidence points to a pre-Torrowangee age for the granite, certain

exposures along the unconformity both north and south af Brewery Well and

particularly in the vicinity of the slackyards, seem to contradict this. These are

discontinuous outcrops of granite which occur along the uconformity itself

and in two isolated cases in the tillite a foot or so above the unconf ormity plane.

First impressions suggest that these are dykes. or sills which have heen

intruded at a later date than the tillite fleposition. However, all the dykes and

smaller masses of granite occurring in the area and the marginal facies of the

Brewery Creek mass are fine in grain size, yet these occurrences now heiny

considered are coarse-grained and very similar to the coarser granite occurring

in the central part of the Brewery Creek phiton.

After studying these outcrops in the field it is now thought that they repre-

sent large boulders and blocks of granite which rested upon the original erosion

Surface at the lime tillite depasition commenced.

Tt is concluded that all the granite in the area studied is pre-Torrowangrce

im age.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

We are indebted to Mr. Nevins, of Poolamacey Station, who provided

transport and accommodation while the field work was being carried ont, ancl

to Messrs, King and Thomson, who were instrumental in bringing the problem

before our notice. Our thanks are also duc to Dr. D. R. Howes and other

members of the Department of Geology, including Professor Sir Douglas

Mawson and Mr. Kleeman, for their suggestions and helpful advice.

REFERENCES

Annrrws, F.C. 1950 Geology of Broken Hill, N.S.W. Rept. XVIItth Tht.

Geol, Cong. pt, vity The Geology, Paragenesis and Reserves of the

Ores of Lead and Zinc, p. 187

Anprews, F.C, and Assacrares 1922 The Geology of the Rroken Hill Dis-

trict, Mem. Geol. Surv., N.S,W,, 8

8, Plate IX

Vol,

‘02 x

SJOOIN, PESSOI) “R96

NUR BY} ByUeLs JO uoNdes uy

‘9g X sfoor

passory

‘gytias puv zyenb Aq ayypoyseryo jo JUusuaor[dar BuiMoys

aAoqe JO JaUIOD PUL,

yay do} Ut UOTJIas SsO19 JO JUAUATIY[UGT

z ‘Si

“8X “3996

‘ayyysyd

I ‘314

ayo1s

‘Yaad AlaMaig, JO pag UI ayy apyumeas jo aansodxy

€ Sq

Trans. Roy, Soc, S. Aust., 1955 Vol. 78, Plate X

Fig. 1

Granite intruded along bedding of Willvania metasedinients—

Brewery Creek,

Fig. 2

A boulder of rock identical with that shown above in overlying tillite—

Brewery Creek.

133

Browne, W. R. 1922 Report on the Petrology of the Broken Hill Region,

Excluding the Great Lode and its immediate vicinity. Mem. Geol. Surv.

N.S.W., 8, 295-353

Davip, T. W. E. 1950 Geology of Australia, 2, 240. Arnold

Kenny, E. J. 1934 West Darling District, Mineral Resources, 36, Department

of Mines, Geol. Surv. N.S.W.

Kine, Hapvon F., and Tomson, B. P. 1953 Geology of the Broken Hill Dis-

trict, Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress, Australia and

New Zealand, 1, Geology of Australian Ore Deposits, 533

Jouannsen, A. 1932 A descriptive Petrology of the Igneous Rocks, 2

Lees, G. fi 1952 Foreland Folding. Geol. Soc. London, Quart. Journ., 108,

-3

Lesuiz, R. B., and Warts, A. J. R. 1952 Geology of portion of the “Grand

Unconformity” North of Broken Hill, N.S.W. Hons. Thesis University

of Adelaide (unpublished).

Mawson, D. 1912 Geological Investigations in the Broken Hill Area. Mem.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 2

Mawson, D. 1926 A Brief Resume of Present Knowledge Relating to the

Igneous Rocks of South Australia. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 17

Mawson, D. 1949 The Late Precambrian Ice Age and Glacial Record of the

Bibliando Dome. Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N,.S.W., 82

SHaAnND, S. James 1943 Eruptive Rocks: Murby

LOWER CRETACEOUS PLANT REMAINS FROM THE VICINITY OF

MOUNT BABBAGE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY M. F. GLAESSNER* AND V. R. RAOF

Summary

A number of Lower Cretaceous plant remains from the north-eastern Flinders Ranges, from strata

previously considered as Tertiary, are described. The only previously described species is placed in

anew genus Nathorstianella.

134

LOWER CRETACEOUS PLANT REMAINS FROM THE VICINITY OF

MOUNT BABBAGE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By M. F. Graessner * and V, R, Raoj

[Read 14 October 1954]

SUMMARY

A number of Lower Cretaceotis plant remains from the tiorth-easiern Flinders Ranges,

from strata. previously considered as Tertiary, are described, The only previously described

species is placed in a new genus Nafhorstianella.

INTRODUCTION

The material on which this account is based was collected by one of the

authors (VY. R, R.), jointly with Mr, G. D. Woodard and Mrs. E. B. Summers,

during September 1953, One specimen collected at Mount Babbage (1,011 ft.,

lat. 29° 54’ south, long. 139° 40’ east) by Dr. D. R. Bowes in 1950, and another

collected by Miss M. J, Wade in 1950 have also been included, All specimens

are in the palacontological collections of the University of Adelaide. The strati-

graphy of the area is the subject of a recent paper by G. D. Woodard (1955),

to which the reader is referred for a detailed description of the localities, their

stratigraphic relations, and the age determination of the strata. A photograph

of Mount Babbage was recently published by Bowes (1953, pl. 10, fig. 1).

Previous. work on the area includes a description of plant remains by H.

Woodward (1885) who determined correctly the age of the flora as Mesozoic.

although insufficient material led him to erroneous identifications, Unfortunately,

his paper was not known to Woolnough and David (1925) who placed the plant-

bearing strata at the top of Mount Babbage in the Tertiary, using for these and

other non-marine deposits of the Lake Eyre Basin the term “Eyrtan Series.”

This term has since found wide application in stratigraphic literature and in

map legends, though it is stil! ill-defined. At the same time Woolnough and David

considered the plant-bearing boulder beds at the foot of Mount Babbaye and in

the vicinity of Muloowurtina Homestead as evidence of Cretaceous glaciation.

Woodard has. now shown that they are gravel and boulder beds at the hase of

the Lower Cretaceous transgression. Mr. S$. B. Dickinson, Director of Mines,

has informed us that he collected a. few years ago plant remains in the same area

which were determined as of Mesozoic age. The results of these investigations

are unpublished.

SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS

NATHORSTIANEL?A Nov. gen.

NATHORSTIANELLA BALHAGENSIS (H. Woodward)

PI. NI, fig. 1-4

1885 Mantellia babbagensis, H. Woodward, Geol. Mag., ns., (3), 2, p. 290,

pl, 7, fig. t, 2.

Material—Six stem fragments of vatying lengths (30-180 imin.); a ster

fragment with root-beating base but without rootlets; one conical fragment,

possibly of a young stem hase.

* University of Adelaide.

} Geological Survey of India.

138

Preservation—Casts in quartzite, without organic substance, The quartzite

ig the alteration product of sandstones which ts widespread on old erosion

surfaces in Central Australia and which is part of the ‘duricrust’ described by

Woolnough,

Lecality—Top of Munnt Babbage (1,01! ft.) Northern Flinders Ranges,

South Australia.

Hoalotype—A.U.G.D. No. PF, 15070 (pl. XI, fig. la, b).

Description—The root-bearing base measuring about 55 mm, in diameter

and 18 mm. high, is divided into lobes by four radial grooves arranged in two

opposing paits which are joined by a short straight groove. The angles at its

ends are less than 90°, those formed on either side of it by the radial grooves

are more than 90°. This arrangement corresponds to that scet in the stem base

of Plewrawvia in which the surface layers are not preserved (Magdefrau 1931,

fig. 2). In this genus, according ta Magdefrau, a crevice extends downward

almost to the external surface of the stem base. This explains ihe appearance

of the grooves on the surface of the present specimen. The central groove also

corresponds to the “split” in the “stock” of the living [sectes. As in Plewrameia,

the surface of the stem base is covered with rootlet scars. They measute about

2 min. in diameter and are mostly preserved as ring-shaped depressions. In the

best-preserved scars the depression is horseshoe-shaped, enclosing a slightly

eccentric elevation, as in Plewromeia and Nathorstiana. No appendages have been

fotind. Tike sears are closely spaced, without any visible regularity in their

arrangement. The outline of the base is angular; with the grooves ending at

the angles which du not project. The lower surface of the stem base is convex

hetween the grooves but one of these areas has been flattened, apparently in the

course of embedding or fossilization, and partly broken radially. Its inargin now

projects outward, giving the base a roughly pentagonal outline. The peripheral

margin of the hase is rounded in lateral view. Above it, the stem base slopes

inwurd for a short distance and then grades into the stem,

A conical fragment (pl. X1, fig: 4), about 38 mm. in diameter and 20 mm,

high, may represent a young growth stage of the stem base, Its surface shows

a projecting ring 27 mmm. in diameter but no rootlet scars.

The stem is conical, sloping (i a large fragment without base, pl. XT, fiz. 2)

from a diameter of 71 mm. to 40 mm, over a length of 180 nun. This is the largest

fragment found to date. It shows expanded rings about 10-20 mm. distant, while

inore closely spaced rings and also wider bulbous expansions are seen in other

fragments. The surface of the stem is densely covered with minute leaf scars,

which are 1-3 mm, long, very low and transversely elongate (slit-like). No

details of the structure of these scirs are preserved in the coarse matrix, Their

atrangement is spiral and the spacing is such that the impression of both low-

ingled and high-augled spirals is created. Neither leaves nor cones have been

jound.

Comparison—A stem fragment ciosely resembling the largest specimen in

the present collection was described from the same Incality by H. Woodward

(1885), as follows:

“On the exterior a thin carbonaceous crust, most of which is now removed,

renders more prominent a fine network of extremely minute compressed elliptical

or lozenge-shaped acars, indicating the bases of the petioles; 6 of these scars

measure only 20 mm, in breadth, and 9 scars oceupy the same space in height.

The diameter wf the stem is 5 centimetres,

The fragment is, I haye no doubt, a portion of the stem of a plant which

has been closely covered with leaves, such as we find in some Monocotyledonons

plants like “Blackhoys” and “Grass trees" (Xanthorrhace and Kingia) of Aus-

136

tralia, or perhaps still more like those Cycadeae whose stems are covered with

the permanent bases of the Icaves. [ have compared this specimen with the

figures of Muntlellig inelusa, Carr, given by Mr. Carruthers im his memoir on

“Fossil Cycadean Stems from the Secondary Rocks of Britain (Trans.

Linn, Sec. Lon., 26, 1868, 703, tab. Ixiii, fig. Z, 3)...”

"OF course but little can be said in the way of detailed description of so

fragmentary a fossil remain; nevertheless, from the comparison I have made,

I am inclined to consider this fossil to belong ta the Cycadeas and perhaps to the

genus Mantellia, If it be desirable, for convenience of reference, to give it a

specific name, I would suggest M. Babbegeisis as its trivial name, after the

locality from whence it was derived.”

It is noted that the genus Mantellia Brongniart 1828 was considered by

Seward (1917, p. 365) a synottym of Cycadecidea Buckland 1827.

Although Woodward correctly described the appearance of the stems of this

plaut, he was misled by its superficial resemblance to a eycad trunk, The dis-

covery Gf the root-bearing base has made it clear that its relations are with

Noathorstiana (Richter 1909, Magdefrau 1932, 1953) and Pleuromwia, and there-

fore with the Lepidophytales and the living Family Isoetacecae, This Family is

linked morphologically and phylogenetically, as many authors and more recerttly

particularly Richter and Magdefrau have pointed out, through these two Mesozoic

genera with the Palaeozoic Tepidodendrons and Sigillarias. The toot-hearing

stem base of Pleuromeia and Nathorstiina is essentially a reduced Stipmaria.

Tn the Australian form it differs from that of Pleuromeia in the almost complete

absence of the expanded and upturned Iobe-like cxpansiona at the ends

of the granyes, These “horns” are here represented only by the four corners

of the base, so that the slightly inflated areas between them begin tu resemble

the lobes of the “stock” of /soetes, The stem base of the fossil plant from Mott

Babbage differs from Nathorstiana in the relatively much reduced length (height)

and in the distinctly fuat-lobed basal surface. Equally important differences from

both genera are found in the leaf-bearing stem. It is much shorter than in

Piewromeja but longer than in Nethorstiand; the leaf seurs are much smaller and

more closely spaced than in Pleuromeia but apparently more distinet than in

Nathorstiena, The Australian species is therefore jn all observable characters

distinct from and intermediate between Pleuromeia and Nathorstiana, and has

to be placed in a new genus,

Genus Nathorstianella nov.

Type species N, habbayeusis (H, Woodward)

Pescription—A genus of the Isoetaceae with a short root-bearing stem base

which js closely and irregularly covered with rootlet scars and divided into four

lobes by deep grooves; its outline does not project at the outer ends of these

grooves, The leaf-bearing stem is long and tapering, with annular expansions,

and bears numerous very stall transversely clongate and closely spaced leaf sears.

Relations—It is possible, although it cannot be proved, that fyactites elequars

Walkom, from fine-grained clayey sandstones underlying the Cretaceous green-

sands at Gingin, Western Australia, belongs to this genus. This species was based

by Walkom on a group of leaves and sporangia, The arrangement of leaves in

the lype specimen (Walkom, 1944, pl. 1, fig. 1) stiggests that they were attached

to a stem abotst 40 mn. in diameter; their bases were 3-4 mim. wide. These

tneasurements agree with those of the stem and the leaf sears in Nathorstianella.

Further discoveries, either of stems in Western Australia ar oi leaves ot, Mount

Babbage, must be awaited helore this suggested relation can be tested. It would

be of great interest as the sporangia in Nathorstiana am] Nalhorsiianella. are not

known. The validity of the new generic name would not be affected by it as the

137

genus Jsoefites Minster 1842 was based on an “imperfectly preserved and

indeterminable fossil” (Seward, 1910, p. 67) and none of the other species

placed in this genys resembles the Western Australian species; two of them are

described by Walkom as “very different,” while [soetites chaffati (Saporta) was

based on “small relatively broad tuberous hodies reaching a breadth of 1 cm,”

(Seward, 1910, p. 67) and basal portions of sporophylls. There is no reference

to 3 stem.

The discovery of this new genus confirms the view that a line of evolution

leads from the Lower Triassic Pleuromeia which is known from Etirope, East

Asia and Australia, through Nathorsfiana (known only from the Lower Cre-

taccous of Germany), to /soetes. It helps to bridge the gap between the twa

extinct genera, Nathorstianella shows a reduction of the lobes of Pieuromeia,

but this does not go as far as in Nathorstione; on the other hand, the new genus

does not show the lengthening of the root-bearing base associated with a shorten-

ing of the leaf-bearing stem which is clearly shown in the German Cretaceous

farm (see Magdefrau 1932, fig. 2, and 1953, fig. 240), and which becomes

cankasire in Isoetes where the “stem” has disappeared in the “stock? (Lang

1915).

Age—The age of Nathorstianella does not differ significantly from that of

Natkorstiana which is Barremian. The Blythesdale sandstone containing these

fossils in its upper part which forms the top of Mount Babbage, is directly

overlain 4 miles eastward by the fossiliferous marine Roma Formation of Aptian

age (Woodard 1955).

Ecology—Magdefrau (1953) has made it probable that Nethorstiana lived

in coastal sand dunes. Nathorstianella was found in some abundance in coarse

sandy deposits, and although these fossils have not been observed in positions of

growth it seems likely that they are either im situ or at least that they have not

been transported far. The sand in which they are embedded is derived from

locally outcropping Precambrian quartzites and appears to have heen deposited

by streams or in lakes. Their sandy banks provided the habitat of Nathorstsanella,

CLaperuiLesis Brongniart 1848

CLADOPHLERIS auSTRALIS (Morris)

P). XII, fig. 12, 13

1917 Cladophlebis australis (Morris), Walkom, Old. Geol, Surv. Publ., 257,

p: 3 pl. 5, fig. 1, 2.

1919 Cladophlebis australis (Morris), Arber, Palaeont, Bull. Geol. Surv. N.Z..

G, p. 29, pl. 4, fig, 1, 5, 8.

Frond bipinnate, pinnae obliquely disposed on a slender rachis, attached ta

the rachis by the whole base, oblong, apex rounded, midrib well defined, extend-

lug to the apex, secondary veins make an acute angle with the midrib, margin

entire, pirnae wide apart, four pinnae seen in the specimen,

Measurements of the pinna—Length = 5 mm. Width = 2+5 to 3 mm,

Localtt—The figured specimen was collected fram an outcrop about 2 miles

north-east of Flinders No. 5 talc mine, situated about 10 miles west of Mount

Babbage (sce Bowes 1953, fig. 2), In another specimen from the Woolshed sec-

tiow the pinnae are longer and closer to each other,

TAENioprerrs Brongniart 1828

TAENIOPTERIS SPATULATA McClelland

Pl. XII, fig. 1-7

1908 “Taentopteris spatulata aud its varieties.” Chapman, Ree. Geol, Surv. Viet..

2, pt. 4. p, 205, pls. 36, 37-

138

1917 Taeniopteris daintreei McCoy, Arber, Palaeont. Bull. 6 Geol. Surv., N.Z.,

p. 46, pl. 6, fig. 5.

1917 Taeniopteris spatulata McClelland, Walkom, Old. Geol. Surv. Pulb, 257,

p. 30, pl. 5, fig. 2b.

1919 Taeniopteris spotulata McClelland, Walkom, Old. Geol. Surv, Publ, 264,

p. 36, pl. 1, fig. 9.

Frond linear, spatulate in shape, margins roughly parallel, midrib pro-

ininent, veins almost at right angles to the midrib, simple, extending from the

midrib to the lateral margins, closely packed, about 12 to 16 in 5 mm., apex

bluntly pointed or rounded, width of the lamina decreases gradually towards the

petiole,

Great variation is observed in the length and width of the frond and the

width of the midrib in the 12 specimens studied. The veins are clearly visible

on the impressions in sandstone, while they are obscure or absent on the impres-

siotis in quartzite,

Measnrements—Length = 40 to 100 mm., width im the middle of the flamina

= 3 to 10 mm., width of the midrib = 0:5 to 2 min.

Locality—All the impressions in quartzite are collected from the flat-topped

hill about 4 mile north-east of Mount Babbage and those in sandstones from the

Woalshed section, Muloowurtina.

Orozamitrs Braun 1842

OTOZAMITES KENGALENSIS (Oldham and Mortis)

Pi. XII, fig, 14

1863 Palaeozamia bengalensis, Oldham and Morns, Palaeont, Indica, Ser. 2.

1, pt. 1, p. 27, pl. 19, fig. 1, 2, 6.

1917 Otuguimites bengalensis (Oldham and Morris), Seward, Fossil Plants, 3,

p. 543, fig, 607.

Frond narrow and long, pinnae short, rhomboidal, slightly rounded and

produced at their basal upper margin towards the narrower end, rectangular with

parallel edges and rounded apices towards the broader end, arranged alternately

on the rachis, closely spaced, attached to the rachis by the whole base in a

slightly oblique direction, venation obscure, rachis deep and broad.

Measurements—Length of the frond = 50 mm. Width of the frond:

narrower end — 4 mm., broader end = 6 mm. Pinna, narrower end: length —

2 mm., width = 2 mm: broader end: length 3 —=m., width = 1°5 mm.

Locality—Only one specimen was collected from flat topped hill north-east

of Mount Babbage.

Cycapites Sternberg 1833

CYCADITES sp.

Pl. XII, fig. 9

cf. 1917 Cycadites sp., Arber, Palacont. Bull. Geol’ Surv., NZ, 6, p. SI,

fix. 10,

Specimen. not well preserved, frond bipinnate, pinnae narrow and linear,

gradually tapering towards the apex, attached to the rachis by the whole base,

midrib paired, rachis broad and deep with roughly circular depressions, pinnae

preserved only on one side of the rachis.

Measurements of the largest pinna—Length = 25 mm.: width (near the

base) = 5 mm.; (near the apex) == 2 mm. Width of the rachis = 3 mm.

Locality—Woolshed section, Muloowurtina.

138

Nizssonia Brongniart 1824

NILSSONIA SCHAUMBURGENSIS (Dunker)

Pl. XU, fig. &

1895 Nilssonia schawmburygensis (Dunker), Seward, Wealden Flora, U, p. 53,

fig. 3.

1917 Nilssonia schaumburgensis (?) (Dunker), Walkom, Qld. Geol. Surv.

Publ, 263, p. 33, pl. 1, fig. 14, 15.

Frond moderately long and broad, segmented, truncated segments of unequal

length and width, margin irregular with incisions of varying length in the middle

of the frond but wavy and gradually becoming entire towards the petiole and

the apex. Veins simple, parallel, 12 to 14 in 5 mm., roughly at tight angles to

the midrib, extending from the midrib to the lateral margims without bifurca-

tion. The margin of the segments in the middle of the lamina is slightly notched.

Apex bluntly pomted. Midrib broad, showing fine ribs tunning from the petiole

to the apex,

This specimen closely resembles Nilssonia elegans Arber (Arber 1917, p. 52,

pl. 8, fig. 8). Edwards (1934, p. 98) points out that there is practically no

difference between the Wealden N. schaumburgensis (Dunker) and N. elegans

Ather of New Zealand and remarks: “. . . but with only a few incomplete

specimens for comparison it is safer to allow N. elegans to stand for the present.”

Measurement of the frond—Length = 60 mm. Maximum width (middle of

the frond) = 10 mm, Maxiniim width of the midrib = 1°5 mm.

Locality—Woolshed section, Muloowurtina (collected by Miss M. J. Wade).

Exatociapus Halle 1913

ELATOcLADUS PLANUS {Feistmantel)

Pi. XIT, fig. 10, 11

1919 Llatecledus planus (Feistmantel), Walkom, Qld. Geol. Surv., Publ, 263,

p, 43, pl 2, fig. 4, 5.

1934 Alatocladus plana (Yeistmantel), Edwards, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 10,

13, p. 103, pl. 5, fig. 3

Shoot with slender tachis showing two ranked spirally attached leaves, leaves

linear, almost of uniform width, apex bluntly pointed, attached to the rachis by

the whole base. The specimens are found in quartzite and no further details of

the leayes are visible.

Measurements of the leaves—length = 15-30 mm.; width = 1-2 mm,

Locality—Flat-topped hill, north-east of Mount Babbage.

CONIFEROUS WOOD

Many well-preserved fossilized tree trunks are found in the Blythesdale

Sandstone about 2£ miles south of Muloowurtina Homestead. The tree trunks

vary in length from 7 to 36 feet, and in diameter from 1 to 4 feet. Some of the

specimens collected show well-marked growth rings. A preliminary examination

of the thin sections indicates that the wood is of coniferous nature.

Impressions of woody structures are also seen in the quartzites of Mount

Babbage and the flat-topped hills north-east of if.

AFFINITIES OF THE FLORA

With the exception of Nathorstianella all the other forms described here

are commonly found in the late Mesozoic floras of many parts of the world.

Even though: it is difficult to determine the affinities of this flora on so Few

forms, it can be said that it has a close relationship with the Cretaceaus floras

of Queensland, particularly with the flora of the Burrum series (Walkom 1919,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955 Vol, 78, Plate XJ

Nathorstianella babbagensis (FI. Woodward)

Fig. La, b—Root-bearing base; a, basal view, natural size: 1 b, lateral view, x 0+9,

Holotype F.15075. Fig. 2, 3—Siem fragments, x 0-75, F.15076, F 15077. Fie, 4—

Conical fragment, possibly stem base, x 1-4, F. 15078.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1955

Fig. 1-4—Tueniopteris spatullata McClelland. Impressions on quartzite, natural size.

F. 15079 a, F.15079 b, F. 15080, F.1508L. Fig. 5-7—T. spatitluta McClelland. Impres-

sions on sandstones showing veins, fig. 5, x 2+5, fig. 6 and 7, natural size. F, 15082 to

F. 15084. Fig. 8—Nilssonia cf. schawnburgensis (Dunker) x 1+2. F. 15085. Fig. 9—

Cycadites sp. natural size, F, 15086. Fig. 10, 11—latocladus planus (Feistmantel)

rittural size. F, 15087, F.15088. Fig. 12, 13—Cladophlebis australis (Morris). Fig. 12,

x2, Fig. 13, same, x4. F. 15089. Fig. 14—Otosamites bengulensis (Oldham and

Morris), natural size, F, 15090,

Vol, 78, Plate XII

NOAM

Tuils

140

1919b), Some of these forms are also described from the Jurassic and Cretaceous

of New Zealand (Arber 1917 and Edwards 1934),

The field evidence (Woodard 1955) supports the Lower Cretaceoits age

of this flora.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The authors are indebted to Professor T. G. B. Osborn for an instructive

discussion of the morphology of the living /soetes and for helpful comment and

criticism. The field investigations were assisted by a grant from the General

Research Funds of the University of Adelaide. The junior author cartied out

his work during his tenure of a Commonwealth Technical Assistance (Colombo

Plat) Fellowship at the University of Adelaide.

REFERENCES

Arner, N. E. A. 1917 The earlier Mesozoic Floras of New Zealand. Geol.

Surv, N.Z, Palaeont. Bull. No. 6

Epwarps, W. N. 1934 Jurassic Plants from New Zealatid, Ann, Mag, Nat.

Hist., Ser. 10, 13, pp, 81-108

Bowrs, D, R, 1953 The genesis of some granitic and associated rocks in the

north-eastern Flinders Ranges, South Australia, Trans. Roy, Soe.

S. Aust., 76, 85-107

Lane, W, H. 1915 Studies on the morphology of Isoetes, I. The general

morphology of the stock of Jsaetes lacustris. Mem. Proc. Manchester

Lit. Phil. Soc., 59, No, 3, pp. 1-28 (reprint)

MAcnerrau, K. 1931 Zur Morphologie und phylogenetischen Bedeutung der

fossilen Pflanzengattung Pleurometa. Beih. z. Bot. Centrulbl., 48, Abt. IT,

pp. 119-140

MA&Gperrav, K. 1932 Ueber Nathorstiana, eine Isoetacee aus dem Neokom

yon Quedlinburg a. Harz, Beih. z. Bot, Centralbl., 49, Abt. II, pp. 706-

718

MAcperrau, K. 1953 Palaeobiologie der Pflanzen. 2nd ed.

Ricutrr, P. B. 1909 Beitrige zur Flora der unteren Kreide Quedlinburgs,

T. Il, Leipzig

Sewarn, A. C. 1910 Fossil Plants, 2

Sewarp, A. C. 1917 Fossil Plants, 3

Watxom, A. B. 1919a Mesozoic Floras of Queensland. Parts 3 and 4, Old.

Geol, Surv. Publ. 263

Wacxom, A, B, 1919b Queensland Fossil Floras, Proc. Roy. Soc, Old., 31,

No. 1

Warxom, A. B. 1944 Fossil plants from Gingin, W. Aust. J. Roy. Soc.

W. Aust., 28, 201-207

Wooparp, G. D, 1955 The stratigraphic succession in the vicinity of Mount

Babbage, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 78

Woopwarp, H. 1885 Notes on some Mesozoic plant remains from South Aus-

tralia. Geol. Mag., N.S., (3), 2, 289-293

Wootnoven, W. G,, and Davin, T. W. E. 1926 Cretaceous glaciation in Cen-

tral Australia, Quart. J. Geol. Soc. Lond, 82, pt. 3, 332-351

ACANTHOCEPHALA COLLECTED BY THE AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL

ANTARCTIC RESEARCH EXPEDITION ON HEARD ISLAND AND

MACQUARIE ISLAND DURING 1948-50

BY S. J. EDMONDS*

Summary

Three Acanthocephala are recorded from the sub-Antarctic Islands: Aspersentis austrinus van

Cleave, Corynosoma bullosum (von Linstow) and Corynosoma clavatum Gosse. Corynosoma sp. is

also recorded from a penguin.

141

ACANTHOCEPHALA COLLECTED BY THE AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL

ANTARCTIC RESEARCH EXPEDITION ON HEARD ISLAND AND

MACQUARIE ISLAND DURING 1948-50

By S$. J. Epmonps *

[Read 14 October 1954]

SUMMARY

Three Acanthocephala are recorded from the sub-Antarctic Islands: Aspersentis austrinus

van Cleave, Corynosonia bullosum (vou Latstow) and Coryrosoma clavatim Gosse. Coryno-

soma sp. is also recorded from a penguin,

INTRODUCTION

Most of the Acanthocephala described in this report were collected by

R. G. Chittleborough and E. H. M. Ealey while stationed with the A.N,A,R.E.

at Heard Island during 1949, Two species were collected by N. M. Ilaysom

at Macquarie Island in the same year.

LIST OF PARASITES EXAMINED ARRANGED ACCORDING

TO THEIR HOSTS

Fisx

NoTroTHENTA coriicers Richatdsou—Aspersentis austrinus van Cleave, 1929, and

structure in both sexes is 0:25 mm. and occurs toward its posterior extremity.

larval form of Corynosoma bullosum (von Linstow, 1892), Heard Island.

NotToTHENIA CYANOBRANCHA Richardson— Aspersentis austvinus van Cleave,

1929, Heard Island.

Birps

PHALACROCORAX ATRICEPS NIVALIS Falla Corynosoma clavatum Gosse, 1940,

Heard Island,

Pyeosceris Papua Forster—Corynosoma sp., Macquarie Island.

MAMMALS

MigouncaA LEONINA Linn.—Corynosoma bullosum (von Linstow, 1892), Heard

and Macqtiarie Islands.

Hyprurca Lerronyx (de Blainville)—Corynosoma bullosum {von Linstow,

1892), Heard Island.

DESCRIPTION OF PARASITES

ASPERSENTIS AUSTRINUS van Cleave, 1929

Fig. 1

Heard Island—Catalogue number of collections 233, 426, 428, 428, 488, 489,

About 30 specimens of this parasite, most of which are females, were found

in the intestine of the fish, Nofothenia corticeps and N. cyanobrancha.

The length of the body or trunk of the males excluding the proboscis is

4-4-5°] mm., and of the females 6°4-9-2 mm. The maximum width of the males

is 1:2 mm., and of the females 2°2 mm. Two females which had contracted very

much in length and whose shape seemed abnormally rounded were 3°3 mm. wide.

The length of the proboscis, which when when fully extended is curved ventrally

to a slight extent, lies between 0°75 and 0-85 mm. The minimum width of the

There is an unarmed neck up to 0°3 mm. long. The proboscis is armed with

14 rows of 9-11 hooks per row and the hooks on its ventral surface are largest.

* University of Adelaide.

14z

The maximum length of the proboscis sheath is 1-3 mm. The body wall is thick

and the anterial ventral surface of the worm is atmed with body spines. The

lemnisei are a little longer than the proboscis sheath.

The testes are oval in shape and of approximately equal size; their maximum

length is 0°75-0-90 mm. and width 0-44-60 mm. Six cement glands are present

and their ducts remain separate almost to the base of Saefftigen’s pouch,

The uterus is as much as 2°6 mm. long, and it some cases much distendel

with eggs; its maximum width is 0:32 mm. Ripe eggs are 78-85» long an 18-25,

wide and possess polar prolongations.

Fout smailer specimens of 4. austrinus were obtained from {he intestine of

Nolothenia cyanobrancha. The four worms consisted of two males and two

females, In two specimens the praboscis was extended sufficiently to make identi-

fication possible,

Aspersents austrinus was described by van Cleave (1929) from “Tremo-

tomus or Notothenia” from South Georgia. Rhadinorhynchus wheeleri Baylis

1929 from Notothena rasstt seems to be synonymous with .4, austrinys,

CorvNoOsOMA CLAVATUM Gosse, 1940

Fig. 2

Ieard Island—Catalogue number of collection 201.

Two male and five female specimens of this parasite were found in the

ftestme of the shag, Phalacrocoraax atriceps, The wortns are small and their

shape resembles that of a pipe with a large bowl. In none of the specimens was

the probsocis fully everted, and in all cases it had sunk below the rim of the

bowl. The length of the parasites measured from the most anterior point of thie

howl in a straight line to the genital aperture is in the case of the males

2°1-2-3 mm. and of the females 2+3-2-7 mm. The maximum width or diameter

of the cirewlar bowl or disc of the males is 1-5 mm. and the females 16 mm.

The introvert, consisting of an armed and small unarmed portion, would he

about O'8 mm. long when fully extended; its maximum width about 0-3 aim.

The proboscis is armed with 16 longitudinal rows of hooks. The exact number

of hooks in each row has not been determined with certainty. It is estimated that

there would he 10-11. The posteriar four hooks of each row ate smallest

and the fifth or sixth hook of each row is the largest. The size and shape of the

largest hook is shown in fig, 2. The proboscis sheath is double walled and its

maximum length is 1-0 mum. The anterior region of the parasite, the dise or bowl,

bears numerous rows of small spines about 284 long, The remainder of the hady

is devoid of spines, except the genital region which bears a few very small

spines, The genital spines are particularly noticeable in the two male speciinens.

Eges 73-76y long and 32-36 wide were present in two of the females,

C. clavatunt has how been reported [rom a number of shays in the southern

hemisphere; by Gosse (1940) from Phalacrocovax alter, P. snclunaleuca and

P. varius, and by Johnston and Best (1942) from P. varius, The larval farm

(19 i reported from the fish, Platycephalus fuscus, by Johnston and Edmonds

CorYNOSOMA BULLOSUM (corn Linstow, 1892)

Fig, 3.5

Heard Island—Catalogue number of collections 144, 218, 219, 304, 361, 426, 427.

428, 470, 483, 503.

Macquarie Island—M1/49/P7,

Anutt Form

A very good collection consisting of over 100 specimens in an excellent

state of preservation were obtained from the intestine of the sea elephant,

143

Mirounga leonina, Two specimens were also found in material collected from

the intestine of the sea leopard, Hydrurga leptonyx. Most of the specimens were

yellow to orange in colour.

The maximum length (excluding the proboscis) of the males is 6'°2 mm.,

and of the females 12°2 mm.; the maximum width (in the anterior region) of

the males is 1°6 mm., and of the female 1:9 mm. The proboscis is cylindrical in

shape and 0-94-1-10 mm. Jong, Its maximum width is about 0°26 mm. It is

armed with 15-16 longitudinal rows of 11-13 hooks per rom. Except for the

posterior 3 or 4 there is little differentiation in their size and shape (fig. 3).

mw 6.6

———__»

orlmm

Fis. 1—Aspersentis austrvinus. Adult male.

Fig. 2—Corynosoma clavatum. Largest proboscis hook.

Fig. 3-5—-Corynosoma bullosum. Fig. 3, proboscis hooks; fig. 4, adult male; fig. 5, proboscis

There is an unatmed neck as long as 0-4 mm. The proboscis sheath is double

walled ; its maximum length is 1:°4 mm.,, and width 0°30 mm, An elliptical ganglion

is present near the middle of the sheath. The anterior swollen portion of the

body and the genital region of both sexes bears small spines.

Two oval-shaped testes of approximately equal size lie in most specimens

at about the same level; their maximum length is 0°7-0‘9 mm., and width

0-32-0'45 mm. There are six long tubular cement glands arranged in pairs. The

testes and cement glands are placed in most specimens so as to make the male

bilaterally symmetrical. Two vasa deferentia unite about the level of Saefftigen’s

idg

pouch. There is a well developed bursa everted in a number of specimens and

bearing about 20 rays.

The female system consisting of a bell, uterus and vagina is as much as

3-5 mm. long. The vaginal complex consists of three bulbs. The posterior region

of a number of females forms an introvort up to 0-5 mm. long. Ripe eggs with

polar prolongations of the middle shell are 93-105 long and 20-26, wide.

C. bullosum has been reported previously (Meyer 1932) from M. leonina,

Larval, Form

Some specimens consisting of 14 cysts, 3 larvae emerging from cysts and

2 freed larvae, collected from the mesentery of Notethenia coriiceps, have been

identihed as C. bullosum, The cysts are oval to kidney-shaped and white in colour.

Their maximum length is 1-6-2-0 mm., and width 0:7-0:9 mm. The identification

is based on an examination of the emerging and freed laryae. The two larvae

which had lost their cyst cases are females. The length of their bady measured

from the base of the proboscis to the genital aperture is 3-5-3-7 mm. The

maximum width of the anterior swollen body region is 1-2-1-4 mm. The proboscis,

0-90-0°96 mm. long and about 0-26 mm. wide, bears 16 longitudinal rows of

hooks, each row consisting of 13 hooks. The anterior portion of the body and

the region surrounding the genital aperture bear small spines.

The larval form of C. bullosum has been recorded from the peritoneum

of Chaenocephalus aceratus by Baylis (1929).

CoryNosoMA sp.

Macquarie Island. M1/49/P33.

Four immature acanthocephala were obtained from the intestine of the

penguin, Pygoscelis papua, The proboscis of none of the specimens is fully

extended and the reproductive organs are in the early stages of development,

The anterior swollen portion of the body and the ventral surface of the parasites

bear small spines. The genital aperture is surrounded with very small spines.

Identification, however, will have to be withheld until more material is available

for examination.

REFERENCES

Bayurs, H. A. 1929 Parasitic Nematoda and Acanthocephala in the Discovery

Reports, 1, 541-559

Gossz, O. M. 1940 Platyhelminth and Acanthocephalan parasites of local shags.

Jour, Roy. Soc W. Aust., 24, 1-14

Jounston, T. H. and Best, E. W. 1942 Australian Acanthocephala, No. 3.

Trans. Roy. Soc. of S, Aust., 66, 250-254

jJounston, T. H., and Epmonns, S. J. 1952 Australian Acanthocephala, No. 9.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75, 16-21

Meyer, A. 1932 Acanthocephala in Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Tier-

reichs, Bd, TV, 2 Abt., 2 Buch, 76-83

van Creve, H. J. 1929 A new Genus and new Species of Acanthocephala

from the Antarctic. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist., 10, IV, 229-231

SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIOLOGY, INCLUDING MATING AND

OTHER BEHAVIOUR, OF THE AUSTRALIAN SCORPION URODACUS

ABRUPTUS POCOCK

BY R, V. SOUTHCOTT

Summary

Two species of scorpion of the genus Urodacus Peters 1861 are recorded from the Adelaide region

of South Australia. These are referred to U. armatus Pocock 1888 and U. abruptus Pocock 1888.

The different habitats of these two species are described. Observations on the behaviour of

specimens of U. abruptus kept in captivity are recorded. This species has been observed to perform

a mating procedure not previously described in the scorpions. After the typical stance of the

promenade a deux is adopted the male has been observed to make a series of lunges or thrusts, in

which he pushes himself through the "arms" or pedipalpi of the female. These, acts appear to be an

effort to turn the female backwards, upon her back, prior to copulation. Actual copulation was not

observed.

Adults of this species of scorpion have been kept in captivity up to 22 months.

A supposedly parturient female of U. abruptus was observed, on very hot days in summer, to adopt

an elevated stance, with the abdomen hyper-extended on the cephalothorax, with the telson

drooping forwards. A similar, but less marked, attitude has also been observed in males of this

species, under hot humid conditions. The purpose of this attitude is uncertain, but probably it has a

respiratory and perhaps cooling function.

145

SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE BIOLOGY, INCLUDING MATING

AND OTHER BEHAVIOUR, OF THE AUSTRALIAN SCORPION

URODACUS ABRUPTUS POCOCK

By R, V- SourTuacorr

[Read 14 October 1954]

SUMMARY

Two species of scorpion of the genus Urodacus Peters 1861 are recorded from the

Adelaide region of South Australia. These are referred to U. armatus Pocock 1888 and

LU. abruptus Pecock 1888. The different habitats of these two species are described, Observa-

tions on the behaviour of specimens of U. abruptus kept in captivity are recorded. This

species has been observed to perform a mating procedure not previously described in_ the

scorpions. After the typical stance of the promenade 4 deux is adopted the male has been

observed to make a series of lunges of thrusts, in which he pushes himself through the

“arms” or pedipalpi of the female. These, acts appear to be un effort to turn the female back-

wards, upon her back, prior to copulation. Actual copulation was not observed.

Adults of this species of scorpion have been kept in captivity up to 22 months,

A supposedly parturient female of U. abruptus was observed, on very holt days in

summer, to adopt afi elevated stance, with the abdomen hyper-extended on the cephalothorax,

with the telson drooping forwards, A similar, but less marked, attitude has also been observed

in males of this species, :mder hot humid conditions. The purpose of this attitude is uncertain,

hut probably it has a respiratory and perhaps cooling function.

INTRODUCTION

The genus Urodacus Peters 1861 is confined to Australia, some 15 species

being recognized. Two species of this genus occur in the vicinity of Adelaide,

South Australia. The smaller darker species is the subject of the present paper,

atid will be referred to Urodacus abruptus Pocock 1888.‘ Te lives in shallow

tunnels in loamy soil, chiefly under stones, and is not uncommon in the

Mount Lofty Ranges, The larger species is less common, It is lighter in colour,

brown, and excavates tunnels in sand or sandy soils, these tunnels opening free

to the surface: It will be referred to U. armafus Pocock 1888, described originally

from a male specimen from Port Lincoln, South Australia.

RECORDED DISTRIBUTION OF U. ABRUPTUS

Urodacus atruptus Pocock 1888 was described from two females in the

collection of the British Museum—'one ticketed Adelaide, the other merely New

Tfolland.” tn 1893 Pocock referred again to this species, describing the male and

stating, “This species seems to be common in South and South-east Australia.

The type of the species (a dried specimen) came from Adelaide; but since it

was described I have seen others in the Museum of Owens College, Manchester,

¥) In the present paper I have followed the classification of Pocock (1888, 1893, 1898,

1902) rather than that of Kraepelin (1899, 1908, and earlier papers). The latter author

regarded U. novaekellundiog Peters 1861 and U. abruptus Pocock 1888 as conspecific with

Toctonus manicates Thorell 1876. Although Kraepelin stated that he had come to this opinion

after a study of Thorell’s otiginal specimens, there are so many gross discrepancies between

Thorell’s brief description and any Urodacus of which T am aware, that I consider it extremely

unlikely that Kraepelin had Thorell's original specimens (from “Nova Hollandia") before

him. Numerotis errors by Kraepelin m both observation and interpretation are pointed out

by Pocock (1891, 1898, 1902). Unfortunately it does not uppear likely that Thorell's types

can be recovered {Vachon 1954, personal communication) .Both species in the Adelaide

tegion correspond to Pocock’s descriptions for U, abruptus and U, armatus respectively.

The systematics of the gentis U/rodacus will be considered further in later papers.

146

which are: ticketed Mount Lofty, South Australia, and Victoria.” In 1898 Pocock

reviewed the genus Urodacus. For U. abruptus he gave as localities “South and

South eastern Australia, Adelaide, type (59.52); Ballarat and Bendigo, in

Victoria (W. W. Froggatt); Cooma, Bathurst, Maitland, Yass, in New South

Wales (W. W. Froggatt); New England District of New South Wales (J.

Macpherson),

“Since I described this species the British Museum has received a very fine

series of it from Mr. Froggatt and Mr. Macpherson irom the localities mentioned

above.”

Glauert (1925) stated that this species extends in its geographical distribu-

tio from New South Wales through Victoria to South Australia, He states

further: “Whether it enters Western Australia is doubtful, Kraepelin states that

it occut's there, butt ] have failed to find it among the hundred or more specimens

ot Urodacus which I have received from all parts of the south of Western Aus-

tralia, On the other hand, the Uredacus, so plentiful in the vicinity of Eucla, is

U. novae-hollandiae; this suggests that U. manicatus (U. abruptus) does not

reach the western boundary of South Australia,” In the same paper Glauert

recorded two specimens of this species from: Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

PRESENT OBSERVATIONS ON HABITAT AND DISTRIBUTION

Uredacus abruptus is found in loamy soil in-eucalypt forest, where it hives in

shallow tunnels under fairly large stones, In the Mount Lofty Ranges of South

Australia, where most of my field observations have heen made, it is found m

fair numbers at the edge of moderately dense forest of stringybark (Eucalyptus

oblique), or occasionally blue-gum (Eucalyptus leucoxylon), in preferably damp

or slightly danip situations. I have also collected this species in the Grampians of

Victoria, and at the western end of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.

Males may readily be distinguished from the females by the former having

the dorsal sutface of the abdomen dull grey, finely granular, whereas in the

females the dorsal surface of the abdomen is darker, smooth and polished.

The specimens of this species (captured up to November 1953) in my collee-

tion are as follows:

Serial Number of

Nuniber Specimens Locality Comments

Sus 6 Workanda Creek, National Park, TParasitized by larval Lepius sp.

Belair, Mount Lofty Ranges, (nmsp.) (Acarina Erythraeidae)

South Australia, 30th March,

1937

Ss 2 144 Mount Osmond (5 specimens) Kept m captivity. Some lived 2

Workanda Creck (9 specimens} months

(Mount Tofty Ranges), April-

May 1938

5S 4 4 Workanda Creek, 24 July 1938 Two mature; iwo juvenile

8 5 2 Waterfall Gully, Mount Lofty One adult; one immature

Ranges, 24 August 1938

3S. +2 1 National Park, Belair, 11 April

1939

s } 1 Chetry Gardens, Mount Lofty Pectines removed experimentally.

Ranges, 30 April 1939 Lived some weeks. Was probably

given jnsufficient water

S 8 3 Rocky River, Kangaroo Island, Two. adult males; one immature

29 December 1939

Ss 9 1 Workanda Creek, 5. Aust. 13 De- Mature. Lived 72 months in cape

cember 1947 tivity

147

Serial Number of \

Number Specimens Locahty Comments

10 1 Fish Falls, Grampians, Victoria, Mature female

4 January 1948

S lt i» =Workanda Creek, 1 August, 1948 Dried carcase

5S 12 1 Workanda Creek, 10 October 1948 Mature. Liyed 4 months im eap-

tivity

S27 1 Workanda Creck, 13 November Mature, Lived 94 mols im cap-

1948 tivity

S$ 13 t Workanda Creek, 22 May 1949 Mature. Lived 13 moliths in cap-

tivity’

S 2+ \ Workanda Creek, 23 October 1949 Mature, Lived 6 months im cap-

tivity

5 i4¢ 1 Workanda Creek, 30 July 1950 Mature. Lived 2 months in cap-

tivily

S$ 25 1 Workanda Creek, 21 May, 1950 Mature. Lived 6 months jh can-

tivity:

5 26 t Workanda Creek, 12 November Lived 2 weeks in captivity

1956

Ss 28 ! Workanda Creek, 18 February Parusitized by larval Leptus sp.

1981 (Erythraeidae), Acarina

S 15-18 6 Workanda Creek, July September, Sexual activity noted, See detailed

19 ALB October 1951 report helow

S 20,21 3 Workanda Créek, 16 November 5§ 21 (female), lived 2 months.

1952 S 20 (male), still alive (Sepiem-

ber 1954), ie., has lived 22. months

in captivity

S 22,23 2 Workanda Creek, 30 August 1953

8S 43 6 Workunda Creek, 1 November Three specimens are still in cap-

1953 tivity. Four mature, 2, immature

REARING EXPERIMENTS

It will be noted from the above data that since 1937 a number of attempts

has been made to keep scorpions in captivity, So far it has been possible to keep

adults alive up to 22 mionths im captivity. Since 1947 T have kept them in

cylindrical glass pots, with overlapping (not sealed) lids. These pots are 15 cms.

across by 10 cms. high and contain a little damp sol. Various insects and spiders

have been given for food. So far no insect or arachnid that I have given them

has been refused. I have fed them on nsoths, spiders, flies, beetles, etc. Generally

moths or beefles are the most conyenient, Of the beetles I generally give various

species of Carabidae, e.g. Clivina sp., etc., oF else Adelium sp. (Tenebrionidae).

The scorpions appear to be able to distinguish an insect’s (etc.) movement from

that of another scorpion; as long as the insect moves. at moderate speed the

scorpion immediately seizes it, unless it is bloated with fond or else the weather

cold. The scorpions invariably sting their prey to subdue it as soon as it 1s cap-

tured, often stinging it twice in different sites before the struggles cease. If one

scorpion walks over another, as often happens in the confined space af the pot,

it is very rare for any evidence of resentment to be aroused. Skirmishes between

these scorpions are rare, Tn its manner of stinging its prey immediately on cap-

ture Urodacus abrupius differs markedly from the large Philippine forest scorpion

(Palamnaeus longimanus Herbst?) as described by Schultze. Schultze (1927)

recorded that he had never seen this latter scorpion sting its prey—e.g., cock-

raaches—in order to subdue it. The prey was held clear of the ground, and eaten

while still struggling, Schultze stated that “I believe that the poisonous stinger is

used only as a defensive weapon against its enemies.” In its habit of stinging ts

prey in order to subdue it Urodacus abruptus resembles Buthus occitanus, as

recorded by Fabre, rather than Schultze's species,

1438

Urodacus abruptis can survive a considerable time without food, 1 have

kept an adult male specimen in captivity for eight months without food, after

which period it was given a housefly to eat. Since then it has heen kept a further

nine months without fond, and remains at the time of writing (September 1954)

active and plump, apparently quite healthy, When a group of scorpions is kept

in captivity, even if both sexes are present, they generally live amicably, How-

ever, If food is not given they occasionally practise cannibalism. These scorpions

are inactive by day, but become active at night, On inspecting the pot one morn-

ing one may find that one scorpion has disappeared, and a plump. catinibal ig

finishing off the last of its fellow. I have not actually seen the beginning of such

4 meal, 50 am unable to say what circumstances precipitate it, or whether the sting

is used in such an encounter, but in view of the general feeding habits of this

scorpiun it appears probable that it is. In such acts of cannibalism it is always

one of the smaller specimens that succumtbs. Usually the meal is altnost over

by the time it is discovered, I make a practice of counting 1p the number of

scorpions in the pot at each observation, Usually the ony bare of the vanquished

that remain after such a meal are the pedipalpal claws (hands) and the vesiculus,

with perhaps a few segments of the tail and the pedipalps, and part of the

dorsal surface of the eephalothorax. The remainder disappears completely. When

small heetles are given as food only the hardest parts of the insect remain after

the meal, ¢.g., the elytra and the exoskeleton of the thorax, Moths and spiders

disappear completely, except the scales of the former. With moths the scorpion

frequently commences to eat at the head, At the present time I do not usually

feed the scorpions oftener than once per month, Tt is probably on account of this

that I haye more lately scen more frequent evidence of cannibalism. Even so,

scorpions may remain in & pot far several months without feeding before one

of the smaller specimens is eaten. There is no evidence that such cannibal meals

commence in sexual activity, in fact, as remarked before the Victims are immature

specimens.

Water is needed more frequently by this species of scorpion. In the cooler

months J generally give water about once per month. The floor of the pots is

covered with a Jayer of earth, which, is kept Just damp. In the summer months

water is given more often, usally about once per week, The water may be dropped

nm to the mouth parts by a dropper, or else pledgets of cotton wool soaked in

water are placed in the pot. In the latter case, when the pot has become very

dry, the scorpions will cluster around the pledget almost immediately, tearing al

it with their chelicerac. They frequently give the appearance of cating the water

rather than drinking it,

As yet parturition has not been observed in Urodacks abruptis, even though

females have been observed in captivity with gross abdominal distension.

Certain details of sexual behaviour have however heen observed, and will be

recorded in the following section,

SEXUAL BEMAVIOUR

Experiment $ 15-19. On 29 July 1951 three scorpions were captured at

Workanda Greek. National Pari, Belgir, South Atistralia. The two larger scor-

pions were placed in a sinall “wax vesta” tin, Nothing unusual was noted at the

subsequent occasional examinations, until 10 September, a warm day, when many

“seuffling” noises were heard emanating from the tin. On opening the tin it was

found that the pair were holding “hands” as im 2 typical promenade & deux as

desctibed by Fabre. The pair were transferred to a glass pot as described abave,

and that manaetvre separated them, On the morning of 11 September it was

seen that the pair had resunied the promenade & dex position. No fresh observa-

tions Gold be made, and on the morning of 12 September the pair had separated

again, On 13 September two fresh adult scorpions from Workanda Creek were

149

added to the pot. On 14 September further evidence of sexual activity was noted ;

a male had grasped a female askew, holding the passive female sideways on.

On 15 September al! scorpions were separate.

On 24 September I recorded: No further attempt at a promenade a deux

has been observed, The scorpions do aot appear to resent in any way one of their

fellows climbing over them—this applies equally well to males and females. By

day they are sluggish, but when one switches on the light at night to observe

them they are at the alert, poised on their legs and with the telson up, walking

or stalking around, manoeuvring the pectines delicately over the crumbs and

limps of soil in the pot, and demonstrating very clearly the tactile function of

the pectines.

On & October 1951 I recorded: No further sexual activity has been observed.

The five scorpions are in the pot on my study table, and are under pretty con-

stant observation. The weather is warm today and perhaps this accounts for

today’s resumption of sexual activity. The soil in the pot has become rather dry.

At 10.10 p.m. I noted: The couple rests for about half a minute, with fingers

clasped (see fig. 1), and then the “orgasm” recommences, The male pushes the

Fig. 1

Normal positied of the promenade 4 deux in the scorpion Uraducus abruptus. Male to

left, Note the more erect telson of the male, that of the female being setmi-ercct.

female against the glass side of the pot and wags his tail up and down in seem-

ing attempts to climb through her “arms” and push his genital operculum against

her mouthparts. The pectines move aboul scemingly to serve as tactile organs.

His mouthparts work at the same time, the chelicerae heing extended. His first

legs are planted on her chelicerae, but she makes no effort at resistance or counter-

movement. He then pulls her backwards. The frenzy then starts again, the male's

tail works vigorously, and at the next attempt he manages to climb further,

in fact almost right through her arms (10,15 p.m.) (see fig. 2). One arm of the

male then disengages, the male circles rapidly around, still retaining the grip of

his other pendipalp (fig 3) until he faces the female again. The process then

starts all over again. In the extreme position of the sexual lunge the pedipalpi

of the female are twisted back behind the cephalothorax, and completely

extended, so that the suriace of the pedipalpi that is normally ventral faces

dorsally and anteriorly {fig. 2), The mouthparts of the female remain quite

impassive, and she remains no more than placidly co-operative during the whole

of the process.

10.30 p.m.; The male nibbles at the female with one chelicera and then the

other in quick succession, or with both simultaneously, at either her cephalo-

thorax or the claws of her pedipalpi. Whilst doing this the male brandishes his

150

tail erect, and waves it about freely as though to heigtiten the “orgasm.” The

tail of the female remains flaccid, curled, usually rest on the soil, or else

slightly raised, but it is never raised at more than 45° above the horizontal.

10.35 p.m,: The activity continues almost unceasingly. In one manoeuvre

the male grasped the female by her wrong (contralateral) claw. The male soon

corrected this. The female appears willing to go wherever the male will push

or pull her.

10.37 p.m.: The male grabs the female's tail with one of his pedipalps

and leads her around by it, pulling her tail over her cephalothorax, At this

insult she opens. her claws a little, but makes no effort to attack or resist the

male, and she soon desists. The male soon after gets tangled up, grabbing any-

where at the female, but after some manoeuvring resumes the standard face to

face position, again holding the female's pedipalpal “fingers” between his. Again

the male attempts to climb through the female’s “atms" on to her back, as in

fig. 2.

Fig, 2

The sexual thrust, im which the male forces himself through the pedipali

of the female. The full depth of the thrust has not yet been reached,

10.41 p.m.: While attempting to climb through the female's “arms’ the

male nearly succeeded in pulling her over on to her back, using the hind end of

her abdomen (mesosoma) as a pivot. Her cephalothorax was hifted clear of the

ground, and sharply retroflexed upon her abdotnen, The pair then returned to

the standard face to face position (as in fig. 1), and the furious “kissings’’ and

lunges started over again,

__ 10.50 p.m.: An attempt was made at photography.. The excessively bright

lights necessary caused a cessation of sexual activity, which was never resumed.

OTHER BEHAVIOUR

These notes continue the narrative of the above group of specimens,

9 October 1951: Weather cooler. No further activity,

16 October; One female has died (not the one of the mating pair) from

no apparent cause, Water was given. The surviving scorpions drank grecdily.

On 27 October a further large female scorpion from Workanda Creek was

added to the pot. By 25 November 1951 this female had died, for nu apparent

reason, and was removed from the pot. Water was given to the others, in the

151

form of a cotton-wool pledget soaked in water. The scorpions drank greedily,

tearing at the cotton-wool with their chelicerae, On 16 Decembet a spider was

added as food. This was soon eaten by one of the scorpions. On 18 December

it was observed that in the preceding two days one scorpion had been eaten by

one of its fellows, and only the claws of the pedipalpi remained of the victim.

On 21 and 29 December insects were given and were promptly eaten.

On 21 January 1951 all three scorpions appeared healthy. A moth was added

to the pot. A male scorpion seized this immediately, stung it twice within a few

seconds, and made off with it. But in doing so the male aroused the interest

of a large female scorpion, which seized the moth from the male and carried it

off. The male attempted two or three times to retricye his meal from the female,

but without success. The thwarted male attempted to pick a fight with the other

male in the pot, but the latter maintained his dormant attitude and would not

fight. Although stings were fourished in these encounters no scorpion actually

used its sting on any other.

Fig. 3

The position shortly after the completion of the sexual thrust. The male has lost the

gup with the left pedipalp, and is circling to resume the normal statice of the

promenade a deux.

On 22 January 1952 a tented piece of bark was dropped into the pot.

The female immediately retired into the cavity beneath this. On 21 March 1952 or

shortly before this female died, Two males remained in the pot. These were fed

and watered about once per month. On 16 October 1952 one of the males died.

The other male remained healthy. On 19 September 1952 a freslily captured

adult female had been added to the pot. No sexual activity was observed between

these scorpions, Nothing unusual was observed for the remainder of the year.

Food and water were given occasionally, and were always accepted.

152

On 23 January 1953 the female commenced to adopt a stance which had

not been observed previously. My notes record: Female appears parturient,

judging by the size of the abdomen, She elevates the posterior end of the

abdomen, with the tail drooping forward (see fig, +). She remains thus for an

hour or so at a time, and then slumps to a flaccid heap on the soil. No attempt

has been made to molest the male, or vice versa.

On 25 January she resumed the same position (as fig, 4) from noon until

nearly 4 p.m. She remained flaccid on the soil until 6 p.nt, then resumed the

fig. 4 stance for three hours, after which she disappeared under the tented piece

of hark. At 10 p.m. she emerged again.

This stance of elevation of the abdomen was resumed periodically but only

on very hot days, and after 25 February 1953 was not ubserved. When she

assumed her position she would climb on a piece of hark or a lump of soil in

an apparent attempt to get as much elevation as possible,

On 31 March 1953 the female (S18) died. By 13 Apri} 1953 or shartly

before the male (S IYA) died,

COMMENT ON ‘THE SEXUAL. BEHAVIOUR

I have net been able to find any record of the sexual lunges described above

for Uredacus abruptus in the published descriptions of mating behaviour of

scorpions, Millot and Vachon (1949), in an excellent review of the existing

knowledge, state: “We owe the essential part of eur knowledge to Fabre, in his

Souvenirs Entomologiques ... - On a single occasion he was able to catch a

glimpse of (‘entrevoir') the solution of the difficult problem of fertilization:

the male, lifting his belly, slides wnder the female, the pectines interdigitating.

the hands still constantly gripped. Well hefore Fabre, Maceary, in September 1809,

had seen a niale, after some initial failures, attack the ‘forehead’ of the female,

turn her ayer on her hack, and remain about five minutes upon her, In 1891

Brongniart and Gaubert reported that Marés. tn Algeria, had surprised coupled

scorpions, belly to belly, the pectines interdigitating,” Millot and Vachon then

proceed to disctiss the mechanism of fertilization.

It is possible that the sexual lunges or thrtists recorded above for Urodacus

abruptus were seen by Maccary in his “vaines tentatives (préludes),” for the

Languedacian scorpion (Buthus occitenus (Amor.) ). However, no more precise

record than this appears to have been made previously,

The observations described above for Urodacis whruptus suggested that the

male was attempting to push the female over onto her back, and in fact he nearly

suceecded in doing this on one occasion during the observations, Tt is expected

that in copulation the animals remain belly to belly, chelicerae to chelicerae,

tail to tail, the male on top. The failure for actual coptilation to occur may

have Leen due to (1) disturbance from the bright lights in the attempts at photo-

graphy; (2) inadequate facilities for the male lo exert pressure on the Female

in his attempt to turn her on to her back, It is expected that in mature copulation

normally occurs in the shallow tunnels in which these scorpions live. In such

tunnels it would be possible for the male to exert considerable ferce with his

legs bracerl against the sides. On the relatively flat earth surfaces in the rearing

jars the male’s legs were quite extended during the moments of maximal pressure

in the sexual thrusts, and obviously the male was at the limits to which he could

force himself.

The writer has since constructed an artificial tunnel of clear plastic, coming

off a box of the same composition (“Perspex”). Some vertical scratches line the

tirmel to aid the male in his bracing. It is hoped that the restricted space of this

tunnel will provide stritable conditions for copulation to occur and be observed.

As our scanty knowledge on this subject world indicate, opportunities to observe

these phenomena. are few and fleeting.

J ie}

‘SL

Way if} UT snfpditago

1o3 prumny Jopun “Ja.utuns

IDPOAS) O[PILDT e ur Laas UOTBAD|O Jeulluopd? out

b Su

153

It will be noted that in the mating dance of Urodacus abruptus the fcmale

keeps her tail comparatively flaccid—her tail is either loosely coiled behind

her, semi-erect, or else lies flaccidly horizontal on th soil, loosely coiled. In this

characteristic U, abruptus differs from other scorpions whose mating dances have

been described, ¢.g, Buthus occitanus (see Fabre 1923), or Buthotus alficela

(see Serfaty and Vachon 1950). In both of these latter species the female takes

a slightly more actiye part in the mating dance, and in them the tail is descrihed

as femaining erect. in both sexes.

It is of interest to note the “kissings’ in U. abreptws—in which the male

nibbles harmlessly at the ‘‘face,"” etc., of the female with his chelicerae. Since

scorpions are but little changed in structure since Silurian times, it may reason-

ably be surmised that this. and other sexual behaviour described extends back

to a geological period of great antiquity,

COMMENT ON THE ABDOMINAL ELEVATION

Tt was at first thought that the clevation of the rear part of the pregnant

female was indicative of imminent parturition. As however perturition did not

ensue in the female described this surmise was rendered less likely, Schultze

oan ) observed parturition in one fernale of the large Philippine forest scorpion

Palammacus longwmanus Herbst?) recording that in this process it “held its body

in a peculiar positioti, somewhat raised and bent or curved in the middle into 3

cotivex shape but with the chelipeds drawn up close to the body.” This fatter

position is unlike the one described above for U. abruptus, 1 have observed males

also of U, abruptus to adopt a similar attitude, on hot days in December 1953,

when conditions in the pot were hot and humid, However in the male the attitude

was less pronounced than in the female. It would appear most likely therefore that

the stance described is an effort to lift the stigmata free from the humid layer of

air and soil, when the scorpion's metabolism is increased by a hot environment.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I am greatly indebted to Dr. Max Vachon, of the Muséum National d'Hist-

cire Naturelle, Paris, for advice and encouragement. The illustrations to this

article were prepared by his artist, M. Gaillard, from sketches and specimens

forwarded by myself (Specimens S2 and $9, fram Mount Osmond, South Aus-

tralia, and Workanda Creek National Park, Belair, South Australia).

REFERENCES

Rroneniarr, C., and Gaunert, P. 1891 Fonctions de lorgane pectiniforime des

Scerpions, C, R. Acad. Se., Paris, Tame 113, 1062

Parre, J. H. 1923 Souvenirs Entomologiques, 9e. Série, Edit. définitive, Dela-

grave, Paris

Fasre, J. H. 1923 The Life of the Scorpion. Translated by Alexander Termeira

de Mattos, Hodder & Stoughton, London

Giavert, L. 1925 The Flora and Fauna of Nuyts Archipetigo and the Investi-

gator Group. No. 17—The Scorpions, with descriptions of some Species

rg poihes localities in South Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Arist,

49,

Kearretin, K. 1899 Scorpions und Pedipalpi, Das Tierreich, Lf. 8, 1-265

Kraeretix, K, 1908 Scorpions ta Die Fauna Stidwest-Australiens, 2, 87, Jena

Maccary, A. 1810 Mémoire sur le Scorpion qui se trouve stir la Montagne de

ee Paris, Gabon Edit., 48 pp. (quoted in Millot and Vachon

Mtttor, J., and Vachon, M. 1949 Ordre des Scorpions, in Traité de Zoo-

ee, “natouite, Systématique, Biologie, Edited by P,-P. Grassé, Tome

154

Pocock, R. I. 1888 The Species of the Genus Urodacus contained in_ the

Collection of the British (Natural-History) Museum. Ann. Mag. Nat.

Hist., 6th Series, 2, 169

Pocock, R. I. 1891 Notes on Some Scorpions collected by Mr. J. J. Walker,

with descriptions of two new Species and a new Genus, Ann. Mag. Nat.

Hist., 6th Series, 8, 241

Pocock, R. I. 1893 Notes on the Classification of Scorpions, followed by some

observations upon Synonomy, with descriptions of new Genera and

Species. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 6th Series, 12, 303

Pocock, R. I. 1898 The Australian Scorpions of the Genus Uredacus, Pet.

Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 7th Series, 2, 59

Pocock, R. I. 1902 A contribution to the Systematics of Scorpions. Ann.

Mag. Nat. Hist., 7th Series, 10, 364

ScuvuttzE, W. 1927 Biology of the large Philippine Forest Scorpion. Philip,

J. Se., 32, 375

Serraty, A., and Vacnon, M. 1950 Quelques Remarques sur la Biologie d’un

Scorpion de Afghanistan: Buthotus alticola (Pocock). Bull. Mus. Nat.

Hist. Nat., Paris 2e Série, 22, (2), 215

Tuorert, T. 1876 On the Classification of Scorpions. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,

4th Series, 17, 1

VacHon, M. 1954 Personal communication

A NEW SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX (ATRIPLEX SPONGITVALVIS AELLEN)

BY PAUL AELLEN (BASLE)

Summary

Atriplex spongiivalvis Aellen spec. nov.

Frutex 30 cm. altus valde lignescens multiramosus; surculi juveniles dense lepidoti demum

glabrescentes. Folia superiors parva, 5 mm. longa, 4 mm. lata, ovatorhombica, utrinque 1-3-dentata,

antice late cartilagineo-mucronata, basi rotundata vel cuneata, sessilia vel breviter subpetiolata,

consistentia crasse coriacea, imprimis subtus dense lepidota. Flores masculi et feminei mixti 1-3-ni

(omnino) axillares sessiles, dense lepidoti. Perianthium florum femineorum 2.5 mm. longum, 2 mm.

latum, obovato-rotundatum, antice latissimum, ibique dentibus 3 (-5) obtusis vel acutis prolongatis

provisum, dente intermedio laterales superante, in parte inferiore magis spongioso-incrassatum, in

medio continue gibberoso-coronatum, gibberibus 3-5 obtusis vel acutiusculis leviter arcuatim

dispositis, non tubulosum, sessile ad 2/3 connatum. Pericarpium tenuiter membranaceum. Semen

atrofusum, oblongum, | mm. ad summum diametro. Stigmata minuta, sessilia. Radicula embryonis

lateraliter ascendens.

155

A NEW SPECIES OF ATRIPLEX (ATRIPLEX SPONGIIVALVIS AELLEN)

By Paut AELLEN (Basle)

(Communicated by C. M. Eardley)

[Read 14 October 1954]

Atriplex spongiivalvis Aellen spec. nov.

Frutex 30cm. altus valde lignescens multiramosus; surculi juveniles dense lepi-

doti demum glabrescerites. Folia superiora parva, 5 mm, longa, 4 mm. lata, ovato-

rhombica, utrinque 1-3-dentata, antice late cartilagineo-mucronata, bast rotundata

vel cuneata, sessilia vel breviter subpetiolata, consistentia crasse coriacea, imprimis

subttis dense lepidota. Flores masculi et feminei mixti 1-3-ni (omnino) axillares

sessiles, dense lepidoti, Perianthium florum fetnineorum 2-5 mm. longum, 2 mm.

latum, obovato-rotundatum, antice latissimum, thique dentibus 3 (—5) obtusis

vel acutis prolongatis provisum, dente intermedio laterales superante, in parte

inferiore magis spongioso-incrassattum, in medio continue gibberoso-coronatum,

gibberibus 3-5 obtusis vel acutiusculis leviter arcuatim dispositis, non tubulosum,

sessile ad 2/3 connatum. Pericarpium tenuiter membranaceum. Semen atrofusum,

oblongum, 1 mm. ad summutn diametro. Stigmata minuta, sessilia. Radicula

embryonis lateraliter ascendens.

South Australia: Eyre Peninsula—Cowell and Kimba Districts; June 1937,

J.C. Gross. (Type in the Herbarium of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute

and in Herbarium P. Aellen.)}

Die neue Art ist zunachst yerwandt imit 4triplexr prostrata R.Br. und A- Acuti-

bractea Anderson. Die beiden Artem werden jedoch als einjahrig beschrieben,

wahrend 4. spongiivalvis ein stark verholzter, niederer Strauch ist. Die Perianthe

von A. prostrata tragen keine Anhangsel, und die kegelformigen Hocker auf den

Perianthen von A. acutibractea stehen einzeln, sind einfach oder hochstens zwei-

geteilt, and sind nicht—wie bei A. spongitvaluis—kraftig und zu emem geschlos-

senen Kranz gruppiert.

Fig. I Fruiting bracteoles of Atriplex spongtivalvis Acllen,

This new species of saltbush is most closely related to Atriplex prostrata

R. Br. and A. acutibractea Anderson. These two species, however, are described as

annuals, whilst <. spongiivalvis is a decidedly woody, low shrub, The fruiting

bracteoles of A. prostrata bear no appendages, and the conical tubercles on the

bracteoles of A. acwtibractea are isolated, being simple or at most divided into two,

and are not—as in A. spongiivalvis—robust and grouped into a closed wreath,

(Translation C.M.E.)

THE GENETIC AND SYSTEMATIC STATUS OF EUCALYPTUS

HUBERIANA NAUDIN, E. VIMINALIS LABILL. AND E. AROMAPHLOIA

PRYOR AND WILLIS

BY L. D. PRYOR*

Summary

Eucalyptus populations in western Victoria and South Australia previously often referred to

E. Huberiana are considered as a result of progeny testing and careful field collecting, to be a

segregating hybrid swarm between E. viminalis and E. aromaphloia. The development of this

swarm may have coincided with a relatively recent arid climatic cycle.

156

THE GENETIC AND SYSTEMATIC STATUS OF EUCALYPTUS

HUBERIANA NAUDIN, E. VIMINALIS LABILL. AND E, AROMAPHLOIA

PRYOR AND WILLIS

By |. D. Pryor *

[Read 14 October 1954]

SUMMARY,

Eucalyptus populations in western Victoria and South Ausiralia previously often referred

lo &. Huberiaha are considered as a resilt of progeny testing and careful field collecting,

to be a segregating hybrid swarm between H. viminalis and EK. aramaphloia. The development

of this swarm may have coincided with a relatively recent arid climatic cycle,

Excalyptus Huberiana\ is a species which in common with a number of

others, was described from a single planted specimen growing in Europe. In this

particular case, Naudin described tt trom a tree seven years old growing at Nice,

France. Naudin makes the remark that “One might take E. Huberiana for a

rather slender form of E. wvminalts, but it can be easily distinguished from it by

the following characteristics. Its inflorescence consists of axillary umbels rather

shortly pedunculate, composed of seven very small pedicillate flowers...” In

addition Naudin says, “... 1 do not know ... to what part of Australia it is

native.” The description given, like that of many species described early in the

history of the systematic treatment of a genus, omits some features which have

later been found critical In determination, and includes others which are of little

diagnostic value.

In applying a name such as this therefore, to a population of Eucalyptus in

its natural habitat, there are very considerable risks, and unléss chatactets are

included in the description which for the particular category concerned happen

to be critically distinct, there is danger of confusion in continuing to employ

such names,

The uncertaiity about the application of the name “Huberiane” is. shown

by its varying use over a considerable period. Maiden, “Critical Revision” (3,

173) says, “It is allied to, or identical with, #. eiminalis.’ On the other hand,

Blakely (1934) gives it specific rank and assigns specimens from a good many

diverse localitics to it. Burbidge (1947) reduces it to HE. wiminaliy var,

Huberiang,

In connection with another but now discarded species name, &. Maseliana,

described by Naudin, Maiden says, “If F, Mazeliana is not E, viminaliy and not

F. Smith, I cannot say what it is.” The same remark might well have been

inade of H. Huberiana. The description, however, is adequate to yilace

£. Huberiana as having a strong affinity with EZ. viminalis, or at least, with

species in Blakely's series Viminales,

Tt has become the practice to refer to Z. I/uberiana, trees falling clearly

within the series Viminales, which are close to E, wiminalis in many respects

hut differ in having at least some flower clusters with more than three flowers,

and with some rough bark varying from a relatively small amount at the butt

to a large amount extending to the secondary branches. A significant thing which

wall be referred to again later, is that H. Auberiana is often described as having

a geographic range co-extensive with FE. viminalis. Burbidge specifically refers to

this by saying, “Distribution is the same as in ZL, wiminalis.” Within the series

Vimitales this is exceptional as the “good” species of the series, vis., Bauerlenii,

quadvangulata, Macarthurt, Smithit and Benthamii, each ocetpy localities which

which are ecologically and generally geographically distinct from £. vimninalts,

and are certainly not co-extensiye with it.

* Department of the Interiar, Canberra, A.C.T.

} Nomenclature as in Blakely (1934), "A Key to the Eucalypts,”

137

EUCALYPTUS VIMINALIS

The type of E. viminalis was desctibed by Labillardiere from a specimen

taken at Cape Van Diemen, Tasmania, There is little doubt that the type, which

had three-flowered inflorescences, was taken from an individual which belonged

to an extensive Eucalyptus population within the Macrantherae in which the

predominant characters are that the inflorescences are exclusively three-flowered,

the bark is smooth and decorticating except possibly for a very small amount

at the base, the juvenile leaves are opposite, sessile, not glaucous, and somewhat

stem-clasping for a large number of pairs. On this basis, the population called

E. viminalis makes up one of the widespread species of the genus (fig. 1), It

{——

(

AUSTRALIA!

Ew Soucy WALES

The présent distribution of E_ wimimalis.

has become the practice, in addition, to refer to this species individuals which

differ in some degree from the type description. This, of course, is necessary

in all systematic work because the type specimen is from a single plant which

cannot be absolutely identical with the population, and therefore it becomes a

matter of opinion as to whether another given individual should be referred to

that species. In accordance with this, Maiden accepted the idea that individuals

which differed only in having a good deal of rough bark on the main trunk might

be included, and also that those with inflorescences with four and five and eyen

more flowers, but otherwise similar, could be included.

With regard to this latter point, however, he says, in making a comparison

E. viminalis with E. Smithit (3, 180) “. . . E. Smithii is multi-flowered, while

E. viminalis usually has flowers in threes, while it much less rarely has them in

fours and even more, but while multi-flowered individuals may be abundant in

a particular district, they are few in comparison with the total of the normal

form,”

158

Emphasis is given to the two points of bark and number of flowers in the

inflorescence, In both cases, but particularly in the inflorescence, the presence of

flower clusters of more than three, but less ihan seven, im individuals assigned

io a species which is ordinarily over a great portion of the population exclusively

threc-flowered, is found invariably associated with the hybridism, A. viminalis

hybridizes freely, as deduced by progeny tests, with many other species belong-

ing to Blakely’s section Macrantherae (Normales), Those which have been

established on this basis or on grounds of morphology are as follows —

Locality of Occurrence Assessment

i, vials x E. glaucescens - Tinderry Mountains - - - - PT.

Munyang - - - - - M.

Tingiringt - - - - - PT.

x Dalrympleana ~ Lixtensively in Tasmania, Victoria and

NSW. - “ - - - PT,

x Hi, rubida - - Near Armidale, New England Tableland and

near Cooma, Southern Tablelands - - PT.

x E. macrlosa - <AC.T. and Mount Wilson, N.S.W. - - M.

x E, parvifolia - Big Badja, N.S.W. = - - ~ PT.

x EF. ovata - - Myponga, $.A. - - - - PBT.

x FE. brcosiata ~ Jenolan, N.S.W. - - - - M.

x £, globulus - Tasmania - - - - - PT.

(= &. uniulata)

x EB, Maident - Araluen - - - - - PT.

x L£. goniocdlyxr + Mount Coreendgy, Blue Mountaius - ~ M.

x E. nitens - - Badja - - - - - M.

(= £. Badjensis)

x E, Bridgesiana - A.C.T., Lake George - - - - PT.

x E. elaeuphora - Seven Hills and Houghton, S.A, —- - PT.

x E. Cordteri - Burra Rd., Southern Tablelands - - PT.

x E. Macarthuri - Planted trees, A.C\T, - - - -~ £.T.

x E, cinerea ~ Lake George, N.S.W. = - -~ PBT.

x EF, nowe-anglica - Deepwater, New Englund Tableland - M.

x camaldulensis — - Ssotith Yarra, Vict, - - - - PT

Note: P.T.= Progeny Test, M, = Morphology only

wee ry E ae |

oo he Bbw FE Rarerenreny Ths + a

Car) ws Pies asi RTPI T Ler eee Fie SPST De eT IG Tete

FaaeDay VIC BLOWERING MSW AAT FRANKLEAL Vice AT-LOFT S-Ay VARRANGOBILY NSW BEARIGALE nS) WW macroan vic-

52/706 52/969 S2/a12 SA60 52/965 S2/t241 52/950

Sikped OV RIS Of DAR Ope yas

EUGALYPTUS AROMAPHLOIA

13 3

qi wy i 3 3

rf 3 z ~ge g ne

Ex aan sa STA neo 4

2am am in 25 re

—s 25 = io fae % 4

x sy) oe :

en po §”

g ~ 5 <

HYBRIDS

A ey B

Fig. 3a

Histogram based on the measurement A~B of the leaf base (shown in the inset)

which provides a measure of the extent to which the Icaf is stem-clasping. All

populations of “pure” E. wiminalis are distinctly stem-clasping, On the other hand,

all populations of E. aromaphloia are tapered to a very short petiole. The hybrid

EB. aromaphiotax E. viminalis shows some degree of segregation for this character.

159

The explanation for this is two-fold. Firstly, because E. viminalis has such

a wide geographic distribution it comes in contact in the field with many other

species which have a more restricted distribution, and secondly, it is evidently

capable of hybridizing with a wide range of species in the broad systematic

group to which it belongs.

Hybrids are common between many Lucalyptus species where a junction

in species area occurs in the field (Pryor, 1953). In a great many cases this is

at the meeting point of two distinct habitats, In such circumstances the hybrid

zone is natrow, or even almost linear and composed only of scattered trees.

This is true of many of the hybrids of E. viminalis listed, but also, E. virninalts

is a component of much more extensive apparent hybrid swarms. Over the whole

range of distribution of E. wimtnalis, there are three main areas in which apparent

hybrid swarms occur:

(a) The New England Tableland,

(b} Towards the upper altitudinal limits of E. wiminalis particularly

surrounding the Kosciusko area and surrounding the central plateau

of Tasmania,

iaciia era bae eq2s4es Biaaed ot pnee Qlrie.e En

52/908 52/959 52/912 5360 52/964 52/024 52/956

EVCALYETUB ViAMNALIS

oe RSS es

(42787 Bro Oia sasavasisu S42330-3 07 TE Bubba SOF wo rgis 403493 4244343 840543 678

52/948 §2/924 52/921 52/333 52/926 42/929 52/ Sad

SUCALYOTIIS AROMAPHLOIA HYBRID’

Fig. 3%

Shows the same progenies assessed on the distance by which each of the tenth pair

of leaves is separated one ftom the other. E. vininalis in all progenies is strictly

opposite. £. aromaphioia is distinctly separated and therefore the leaves are not

opposite. In the hybrid F. aromaphloiax E. viminalis the opposite leaf character per-

sists apparently as a dominant and no segregation is disclosed, but some segregation

is shown in the progeny E, aroemaphloia x &, elaeaphora.

In the case of the New England Tableland, itis easy in most cases to deduce

convincingly which species other than #. viminaiis have contributed to the hybrid

swarm, There is a considerable number of species on the New England Table-

land occupying various habitats, and still present, which either have been observed

to hybridize with &. viminalis or are. theoretically able to da so. For this reason,

therefore, it seems that Blakely’s remark with regard to E. Huberiana, “It is

widely distributed on the mainland and exceedingly plentiful on the New Eng-

land Tableland where it reaches its optimum .. -’ is easily explained, apart from

160

other reasons which will be discussed later, by the fact. that there, there are several

species in contact with E. viminalis with which it can readily hybridize, e.g.,

EH. nove-anglica, E. acaciacformis, E. Nicholt, RE. Deanei, E. rubida. Both E.. now-

anglica and £. acaciaeformis could provide combinations which could satisfy the

second part of Blakely’s description “with a smooth deciduous bark except for a

few feet at the base, but sometimes rough-barked to the secondary branches,

especially in the Tamworth and Guyra-Armidale district.”

The position is also fairly clear at the upper altitudinal limit where extensive

hybridizing between £, Dalrympleana and L. wimitnalis leads to hybrid swarms

over a considerable altitudinal range, and results in a marked blurring of the

boundaries between the two species. This is in a way that is relatively uncommon

and has led to difficulty in the easy recognition of H. Dalrympleana as a species,

(£. Dalrympleana is also three-flowered, however, so this combination is nat

referred to as E, Huberiana).

esse

(

@ i es ‘a

Bi-eaas Cresaes Vo bbe dees bhrasas Piaegas g46 biaive

Saf oes 52/962 sevgr $360 Sée965 eA

Ld OR

21h 22/950

Ty 20

‘a 1a

“ ree!

s sdk j

S445 SCA PSae EF apes PSSA Sw TAB IOIT CrPSP HS IO Hie Op a4 OTA die

82/948" S282 4 32/921 522993 52/906 52/922 s2/gaa

EUCALYPTUS AROMAPHLOIA - HYBRIDS

Fig. 3c

The same progenies assessed on the petiole Iength at the tenth pair of leaves.

#. viminalis in all progenies is strictly sessile, while E. wramuphivia is at this stage

changing over to a pétiolate condition, althoiigh the petioles are [requently quite short.

The progeny from the hyhrid /. aramaphloiax &, viminalts shows marked segrega-

tions for this character and so does the progeny from #. aromaphloiax E, elaeaphora.

E. elaeophora has sessile juvenile leaves as in EB. visninalis-

In the Mount Lofty Ranges and the Mount Gambier apd Naracoorte area

of South Australia, the position is the same so far as the appearance of hybrid

swarms 1s concerned. Populations exist which have many of the characters of

E. viminalis but are modified in three main ways.

‘irstly, by the development of inflorescences of four, five and seven flowers;

secondly, with a varying amount of rough hark from almost clean to individuals

with secondary branches quite rough; and thirdly, with juvenile leaves which

become sub-opposite after ten to fifteen pairs, and which are contracted at the

base and even shortly petiolate. This pattern of variation is identical with that

found in hybrid swarms elsewhere. The difficulty in adopting the occurrence of

a hybrid swarm as the explanation for this variation in South Australia has been

(since it is highly probable that H. wiminalis cannot hybridize with species other

than those in the Macrantherae-Normales) that there are vety few sich species

either in the Mount Gambier-Naracoorte area or the Mount Lofty Ranges with

which it could hybridize. Those which do exist coutd not contribute the characters

161

necessary to accotint for this particular swarm. Those available are limited to

E. rubida, E. ovata and E. elacophura. Amongst these, E. elaeophora is rough-

barked, but its juvenile leaves alone would produce variations in another direc-

tion, and cannot be used to account for the swarm. Likewise E. camaldulensts

of the Exsertae cannot be assumed as the second parerit.

The position is met completely, however, by the recognition over a Tange

from central Victoria to the south-east of South Australia of a hitherto un-

described species, now called E. aromaphicia. This is described elsewhere (Pryor

and Willis 1954).

we LUC AROMAPHLOIA

Fig, 2

The present distribution of E. aromaphloia.

EUCALYPTUS AROMAPHLOIA

In the area shown on fig, 2, a population distinct from other species occurs

quite extensively and has been described in various ways; either as E. Huberiana,

“Creswick Apple Box” or “Rough-barked Maculosa,” If it is proposed that a

species belonging to the Macrantherae-Normales having an inflorescence of seven

flowers, sotnewhat furrowed and highly aromatic bark rough to the secondary

branches, and juvenile leaves sub-opposite to alternate after about the tenth pair

and contracted to a short or very short petiole but not at all stem-clasping, then

a Telatively uniform population of trees is found to occur in certain situations

within the area shown in fig. 2. Progenies raised from trees possessing these

characters and from within this area show relatively small variation in the

juvenile foliage when raised from seed. There is a progressive change in juvenile

leaf shape and glaucousness from east to west in a clinal sequence (which is

characteristic of many species), although from a single locality within this zone

they are as uniform as is customary in Eucalyptus. On the other hand, if at

junctions between the poptilation area of this tree and species such as E. ovata,

162

&. elaeophora and E. viminalis, individuals are selected which appear ta be

hybrid between it and the second species, the progeny raised from such indi-

viduals discloses segregation comparable with that obtained from similar suspected

hybrids in many other cases.

There are good grounds, therefore, for erecting £. aromaphlow as a species,

lt conforms with three requirements which apply well in judging whether a

proposed type tairly represents a species of Eucalyptus, These are:—

(1) A species must be 4 population,

(2) It must be morphologically distinct,

(3) It should be reproductively jsolated.

The isolation in Eycalyptus is very commonly ecological in that inter-

breeding species occupy different ecological situations. In the case of

E, aromaphloia, the most common species occurring at habitat junctions with it

in the field with which it can be interbred are Z, ovata, whick occupies more

swampy sites; E. glaeophora, which occupies generally harder, drier, more “ridgy”

sites, £. wimiizalis, which occupies generally damper or somewhat cooler sites.

The information obtained from progeny tests of these combinations is presented

by the histograms in fig. 3, a, b and c. On the hasis of its characters there is

some difficulty in placing it in une of the established series. The treatment by

Blakely (as he admits) is inadequate particularly with regard to the series

Microcarpae. Blakely says, “This series may appear to be more artificial than

natural, and its members cannot very well be merged into any of the other series.”

{f{, however, a series is erected to embrace Blakely’s sub-series Semi-Decorticatae,

and there removing £, ovata, BR. camphora and FE. aggregata {rom the series Sub-

Exsettae, these species are thet: conveniently placed with E. maculosa, E. acaciue-

formus, FE. N fcholi E. scoparia and E, aromaphloia, in a series which is charactet-

ized within the Muacrantherae (Normales) by juvenile leaves sub-opposite or

alternate after a few pairs, and which are from very shortly petiolate to petiolate.

A considerably more satisiactory explanation and treatment of the

“Huberiana” eucalypt population of the south-east of South Australia and the

Mount Lofty Ranges is thus achieved. £. aromaphloia appears to reach the

present limit of its range in the south-east of South Australia, and individuals

vorresponding fairly well with the general population of the species occur

comtnonly enough, but there is generally what appears to be an extensive swarin

between it and £. viminalis through much of the area. In the Mount Lofty Ranges

and Kangaroo Island the swarm exists, but there are apparently no stands of

E, aromaphioia extant. For turther explanation of the position it is necessary

to speculate om the possible population movements in the light of evolutionary

genctic theory in relation to sub-recent climatic charges,

E. VIMINALIS AND E. AROMAPHE.OTA IN RELATION TO SUB-RECEN'T

CLIMATIC CELANGES

The pattern of distribution of #. eminalés and the associated hybrid swarms

ius well with the kind of chmatic change descrihed by Crocker and Wooil (1947),

There is a growing body of evidence that Australia endured a dry period perhaps

only 5,000 years ago and ihat before this period conditions were considerably

more equable. An arid period as recently as this date would, of course, have

appeared on a landform unaltered appreciably from the present, It is uncertain,

as Downes (1954) says, to what extent the present-day climate has emerged from

that of the arid period, but there seems to be some vegetational evidence for a

slight spread of species otitwards from a still more narrow limit than the present-

day distribution, If this pattern of climatic change is correct, the present-day

pattern of distribution of E, eaiinalis and E. aramaphloig and its segregating

swat fits in well with the pattern of climatic change.

163

£. wininalis reaches its best development in cool situations in areas with

rainfall of 35 inches per annom or more, It occurs up to 4,500 Ft. elevation in

the vicinity of Mount Kosciusko. A relatively cool and moist period, theretore,

which presumably preceded the arid period, would favour the occupation of a

much wider area by £, wiminalis than at present. There are many present-day

examples of E, wininalis growing on sandy soils comparable with those extending

from the south-east of South Australia to the Mount Lofty Ranges, and a rela-

tively muderate variation in chmate giving a rainfall no more than 50%. above

the present figures. would almost certainly permit the continuous distribution of

E. viminalis from the Mount Lofty Ranges to the Grampians in Victoria and

then continuously to its present range. Likewise, E. eramaphloia, while thriving

in conditions not quite as moist as those normally occupied by EF. viminalis, also

viviously is favoured by relatively cool and moist conditions and would therefore

wlso be expected to have a much more extensive range. In such circumstances it

is easy to imagine E, viminulis and E. aromaphloia, along with several other

species such as FE, ovata and E, rubida, occupying their appropriate ecological

betes continuously over the area between the Grampians and the Mount Lofty

anges.

A hardening of the climate from the condition which permitted such a

distribution would cause a contraction of species like FE. wiminalis and F. aroma-

piiloia towards any available “refuge,” as suggested by Crocker and Wood. Such

movements have undoubtedly occurred in the past and must certainly have been

associated with changes in genetic balance, Qn some vecasions it seems clear

that hybrid swarms between two previously established species were able to

thrive in the marginal areas better than either parent. Where extensive hybrid

swarms have developed, as apparently is the case between F. ciminalis and

E. aromaphioia, there is still a good deal of diversity in the population and it may

well be that the number of generations which have elapsed since the onset of the

arid period 1s as few as twenty-five. Greater genetic uniformity, therefore, could

scarcely be expected and it may well be that the occurrence of scattered hybrid

“phantoms” in stands in areas from which now one of the putative parents is

missing and in other cases of extensive hybrid swarms is a reflection of the fact

that marked movements, especially in some areas of the continent, have heen

imposed on the Eucalyptus populations as the result of a quite recent arid period

on the present land form. It has heen suggested by Stebbins (1950) that this kind

of change provides one of the means by which new species evolve, and it scems

that the extensive segregating swarms of E, viminalis and E. aromaphloia in

Victoria and South Australia may yet proceed to greater genetic stability and

give a good example of this kind of speciation,

A similar Situation exists with £. vimimalis in other patts of its range,

particularly the New England Tableland and the upper altitudinal limits of its

range in central Vietoria and the adjoining areas of New South Wales and

similarly in central Tasmania. In these cages, however, the enmbhining species are

not £. evomaphloia and thus the pattern differs to this extent, although the general

sitvalion 3s similar.

CONCLUSIONS

Tt is considered that a more satisfactory explanation than that employed

hitherto for the “AHuberiana’” populations af South Australia and Victoria is

found by adupting the following views —

(1) E. Huberiang should be discarded as a nomen ambigunm,

(2) FE. aromephloia. should be crected and teckoned to have a distribation

frotn central to south-western Victoria and (o the south-east of South

Australia.

164

(3) Most of the material in South Australia and Victoria generally referred

to E. viminalis var. Huberiana Burbidge, or E. Huberiana Naudin,

should be considered a segregating hybrid swarm of E£. viminalis x

E. aromaphloia,

REFERENCES

BuaxELy, W. F. 1934 “A Key to the Eucalypts,” Sydney

Burgince, N. T. 1947 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, 137-163

Downes, R. G. 1954 Aust. Jour. Agric. Research, 5, 448-464

Crocker, R. L., and Woop, J. G. 1947 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71, 91-136

Mawen, J. H. 1924 “A Critical Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus.” Govt.

Printer, Sydney

Pryor, L. D. 1953 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 78, 8-18

Pryor, L. D., and Wittis, J. H. 1954 Eucalyptus aromaphloia, sp. nov. “Vic-

torian Naturalist,’ 71, 125-129

Stesnins, G. L., Jnr. 1950 “Variation and Evolution in Plants.” New York

THE POINT MARSDEN CAMBRIAN BEDS, KANGAROO ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY R. C. SPRIGG

Summary

Index fossils (Redlichia and Lusatiops) have now been found in the Point Marsden beds of

Kangaroo Island. They are thought to indicate an uppermost Lower Pre-Cambrian age. These fossils

occur in the Emu Bay Shales associated with a succession of slump-bedded sandstones (the Stokes

Bay Sandstone) considered to be near the edge of the ancient Cambrian Continental terrace in this

region. Ubiquitous internal convolutions within individual sandstone lenses evidence widespread

instability with gliding to the south, possibly down a "continental" type slope. The White Point

Limestone also within the succession is a conglomeratic development of the nature of an outer slope

breccia to a reef-like bioherm. Its fragments are extensively squeezed, evidencing lack of

consolidation at time of formation, and a few of them contain Archaeocyathina.

165

THE POINT MARSDEN CAMBRIAN BEDS, KANGAROO ISLAND,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R, ©, Sprite

{Read 11 November 1954]

SUMMARY

Index fossils (Redlichia and Lusatiops) have now been fotind in the Point Marsden

beds of Karigaroo Island, They are thought to indicate an uppermost Lower Pre-Cambrian

age. These fossils occur in the Emu Bay Shales associated with a succession of slump-bedded

sandstones (the Stokes Bay Sandstone) considered to be near the edge of the ancient Cambriatt

Continental terrace in this region. Ubiquitous internal convolutions within individual sandstone

Jenses evidence widespread instability with gliding to the south, possibly down a “continental”

type slope. The H’hite Point Limestone also within the succession is a conglomeratic develop-

ment of the nature of an outer slope breccia to 4 reef-like bioherm, Its fragments are

extensively squeezed, evidencing lack of consolidation at time of formation, and a few of

them contain Archacocyathina.

In 1928 the late Dr. C. T. Madigan descrihed in detail a group of beds

occurring along the north-east coast of Kangaroo Island, north of Kingscote,

in which boulders carrying Archaevcyatha occurred plentifully. The beds had

previously been recorded by Howchin (1899) and Wade (1915). They were

variously ascribed to the Cambrian System or later in the Palaeozoic Era. They

were described as lying unconformably on the metamorphic core complex of the

Island (Kanmantoa Group), which in turn was considered to be Precambrian

Age. The Katimantoo Grotip is now known to range from the Cambrian to

perhaps Ordovician Period, (Sprigg and Campana, 1953.)

Dr, Madigan designated these younger sediments the Point Marsden Beds

and considered them to be possibly Post-Cambrian in age, He found raindrop

impressions in some of the more slaty horizons, and observed obscure animal

tracks, presumed to be those of trilobites. Dr. Madigan returned to the Island

in 1945 with a party of students intending to search more diligently for Fossils

in original situation, but unfortunately developed sickness which was eventually

te lead to his untimely death. The expedition was interrupted and little of sig-

nificance was accomplished, except that a party of students (personal communi-

cation by Mr. R, Ayliffe) reported evidence of hasal tinconformity with the then

presumed Precambrian to the west of Stokes Bay.

Tn 1952, while preparing the four-mile map sheet of Kingscote (published

1954}, the writer made several discoveries of considerable significance concern-

ing these beds, including the discovery of marker fossils. and much new evidence

concerning the nature and field relations of the sediments as a whole.

DEFINITION AND REGIONAL EXTENT OF THE

POINT MARSDEN GROUP

This succession of conglomerates, sandstones, slates and limestones outcrops

intermittently along the north coast of Kangaroo Island from Point Marsden,

westward probably to Snelling Beach, a distance of about forty miles, Jandward

it extends south to the base of the Cygnet and Snelling farlt escarpments ( Sprigs,

1954). The beds are dominantly subhorizontal except in the approaches to each

of a set of imbricate (reversed) faults trending east-west to E,S.R.- W.N.W,

which hade to the south at about 45 degrees. The beds are Cambrian in age and

preserve conformable relationships with underlying phyllites presumed ta he

uppermost members of the reduced Adelaide System in this area. They abut

the Kanmantoo Group along the foregoing fault escarpment, and themselves are

cut hy deep yalleys of Permian age, choked with glacial debris,

166

THE SEDIMENTARY SUCCESSION

Phyllites of the Adelaide System are overlain conformahly by a massive,

medium-graitied sandstone development, herein hamed the Stokes Bay Sandstone.

The formation is possibly 1,000 feet thick but cannot be observed completely

because of faulting; it may thicken to the west. Jt is reddish or whitish jn colour

and is characterized by marked internal slumping and normal and pseudo-

crossbedding (see Jater), The sandstone is sticceeded hy grey shales (Zmu Bay

Shales, 300-400 feet thick) with interbedded quartzites, the former of which

carry a newly-discovered trilobite fauna. After a break in the succession due to

the interpasition of Emu Ray, the succession (still dipping easterly ) apparently

continues with purple shales followed by at least 200 feet of the boulder-breccia

limestone which will he called the White Point Linestone. These are overlain

by more slate and boulder leds followed in the extreme cast hy numerous con-

glomerate bands, set in cross-bedded sandstone. Unfortunately, due lo an accident

which befell the writer, this succession was not mapped nor measured in detail,

Further field work is required to check for internal faulting which may effect

the order of the beds and thicknesses.

The White Point Limestane consists of closely packed, coarse fragments of

whitish and yellowish dolomite and limestone, some of which contain Archaeu-

cyutha, The boulders frequently attain two feet of more jn length and there is

little interstitial material. There is little or no evidence of sorting, ur of ubvinus

abrasion rounding of fragments throughout the whole mass of the deposit.

Frequently the limestone fragments are squeezed in a manner suggestive of cam-

paction following burial, in which case the “boulders’ could have been only

partially consolidated at that time. Extraneous matter in the limestone breccias

consists of not infrequent, small, well-rounder pebbles of unusually red gneissic

granite and black schists not found elsewhere on Kangaroo Island, except in the

overlying pebble conglomerates of Point Marsden.

THE NATURE OF THE SEDIMENTARY ENVIRONMENT

It has been inferred elsewhere ( Sprigg 1952) that Kangarow Island Jay near

the platform edge of the ancient Proterozoic-Cambrian continental terrace which

constituted the Adelaide (Mio) geosyncline in South Australia, The continental

platform locally was a more stable zone extending landwards (north and west)

onla neighbouring shelf and shield areas, Beyond the shelf edge, the continental

slope environmen! possibly extended to ocean depths in a sotith-easterly direction,

with steep unstable secitnent slopes, which in Cambrian time possibly simulatect

conditions now existing beyond the south-eastert extremity of the modern Aus-

tralian Continent. The Point Marsden beds were apparently accumulated near

the outer edge of a narrowing continental platfurm (Platform-edge environ-

ment).

There is also reason to believe that positive and negative land movements

were in progress at the time. These would have enhanced the tendency to rapidly

transport sediments across the plattorm-edge, and would alsa have permitted

raindrop impressions to be recorded in exposed arid, ved bed sediments (how

shales), and also the growth, neathy to the north, of shelf-edge hioherms

(Archgeucyatha reefs). The climate at this time appears te have been wann,

possibly arid, following late Proterozaic glaciation,

Of special interest concerning the natyte of this environment are the massive

slump structures of the Stokes Ray Sandstone, the presumed contemporaneous

Kaninantoo developments in the soitth, and alsa the remarkable sedimentary

breceia—conglomerate constituting the Mhite Point Limestone.

The Stokes Bay Sandstone is remarkable for the magnitude and mrmiber

of slump structures contuined within its mass. Subaqueous sliditg and sliding

phenomena are almost ubiquitous within the formation, bat mostly the structures

147

are coarse, and evidencing much apparent erosion truncation, which in turn

suggests a shallow water environment. One tongue of sandstone, for example,

may be flat-bedded but on either “facing” the sediment may be highly contorted

and attenuated, in a manner which can only suggest gravity slumping of water-

soaked sediment, The undersurfaces of many of the layers ate grooved and

rounded in the direction of presumed movement. whereas the upper surfaces

ate truncated and on occasions may he ripple marked.

By way of comparison, the more quartzitic members and those within the

Kanmantoo Succession to the south are thinner and display far more attenuated

slumps and “glide-rolling. By the latter is meant the tendency for folds to

develop within a particular slumped bed, and to curl over in the direction of

gravitational movement ; these become extremely attenuated to finish as “extruded”

recumbent folds strongly recalling alpine fold nappes on vastly reduced scales.

Study of these remarkable features (which have since been found to be well

developed in the Ordovician Sandstones of the Indulkana Range, in north-western

South Australia) may provide important leads to Alpine “tectonics.”

In the Kanmantoo beds these slump structures are almost always eroded

on the surface by subsequent slumped sediments, but the surfaces, unlike those

ul gliding formations within the Stokes Bay Sandstone, are parallel with the

hase and do not show the same tendency to inter-surface irregularity. This is

thought to argue a deeper water environment and steeper slopes for the former,

a supposition supported by the poorer sorting and Flysch-like character of the

Kanmantoo Succession generally (Sprig and Campana, 1953),

In this way it is deduced that the Stokes Bay Sandstone is a terrace platform

edge development. adjacent to a steep continental slope. Its sands are well sorted,

but the element of instability consequent upon a platform-edge location, and

accentuated perhaps alsa by regional uplift and consequent coastal migratiun to

seawards, is always present.

In this light. the origin of the White Point Limestone breccias may now

be contemplated a little more clearly, As described previously, these sediments

contain plentiful Archaeocyathe as remanié boulders which, by their coarseness,

and the absence of obvious abrasion rounding could not have travelled far. Also,

the boulders appear to have been unconsolidated at the time of deposition, being

subsequently squeezed by vertical loading pressures; the environment of the

outer reef ialus slope is siiggested. This is in keeping with the probable habitat

of Archaeocyatha which are considered to have lived in bioherms simulating

modern barrier reefs and their associated coral meadows. Their preference for

wanh seas, on ati east-facing continental coast, further enhanches the analogy

which however should not be taken too far for these problematic sponge-like

creatures are only occasionally fewnd in densely massed colonies. Another com-

plication concerns the eccurrence of numerous well-rounded pebbles of red granite

and black schist which the writer knows only from northern Yorke Peninsula

(e.g., Point Pearce, Pine Point, etc.). In a theory involving “barrier” type reefs,

these could only enter such an environment of restricted clastic sedimentation

wia floating sea weeds with holdfasts. The writer can see no obvious alternative

explanation, as these granite and schist fragmetits are well rounded. If, however,

some local fault escarpment with breccia and talus developments is inferred, hard

rock fragments wotld be far less abraded than the sof! tumbled limestone frag-

ments, which is not the case.

In consideration of the fossil fauna, other than the drehagocyatha, the Point

Marsden environment was obviously not always one of active coarse clastic sedi-

mentation. The occurrence uf abundant trilobites and brachiopods suggests a

relatively shallaw water environment with a muddy bottom, interrupted only by

local sand banks.

168

THE FOSSIL FAUNA

At least two richly fossiliferous but narrow zones occur in slates about

200 yards north-west of the Emu Bay Jetty, The horizons occur about 100 feet

above the Stokes Bay Sandstone and below the White Point Limestone. Dr. M. F.

Glaessner, who has examined the fama and who will describe it elsewhere,

records the following species:

Redlichia n. sp., Lusatiops n.sp., Acrathele sp., Hyolithes sp.

Dr. Glaessner observes that the Family Protolenidae in general, and

Lusatiops in particular, are considered as restricted to the Lower Cambrian where

they characterise one of the youngest zones. Redlichia is repotted as ranging from

Lower to Middle Cambrian. The two genera do not appear to have been found

previously associated in the same beds. On this basis the fossiliferous beds of

Kangaroo Island are provisionally placed in the uppermost Lower Cambrian.

REFERENCES

Gragssner, M. F. 1952 A Cambrian Fauna from Kangaroo Island, South

Australia, Unpublished report, Department of Mines. South Australia

Ilowcuin, W. 1899 Notes on the Geology of Kangaroo Island, with special

reference to evidences of extinct glacial action. Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust.

23, pt. 11

Howcuin, W. 1903 Further Notes on the Geology of Kangaroo Island, ibid,

27, pt. 1

Mapican, C. T. 1927 Preliminary Notes on new evidence as to the age of

formations on the North Coast of Kangaroo Island, S. Aust, Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 52

Spricc, R. C. 1952 Sedimentation in the Adclaide Geosyncline and the forma-

tion of the Continental Terrace. Sir Douglas Mawson Anniversary Vol.

Series, R. C. 1954 Kingscote 4-mile Sheet. Geological Atlas, Geological Sur-

vey of South Australia (in press)

Spricc, R. C., and Campana, B. 1953 The Age and Facies of the Kanmantoo

Series of the Eastern Mount Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island,

S.A. Aust. Journ. Science, August, 1953

Wave, A. 1915 The Supposed Oil-bearing areas of South Australia, Bull 4,

Geological Survey of South Australia

ABSTRACT OF EXHIBITS SHOWN AT THE ORDINARY MEETING

ON 10 NOVEMBER 1954

Summary

169

ABSTRACT OF EXHIBITS SHOWN AT THE ORDINARY MEETING

ON 10 NOVEMBER 1954

THE EFFECT OF COLD SHOCK IN PRODUCING ARTIFICIAL

TERATOLOGICAL DEFORMITIES IN ERYTHRAEID MITES

The President, Dr. R. V. Southeott, presented normal and_teratological

specimens of the larva of the Erythraeid mite Erythraeus reginae (Hirst), The

living larvae shown had been reared from eggs collected in the Adelaide region,

from splits in the tops of fencing posts, under or near Eucalyptus camaldulensis,

and close to water courses. The eggs had been laid in the preceding summer, In

southern Australia these eggs hatch between September and December. Batches

of eggs were chilled experimentally to varying temperatures and for varying

periods. In one batch, cooled to -3° F. for one hour on 27 June 1954, larvae with

gross teratological abnormalities of the dorsal scutum hatched in November. In

these the scutal non-sensillary setae were reduced in number or absent. Below

the sciittim and elsewhere were chitinous knots which in some cases resembled

expanded setae.

These experiments had been suggested by the finding of abnormal larvae of

Erythracus reginae and EF. urrbrae at Inman Valley, South Australia, in December

1952, the major abnormalities being gross “clubfoot,” and in the palp. The winter

of 1952 had had an abnormally high number of frosts. The deformities seen

experimentally differed from those observed in nature. Whether this was due to

differences in the stimuli was uncertain. Nevertheless, it may be concluded that

cold shock to the deutoyum stage causes teratological deformities in the larva,

of a kind not seen identically in nature, the differences being normally significant

at the generic level of classification. Vurther observations were being made,

PRECAMBRIAN PROBLEMATICA

Dr, Southcott exhibited also specimens of the ochraceous problematica named

Beaumontia eckersleyi by David and Tillyard, collected in 1939 at Beaumont

Quarries, Glen Osmond, South Australia. Reference was made to the recent re-

working of the quarry, The specimens shown had a uniformity of structure which

indicated an organic origin.

BALANCE SHEET

Summary

170

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended 30th September, 1954

£ sd £ «8 4 By Transactions— £ésda £5 4

To Balance, 1/10/53 sit 1,212 1 8 Printing and Publishing

» Subscriptions _.... 531 17 0 Vol. (s (part) wu. 344 8 8

» Government Grant for Vol. we awe 1,147 17 61,492 6 2

Printing, etc.i— —_

1953/4 (balance) 1,150 0 0 » Reprints besa 3416 0

1954/5 (istinstlt.) 375 0 01,525 0 0 » Library Assistants bene 171 5§ il

—<— a 45 (Female) ree 132 15 O

» Sale of Publications ani » Printing and Stationery 51 9 9

Reprints yee 147 6 ” Postages, Duty Stamps,

» Interest ie an 332 11 9 ete. 1. 6218 4

» Hire of Hall _.... tues 4 4 0 hi Postages on Transactions 75 3 9

1» Book-binding ..., 4 og) 438 2 6

» New Shelving .... wf 292 4 6

» Cabinet .,.. 65 6 1

» Typewriter and Chairs 89 7 6

, Addressing Machine .... 5514 6

» Cleaning Lie re 4712 0

» Insurance ite on 8 2 6

» Lighting 2416 0

» Centenary Celebrations 33. 5 0

» Sundries Sew orb 22:12 1

» Dalance—

Savings Bank

of S.A.:

General A/c, 549 0 9

Ex Endow-

ment Fund i3 4 9

Rundle St

A/e. ou 11:9 «3

573 14 9

Less Out-

standing

Chyuus3 7 3

010 O

36 2 3

217 0 4216 6 53018 3

Cash on hand .... _. 24 6 7 554 18 10

£3,652 15 11 £3,652 15 11

ENDOWMENT FUND

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended 30th September, 1954

£ s. d £ s. d. £5 da ¢£ s. d.

1953—October 1 1954—Sept, 30

To Balance— By Reyenue A/c... wat 232 1k 9

Commonwealth Inscribed » Balance—

Stock 3 6,010 0 0 Commonwealth — In-

Savings Bank of S.A. 6218 76,072 18 7 seribed Stock ....6,010 0 0

—__—_—. Savings Bank of S.A. 62 18 76,072 18 7

1954—Sept. 30

To Interest—

Inscribed Stock .. 199 14 6

Savings Bank of S.A... 3217 3 232 11 9

£6,305 10 4 £6,305 10 4

Audited and found correct. The Stock and Bank Balances have been verified by certificates

from the respective institutions.

F. M. ANGEL Hon. H. M. HALE, Hon. Treasurer

N. ANGEL, A.U.A. Com. § Auditors

Adelaide, 12 October 1954

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL AND

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

Summary

171

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. Watter Howcnin, F,G.8.

3930 Joun McC. Brack, A.L.S,

1931 Pror, Sie Dovctas Mawsox, O.B.E,, D.Se., B.E., F.R.S,

1935 Pror. J. Burros Creranp, M.D.

1935 Por, T. Harvey Jounsron, M.A, D.Se

1938 Pror. J. A. Prescort, DSc. F,A.1.C.

1943 Herpext Womenstey, A.L.S,, F.R.ES.

1944 Pror. J. G. Woon, D.Sc., Ph.D,

1945 Cecm T. Manican, M,A., BE, D.Sc, F.G.S.

1946 Hererrt M. Hae

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS AT 30 JUNE 1955

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's

Transactions, Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members,

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrear.

Bresise Honorary Feriowe

1949. *Cretann, Pror, J. B. M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumont, S.A—Fellow, 1895-1949;

Verco Medal, 1933; Coutcil, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28; 1940-41; Fice-

President, 1926-27, 1941-42. '

1955, “Mawson, Prog. Sir Dousias, O.B.E., D.Sc, BE. F.RS., University of Adelaide—

Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25, 1944-45; Vice-President, 1923-24, 1925-26;

Council, 1941-43,

1955. *Osporn, Prov. T. G. B., D.Sc, 6 Magdalen Street, College Park, S.A—Council,

1915-20, 1922-24; President, 1925-26; Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27.

1955. *Warn, L. K., 1.5.0, B.A, BE, D.Sc., 22 Northumberland Street, Heathpool, Marry-

atville, 5.A—Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; Pice-President, '927-28 Prasident, 1928-30.

FexLows.

1946, Annir, Prop. A. A., M.D,, D.Sc,, Ph.D, University of Adelaide.

1953. Ancock, Mrss 4., 4 Gertrude Street, Norwood, 5.A.

1951, Arrentsox, G, D,, B.E., Civil Engineering Department, University of Melbourtie,

Carlton, Victoria,

1927, *AnperMAN, Pror, A. R, PhD., D.Sc. F.GS., University of Adelaide—Counet/,

1937-42, 1955, ;

195]. Annerson, Mus, S. H., B.Se,, Zoology Dept., University of Adelaide, S.A,

1951, Awnbrews, J., M.B,, B.S., 40 Seafield Avenue, Kingswood, S.A.

1935, *AnvrewarTuHa, 1. G, M.AgrSe., D.Sc, Zoology Department, University of Adelaide

—Conncil, 1950; Wice-Presiden?, 1950-51; Président, 1951-.

1935, *Annrnwartaa, Mrs. H. V., B.AgrSc., M.S, (nee H. V. Steele}, 29 Claremont

Avenue, Netherby, 5,A,

1929. *ANcet, F. M., 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A.

1930, *AwnerL, Miss L. M., M.Sc., ¢/o Mrs. C. Angel, 2 Moore Street, Toorak, Adelaide, SA.

1945. *Barrcett, H. K., L.Th., 2 Abbotshall Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A.

1050. Brasvey, A. K., Harris Street, Marden, S.A.

150. Breck, R. G, B.Ag.Se., RDA. Lynewood Park, Mil-Lel, via Mount Gambier, S.A.

1932. Recs, PR, D.D.Sc., L.D\S., Shell House, 170 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1928. Best, R, J., D.Sc, FAC, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide,

1034. Rrack, FE. C., MR. WS. Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

1950. TBownt, N. I, MB, B.S, FRCS. (Eng), F.R.ALC.S,, 40 Barnard Street, North

Adelaide, S.A,

1945. *Boxytion, C. W,, BSe, A.A.CI.. Romale House, Romulo Avene, Magill, S.A,

1040, = RBoxyrrox, Six jf. Lavincros, 263 Fast Terrate, Adelaide.

1945. *Ruomsaa, C. D., M.Sc, B.Se.For., f Celtic Ayenue, South Road Park, S.A.

1947, *Bowes, D. R., PhD., M.Sc., D.LC., F.G.S., Geology Department, University College,

Swansea, Wales,

1939, Brooxman. Mrs. R. 1. (nee A. Harvey), B.A., Meadows, §.A,

1944, *Bernincz, Mrss WN. T., M.Sc, CS.LR.O., Div, Plant Industry, P.O. Box 109, Can-

herra, A.C.T,

1923, Rurnos, R. S., D.Sc. University of Adelaide—Council, 1946.

Date of

Election,

1922, *Cawrrece, Prop. T. D, D.D.Sc., D.S¢,, Dental Dept. Adelaide Hospital, Adelaide—

Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-45; bire-President, 1932-4; President, 1934.35,

1053. Carrer, A, N,, B.Sc. 70 Madeline Street, Burwood E13, Viet,

1951, Cwttrresproucn, R. G, B.Se,, c/o C.S.L.R.0,, Div, of Fisheries, 1 Museum Street,

Perth, W.A.

192), Cunisre, W., MB. B.S. 7 Walter Street, Hyde Park, Adelaide, S.A.—Treasurer,

1933-38.

1955. Cyornrer, FE, A. c/o Department of Mines, Adeluide, S.A,

1049, Cortiver, F. S., Geology Department, University of Queenslanil.

1007, *Cooxr, W. T., DiSe, AAC, 4 South Ferrace, Kensington Gardens, SA—Couneil,

1938-41: Vice-Presutent, W41-42, 1943-44; President. 1942-43,

1929, #Corrow, B. C, S.A. Museun, Adclaide—Counril, 1943-46, 1948-49; Fiee-President,

1049-50, 1951; President, 1950-51.

1953. Dane, D. M. S, MB, B.Chir, MRCS. L.RCP., B.A. Institute nf Medical and

Veterinary Science, Frome Road, Adelaide,

j951 -Davipgon, A, COL. PRD, BSc, c/o. Burne Phity Trust Co, 7 Ridge Street,

Sydney, N.S.W.

15 Derawn, GC, M., MB. B.S., D:P.AL, D.T.M., 29 Gilbert Street, Lioodwood, SA.

1u4], Dickinson, S. B., M.Se, c/o Department of Mines, 31 Hlinders Street, 5S,A-—

Council, 1949-51; Vice-President, 1951-.

1930. Dix, E. V., Hospitals Department, Rundle Street, Adelaide, S.A,

\Q44, Dungrowe, 5S. M, L,, M.B., B.S., 170 Payneham Roud, St. Peters, Adelaide.

3931. Dwyer, J. M., M.B., B.S. 105 Port Road, Hindmarsh. 3A,

1933. *Harprey, Mrss CG. M., M.Sc,, University of Adeliide—Connot!, 1943-46.

1945, *Epmenns, S. J., BA, M.Sc, Zoology Department, University of Adelaide.

1902. *Epovist, A.-G. 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg, S.A,—Couneil, 1949-1953,

1927. *Pinvayson, H. If, 305 Ward Street, North Adeluide—Conneil, 1937-40,

1951. Fisaex, R. LL, 265 Goodwood Road, Kings Park, S.A,

23. they, TK, DSO, M0, Bo. bSe, ETAG RP, Ten Hall, Adelatde—Coriledt,

1933-37: Mice-President, 1937-38, 1939-40; President, 1938-39.

1951, Forron, Cor, D, CMAs, C.B.E, Aldgate, S.A,

1955. Gites, KE, T. (De), c/o S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A,

1954. Gissox, A, A. A.W.A.S.M., Geologist, Mines Department, Adelaide,

1955. GiArssxrr, De, M. F., c/o Geology Department, University of Adelaine, S.A.

1927. Gonrery, F. K,, Box 951H, G.P.O., Adeluide.

1035 #Gotnsack, H., Coromandel Val'ay, S.A.

191k *GeaAyy, Prom Sie Kerr, M.Sc, WL. 36 Tonrth Avene. St. Peters, S.A.

1951. Guaeen, J. W., 6 Bedford Avenue, Subiaco, West Australia.

1904.) Greer, H. D., 13 Dunrobin Road, Brighton, S.A,

1948, Guoss, G. F., B.Sc, Soth Australian Museum, Adelaile—Sreretiry, 1950-,

1944. Gupey, D. J, B.Sc, c/o WA. Petrolenm Ca. 251 Adeluide Terrace, Perth, W.A.

1922, *HIazue, H. M,, Director S.A. Museum, Adelaide——-l’erco Medal, 1946; Council, 1931-34,

1980-; Mice-Preowident, 1934-36, 1937-38; President, 1936-37; Preasurer, 1938-195),

194u. Harr, D. R., Tea Tree Gully. S.A,

1930, Hawcocs, N, L., 3 Bewdley, 66 Beresford Road, Rose Bay, N.S, W,

1953. *Hansen, 1 V,, BA, 34 Herbert Road, West Croydon, S.A.

1946, *ELaxby, Mrs. J. F. (nee A. C. Beckwith), M.Sc., Box 62, Smithton, Tas.

1944, Harris, J. R, 1.Sc., c/o Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1944, Herrtor, R. S., B.Agt.Sc., 49 Halsbury Avenue, Kingswood, S.A.

1954, Hinron, F. M, B.AgSe., Botanist, 298 Magill Road, Beulah Park.

1951. Hocertse, L, J, School Mfonse, Renmark West, 5.A.

1924, *Hossrmp, P. §., M.Sc., 132 Fisher Sureet, Fullarton, 5A.

1950. “Hor any P. 1, BSc, Geoluyy Museum, Uarvard University, Cambridge, Mass.

1944, Homie, D. 5. Wi MPS, J-P., 238 Payneham Road, Payneham, 5.A-

1917, Hovrox, J. T, BSe, 18 Pmily Avenue, Clapham,

1028 Tyvory, P., 14 Wyatt Road, Burnside, 5.A.

1045, *Jessup, R. W., MSc., c/o 51 Hatrict Street, Croydon Park, 5.4,

1930. *Jouns, R. K., B.Sc. Department of Mines, Minders Strect, Adelaide, S.A.

1054. Keats, A. L., B.E., Metallurgist, C/o. North Broken Hill Ltd, Broken Hill

1939, FRAAREAE H. M., Ph.D: M.B,, F.R.GS., Khakhar Buildings, CP. ‘Tank Road, Born-

day, India.

1949. *Kixc, D, M.Sc, c/a Department of Mines, Flinders Street, Adelaide,

1933. *#Kuremay, A. W., M.Sc., Ph.D), University of Adelaide—Serretery, 1945-58; Mice-

President, 1948-49, 1950-51, President, 1949-50,

M51, Keocarovc, D. BASe. (Mut), 65 Dayid Terrace, Kilkenny, 5.A-

173

Date af

Election.

1922, Lenpon, G. A. M.D., B.S., FRCP, A.M.P. Building, King Wiltiam Street, Adelaide,

1948. Lorman, TR, N,, N.D.1, (N.Z.), Director, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide,

193], *Lyonnoox, Mus. N. H., M.A, PhD. D.C. F.G.S,, Department of Mines, 3] Finders

Street, Adelaide.

1948 McCritocs, R. N., M.B.E. BSc. (Oxon.), BAgrSci. (Syd.), Roseworthy Agricul-

tural College, S.A.

1938. Manpveryn, C. B., B.D,S., D.D,Sc., Shell House, North Terrace, Adelaide.

1953. Maezer, D. A., B.Sc, (Elons.}, Waite Institute, Adelaide.

1932, Mawwn, E. A., C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide,

1939. MaArsHaty, T. J., M.AgriSc,, Pi.D., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—

Coauncti, 1948-,

1920, Mayo, Tue Hon, Mr. Justice, LL.B, K.C., 19 Marlborough Street, College Park,

1950. - Maye, G. M. i. B.Ag.Se., 24 Marlborough Street, College Park, 5.A.

1943. McCarry, Miss PD. F,, B.A, B.Sc., 70 Halton Terrace, Kensington Park.

1953. McCartney, J, E, M1, D.Sc, (Edin.), Institute of Medical and Veterinary Science,

Frome Road, Adelaide.

1948. Meera, R. N., B.Sc,B-Sc.Ag., Roseworthy Agricultural College, Roseworthy,

1945. 7*#Mires, KR. D.Se., FLG.S., 11 Church Road, Miteham, SA.

1952) Mirwe, K. L. F.C.A.. 14 Burlington Street, Walkerville, S.A.

1951. Meres, J. A. R. M.A... B-Cur. (Cant.), 11 Church Road, Mitcham, S.A.

1939. Mincnam, V. H,. 7 Lewthwaite Street, Whyalla West, S.A.

1925. ¢Metrcaet, Pror. Sir W., K.CM.G., M.A D.Se., Fitzroy Fer., Praspect, SA-

1993. MrtcHerr, Pror. M. L., M.Sc., c/o Elder's Trustee and Executor Co, Ltd, 37 Curie

Street. Adelaide

1981. Mrrcsete, F. I, c/o The South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide.

1938. Moornousr, PF. W., M.Sc., Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Simpson Buildings, Gawler

Place, Adelaide.

1936, *Mountrorn, C, P., 25 First Aventie, St. Peters, Adelaide.

1944. Murrep, J, W., Enginecring and Water Supply Dept., Victoria Square, Adelaide,

1944. Nrxwns, A. R., B.A., 62 Sheffield Street, Malvern, S.A.

1952. Noone, H. V. V., c/o Union Bank of Australia, Adelaide.

1945. *Norrucore, K. H., B.Agr.Sc, A.LA.S., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1930, Ockennen, G. P., B.A., School House, Box 63, Kimbe, $,A-

1947. *Opnetr, I. L., Atomic Energy of Canada, Chalk River, Ontariv, Canada.

1997. *Parkin, LL. W., M.Sc. c/o Mines Department, Adelnide—Secretary, 1953.

1949. ParKinsox, K. J., B.Sc, Whitwarta Road, Balaklava, S.A.

1929, Pautt, A. G. M.A. B.Se., 10 Milton Avenue, Fullarton Estate, S.A.

1925.. *Prerr, C. S., D.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Baz}, Adclaide—Cowncil, 1941-43;

Fice-Presiden?, 1943-45, 1946-47; President, 1945-46,

1948. Pownre, J. K.. B.Sc, C.S.1.R.0_ Keith, S.A.

1949. Prarre, R, G, 81 Park Terrace, North Unley. S.A.

1925, *Presoorr, Paor. J. A, CBE, DSc, ALC, F.RS., Waite Institute (Private Mail

Bag), Adelaide—ferco Medel, 1938; Council, 1927-30, 1935-39; Vice-President,

1930-32; President, 1932-33.

1945, Pryor, L, BD. M.Sc, Dip For., Dept ef Titerior., Canberra, A.C.T-

1950, *RarticAN, J..H., M.Sc, c/o Rio Tinto Ltd, Darwin, Northern Territory.

1951. Rayson, P., B.Sc, c/o Botany Department, Lniversity of Adelaide,

1944, Riceman, D, &, M.Sc, BAgtSe., CS.UR.O,, Division of Nutrition, Adelaide.

1947. Rieper, W. R., B.Sc. S.A. Museum, Adelaide,

1948, *Rives, G. D., B.Sc, c/o Muresk Agricultural College, Muresk, WA,

1947. Rrx, C. F., 42 Waymenth Avene. Glandore, S.A.

1953. Rocers, Pror S, W, P,, Ph.D., Zoology Department, University af Adelaide

1951. Rowe, S. A., 22 Shelley Street, Firle, S.A.

195}. Rowe, S. F., B.Sc., Gordon Institute of Technology, Geelong, Victoria.

1950, Ruon, Prop. E. A., B.Sc, A.M., University of Adelaide, S.A,

1951, Russenr, L. Do oc/o High School, Port Pirte, 5.4

1945, Ryaets, J. KR, Old Penola Estate, Penola, S.A.

1933. Scunesorr, M., M.B,, B.S,, 175 North Ter., Adelaide

1951. Seorr, T. D., B.Se., c/o S.A. Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, SA.

1946. *Secxit, E. R., M.Sc., Ph.D, Geology Department, University of Adelaide.

1924. *Secnir, R. W., M.A,, B.Sc. Engineering and Water Supply Department, Victoria

Square, Adelaide—Secretary, 1930-35; Council, 1937-38; Wice-Presidens, 1938-39,

140-41; President, 1939-40.

1925. *Surarn, H., Port Elliot, S.A-

19%. *Saearp, Da, K., M.Sc., Fisheries Research Diy, C.S.1.R.O, University of W.A,

Nedlands, W.A.

17a

Date of

Rlection

1954. S#Hepuerp, R. G., B.Sc., c/o Department of Mines, Adelaide.

1934, Ssrnxrrenp, R. C., 57 Canterbury Ayenuc, Trinity Gardens, S.A,

1949, Simpson, D. A, M.B., B.S,, The Manor House, Great Haseley, Oxfordshire, Engkind.

1925. tSmurnu, T. E, Barr., B.A. 25 Curtie Street, Adelaide,

194].

1925,

1950,

1953.

*Surru, T, L., B.Sc. Regional Planning Section, Department of National Develop-

ment, Canberra, A.C-T.

*Soutreort, R. V., M.B, B.S., D.T.M. & H., 13 Jasper Street, Hyde Park, S.A—

Gauncil, 1948-51; Treasurer, 1951-; President, 1955-56,

Soutuweon, A. R., M.D, M.S, (Adel.), M.R.C.P., 170 North Terrace, Adelaide,

*Srecut, R. L., Ph.D., Botany Department, University of Adelaide—Council, 1951-,

{*Spricc, R. C., M.Sc. 5 Baker Street, Somerton Park,

STeADMAN, Rey. W. R, 8 Blairgowrie Road, St. Georges, S.A,

Spurrinc, M. B. BAg.Sc., Horticultural Branch, Department of Agriculture, Box

901%, G.P.O,, Adelaide.

*Spry, A. H., M.Sc, Geology Department, University of Tasmania.

*SrepHens, C. G., D.Sc. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

Swaiwe, Dra, C. D., Repatriation Sanatorium, Belair, S,A,

Swan, D. C, M.Sc. Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag). Adelaide—Secretary,

1940-42; Miee-President, 1946-47, 1948-49; Presidertl, 1947-48; Council,

Swann, F. J. W., Box 156, P.O. Burnie, Tasmania,

Swirsky, P., M.Ag.Sc., 618 Seaview Road, Grange, S.A,

Symons, I, G., 35 Murtay Steet, Lower Mitcham, 5.4 —Editor, 1947-,

*Tavron, J. K., B.A. M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Counzil,

1940-43, 1947-50; Librarian, 1951-; President, 1954-55; Council, 1955

Tatcuer, D, B.Sc,, Department of Mines, Adelaide, |

Tapes, I. M., M.Sc. (Wales), University of Adelaide —Secretury, 1948-50, Council,

=79Ur, '

*THomas, Mrs. I. M. (nee. P.M. Mawson), M.Sc, 36 King Street, Brighton.

. *Tgomson, Carr, J. M,, 135 Military Road, Semaphore South, S.A.

. *Tinpate, N. B, B.Sc. South Australian Museum, Adelaide — Sceretary, 1935-365

Council, 1946-47; Vice-President, 1947-48; 1049-50; President, 1948-49; Librarian,

Turner, D. C,, Brookman Buildings, Grenfell Street, Adctaide.

Viercno, S, T.,, Box 92, Port Lincoln, 5.A.

Waterman, R, A, BA, M.A, PhD, North-western University, Evanston,

INinois, U.S.A.

Wess, B. P., B.Sc, Radium Hili, ‘S.A.

Wetts, C. B., B-Ay.Se., Broadlees, Waverley Ridge, Crafers, 5.A,

Waite, A. R,, c/o Geology Department, King's College, Strand, W.C. 2, London.

Wurtenaw, A. J., B.Sc, Box 167, Port Lincoln.

. *Waitrie, A. W. G., M.Se., Mines Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide,

Wiiurams., L. D., “Dumosa,” Meningie, S.A.

*Witson, A. F., M.Se., University of W.A., NedIands, W.A,

*Witson, J, O., CS.ER.O., Division of Nutrition, Adelaide.

. *Womexstey, H., FLR.ES,, A.L,S. (Ton. causal, S.A, Museum, Adelaide, Perc

Medal, 1943; Secretary, 1936-37; Editor, 1937-43, 1945-47; President, 1943-44; Vice-

ibe 1944-45; Rep, Fauna and Flora Protection Comuriiice, 19455 ‘Lreasurer,

*Womenstey, H. B. S,, Ph.D., University of Adelaide,

Womenrstey, J. 5., B.Sc, Lae, New Guinea.

*Woon, Pror, J. G, D.Sc, PhD., University of Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1044

Council, 1938-40, Vice-President, 1940-41, 1942-43; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board,

1940-; President, 1941-42; Council, 194448.

Wooparn, G. D., 1 Brigalow Avenite, Ketisineton Gardens, S.A,

Woovnousez, L. R., 15 Rohert Street, North Unley, S.A.

Wortatey, B. W., B.A. M-Sr., A. Tash P,, University of Adelaide.

Years, J, N., LS, AME, AM.LM.E., Richards Buildings, 99 Currie Street,

Adetaide, S.A,

Zimmer, W. J., Dip Tor, F.L/S. (Lon.), 7 Rupert Street, Footseray West. W.12, Viet.

GENERAL INDEX

Summary

175

GENERAL INDEX

[Names printed in italics as separate entries indicate that the forms are new to scierce.]

Acanthocephala collected by the Australian

National Antarctic Research Expedition

on Heard Island and Macquarie Island

during 1948-1950: S. J, Edmonds, 141-144

Aellen, Paul: A New Species of Atriplex

(Atriplex spongiivalvis) Aellen, 155

Atriplex sesstlifolia, 111 :

Atriplex spongiivalvis Aellen, 155

Australites, Part V1; Notes on Unusually

Large Australites; Charles Fenner, 88-91

Bassia holtiana, 111

Honython, C. W., Collins, J. A. and Pres-

cott, J. A,; The Evaporation Pattern over

Australia for the months of January and

July, 99-109

Cardtta subdecepfiva, 40

Curinavalva glauca, 115

Collins, J; A., Bonython, C. W., and Pres-

cott, J. A.: The Evaporation Pattern over

Australia for the months of January and

July, 99-109

Cryptophlebia ombrodelia (Lower) ; Note on

ape Eucosmid Moth: Norman B. Tindale,

Cyclocardia (Arcturellina) hindmarshensis,

C. peridonen, 44

Edmonds, S. J.: Acanthocephala collected by

the Anstralian National Antarctic Re-

search Expedition on Heard Island and

Macquarie Island during 1948-1950, 141-

144

Eomiltha (Gibbolucina) confirmans, 49

Evaporation Pattern over Australia for the

months of January and July: C. W.

Bonython, J. A. Collins, and J. A. Pres-

cott, 99-109

Fenner, Charles: Australites, Part VI; Notes

on Unusually Large Australites, 88-91

Genetic and Svstematie Status of Eucalyptus

Aubertana Naudin, E. vtmrinaltys Labill., and

FE. aromaphioia, Pryor and Willis: L. D.

Pryor, 156-164

Glaessner, M. F., and Rao, V. R.: Lower

Cretaceous Plant Remains from the

Vicinity of Mount Babbage, South Aus-

tralia, 134-140

Gommyrtea silishuryensis, 50; G. cragsior,

51; G. walidior, 52; G. noatabiliar, 53

Goodenta helenae, 117

Hybrid Swatm between Eucalyptus odo-

vata Bebr, and Eucalyptus leucoxrylon F.

Mueill.: L. D. Pryor, 92-96

Ising, Ernest H.: Notes on the Flora of

South Australia, No. 6, 110-120

Kochia concava, K. ovata, 112

Labiostrangylus kungi, 3

Lentipecten adelaidensis, 32

Leslie. R. B., and White, A. J. R.: The

“Grand” Unconformity between the

Archaean (Willyama Complex) and Pro-

teroroic (Torrowangie Series), North of

Broken Hill, N.S.W., 121-133

Litigiella adelaidensis,; 57

Lower Cretaceous Plant Remains ftom the

Vicinity of Mount Babbage, South Aus-

tralia: M. F. Glaessner and V. R. Rao,

124-140

Ludbrook, N. H.: The Molluscan Fauna of

the Pliocene Strata underlyiny the Ade-

jaide Plains. Part 11 — Pelecypoda, 18-87

Macropostrongylus. lastorkim, 4

Malacocera biflora, 113

Monitlora (Prophetilora) chavani, 47

Monitilora (Monitilera) idonea, 47

Mawson, FP. M.: Some Parasites of Austra-

lian Vertebrates, 1-7

Nathorstionella babbagensis, 134

Nemocardium (Pratulum) proterothetidis, 64

Notes on the Flora of South Australia,

No, 6: Ernest H. Ising, 110-120

Observations on the Biology, including Mat-

ing and other Behaviour, of the Australian

Scorpion Uraducus abrupits Pocock: R.

V. Southeott, 145-154

Parasites of Austrahan Vertehrates: P. M.

Mawson, 1-7

Pelecypoda: N. H. Ludbrool, 18-87

Phascolostrongylus stirtont, 5

Pleuromeris subpecten, 42

Point Marsden Cambrian Reds, Kangaroo

Tsland, South Australia: R. C. Sprigg,

165-168

Prescott, J. A.: Bonython, C. W., Collins,

J. A-and: The Evaporation Pattern over

Australia for the months of January and

July, 91-109

Properycina torrensensis, 58

Pryor, L. D.: A Hybrid Swarm between

Eucalyptus odorata Behr. and Eucalyptus

leucoxylon F. Muell., 92-96

Pryor, L. D.: The Genetic and Systematic

Status of Eucalyptus hubertana Naudin,

E. viminalis Labill., and E. earomophloia

Pryor and Willis, 156-164

Rao, V. R.: Glaessner, M. F. and: Lower

Cretaceous Plant Remains from the

Vicinity of Mount Babbage, South Aus-

tralia, 134-140

Some Parasites of Australian Vertebrates:

P. M. Mawson, 1-7

Southcott, R. V.: Some Observations on the

Biology, including Mating and other Be-

haviour, of the Australian Scorpion Uro-

dacus abruptus Pocock, 145-154

Spirostrongylus kartana, 2

Sprigg, R. C.: The Point Marsden Cam-

brian Beds, Kangaroo Island, South Aus-

tralia, 165-168

176

Tawera incurvilamellata, 68

The “Grand” Unconformity between the

Archaean and the Proterozoic, North of

Broken Hill, N.S.W.: R. B. Leslie and

A. J. R. White, 121-133

The Stratigraphic Succession in the Vicinity

of Mount Babbage Station, South Aus-

tralia: G. D. Woodard, 8-17 .

Tindale, Norman B.: Note on the Eucosmid

Moth Cryptophlebia ombrodelta (Lower),

Vasticardium (Regozara) praecygnorum, 61

Vasticardium (Vasticardium) submaculosum,

White, A. J. R, Leslie, R. B. and: The

“Grand” Unconformity between the

Archaean and the Proterozoic, North of

Broken Hill, N.S.W., 121-133

Woodard, G. D.: The Stratigraphic Succes-

sion in the vicinity of Mount Babbage

Station, South Australia, 8-17

CONTENTS

Mawson, Parricra M.: Some Parasites of Australian Vertebrates ....

Wooparp, G. D.: The Stratigraphic Succession in the Vicinity of Mt, Babbage

Station, South Australia 7 * =. - ry,

Lupproox, N. H.: The Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata Underlying ihe

Adelaide Plains, Part II, Pelecypoda .... : n mare Kel ;

Fenner, Carters: Australites, Part VI. Some Notes. on unusually large Aus-

tralites

Pryox, L. D.: A Hybrid Swarm between Eucalyptus odorata Behr. and Eucalyptus

leucoxylon F, Muell, ahs aie

TINDALE, NorMAN B.: Note on the Eucosmid (Olethreutid) Moth Cryptophlebia

umbrodelta (Lower) ne ree * as

BonyrHon, C. W., Cortins, J. A., and Prescort, J. A.:.The Evaporation Pattern

over Australia for the Months of January and July

Istne, Ernest H,: Notes on the Flora of South Australia, No. 6

Lestir, R. B., and Wuure, A. J. R.: The “Grand” Unconformity between the

Archaean (Willyama Complex) and Proterozoic (Torrowangee Series)

North of Broken Hill, New South \Wales *.

GLAESSNER, M. F., and Rao, V. R.: Lower Cretaceous Plant Remains from the

Vicinity of Mt. Babbage, South Australia 5

Epmonps, S. J.: Acauthocephala collected by the Australian National Antarctic

Research Expedition on Heard Island and Macquarie Island during

1948-50 Pye a

SoutHoorr, R. V.: Some Observations on the Biology, including Mating and

other Behaviour, of the Australian Scorpion Urodacus abruptus Pocock

AELLEN, Paut: A New Species of Atriplex (Atriplex spongiivalvis Aellen)

Pryor, L, D.: The Genetic and Systematic Status of Eucalyptus huberiana Naudin,

E. yiminalis Labill., and E. aromaphloia Prior and Willis ~

Spricc, R. C.: The Point Marsden Cambrian Beds, Kangaroo Island, South

Australia A nd 7. ree 4) , st , Plas!

8—17

18—87

88—9]

92—%

97—98

99—109

110—120

121—133

134-0

141—144

145—154

155

156—164

165—168